Table Personalization (Overview)

Table personalization can be used to modify the display and settings of a table.

It is a UI pattern that is used to change one or more of the following attributes:

  • Visibility of columns
  • Order of columns
  • Sorting
  • Grouping
  • Filtering

Table personalization can be applied to simple tables (up to about 20 columns) and complex tables (more than about 20 columns) using different controls.

Usage

Use the view settings dialog if:

  • The user is able to personalize fewer than about 20 columns.
  • A combination of sorting, filtering, and grouping is needed.

Use the table personalization dialog if:

  • The user is able to personalize fewer than about 20 columns.
  • Columns need to be shown/hidden and reordered.

Use the view settings dialog AND the table personalization dialog if:

  • The user wants to personalize fewer than about 20 columns.
  • A combination of show/hide and one other function is needed.

Use the P13n dialog if:

  • You are using an analytical table (ALV).
  • The user is able to personalize more than about 20 columns.
  • Complex queries have to be built for the respective table.

Do not use table personalization at all if:

  • The table has very few columns and rows.
  • A very complex filter is needed. In this case, consider using a filter bar instead of the filter tab.

Types

Simple Table Personalization

Table Personalization Dialog

All table personalization dialogs are opened via the Settings button on the right-hand side of the table toolbar.

The table personalization dialog can show/hide and reorder columns.

Hide/Show

To show or hide columns, the user only needs to select or deselect the checkboxes of the respective list item. Alternatively, the user can select all the items at once.

Reorder

Two buttons on the left-hand side enable a selected column to be moved up or down.

The user confirms the dialog to apply the options to the table.

For more information, see table personalization dialog.

Table personalization dialog
Table personalization dialog

View Settings Dialog

The sort, filter, and group features can all be applied to a table simultaneously.

Sort

The first tab in the view settings dialog is the sort feature, which allows the table content to be sorted according to the chosen attribute.

The dialog offers two sort features:

  • The first group sorts the table by a general ascending or descending order.
  • The second group lets the user choose an attribute that fits either a column or part of a column since there are also columns that contain more than one data point.

Filter

The second tab in the view settings dialog is the filter feature, which can offer a single filter selection list or a category list. The category list provides an overview and guides the user to detailed filter selection lists via drilldown. The options available are single selection, multiselection, a category list, a predefined list, and a custom filter.

Group

The third tab in the view settings dialog is the group feature, which also offers two groups of attributes:

  • The first group offers a general ascending or descending order that controls the order in which the defined groups appear.
  • The second group offers attributes with which to group the corresponding data in the table.
View settings dialog – Sort tab
View settings dialog – Sort tab
View settings dialog – Filter tab
View settings dialog – Filter tab
View settings dialog – Group tab
View settings dialog – Group tab

Complex Table Personalization

P13n Dialog

The P13n dialog is the most complex personalization option for tables. It is used if none of the other options are sufficient. Like the view settings dialog, it can combine any of the tabs available. By allowing inclusion and exclusion filters, as well as several group options (for some tables only), it can form more complex queries than the other options.

Columns
The P13n dialog offers the most options for changing the table columns that are shown and the order in which they are displayed.

It can show/hide a column and alter the order of the columns.

Columns tab in the P13n dialog
Columns tab in the P13n dialog

Sort
It also allows the user to sort the table content according to the columns that are chosen and in a specific order.

For more complex sorting needs, the user can add the required number of criteria by clicking the  button (Add New Line) at the end of the line.

P13n dialog – Sort tab
P13n dialog – Sort tab

Filter
A filter option allows the user to filter the table information according to specific filter criteria, which can be included or excluded in the relevant section of the filter.

Each filter criterion consists of a column, an operator (depending on the data type of the column), and a value by which the selected column is filtered.

For more complex cases, the user can add filters by clicking the   button (Add New Line), and remove them by clicking the  button (Remove Line) at the end of each filter item.

P13n dialog – Filter tab
P13n dialog – Filter tab

Group
The Group tab enables the user to group the table data by one or more columns.

For more complex grouping scenarios, the user can add more grouping options by clicking the   button (Add New Line) at the right-hand side of each grouping line (only available for the ALV table).

P13n dialog – Group tab
P13n dialog – Group tab

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Calendar Date Interval

The calendar date interval displays a range of days in a single row. The control allows the user to select a single day, multiple days, or a range of days. Content corresponding to the date selection is usually displayed below the control. The user can navigate the date intervals by browsing through them (using the previous and next arrows), or by going directly to a specific month or year.

Compared to the regular date range selection control, this control offers a flexible date range and consumes very little horizontal space.

Calendar date interval
Calendar date interval

The current day is highlighted by a colored frame. Weekends are shaded in a slightly darker gray.

Special day markup
Special day markup

You can mark special days, such as public holidays, with a colored line along the lower edge.

Alternative start date
Alternative start date

You can configure the number of days displayed in a single interval (property: days) as well as the start date (property: startDate).

Responsiveness

The horizontal space occupied by the control is already minimal, so the responsiveness is limited to the width of the control.

Sizes M and L
Sizes M and L

On small screens, the maximum number of days per range interval is automatically reduced to eight.

Size S
Size S

Layout

The date interval control is divided into two main areas: date interval navigation, and date interval display and selection.

The navigation area contains two arrows (one to the left, one to the right), which allow the user to navigate easily to the previous and following date ranges. This area also contains month and year indicators, which display the currently selected month and year. These indicators also trigger the month and year navigation mode of the control.

The display and selection area is primarily used to display the range of days in the current date interval. You can also display a second row to show the calendar week can be shown (property: showWeekNumbers). When the user triggers month or year navigation, a range of months or years is displayed in this section to enable easy interval navigation.

Schematic visualization of calendar date interval
Schematic visualization of calendar date interval

Behavior and Interaction

The behavior and interaction of the calendar date interval control can be divided into two parts: navigation and selection.

Navigation

Previous/Next

The user clicks the previous or next arrow to replace the currently displayed date interval with the previous or next date, respectively. Previous and next navigation can be used while the user is in selection mode, as well as in month or year navigation mode.

Navigation by Month

The user triggers month navigation mode by clicking the month link displayed at the top of the date range interval. The currently selected month is highlighted. The user clicks a month to switch the date range interval to the selected month. The user can browse the months by clicking the previous and next arrows.

Navigation by month
Navigation by month

Navigation by Year

The user triggers year navigation mode by clicking the year link displayed at the top of the date range interval. The currently selected year is highlighted. The user clicks a year to switch the date range interval to the selected year. The user can browse the years by clicking the previous and next arrows.

Navigation by year
Navigation by year

Selection

The calendar date interval control can be set up for single day selection, multiple day selection, or day range selection.

Single day

The user clicks an unselected day to select that particular day and deselect all previously selected days. Clicking a selected day a second time removes the selection. Only one day can be selected at a time. The selected day is highlighted.

Selection – Single day
Selection – Single day

Multiple days

The user clicks an unselected day to select that particular day. Clicking a selected day a second time removes the selection. Multiple days can be selected. Selected days are highlighted.

Selection – Multiple days
Selection – Multiple days

Day range

The user clicks an unselected day to select the start date. Clicking a second unselected day selects the end date. Both start and end dates are then highlighted. The days in between are highlighted in a lighter color. The minimum range is one day and only one range can be selected at a time.

Selection – Day range
Selection – Day range

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

  • No links

Date Picker

The date picker lets users select a localized date using touch, mouse, or keyboard input. It consists of two parts: the date input field and the date picker.

Use this control if the user needs to enter a single date or a date range. The control also allows users to navigate directly from one month or year to another.

Usage

Use the date picker if:

  • You need a range and know that your user is a power user who has to input lots of data. If the keyboard is the primary device used for navigating the app, use two input fields. This allows the user to quickly jump from field to field. By selecting a date in one of the fields, the other field should know what is selected and jump to the same selection.

Responsiveness

The date picker provides responsive behavior that allows for simple operation on all devices. It is smaller in compact mode and provides a touch-friendly size in cozy mode.

With one click on the input field, the date picker opens in full screen. To close the window, the user can select a date (which triggers the close event), or click Cancel without selecting a date.

Date picker on a smartphone
Date picker on a smartphone
Date picker on a desktop
Date picker on a desktop

Components

The date picker has two components: the date input field and the date picker button. On all devices users can either use the input field to type a date or use the date picker button to open the date picker calendar.

Date picker with input field and button
Date picker with input field and button

Date Input Field

In the input field, the user can enter a date directly or select it using the date picker. The system validates the entry and provides the user with feedback. You can also show placeholder text in the field.

Date Picker

With the date picker, the user can see a day view, month view, or year view. The current day and the selected date are highlighted. The calendar week is also visible in the day view. The calendar closes when a final day is selected. The user can click or tap the arrows to navigate to the previous and the next day, month, or year view depending on the current view.

The selected date is shown with a blue background. The current day is indicated with a purple border and owns the focus.

Date picker with a selected date and the current date
Date picker with a selected date and the current date
Clickable areas of the date picker
Clickable areas of the date picker

You can change the default focus “today” to another date. This can save users several clicks when they create events. For an event end date, for example, the focus should propose a date in the future (after the start date).

Use case-specific focus date
Use case-specific focus date

Behavior and Interaction

Selecting a Date

The user selects a date by clicking or tapping the date. After the user selects a day, the calendar closes and the date appears in the date input field.

Date selection
Date selection

Clicking or tapping the arrow shows the next day, month, or year view.

Navigating to the next month
Navigating to the next month

If the current month is clicked, the view changes to the month view and the user can change the month.

Switching to month view
Switching to month view

By clicking on a month, the user changes the month and the view changes to the day view.

Selecting another month
Selecting another month

The user can similarly change the year. By clicking the current year, the view changes to the year view. After the user selects a year, the view changes back to the day view.

Switching to year view
Switching to year view

After the user selects a year, the view changes back to the day view. The date in the date input field stays the same until the user selects a new date.

Selecting another year
Selecting another year

Guidelines

Date Formats

Long Date Format

Use the long date format for master list/object list item/title and object header/title. Here are some examples:

  • English (US): January 16, 2022
  • German (DE): 16. Januar 2022
  • Danish (DK): 16. Jan. 2022

Short Date Format

Use the short date format for master list/object list item/list of object attributes if space is a concern. For example, you might need to save space if there is a label with the date. Here are some examples of the short date format:

  • English (US): 1/16/22
  • German (DE): 16.01.22
  • Japanese (JP): 22/01/16

Relative and Medium Date Format

If appropriate, use a relative format for master list/object list item/list of object status. For example: today, 1 day ago, 2 days ago, and so on up to 6 days ago. After 6 days, use an absolute date with the medium format.

Use the absolute date with medium format in the corresponding object header in the details area. Do not use the relative format here.

Responsive Table

If screen space is at a premium (for example, if there are too many columns), use the short date format in table cells. Otherwise use the medium format.

If you need to display the weekday, use the full format. For example:

  • English (US): Sunday, January 16, 2022
  • German (DE): Sonntag, 16. Januar 2022
  • French (FR): dimanche 16 janvier 2022

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Date Range Selection

The control for selecting the date range is a single-field input control. Users can enter a localized date range using touch, mouse, or keyboard input, or by selecting a date range in the calendar. They can also navigate directly from one month or year to another.

Usage

Use the date range selection if:

  • You need a time range and know that your user is a power user who has to input lots of data. If the keyboard is the primary device used for navigating the app, use two input fields. This allows the user to quickly jump from field to field. By selecting a date in one of the fields, the other field should recognize the information and jump to the same selection.

Do not use the date range selection if:

  • You want to enter a date and a time. In this case, use the date picker or time picker instead.
  • The user’s primary goal is not to select ranges. If this is the case, use the simple date picker.

Responsiveness

The date range selection is fully responsive. It is smaller in compact mode and provides a touch-friendly size in cozy mode. For more information about cozy and compact modes, see the article on content density.

Date range selection (size S)
Date range selection (size S)
Date range selection (size L)
Date range selection (size L)

Components

The date range selection consists of two components: the date range input field and the date range picker.

The two clickable areas of the date range selection on all devices
The two clickable areas of the date range selection on all devices

Date Range Input Field

The user can type the date directly into the input field, or use the date picker. You can also show a prompt text in the field (property: placeholder). The system validates the date and gives the user feedback.

The dates June 7–16 are selected, and June 23 is shown as the current day
The dates June 7–16 are selected, and June 23 is shown as the current day

Date Range Picker

With the date range picker, the user can see a day view, month view, or year view. The current day and the selected date are highlighted. The calendar week is also visible in the day view. The calendar closes when a final day is selected. The user can click the arrows to view the previous and next days, months, or years (depending on the current view).

The selected date is shown with a blue background. The current day is indicated with a purple border in the calendar.

Clickable areas of the date range selection
Clickable areas of the date range selection

Behavior and Interaction

Selecting a Date Range

The user can type two dates into the date range input field or click the calendar icon to open the calendar and select a date. These two possibilities work for all devices – desktops, tablets, and smartphones.

Switch View

Clicking an arrow shows the next or previous day, month, or year.

Navigating to the next month
Navigating to the next month

Clicking the month shows an overview of all months.

Opening the month picker
Opening the month picker

If the current month is clicked, the user can change the month. When the user selects a month, the view changes to the day view.

Changing the month navigates back to the date picker. The focus is on the last selected start date.
Changing the month navigates back to the date picker. The focus is on the last selected start date.

By clicking the current year, the view changes to the year view. When the user selects a year, the view changes to the day view.

Opening the month picker
Opening the month picker

Selecting a Range

After the user selects a start date, the dates being hovered over turn light blue to provide visual feedback that a range is being selected. When the user selects an end date, the calendar closes. The range appears in the date input field.

Selecting the start date
Selecting the start date
Selecting the end date
Selecting the end date

Entering Single Dates

The date range selection also allows the user to input single dates. The user can type one date into the input field, or select the same day as a start and end date in the calendar.

Styles

Delimiter

The delimiter visualizes the start and end date. If no delimiter is given, the app uses the one defined for the used locale.

Placeholder

If no range is selected, show a placeholder text to indicate the correct format. If no placeholder is defined, the control shows the default locale placeholder format. You can define your own placeholder, but you must also take localized versions into account.

Date range selection with default placeholder
Date range selection with default placeholder

Validation

Use in-line validation to give the user feedback, especially in the form of errors and warnings. Possible warning states are warning, error, and success. The date range input field in question is highlighted by a frame in the corresponding color. If the focus is inside the field, an explanation is shown. Ensure that this explanation is as specific as possible.

Visible frame that shows an error when the field is out of focus
Visible frame that shows an error when the field is out of focus
Error state with meaningful text; the date range input field is in focus
Error state with meaningful text; the date range input field is in focus

Guidelines

Display Format

You can choose whether the displayed texts are to be shown in short, medium, or long format, or in another date format like dd–MM–yyyy. However, other date formats (besides short, medium, and long) should be used carefully due to local dependencies.

Long display format
Long display format
Medium display format
Medium display format
Short display format
Short display format

Input Types

The following input types are available. (Note: these examples show German date formats for January 14, 2014.)

  • Unicode CLDR short format: 14.01.14
  • Unicode CLDR medium format: 14.01.2014
  • ISO date format: 2014-01-14
  • ISO date format without delimiters: 20140114
  • Unicode CLDR short format without delimiters: 140114
  • Unicode CLDR medium format: 14012014

Date Formats

Long Date Format

Use the long date format for master list/object list item/title and object header/title. Here are some examples:

  • English (US): January 16, 2022
  • German (DE): 16. Januar 2022
  • Danish (DK): 16. Jan. 2022

Short Date Format

Use the short date format for master list/object list item/list of object attributes if space is a concern. For example, you might need to save space if there is a label with the date. Here are some examples of the short date format:

  • English (US): 1/16/22
  • German (DE): 16.01.22
  • Japanese (JP): 22/01/16

Relative and Medium Date Format

If appropriate, use a relative format for master list/object list item/list of object status. For example: today, 1 day ago, 2 days ago, and so on up to 6 days ago. After 6 days, use an absolute date with the medium format.

Use the absolute date with medium format in the corresponding object header in the details area. Do not use the relative format here.

If screen space is at a premium (for example, if there are too many columns), use the short date format within table cells. Otherwise, use the medium format.

If you need to display the weekday, use the full format. For example:

  • English (US): Sunday, January 16, 2022
  • German (DE): Sonntag, 16. Januar 2022
  • French (FR): dimanche 16 janvier 2022

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Planning Calendar

The planning calendar allows users to see different appointments at the same time and to create new appointments. It allows the user to display appointments for several objects, such as a team calendar, and compare them to each other.

Usage

Use the planning calendar if:

  • You want to compare objects of the same type with each other over a period of time.
  • You require responsive behavior.
  • You have less than 100 lines in the calendar.

Do not use the planning calendar if:

  • You want to show a calendar for one object and a detailed overview of appointments over a long time interval.
  • You want to show a complex or graphical representation. In this case, please use the Gantt chart.
  • You have more than 100 lines in the calendar. In this case, please use the Gantt chart.

Responsiveness

In size S, the control provides pop-in behavior, which allows the user to see as many appointments as possible and to connect them with the corresponding object. If the toolbar contains too many actions for the space available, the overflow icon appears.

The interval section displaying the hours, days, and months is responsive and shows 12 values in size L, 8 values in size M, and 6 values in size S. You can override this behavior, but you should then check that the responsiveness is still working.

Planning calendar - Size L
Planning calendar - Size L
Planning calendar - Size M
Planning calendar - Size M
Planning calendar - Size S
Planning calendar - Size S

Types

You can define what size of interval the calendar should show, and whether multi selection should be possible. Additionally, the row header and the interval appointments are optional.

The control allows multi-select mode to be shown for the list items. This can be used, for example, to delete multiple objects from the view.

An app development team must decide whether to show the planning calendar with or without multi-select mode, or whether users should be able to switch between the two modes. Hiding the interval appointments of every object is optional.

The example opposite shows what the interaction looks like if the user can trigger multi-select mode. When the user clicks or taps the button, a checkbox appears next to each list item and a Select All option is shown. Additional actions can appear or disappear in the calendar toolbar.

The planning calendar can also be used without a row header. In this case, the row header disappears and only the appointments are visible. It can be used to show the calendar of one object. Note that the control was built mainly to compare time slots of different objects. For this reason, the time axis is shown horizontally and, depending on the interval, the appointments might shrink to smaller size. In this case, the text is cut off rather than truncated.

Components

This section describes the various components of the planning calendar.

Parts of the planning calendar
Parts of the planning calendar

The control consists of different parts:

  1. Toolbar
  2. Header
  3. Calendar view
  4. List item
  5. Row header
  6. Row
  7. Appointment
  8. Interval appointment

1. Toolbar

The toolbar is optional and can contain a title as well as app-specific and generic actions.
If you have actions in the toolbar, we recommend that you use a title to describe the purpose of the planning calendar. For more information, check out the toolbar guideline article.

The generic actions are as follows:

  • Search
  • Add Appointment (icon: add)
  • Add New Contact (icon: add-contact)
  • Multi-Select Mode (icon: multi-select)
  • Legend (icon: legend)
  • Settings (icon: action-settings)
  • Full Screen (icon: full-screen/exit-full-screen)

2. Header

The calendar header has two parts.

  • Left: An optional switch to see different calendar views (hours, days, months, 1 week, 1 month, or custom) and a Today button, which navigates the visible interval to the present moment, depending on the view
  • Right: Calandar view

3. Calendar view

The calendar view defines the granularity of the time intervals. You can decide which views are available in the view switch (Hours, Days, Months, 1 Week, 1 Month), and how many values are shown for each view. App developers can change the default number of values shown, but they should then ensure that the app is still responsive.

For all views with the granularity “Days” (Days, 1 Week, 1 Month), you can add a bar to show calendar weeks below the main calendar date interval (property: showWeekNumbers).

The 1 Week view always renders a full week. It displays seven days on one screen. The start date is always the beginning of the week  (depending on the locale). It can be found in the view switch as a default view. When applications have this view available, we strongly recommend setting a different number of days displayed in the Days view (more or less than seven). Otherwise, the user might be confused, as the navigation for the two differs.

The 1 Month view shows an entire month. On desktop, the 1 Month view always displays an interval of 31 days. When the displayed month is shorter (28, 29, 30 days), days from the following month are displayed. They have a different visual state and serve as navigation to the following month.

On size M and Size S, the 1 Month view is adaptive. It consists of a calendar and a list of appointments for the selected day.

1-month view - Size S
1-month view - Size S

4. List item

The list item contains the row header, row, appointments, and interval appointments. Each row can show different working and non-working days.

If the users have a specific working schedule, the non-working days can be different on each row. This can be applied not only for weekends, but for also for non-working days based on specific schedule differences.

5. Row header

This identifies the object for which the appointments are shown. The row header pops in if there is not enough space. It can contain a picture or icon, a title, and a subtitle.

6. Row

All appointments that appear for an object are shown here.

App developers can turn the alternating row coloring on or off. By default, the alternating rows option is turned on.

7. Appointment

Appointments display an icon or picture, a title, and a subtitle. Appointments taking place simultaneously are shown one above the other. There are two appointment sizes – regular and half size. While half-sized appointments save space, they do not show a second line with appointment details.

App developers can define the colors of different appointment types, and appointments can be shown as tentative. Appointments are fully colored.

The control can register the click event, but the app development team must define what happens next.

In Months view, appointments within the same calendar week are combined to save space. The combined appointment shows the number of appointments in the same week. If an appointment takes place between two calendar weeks (for example, from Sunday to Monday), it is not included in the combined appointments for either calendar week.

You can show the list of the appointments in a combined appointment in a popover. However, this must be implemented by the app team. The control only provides the click event.

The app developer can disable combined appointments by setting the property GroupAppointmentsMode to Expanded.

Users can copy and paste appointments to a new position in the planning calendar using keyboard combinations (Ctrl/Cmd + Drag and drop to the new position).

8. Interval appointment

Each row can also have interval appointments, which are smaller and always appear at the top of the row. Interval appointments can be used to show appointments that last for a prolonged period of time, such as vacations or workshops.

The app developer can choose to hide the space reserved for interval appointments if no such appointments exist for that time period.

Planning Calendar Legend

To show the types for days and appointments, the planning calendar uses a specific legend control (sap.m.PlanningCalendarLegend).

Users open the planning calendar legend using a standard legend button in the toolbar ( ). Like all other actions in the toolbar, the app developer must add the legend button explicitly.

The app team also needs to decide which container to use for the planning calendar legend. We recommend placing the legend in a popover to keep the context. You can also use a dialog, or, if there is sufficient screen real estate, show the legend as dynamic side content.

The planning calendar legend has two non-collapsible sections containing legend elements. By default, these are called Calendar and Appointments. The app developer can configure the section names using the itemsHeader and appointmentItemsHeader properties. If no elements are available for a section, it is not displayed.

The Calendar section contains standard legend items: Today, Working Day, Non-Working Day, and Selected (only in the 1-month view on mobile). The app team must ensure that the Selected element is added to the planning calendar legend when the planning calendar is viewed in 1-month mode in a smartphone size. This is not provided by the control. If any of the standard legend items are not needed, you can switch them off (property: standardItems).

You can also apply colors for special days in the Calendar section. The planning calendar legend does not automatically use the colors defined for special days in the planning calendar – this must be done by the app team.

The Appointments section contains the color values for the available appointment types. The app developer has to define explicitly which color represents which type. The planning calendar legend does not take the color automatically from the planning calendar.

If combined appointments in the calendar are of the same type (in Months view), they take the color of that type. Combined appointments of different types are marked gray. We also recommend adding the gray color for mixed combined appointments to the Appointments section in the legend.

Planning calendar with legend
Planning calendar with legend
Developer Hint
To prevent waiting time, app developers should load the sap.ui.unified library.

Behavior and Interaction

To create an appointment, the user must trigger an action by clicking the Add   icon in the toolbar. Clicking directly on the row also creates a new appointment.

The user can click on the appointment to see further details. The app development team must define what kind of information is then shown. For example, clicking on an appointment can trigger a popover with detailed information.

A multi-select toggle can also be provided in the toolbar. This can be used, for example, to select multiple people in order to delete them from the planning calendar.

Various tooltips can be shown, but you should not use them to show additional information because users cannot access this functionality on touch devices.

Depending on the current time interval, appointments might be smaller and the text might be cut off, rather than truncated. The user can click or tap the appointment to see the details.

1. View select

The user can change the calendar view with the select control (dropdown). For example, to get an overview of a whole year, the user selects the Months view. Which view is most useful depends on the average length of appointments and the use case.

2. Today action

The user can trigger this action to go back to the current date/moment.

3. Back and forward navigation

The arrows allow the user to navigate to the next or previous interval.

4. Picker

The user can open a date picker to select the start time for the visible interval. What is shown initially in the picker differs depending on the view.

5. Month switch

The month switch is available if the day or month view is selected. It allows the user to switch to a different month.

6. Year switch

Day, month, and year views enable the user to switch between different years.

Navigation parts
Navigation parts

Interaction Flow for Switching Days

There are two ways in which the user can switch to a different day:

  • Clicking or tapping the arrows to navigate to the next or previous interval.
  • Clicking or tapping the date opens the date picker. When the user selects a day, the picker closes and navigates the user to the selected value.

Snapping Header

The header area of the planning calendar can remain fixed on top of the screen (property: stickyHeader), which allows users to view calendars with a lot of rows without losing the context.

Header snaps to top when scrolling down
Header snaps to top when scrolling down

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop can be used to move appointments (to enable Drag and Drop use property: enableAppointmentDragAndDrop). Moving an appointment automatically changes its start and end times (for example, if an appointment is scheduled from 1:00-2:00 PM, the user can drag it and change the time from 2:00-3:00 PM) . When dragged, the appointment is shown as a ghost element on the mouse cursor. Drop target areas are indicated to the user with a placeholder.

In the “Hours” view, the appointments can be moved to a specific new time, with the placeholder snapping at every 30 minutes. In the “Days” view, the appointment can be moved to a different day. The placeholder indicates the target day. On drop the appointment is moved to that day but keeps its previous start and end hour. The interaction is the same for the “Months” view. The placeholder indicates the target month and, when dropped, the appointment is moved to that month. The start and end hour and start and end day remain the same.

Appointments can be moved between rows. Note that additional coding may be needed to determine whether all calendar users will be able to perform this action.

Users can create new appointments by clicking, dragging and releasing on an empty space in the content area. The control also allows users to change the duration of an appointment by clicking and dragging one side of the appointment container. These two options are only available for desktop devices.

Combined appointments and interval appointments are not draggable.

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop

Guidelines

Switching the Row Header

To enable end users to rearrange the planning calendar by switching the row header, you can implement a flexible row header. This is not done by the control and must be implemented by the app development team.

The list items in the row header can be a value of any attribute of an appointment. The appointment attributes are part of app-specific content, so they should be specified by the app development team. The control does not provide default attributes.

Our guideline is to use the select control in the place of the calendar title. The select control will contain all the attributes that can serve as the row header. When a different attribute is selected, the calendar is rearranged accordingly. You can also add a counter after the list items to indicate how many appointments fall into a specific group.

It is also possible to have both the calendar title and select control, in which case you should have first the title and then the select.

On small screen sizes, use select instead of the calendar title. If you want to keep the calendar title, place select in the overflow menu.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Select Dialog

The select dialog enables users to select one or more items from a comprehensive list. The select dialog comes with a list of entries and a search field to filter the list.

A more enhanced dialog for single selection and multiselection is the value help dialog as it offers range selection and excluding functions. For more information on which selection control to choose, see the selection control overview.

Usage

Use the select dialog if:

  • Users need to select one or more entries from a comprehensive list that contains multiple attributes or values.

Do not use the select dialog if:

  • Users need to pick one item from a predefined set of options that contains one attribute or value only such as languages. In this case, consider using the combo box or select instead.
  • Your use case requires more enhanced functionalities such as a selection based on ranges. For the selection of values, consider using the value help dialog instead.
  • Your use case requires tabs, filters, or an Add New functionality in the select dialog. In this case, use a standard dialog instead.

Responsiveness

The display of the select control depends on the device. On phones, the selection list takes up the whole screen. On desktop and tablet devices it appears as a popover.

Size S

Single select dialog in full screen on smartphone
Single select dialog in full screen on smartphone
Multi-select dialog in full screen on smartphone
Multi-select dialog in full screen on smartphone

Size M

Single select dialog on tablet
Single select dialog on tablet
Multi-select dialog on tablet
Multi-select dialog on tablet

Size L

Single select dialog on desktop
Single select dialog on desktop
Multi-select dialog on desktop
Multi-select dialog on desktop

Components

Dialog Header

You need to set the title of the dialog header (1). We recommend the following form:

Single selection

Select

Example: Select Product

Multi-selection

Select

Example: Select Products

Search

The first element in the dialog is a standard search field (2).

Info Toolbar

The info toolbar (3) is only available in multi-selection mode. It shows the number of selected items in the following form:

Selected :

Example: Selected Products: 2

Content

The content area (4) can be filled with any list content inherited from the list item base, such as standard list items, display list items, and feed list items. You can set the content to be displayed as grouped.

Button Toolbar

The button toolbar (5) contains two buttonsOK and Cancel. OK takes over the selection, while Cancel resets the selection to the state it was in when the dialog was opened. Do not use Add or Select instead of OK.

Components of the select dialog. Left: single select, right: multi select
Components of the select dialog. Left: single select, right: multi select

Behavior and Interaction

The select dialog can be called up from any control. The most common trigger is an input field with selection icon, also known as a “value help field”, or F4. Alternative triggers are buttons or icons, which add items to an existing list or the info bar in the master list in order to apply a contextual filter.

Single Select

Once users select an entry, the select dialog is closed and the selected entry is taken over. If applicable, the entry is displayed in the field from which the dialog was triggered.

Multi-Select

In the multi-select version of the select dialog, checkboxes are provided for choosing multiple entries. The selection is taken over when the user closes the dialog via OK. Cancel closes the dialog without taking over the selected values. An info bar indicates the number of selected items.

Search

The user can search items.

Guidelines

List Options

If you need to indicate that none of the selection options are selected, or you need to allow the user not to select an option, provide (None) as an option and place it at the beginning of the list.

If you need to indicate that all items apply (for example, as a list filter), provide All as an option and place it at the beginning of the list.

Select list with '(None)'
Select list with '(None)'

Search Behavior

Two types of search behavior are available:

(1) A live search, also known as “search-as-you-type” (property: liveChange), which is triggered by each character that the user enters or deletes.

(2) A manual search, which is triggered explicitly after the user enters text in the search field and clicks or taps the Search icon or presses the ENTER key.

Although app developers need to decide themselves which search to use, we recommend implementing the live search whenever possible. Use the manual search only if the amount of data is too large and your app would otherwise run into performance issues. For more information, check out the article on search.

Remember Selections

If your use case requires selections in a dialog to be remembered so that the user can make corrections, you can set the rememberSelections function in the select dialog to ‘true’. When users exit the dialog by clicking or tapping Cancel, the selection is restored to the state it was in when the dialog was opened.

Selection is remembered after the dialog is reopened
Selection is remembered after the dialog is reopened

Once the dialog is closed, the selection is reset by default. This allows users to make a new selection when they reopen the dialog. This functionality makes sense, for example, when users need to add multiple items to a table.

Selection is reset after the dialog is closed
Selection is reset after the dialog is closed

Info Bar

In multi-selection mode, an info bar shows the number of selected items. Use the following format:

Selected: [Business Objects] Selected: [Number of Items]
Example: Products Selected: 2

Note that the info bar is not “sticky”. When the user scrolls down the list, the info bar scrolls off the screen.

“Clear” Button

The Clear button allows users to clear all the selected items. By default, the button is not shown. To display the button, set the showClearButton property to “true”.

Select dialog with 'Clear' button
Select dialog with 'Clear' button

Content

By default, the select dialog comes with a growing feature (property: growing = true). We recommend disabling the growing feature and setting this property to “false”. This ensures that all items in the table are loaded at once, and that the “Items selected” count, the search, and select/deselect features all work properly.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

  • No links

Input Field

A text input field allows users to enter and edit text or numeric values in one line. To help users enter a valid value, you can enable the autocomplete suggestion feature and the value help option.

For more information on which selection control to choose, see the selection control overview.

Usage

Use the input field if:

  • The user needs to enter a short, single-line text or number.
  • The user needs to enter a password, URL, phone number, or email address.
  • The user needs to select a single item from a large amount of data (for example, more than 200 items).
  • The user needs to find an object by searching for more than one attribute, such as an ID, city, and customer name. Use this control in combination with the autocomplete suggestion feature and value help option. For a small set of values (for example, fewer than 20 items), consider using the select control. Otherwise, use the combo box (for 20-200 items).

Do not use the input field if:

Responsiveness

In the examples below, the input field is shown in combination with the tabular autocomplete feature for different device sizes.

Size S (Smartphones)

Cozy mode:

When the user clicks or taps the input field, a new full screen dialog opens in which suggested items can be selected. Here, the pop-in feature of the responsive table is used.

Tabular autocomplete suggestion feature on a smartphone
Tabular autocomplete suggestion feature on a smartphone

Size M (Tablets)

Cozy mode:

The pop-in feature of the responsive table is used here, and defined columns are wrapped into a new line due to the limited space available.

Tabular autocomplete suggestion feature on a tablet
Tabular autocomplete suggestion feature on a tablet

Size L (Desktops)

Compact mode:

The full table is shown by the suggest feature.

Tabular autocomplete suggestion feature on a desktop
Tabular autocomplete suggestion feature on a desktop

Types

Six input types are currently supported (API). Be sure to select the correct type for your use case. Depending on the input type, a different keyboard layout is displayed on a mobile device (see some sample input types).

Note: The control does not provide validation based on the type. The app development team must carry out format validation. If binding is used, validation is carried out by the model, but the error handling still needs to be taken care of on the UI.

URL

Input type URL – Keyboard layout on a smartphone
Input type URL – Keyboard layout on a smartphone

Telephone Number

Input type telephone number – Keyboard layout on a smartphone
Input type telephone number – Keyboard layout on a smartphone

Password

Input type password – Keyboard layout on a smartphone
Input type password – Keyboard layout on a smartphone

Some types, such as number or telephone number, can be used together with mask input for better guidance.

Examples of input with different number masks
Examples of input with different number masks

Behavior and Interaction

Entering Text Using the Autocomplete Feature

Have a look at the interaction flow below:

Entering Text Using the Value Help Dialog

Have a look at the interaction flow below:

Information
For information on how to manage leading and trailing whitespace (blanks) when copying and pasting text into input controls, please see removing leading and trailing whitespace.

Styles

An input field can have four states: default, warning, error, or success.

Default
Default
Error
Error
Warning
Warning
Success
Success

Properties

Value State and Value State Message

The input control offers the four value states listed below. For the error and warning states, you can show an additional value state text when the focus is on the input field.

  1. None (default): No value state message is shown.
  2. Warning
  3. Error
  4. Success: No value state message is shown.

For more guidance on when to use which state, check out the article on message handling.

Default
Default
Warning
Warning
Error
Error
Success
Success

Required

Use this property to indicate that user input is required. Set the property for the specific input field to ensure that the asterisk is shown in front of the label.

Required input field
Required input field

Maximum Length

Use this property to set the maximum number of characters allowed. There is no limit by default.

Placeholder

The placeholder, or input prompt, is a short hint (a word or short phrase) to help the user with data entry. A hint can be a sample value or a brief description of the expected format.

Placeholder
Placeholder

Description

You can provide an additional description on the input field, for example, for units or currency. The width of the input field and description is distributed equally by default. Although the default setting is 50%, you can change this with the fieldWidth property.

Input description
Input description

Width

The width of the input field is set to 100% by default. Input fields are usually used in forms, where the width is determined by the form element or container that the input field is embedded in. Therefore, we do not recommend defining a fixed width, but rather working with proper layout containers, like the form, simple form, and responsive grid layout, and with the layout data property, where the width is defined by the 12-column approach.

Editable and Enabled States

The input field has three states (see examples of input states):

  1. Enabled: This is the default setting.
  2. Read-only: The input field is not shown; only the value is shown. This is used in display-only forms.
  3. Disabled: The input field is shown with a visual indication that an edit is not possible, for example, due to missing editing rights.
Editable and enabled input states
Editable and enabled input states

Text Alignment

The input field offers six types of alignment for text values (API):

  • Begin
  • Center
  • End
  • Initial (default): Browser-configured alignment is used
  • Left
  • Right

Value Help

To help the user find the correct value, you can enable the value help option (propertyshowValueHelp). By enabling this option, a small value help icon is displayed in the input field on the right-hand side. Once this option is enabled, the click event can be registered and one of the following displayed:

If you want to force the user to select only existing values, you can enable the value-help-only option (see an example of the value-help-only option). In this case, the user cannot enter text in the input field. Instead, the value must be selected from the list of suggestions, or chosen using the select dialog or value help dialog.

Value help option
Value help option

The values can also be pasted into the input field by copying and pasting, or dragging and dropping, if the user prefers this. In this case, the values will be automatically transformed into conditional expressions. Example: Copying values “1234” and “5678” leads to the token generation “=1234” and “=5678”. Additionally, these values will be found within the conditions tab of the value help dialog.

Autocomplete Suggestion

The input control offers three different types of autocomplete suggestions: single, two-value, and tabular. The width of the autocomplete and the input fields are set by default, but you can change these via the maxSuggestionWidth property. The position of the suggestion box depends on the space available below the control. If there is not enough space, the suggest box is shown above the control.

Single Value with Autocomplete

Displays a list of suggestions with one left-aligned value. As a base for the aggregation suggestionItemssap.ui.core.Item is used.

See live example of single-value autocomplete suggestions.

Single value autocomplete suggestion feature
Single value autocomplete suggestion feature

Two Values with Autocomplete

The two-value autocomplete suggestion feature displays two attributes of a business object, such as an ID and a name.  As a base for the aggregation suggestionItemssap.ui.core.ListItem is used.

The text property is displayed first, left-aligned, and the additionalText property is right-aligned.

See live example of two-value autocomplete suggestions.

Two-value autocomplete suggestion feature
Two-value autocomplete suggestion feature

Tabular Autocomplete

This autocomplete feature displays the values in a table layout. The width of the columns is distributed equally by default.

To use the tabular autocomplete feature, use the suggestionColumns aggregation to define the columns and the correct responsive behavior for the pop-in. For more information, see the article on the responsive table.

With the showTableSuggestionValueHelp property, you can offer a Show All Items button at the end of the suggest result list. Because the number of results in the suggest functionality is limited, this option helps the user find the relevant item via an alternative dialog:

See a live example of tabular autocomplete suggestions.

Tabular autocomplete
Tabular autocomplete

Guidelines

Always provide a meaningful label for any input field, and use the least complex control (such as select instead of value help. Use more intricate controls only if the use case really requires it. Where appropriate, help users by providing mask input or placeholder texts.

Maximum Columns

For input fields in a tabular view, we recommend using a maximum of 4 columns.

Maximum Length

Limit the length of the input field. For example, if you don’t want users to enter more than 5 characters, set the maximum length to 5. The maximum permissible character length is not defined by default. If the back-end system has a limit, ensure that you set this property accordingly.

Note that this parameter is not compatible with the input type sap.m.InputType.Number. If the input type is set to Number, the value of the maxLength property is ignored.

Placeholder

Avoid using the placeholder attribute as an alternative to a label. This is important because the placeholder text is overwritten as soon as the form is filled out. Labels are necessary to indicate the meaning of the form fields when the placeholders are no longer visible.

Description

The description field should be used, for example, for displaying units or currency. Do not use a description for help text or as a label replacement. Note that the description is not placed in a new line in size S. Therefore, only use the description property for small input fields with a short description.

Width

Editable and Enabled States

Editable

Property settings: editable = true, enabled = true

The input control is enabled and editable by default. Set the control to editable to allow the user to enter a value.

Not Editable

Property settings: editable = false, enabled = true

Use this state, for example, to display data only.

Disabled

Property settings: editable = not relevant, enabled = false

Set the control to disabled in an edit scenario to indicate that the user cannot change the control, for example, due to missing access rights or previous conditions not having been fulfilled or selected.

Text Align

Align left if:

  • Text is used. Also use left alignment for a phone number, URL, password, and email address.

Align right if:

  • Amounts and decimal numbers are used.
  • Values need to be added and compared.

Value Help

Show the value help option to help the user select the correct value (such as a customer ID) from a large dataset via the:

Use this option in combination with the autocomplete suggestion feature.

When the user clicks or taps the value help icon, the data entered into the input field must be transferred to the processing dialog so that the user does not have to enter the search term again. Likewise, data entered in the processing dialog must be transferred back to the input field.

Autocomplete Suggestion

Use the autocomplete suggestion feature to display real-time suggestions and to help the user enter information more accurately and efficiently. If you expect the suggest values to be longer than the input field itself, you can change the width via the maxSuggestionWidth property.

Single Value with Autocomplete

Use the single-value autocomplete feature if you want to search by only one attribute, such as an ID or a customer name.

Two Values with Autocomplete

Use the two-value autocomplete feature if you want to search by two attributes, such as a customer name and an ID. This ensures that the search is carried out for both attributes.

Tabular Autocomplete

If you need to display more than two attributes, use the tabular autocomplete feature. Try to keep the number of columns to a minimum, and focus on the columns that are really relevant for the use case. Define appropriate responsive behavior for sizes S and M. For more information, see responsive table.

The width of the columns is distributed equally by default. To avoid truncation, accurately estimate the primary attribute length and set a minimum width for this column.

Creating and Editing Objects

Sometimes a new object needs to be created if the user cannot find a specific item via autocomplete or value help. In this case, we recommend that you place the New action next to the input field.

If you want the user to be able to edit a selected object directly, you should place the Edit link next to the input field.

If both actions are needed, they should be toggled based on the content of the input field. If a valid object is selected, you should display Edit. If the input field is empty or the object is not valid, you should display New. This pattern can also be applied for the multi-input fieldcombo boxmulti-combo box, and select controls.

Input field – New action
Input field – New action
Input field – Edit action
Input field – Edit action

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Select

The select control (also known as a dropdown) is commonly used to enable users to select an item from a predefined list.

For more information on which selection control to choose, see the selection control overview.

Usage

Use select if:

  • Users need to select one item exclusively from a short list of options (for example, fewer than 12 items).
  • The values of the option list are of secondary importance and do not need to be displayed right away.

Do not use select if:

  • Users need to choose between two options, such as On or Off and Yes or No. In this case, consider using a switch control instead.
  • Users need to pick one item from a very large set of options. In this case, consider using the combo box instead.
  • You need to display more than one attribute. In this case, consider using the input field with a select dialog or a value help dialog instead.
  • The user needs to search on multiple attributes. In this case, consider using the input field with select dialog or value help dialog instead.
  • Your use case requires all available options to be displayed right away, without any user interaction. In this case, consider using radio buttons or a radio button group instead.

Responsiveness

The display of the select control depends on the device. On smartphones, the selection list takes up the whole screen. On desktop and tablet devices, it appears as a popover.

Size S

Select option list in full screen - Size S
Select option list in full screen - Size S

Size M

Select option list – The option list opens above the field if there is not enough space below it - Size M
Select option list – The option list opens above the field if there is not enough space below it - Size M

Size L

Select option list – The option list opens above the field if there is not enough space below it - Size L
Select option list – The option list opens above the field if there is not enough space below it - Size L

Layout

The select control can be placed in toolbars, such as chart toolbarsfooter toolbars, or header toolbars, as well as in forms or tables:

Components

Select Trigger

The trigger to open the option list is either the Select field (1), which also displays the current selection, or an icon (3).

Option List

The option list (2) displays all the items available to the user. The selection is always highlighted. Selecting another option from the list moves the highlight to the selected option.

Full Screen Title Bar for Size S

Opening the select control on a smartphone brings up the option list in full screen mode. The full screen mode can be closed using the icon on the top right corner (5).

You need to set a title for the full screen mode (4). We recommend the following format:

Single selection

Select [Entity]

Example: Select Product

Multi-selection

Select [Entities]

Example: Select Products

 

Anatomy of the select control
Anatomy of the select control
Anatomy of the select control - Size S
Anatomy of the select control - Size S

Behavior and Interaction

Clicking/Tapping

The Select field always displays the current selection. The user clicks or taps the field to display a list of options to choose from. Once the user selects an option, the list box closes and the selected option is displayed in the field. If there is no Select field but an icon, the user clicks the icon to open the list of options. The currently selected item is always highlighted in the list to help the user identify what has been selected.

Guidelines

Option List

The option list contains text values only. Keep the text values as short as possible because the list uses single lines only. Values that are too long may be truncated.

If you need to indicate that none of the selection options are selected, or you need to allow the user not to select an option, provide (None) (1) as an option and place it at the beginning of the list.

If you need to indicate that all items apply, for example, as a list filter, provide All as an option and place it at the beginning of the list.

If your use case requires a blank input field instead of (None), use a combo box instead.

If the select control is placed in a toolbar as an icon-only version for grouping or filtering a set of items, consider the following guideline:

Sort, Group, and Filter:

  • (Not sorted)
    Note: In most cases, this option is not necessary; just show the default sort settings instead.
  • (Not filtered)
  • (Not grouped)

For more information about the toolbar, see toolbar overview.

Define a default selection whenever possible (2). If the selected item is not specified, the first one is selected.

(1) Selection option list with (None); (2) first value selected
(1) Selection option list with (None); (2) first value selected

Label

The select control can be displayed with or without a label. If the field is attached to another field, you do not need to define a second label.

Information

Do not provide a blank value to indicate that nothing is selected.

Sorting

The sort option list contains all the items that are available to the user. Choose one of the following styles to order the content:

Logical: Sort items into a meaningful order. Group related options together and show the most common options first, followed by less common options. Sort the options alphabetically if more than eight select options are available. This helps the user find the right option quickly.

Example of logical sorting
Example of logical sorting

Alphabetical: Sort currencies, names, and similar content alphabetically.

Example of alphabetical sorting
Example of alphabetical sorting

Numeric: Sort numeric values into a sequential order, with the lowest number first.

Example of numeric sorting
Example of numeric sorting

Chronological: Sort time-related information into chronological order, with the most recent first.

Example of chronological sorting
Example of chronological sorting

Width

You can adjust the width of the option list to some extent. The width of the select control is set to Auto by default, while the maximum width is set to 100%. The option list adapts its length to the longest entry by default.

The select control is usually used in forms, where the width is determined by the form element or container in which the select control is embedded. Therefore, we do not recommend defining a fixed width, but rather working with proper layout containers, like the form, simple form, or responsive grid layout, and with the layout data property, where the width is defined.

If you need to restrict the width to a defined value, set the width accordingly.

Do not allow the control to auto-adjust based on the selection.

Keep in mind that there is no horizontal scrolling in the option list. Entries in the list that are too long are truncated and users will not be able to read them.

Information
If localized text is not an issue, such as with currency codes, consider using a smaller width.

Unit of Measurement

You can use the layout options of the form to can add the unit of measurement (UoM) after select. Apps can use the label-field ratio to show the UoM after the field. However, you must make sure that the UoM is properly visualized and doesn’t wrap to the next row.

Developer Hint

For accessibility purposes, you can use “ariaDescribedBy” from the input control.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Table Select Dialog

Table select is a commonly-used dialog that helps users to make a selection from a comprehensive table containing multiple attributes or values. With the dialog, users are also able to access additional information about the objects in the table without needing to select them first.

The dialog provides a responsive table layout with additional search, filter, and selection functionalities in the header. A footer toolbar provides actions for canceling or confirming the process.

For more information on which selection control to choose, see the selection control overview.

Usage

Use the table select dialog if:

  • You need to help users select one or more items from a comprehensive list that contains multiple attributes or values.

Do not use the table select dialog if:

  • You need to help users pick one item from a predefined set of options that contains only one value. In this case, use the dropdown box instead.
  • You need to help users with query-based range selection and enhanced filter options. In this case, use the value help dialog instead.
  • Your use case requires tabs, filters, or actions in a select dialog.In this case, use a standard dialog instead.
  • Your use case only requires filtering without selection. In this case, use the filter toolbar instead.

Responsiveness

The table inside the table select dialog behaves like the responsive table. On smaller screens, the columns wrap and build a list that shows all the information. All other elements in the control are also responsive.

On bigger screens, the table select dialog also provides columns
On bigger screens, the table select dialog also provides columns
The table in the dialog is responsive and wraps on smaller screens to show a list
The table in the dialog is responsive and wraps on smaller screens to show a list

Behavior and Interaction

The table select dialog can be called up from any control. The trigger is usually a button with a selection icon in an input field, or an Add button in a toolbar.

Triggers

Input Trigger

This trigger can be useful if users need to select, for example, one customer from a large customer register.

Example of a trigger: the selection icon in the input field
Example of a trigger: the selection icon in the input field

“Add” Button

This trigger can be useful if users need to add an item to a list. For example, the dialog could help users select the product from a large product catalog. Clicking OK in the footer toolbar of the dialog adds the selected products to the list.

“Clear” Button

The Clear button allows users to clear all the selected items.

Example of a trigger: 'Add' button in a table
Example of a trigger: 'Add' button in a table

Sticky Header

The column headers and info toolbar in the table select dialog are “sticky”, which means that they stay fixed on top when scrolling (sap.m.Table, property: sticky).

Information
The “sticky” feature has some browser limitations, and is not supported in Internet Explorer and in Microsoft Edge versions older than 41. In these browsers, the headers of the table select dialog will not be sticky.
Example of sticky headers
Example of sticky headers

 

Single Select

The single-select version does not need an OK button in the footer toolbar because the selected entry is taken over and closed as soon as a user selects an item from the table. If applicable, the entry is displayed in the field from which the dialog was triggered. Alternatively, a toast message can be shown if necessary.

Multi-Select

The multi-select version of the table select dialog provides checkboxes for users to choose multiple items. The blue info bar above the table indicates the number of selected items. The selection is taken over when the user closes the dialog via the OK button in the footer toolbar. Clicking or tapping Cancel closes the dialog without taking over the selected values.

Remembering Selections

If selections need to be memorized in order to help users make corrections, you can set the RememberSelections property to true. This restores the selection to the state it was in when the dialog was last opened as soon as users exit the dialog via OK or Cancel. The interaction flow of the RememberSelections property is shown and explained in the select dialog article.

Grouping

The list can also be displayed as grouped. Group headers divide the table into segments. A pregrouped table is useful for tables with many entries, which can be sorted by a single attribute.

A responsive table with group headers
A responsive table with group headers

Guidelines

Set the information provided in the table select dialog from top to bottom as follows:

Dialog Header

Use the following format for the dialog header:

  • For single selection: Select [Business Object]
    Example: Select Product
  • For multiple selection: Select [Business Objects]
    Example: Select Products.

Search

The first interactive element in the dialog is a standard search field. Two types of search behavior are available:

  • live search, also known as “search-as-you-type,” which is triggered by each character that the user enters or deletes.
  • A manual search, which is triggered explicitly after the user enters text in the search field and clicks or taps theSearch icon or presses the ENTER key. As soon as the user hits the Search button, a Delete icon appears at the end of the input field to delete the keyword and cancel the result list.

App developers need to decide which search to use. We recommend implementing the live search whenever possible. Use the manual search only if the amount of data is too large and if your app would otherwise run into performance issues. For more information, check out the article on searching.

Info Bar

In multi-selection mode, an info bar shows the number of selected items. Use the following format:

[Business Objects] Selected: [Number of Items]
Example: Products Selected: 2

“Clear” Button

The “Clear” button for clearing all the selected items is optional. By default, the button is not shown. To display the button, set the showClearButton property to “true”.

Content

The content area provides a table. This behaves like the responsive table, so the columns wrap on smaller screens and display a list.

By default, the table select comes with a growing feature (property: growing = true). We recommend disabling the growing feature and setting this property to “false”. This ensures that all items in the table are loaded at once, and that the “Items selected” count, the search, and select/deselect features all work properly.

Footer Toolbar

In the multi-select version, the footer toolbar contains the OK and Cancel buttons. OK takes over the selection, while Cancel resets the selection to the state it was in when the user opened the dialog. Do not use Add or Select instead of OK.

In the single-select version, only provide Cancel in the footer toolbar because the dialog takes over the selection as soon as the user chooses one.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Value Help Dialog

The value help dialog is a UI pattern that helps the user find and select single and multiple values. The user can also define and select multiple ranges. The value help dialog is generally called from an input field or a multi-input field by clicking the selection icon (value help icon) of the input field.

For more information on which selection control to choose, see the selection control overview.

Usage

Use the value help dialog if:

  • The user needs to use different attributes (such as city, company name, and so on) to find an object.
  • The user is searching within a dataset containing more than 200 items.
  • The user needs to define and select ranges and exclusions.

Do not use the value help dialog if:

  • The user only needs a few items to filter the data set. Always start with the least complex control (for example, use select instead of value help if the user needs to select only one item from a short list).

Responsiveness

The behavior of the value help dialog on a phone differs from its behavior on a tablet or desktop device. Both the navigation and the positioning of the selection area differ depending on the device.

Value help dialog - Size S
Value help dialog - Size S
Value help dialog - Size M
Value help dialog - Size M
Value help dialog - Size L
Value help dialog - Size L

Components

The value help dialog contains the following components:

1) Header bar
2) Icon tab bar / list control (phone)
3) Search template (optional)
4) Basic search
5) Advanced search
6) Result list
7) Items row (selected items, excluded items)
8) Footer toolbar
9) Include/exclude areas for range selection

Header Bar (1)

The header bar contains the dialog title. For guidelines on the dialog title, see the Guidelines section of this article.

Icon Tab Bar on Tablet/Desktop and List Control on Phone (2)

Depending on the device, the following controls are used to display the content of the value help dialog:

  • Smartphones: The start dialog provides a list (sap.m.List) with the standard list items (sap.m.StandardListItemSelect from List and
    Define Conditions to navigate between the different dialogs.
  • Tablet and desktop devices: The value help dialog contains an icon tab bar (sap.m.IconTabBar) to navigate between the Select from List and the Define Conditions tab.

Search Template (3)

Search templates allow the user to display different or additional fields in the advanced search field and the results list. Depending on the use case, the user can switch between the different search templates in order to use different fields when searching. For example, the search template “Customer (by company code)” displays the additional field “Company code” in the advanced search and result list.

Basic Search (4)

The basic search finds all results that are somehow related to the input. For example, the search term “A” returns all the results containing the letter “A”.

Always offer the basic search in the value help dialog. Position the basic search to the right of the search template control. If there is no search template control, left-align the basic search.

Advanced Search (5)

The advanced search offers a search field for each column in the result list.

Value help dialog - Advanced search
Value help dialog - Advanced search

For implementation of the basic and advanced search, the filter bar (sap.ui.comp.filterbar.FilterBar) is used in advanced mode. Advanced mode differs from basic mode in the following ways:

  • There is no Filters link or a dialog to make additional filter fields visible. All filter fields/advanced search fields are added automatically to the advanced search area.
  • There is a toggle link to show and hide the advanced search.
  • On desktops, the advanced search should be expanded by default.
  • On tablets, the advanced search should be collapsed by default.
  • In each of the filter fields, users can use operators like “between” or “lower than” to define ranges.

Note that the value help icon of the business object ID field and description field for the business object that opened the current value help dialog will open only the Define Conditions screen. The entire value help dialog is not shown in order to prevent endless loops. For example, the value help icon of the customer ID or description field in a Select: Customer value help dialog will navigate directly to the Define Conditions screen.

How the Advanced Search Works

The user can include operators (such as “=“) to define the ranges directly within the field without moving to the fields of the Define Conditions tab.

The user must type the following to get results:

Operator Input Notation Example
between valuevalue 000100
equal to =value =0001
contains *value* *1*
starts with value* 001*
ends with *value *5
less than <value <100
less than or equal to <=value <=200
greater than >value >0300
greater than or equal to >=value >=0500
not equal to* !(=value) !(=0)

* Note that there isn’t an explicit “not equal to” operator. Instead, you need to use “Exclude” (!) in conjunction with the “equal to” operator (=).

Advanced search using operator
Advanced search using operator

Result List (6)

  • You can prefill the result list of the value help dialog by default.
  • If you transferred values from the input field to the basic search field of the value help dialog, the results are filtered accordingly.
  • If available, display the ID and description of the business object in the first and second columns. Display additional information in the next columns.
  • We recommend a maximum of five columns in the results list.

Selected/Excluded Items Row (7)

The row for Selected Items / Excluded Items is displayed in the panel container (see panel for more information). Each item or range that is selected or excluded is displayed as a token in the selected or excluded item row.

  • On desktops, the selection area with the selected and excluded items row is initially expanded.
  • On tablets and phones, the selection area with the selected and excluded item row is initially collapsed.

Footer Toolbar (8)

The footer bar offers the OK and Cancel buttons.

Include/Exclude Areas for Range Selection (9)

In the Include and Exclude areas of the Define Conditions tab, you can define single and multiple ranges with the following operators:

  • equal to
  • between
  • less than
  • less than or equal to
  • greater than
  • greater than or equal to

Each range is displayed as a token in the selected or excluded item row.

Developer Hint
For information on how to manage whitespace characters (blanks) when users copy and paste text into input controls, see Removing Leading and Trailing Whitespace.

Behavior and Interaction

Basic and Advanced Search

  • The basic search (mandatory) and advanced search (optional) are triggered by clicking or tapping the Go button. The search results are shown in the result list.
  • If the input field where the user is coming from contains data, this data is transferred to the basic search of the value help dialog and the results are then filtered accordingly.
  • The basic search performs a search across all fields that are displayed in the advanced search and the result list.

Item and Range Selection

Depending on your use case, the value help dialog can offer different selection options:

  • Select a single item
  • Select a single range
  • Select multiple items
  • Select/exclude multiple ranges

Users open the value help dialog by clicking or tapping the value help icon of the input field. The next steps depend on the use case and form factor (smartphone or desktop/tablet).

The different use cases are described in the sections below.

Select a Single Item (Smartphone)

Tapping the value help icon opens the Select from List tab. As soon as an item is selected, the value help dialog closes automatically.

Single item selection on a smartphone
Single item selection on a smartphone

Select a Single Item (Desktop/Tablet)

Clicking the value help icon opens the Select: [Object]  screen (for example, Select: Company). The icon tab bar and the Selected Items / Excluded Items row are hidden. As soon as an item is selected, the value help dialog closes automatically.

Single item selection on a desktop/tablet device
Single item selection on a desktop/tablet device

Select a Single Range (Smartphone)

Tapping the value help icon opens the Define Condition tab.

Single range selection on a smartphone
Single range selection on a smartphone

Select a Single Range (Desktop/Tablet)

Clicking the value help icon opens the Define Condition: [Object] tab (for example, Define Condition: Company).

The icon tab bar and the Selected Items / Excluded Items row are hidden. The Add and Delete icons for adding and deleting ranges are also hidden.

Single range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Single range selection on a desktop/tablet device

Select Multiple Items | Select/Exclude Multiple Ranges (Smartphone)

Tapping the value help icon displays the start dialog.

  • The Select from List tab is used to select multiple items
  • The Define Conditions tab is used to select and exclude ranges.

Both are added as tokens to the Selected Items / Excluded Items row at the bottom of the start dialog.

Start dialog for multi-item and multi-range selection on a smartphone
Start dialog for multi-item and multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-item selection on a smartphone
Multi-item selection on a smartphone
Advanced search on a smartphone
Advanced search on a smartphone

Select Multiple Items | Select/Exclude Multiple Ranges (Desktop/Tablet)

Clicking the value help icon displays the icon tab bar with the Select from List and Define Conditions tabs.

  • The Select from List tab is used to select multiple items
  • The Define Conditions tab is used to select and exclude ranges.

Both are added as tokens to the Selected Items / Excluded Items row at the bottom of the screen.

Multi-item and multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Multi-item and multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Multi-item and multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Multi-item and multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device

Select/Exclude Multiple Ranges (Smartphone)

Tapping the value help icon opens the start dialog with the Define Conditions tab.

The selected values are added as tokens to the Selected Items / Excluded Items row at the bottom of the start dialog.

Start dialog for multi-range selection on a smartphone
Start dialog for multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-range selection on a smartphone

Select/Exclude Multiple Ranges (Desktop/Tablet)

Clicking the value help icon opens the Define Conditions: [Object] tab (for example, Define Conditions: Company). The icon tab bar is hidden and the Selected Items / Excluded Items row is displayed.

Multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device

Selected Items / Excluded Items

  • Each item that is selected from the result list on the Select from List tab is displayed as a token in the Selected Items row.
  • Each range that is selected or excluded on the Define Conditions tab is displayed as a token in the Selected Items / Excluded Items row.

Copying and Pasting Multiple Values

The Include and Exclude areas on the Define Conditions tab allow the user to enter multiple values at once (copied from the clipboard) .

In both areas, users can paste more than one value into the value input field. In this case, the condition row repeats with the previously selected condition and shows one value per row.

If there are more than 10 rows of conditions in either the Include or Exclude area, pagination is added to top of the respective area. A token appears next to each pasted value on the Selected Items / Excluded Items row at the bottom of the value help dialog.

Copying and pasting multiple values
Copying and pasting multiple values
Copying and pasting multiple values
Copying and pasting multiple values

Guidelines

Dialog Title

The dialog title differs depending on the device and whether multiple or single selection is used.

For smartphones:

  • Starting dialog: [Object] (for example, Company)
  • Select from list dialog: Select from List
  • Advanced search dialog: Advanced Search
  • Single range selection: Define Condition
  • Multiple range selection: Define Conditions

For tablet and desktop devices:

  • Multiple items combined with selection of multiple ranges: [Object] (for example, Company)
  • Single item selection: Select: [Object] (for example, Select: Company)
  • Single range selection: Define Condition: [Object] (for example, Define Condition: Company)
  • Multiple range selection: Define Conditions: [Object] (for example, Define Conditions: Company)

Advanced Search

If necessary, also provide value help for fields offered in the advanced search. However, do not provide the full value help dialog for the ID and description fields of the business object that is being selected. For these two fields, make sure that the value help icon opens only the Define Conditions screen (range selection).

For example, in a value help dialog for selecting the customer, do not offer full value help for the Customer ID and Customer Name fields. Instead, try to use the value help in combination with a helpful suggestion.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

 

Toolbar Overview

The toolbar enables the user to change the UI or trigger an action. For example, the toolbar allows the user to change views, manipulate data or objects, navigate to another page, perform generic actions, and so on.

This article gives an overview of what kind of different toolbars exist and when to use which one.

Information
With SAPUI5 version 1.40, the floating footer toolbar was introduced to improve the legibility and general clarity of the page. It is slightly transparent, showing underlying content. The floating footer property is activated at page level and not at the floating footer itself.

Actions and Layout

Actions can be used as follows:

  • They can be independent of the current selection and not related to a specific item or object. (1)
  • They can be specific to the current object (user selects one item). (2)
  • They can apply to a set of items (user selects two or more items). (3)
  • They can control the settings of the UI, which affects all items. (4)
Types of actions
Types of actions

Sort your buttons according to their importance for the user, with the most frequently-used action first and the most seldom-used action last. All buttons go into the overflow from right to left, thus ensuring that the most important buttons are the last to be moved into the overflow menu.

The toolbar is mostly used for buttons (with an icon or text) and should be right-aligned.

Responsiveness

To enable responsiveness, use the OverflowToolbar control. Based on the sap.m.Toolbar control, the OverflowToolbar control is a container that provides overflow when its content does not fit in the visible area. Controls that can overflow include the segmented button, select, toggle button, checkbox, input, search field, combo box, and date/time input.

Only allow important actions to shrink and stay outside the overflow. The app team itself must decide which actions it considers to be sufficiently important.

The height of the toolbar changes on desktops (compact mode), tablets, and smartphones (cozy mode). For more information, see the article on content density.

Responsive table toolbar – Size S
Responsive table toolbar – Size S
Responsive table toolbar – Size L
Responsive table toolbar – Size L

Behavior and Interaction

App teams should implement overflow behavior to ensure that all actions can be accessed at any time. Buttons are sorted by usage, with the most frequently used action first (on the left) and the most seldom-used action last (on the right). This ensures that the most important buttons are the last to be moved into the overflow menu. Our general guideline is to use only icon buttons or text buttons. Do not combine an icon and text into one button. Buttons are always right-aligned.

Overflow (Generic)

The overflow should be activated either when there is not enough space for all actions, or if some actions are less important than others. In this case, the app team might decide to have certain actions only appear in the overflow. Furthermore, the app team can also decide that some (important) actions should never be moved into the overflow.

When you implement the overflow toolbar, the overflow behavior is generated automatically. Since release 1.30, new features have been added to the overflow toolbar. The  “” (overflow) button is now a toggle button and can be used to switch the overflow menu on and off.

The user clicks or taps the overflow button to open a popover. In this action sheet, all icon buttons are labeled with text and the user can overflow the following controls:

  • sap.m.SegmentedButton – When in the overflow, the segmented button is in select mode and looks like a select, although it is technically still a segmented button.
  • sap.m.Select – When in the overflow, it is always in default mode to take advantage of the extra space, even if it was set to icon-only mode in the toolbar.
  • sap.m.ToggleButton
  • sap.m.Checkbox
  • sap.m.Input
  • sap.m.SearchField
  • sap.m.ComboBox
  • sap.m.DateTimeInput
  • sap.ui.comp.smartfield.SmartField
  • sap.m.Label
  • sap.m.MenuButton

All buttons go into the overflow from right to the left. This ensures that the most important buttons are the last to be moved into the overflow menu.

Prioritization

You can also prioritize the actions in the toolbar by applying one of five statuses:

  • Always overflow: The action always goes into the overflow.
  • Disappear: An action that is not so relevant for the user can disappear if the space is limited (for example, a title).
  • Low: Assign the priority “Low” to an action if the user seldom needs it; this action will overflow first.
  • High: Actions set to “High” remain visible in the toolbar until all lower-priority actions have moved to the overflow. Lower-priority actions are those with the priorities “Disappear” or “Low”, and all unprioritized actions.
  • Never overflow: These actions are always visible in the toolbar.

The priority of each item is high by default. If two items have equal priority, the item on the right side overflows first.

Grouping

Items can overflow together even if they are in different positions. This can be achieved using the group property in the overflow toolbar layout data. When the value of the property is 0, the element does not belong to any group. When two or more elements are given the same property value, they belong to the same group and will go into the overflow together. Elements that belong to a group are not allowed to have “always overflow” or “never overflow” as priorities, since these priorities force the items to remain either in the toolbar or in the overflow area. When group elements have different priorities, the priority of the group is defined by the maximum priority of its elements.

Table toolbar on desktop without overflow
Table toolbar on desktop without overflow
Table toolbar on smartphone with overflow
Table toolbar on smartphone with overflow
Table toolbar on smartphone with open overflow
Table toolbar on smartphone with open overflow

Styles

The footer toolbar has a dark background, while header and content toolbars have a transparent style. Buttons are always transparent, and the styles accept, reject, and emphasized are reserved for key actions on the page. Pages will either have a styled button in the header or in the footer toolbar.

For more information, see buttons.

The toolbar style is an enumeration with two properties: Standard (default) and Clear.

  • Standard style results in linear design (with border) and is intended for standalone usage of the toolbar.
  • Clear style appears as a plain color without borders. This style visually groups the toolbar with a nearby control or controls.

The toolbar style property is combined with the toolbar design property to create various visual styles.

Types

A variety of toolbars exist for different use cases (see examples below). The following types are used:

  • Header toolbar: Contains global actions that are important for the whole page
  • Footer toolbar: Contains only closing and finalizing actions
  • Table toolbar: Toolbar that is positioned above a table and contains table-specific actions
  • Chart toolbar: Toolbar that is positioned above a chart and contains chart-specific actions
  • Info bar: Blue toolbar that indicates what filters have been set, and how many items have been selected
Header Toolbar with Edit and Delete Action
Header Toolbar with Edit and Delete Action
Footer toolbar with transparent standard buttons and emphasized
Footer toolbar with transparent standard buttons and emphasized
Table toolbar with title, show items, sort, group and settings
Table toolbar with title, show items, sort, group and settings
Chart toolbar with perspective switch, legend, zoom, full screen, view switch
Chart toolbar with perspective switch, legend, zoom, full screen, view switch
Info bar in filtered master list
Info bar in filtered master list

Guidelines

Order of Buttons

To provide a consistent user experience for each app, we highly recommend using the following alignment for generic actions:

  • All buttons are right-aligned.
  • Text buttons should be grouped together, as should icon buttons.
  • App-specific text-only buttons and generic text-only buttons can be combined and arranged in a sequence defined by the app team. Remember to place the most frequently-used actions furthest to the left of the group of buttons. This ensures that these actions are the last to be moved into the overflow menu or are visible at all times.

General Guidelines

  • Do not overload the toolbar with actions.
  • Place actions as close to the corresponding content as possible.
  • Place commands in the same location throughout the app. Each page should contain only the commands that are relevant to that page. If commands are shared between pages, they should be placed as close to the same location as possible on each page so that users can predict where the commands can be found when navigating.
  • Separate navigation and commands. Place commands as close to their corresponding items as possible.
  • Do not place Settings, Logout, or other account management commands in the footer toolbar. All these actions are shown in the Me Area.
  • Use only icon buttons or text buttons. Do not combine an icon and text into one button. Buttons are always right-aligned.
  • If you want to group buttons, use a menu button.
  • Actions that impact the entire page are placed in the header area.
  • Only closing or finalizing actions are placed in the footer toolbar (for example, Submit or Post).

UI Text Guidelines

Use tooltips such as Sort, Filter, and Group to label the icons in the footer toolbar. In the case of Sort, Group, and Filter, use the following text for the no selection made option:

  • (Not sorted)

Note: In most cases, (Not sorted) is not necessary. Simply show the default sort settings instead:

  • (Not filtered)
  • (Not grouped)

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Multi-Input Field

A multi-input field allows the user to enter multiple values, which are displayed as tokens. To help the user enter a valid value, you can enable the suggestions feature and the value help option.

Usage

Use the multi-input field if:

  • You want the user to select multiple ranges (with the value help option and the value help dialog).
  • The dataset to choose from is expected to increase over time (for example, to more than 200 values).
  • You need to provide the value help option to help users select or search multiple business objects.
  • You want to enable users to add custom values.

Do not use the multi-input field if:

  • You want the user to select one entry only. In this case, use the input field or combo box instead.
  • You want the user to select from a pre-defined set of options only. In this case, use the multi-combo box instead.

For more information on which selection control to choose, see the selection control overview.

Responsiveness

Size S

  • Cozy mode.
  • When the user taps the multi-input field, a new full screen dialog opens. After tapping in the input field and typing, the suggestions can be selected. When the user makes a selection, the dialog closes and the token is displayed.
  • The user can review the tokens by swiping them to the left or right.
Suggestions on a smartphone (size S)
Suggestions on a smartphone (size S)
Users can review tokens by swiping left and right on touch devices
Users can review tokens by swiping left and right on touch devices

Size M

  • Cozy mode.
  • The suggestions appear below or above the multi-input field.
  • The user can review tokens by swiping them to the left or right.
Suggestions on a tablet (size M)
Suggestions on a tablet (size M)

Size L

  • Compact mode.
  • The suggestions appear below or above the multi-input field.
  • The user can review tokens by pressing the right or left arrows on the keyboard.
Suggestions on a desktop (size L)
Suggestions on a desktop (size L)

Types

The input types of the multi-input field are identical to those of the input field.

Behavior and Interaction

Adding a Token

The user can add a token using suggestions or value help. When an item is selected from the suggestions dropdown, the corresponding token is created, and the input field is ready for the next entry. Tokens are placed next to each other on one line.

Developer Hint
Values that are entered can also be tokenized when the user presses ENTER. The app development team can perform a custom validation of the entered data and decide whether a token should be created.
Adding tokens
Adding tokens
Adding a second token
Adding a second token
Information
For information on how to manage leading and treading whitespace (blanks) when copying and pasting text into input controls, please see removing leading and trailing whitespace.

Reviewing Tokens

If tokens have been selected, and the input field is not in focus, the input field displays as many tokens as possible in the available space. If more tokens have been selected, an [n] More label indicates the number of hidden tokens. The tokens in the input field appear in the order in which they were selected.

Clicking or tapping the [n] More label opens a popover below the input field, in which all selected items are shown. The user can deselect an item by clicking or tapping its checkbox or label.

Multi-input field - n More (Desktop)
Multi-input field - n More (Desktop)
Multi-input field - n More (Phone)
Multi-input field - n More (Phone)

In the input itself, the user can review tokens by using the left or right cursor keys on a desktop, or by swiping to the left or right on a smartphone or tablet.

Left/right keyboard cursor
Left/right keyboard cursor
Swiping left and right on a touch device
Swiping left and right on a touch device

Deleting Tokens

The user can delete tokens by pressing the Backspace or Del button (when selected) on a desktop’s keyboard, or by tapping the Delete icon on a mobile device.

Deleting tokens
Deleting tokens

Using Value Help

You can enable the value help option to provide a more advanced dialog for finding the relevant business object. Two dialogs can be used at present:

Value help with select dialog
Value help with select dialog
Value help with value help dialog
Value help with value help dialog

Filtering

When the user starts typing in the input field, the list is filtered. Only items that match the characters entered are shown in the dropdown list. The default filtering method is “starts with per term”, which matches the beginning of each word in an item’s text.

In addition, application developers can set a custom filtering method “starts with” or “contains” (method: setFilterFunction). The “starts with” approach filters only for items where the beginning of the label matches the query entered. The “Contains” approach searches the full label for a match.

As a visual hint for the user, the matched characters are highlighted in the option list items. The highlighting works on the basis of “starts with per term”, regardless of the filtering method.

Multi-input field - Default filtering
Multi-input field - Default filtering

Copying and Pasting Data from a Spreadsheet or Text File

The multi-input field can handle paste actions containing multiple items, such as items that have been selected in a column of a spreadsheet or text file. The user simply selects a whole column in the spreadsheet, copies it, and then pastes it from the clipboard into the multi-input field. Each item is represented as a token. If a single value is copied and pasted into the field, it is shown as a text value, as further editing might be required before it is converted into a token.

Guidelines

  • Give the control a width that is appropriate for the range of values that are going to be entered. Try to avoid setting a fixed width on this control. Instead, embed it in a proper layout (such as a form, simple form, or grid layout) and work with the layout data property.
  • Provide meaningful labels for all input fields. Do not use the placeholder as a replacement for the label. The placeholder should only provide an additional hint.
  • The multi-input field can currently contain tokens and one free text value. If you allow only validated values, display an error or warning when the user tries to leave the field to indicate that the value entered is invalid, or remove the value.
  • If users try to select an item that has been selected before, we recommend setting an error state and providing a meaningful message.
Multi-input - Error state for an item that has already been selected
Multi-input - Error state for an item that has already been selected
  • You can use the layout options of the form to add the unit of measurement (UoM) after the multi-input control. Apps can use the label-field ratio to show the UoM after the field. However, you must make sure that the UoM is properly visualized and doesn’t wrap to the next row.
Developer Hint

For accessibility purposes, you can use “ariaDescribedBy” from the input control.

  • The multi-input field can be used in the grid tableanalytical table and tree table as well, as condensed mode is already supported, both for desktop and mobile (tablets).
Multi-input field in the grid table in condensed mode
Multi-input field in the grid table in condensed mode

Properties

Since the multi-input field is derived from the input field, refer to the properties in the input field article.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Combo Box

The combo box control allows users to select an item from a predefined list.

The control provides an editable input field for filtering the list, and a dropdown menu with a list of the available options.

Usage

Use the combo box if:

  • Users need to select a single item from a long list of items (minimum 13, maximum 200 entries).
  • The values of the option list are secondary information and do not need to be displayed right away.

Do not use the combo box if:

  • Users need to select from a list of two options, where one of the options can be implied as on and off or yes and no. Consider using a switch control instead.
  • Users need to pick one item from a small set of options, such as up to 12 entries. Consider using the select control instead.
  • Users need to pick one item from a large set of options, such as more than 200 entries. Consider using the input field control with a select dialog or value help dialog instead.
  • You need to display more than one attribute. Consider using the input field with select dialog or value help dialog.
  • Searching on multiple attributes is required. Consider using the input field with select dialog or value help dialog.
  • Your use cases require that all available options should be displayed right away without any user interaction. Consider using radio buttons or a radio button group.

For more information on which selection control to choose, see the selection control overview.

Responsiveness

Size S

Size S
Size S

Size M

Size M
Size M

Size L

Size L
Size L

Also see the section on mobile handling below.

Components

Title

A descriptive heading (1).

Input Field

The input field (2) displays the selected value. Users can type any character to filter the option list.

Dropdown Arrow

The dropdown menu’s arrow (3) collapses and expands the option list.

Option List

The option list (4) contains a list of values (5) that users can choose from.

Size S
Size S
Size M/L
Size M/L

Two-Column Layout

Use the combo box with a two-column layout if you need to display additional information for the selection options, such as currencies, country abbreviations, or system abbreviations.

Users can filter both columns simultaneously showing only matching entries.

Combo box with two-column layout
Combo box with two-column layout

Behavior and Interaction

Select a Value

There are three ways to select an item from the list:

  1. Select the item directly from the dropdown list.
  2. Type the item into the input field.
  3. Use the up and down arrows to navigate the list.

Clicking the input field places the cursor in the field (1). Clicking the arrow opens the option list (2). When the user starts typing, the list is filtered accordingly. The first item that starts with the characters entered is highlighted in the list and auto-completed in the input field (3). Up/down moves the highlight in the list and populates the value in the field (4). Selecting a value closes the list of options (5).

Auto-Complete

When the first few letters are typed in the input field, the control performs auto-complete to help users to easily select one item from the option list.

Choose from Option List

The option list displays all the available items the user can choose from. The selection is always highlighted. Selecting another option from the list moves the highlight to the newly selected option.

Clicking the arrow opens the option list below the field. If there is not enough space, the list is displayed above the input field.

Selecting a value
Selecting a value

Filtering the Option List

When the user starts typing in the input field, the option list is filtered. Only items that match the characters entered are shown in the dropdown list. The default filtering method is “starts with per term”, which matches the beginning of each word in an item’s text.

In addition, application developers can set a custom filtering method “starts with” or “contains” (method: setFilterFunction). The “starts with” approach filters only for items where the beginning of the label matches the query entered. The “Contains” approach searches the full label for a match.

As a visual hint for the user, the matched characters are highlighted in the option list items. The highlighting works on the basis of “starts with per term”, regardless of the filtering method.

If the filtered option list contains items that start with the characters entered by the user, the first matching, unselected item is auto-completed in the input field.

Combo box - Default filtering and auto-complete
Combo box - Default filtering and auto-complete
Combo box - Default filtering in both columns and auto-complete
Combo box - Default filtering in both columns and auto-complete

Auto-Resize

The width of the option list adapts to its content. The minimum width is the input field plus the dropdown arrow. The maximum width is the part of the screen furthest to the right. If the option list content requires even more width, entries become truncated.

Option list – Minimum width
Option list – Minimum width
Option list adapts to long entries
Option list adapts to long entries

Mobile Handling

The user can enter text into the input field (supported by auto-completion). Clicking or tapping on the dropdown arrow of the combo box (1) opens in a full-screen dialog (2). The user can now modify the selected entry by tapping the input field of the combo box. The mobile keyboard is then displayed, and the user can begin to enter a new term to filter the option list, also supported by auto-completion (3). The option list closes when the user clicks or taps the OK button at the bottom of the list (4) or selects an item in the list (5).

Information
For information on how to manage leading and treading whitespace (blanks) when copying and pasting text into input controls, please see removing leading and trailing whitespace.

Styles

A combo box has different styles for its different states. Here are some examples:

Unselected
Unselected
Unselected (predefined placeholder)
Unselected (predefined placeholder)
Unselected (on hover)
Unselected (on hover)
Arrow (on hover)
Arrow (on hover)
Focus
Focus
Warning
Warning
Error
Error
Expanded
Expanded
Auto-complete
Auto-complete

Guidelines

Label

The combo box control can be displayed with or without a label. If the field is attached to another field, you do not need to define a second label. For more information, see the article on how to use labels in SAP Fiori.

Placeholder

Do not use the placeholder attribute as an alternative to a label. This is important because the placeholder text is overwritten as soon as the form is filled out. Labels are necessary to indicate the meaning of the form fields when the placeholders are no longer visible. Show a placeholder only if the user needs a hint on data entry. Do not repeat the content of the label. A hint could be a sample value or a brief description of the expected format. Read more about how to use placeholders.

 

Option List

The option list contains text values only. Keep the text values short because the list is represented using only single lines. Values that are too long might be truncated.

If you need to express that none of the selection options are selected, show a blank input field. Define a default selection whenever possible.

Sorting

We recommend sorting options alphabetically to help users find the right option quickly. For more sorting rules, check out the guidelines for the select control.

Width

You can adjust the width of the option list to some extent.

The combo box control is usually used in forms, where the width is determined by the form element or container in which the combo box control is embedded. Therefore, we do not recommend defining a fixed width, but rather working with proper layout containers that have a defined width, such as the following properties: “form”, “simpleform”, “responsivegridlayout”, and “layoutdata” .

If you need to restrict the width to a defined value, set the width accordingly.

Keep in mind that there is no horizontal scrolling in the option list. Entries in the list that are too long become truncated and users may not be able to read them.

If localized text is not an issue, consider using a smaller width.

Unit of Measurement

You can use the layout options of the form to add the unit of measurement (UoM) after the combo box control. Apps can use the label-field ratio to show the UoM after the field. However, you must make sure that the UoM is properly visualized and doesn’t wrap to the next row.

Developer Hint

For accessibility purposes, you can use “ariaDescribedBy” from the input control.

Properties

Selection

When you select a value, there are two events:

  • Change: Occurs when the text in the input field is changed and the focus leaves the input field or the user presses the Enter key.
  • Selection change: Occurs when the user types something that matches an item in the list; also when the user clicks a list box item, or when navigating via keyboard.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Multi-Combo Box

The multi-combo box control is commonly used to enable users to select one or more options from a predefined list. The control provides an editable input field to filter the list, and a dropdown arrow to open the list of available options. The select options in the list have checkboxes that permit multi-selection.

Usage

Use the multi-combo box if:

  • The user needs to select one or more options from a long list of options (maximum of approximately 200).
  • The values of the option list contain secondary information that does not need to be displayed right away.

Do not use the multi-combo box if:

  • The user needs to choose between two options, such as ON or OFF and YES or NO. In this case, consider using a switch control instead.
  • You need to display more than one attribute. In this case, consider using the select dialog or value help dialog instead.
  • The user needs to search on multiple attributes. In this case, consider using the select dialog or value help dialog instead.
  • Your use case requires all available options to be displayed right away, without any user interaction. In this case, consider using checkboxes instead.
  • You want to enable users to add custom values. In this case, consider using the multi-input field.
  • Your use case requires more options to choose from. In this case, consider using the multi-input field, either with the select dialog or value help dialog (for more than 1000 items).

For more information on which selection control to choose, see the selection control overview.

Responsiveness

The multi-combo box is optimized for keyboard and mouse interaction.

Size S

 Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size S
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size S
Option list in full screen - Size S
Option list in full screen - Size S

Size M

Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size M
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size M

Size L

Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size L
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size L

Also see the section on behavior for mobile devices.

Components

Input Field

The input field (2) can display a placeholder text (6) when it’s empty, or a token (1) if a value is selected.

Dropdown Trigger

The dropdown button (3) collapses and expands the dropdown list.

Option List

The option list (7) contains a list of selectable options (5). Clicking the label of for an entry closes the option list and creates a token for the selected option. To enable multi-selection, every entry also has a checkbox (4). Clicking a checkbox creates a token. The option list remains open.

Components of the multi-combo box
Components of the multi-combo box

Behavior and Interaction

Select a Value

There are three ways to select an item from the list:

  • Tick the checkbox (option list remains open).
  • Click or tap the label of a select option (option list is closed).
  • Use the keyboard (spacebar or Enter).

The user clicks or taps the input field to place the cursor in the field (1). Clicking the arrow displays the list (2). As the user types into the input field, the list is filtered accordingly (3). The up and down arrows move the focus within the list (4), while the typed text remains in the input field. Selected options are automatically entered into the input field as tokens (5).

If the user selects items from the filtered option list (3) by clicking or tapping the checkbox or by pressing the spacebar of the keyboard, the text entered in input field remains. The option list stays open. If the user selects items by clicking or tapping the label or by pressing Enter, the entered text is cleared and the option list is closed.

Input Field

Any character in the input field acts as a filter for the option list. The input field only allows users to type text that matches the items in the list. If the user tries to enter character combinations that are not in the option list, visual feedback is provided to indicate that the combination of characters is invalid, while the input field suppresses the characters entered.

Behavior - Sizes M and L
Behavior - Sizes M and L

Choose from Option List

The option list displays all the available items that the user can choose from. Clicking the arrow opens the option list below the field. If there is not enough space to display the dropdown list below the field, it is displayed above the field instead.

Reviewing Tokens

If tokens have been selected, and the multi-combo box is not in focus, the input field displays as many tokens as possible in the available space. If more tokens have been selected, an [n] More label indicates the number of hidden tokens. The tokens in the input field appear in the order in which they were selected.

Clicking or tapping the [n] More label opens a popover below the input field, in which all selected items are shown. The user can deselect an item by clicking or tapping its checkbox or label.

Multi-combo box - n More
Multi-combo box - n More

Filtering the Option List

When the user starts typing in the input field, the option list is filtered. Only items that match the characters entered are shown in the dropdown list. The default filtering method is “starts with per term”, which matches the beginning of each word in an item’s text.

In addition, application developers can set a custom filtering method “starts with” or “contains” (method: setFilterFunction). The “starts with” approach filters only for items where the beginning of the label matches the query entered. The “Contains” approach searches the full label for a match.

As a visual hint for the user, the matched characters are highlighted in the option list items. The highlighting works on the basis of “starts with per term”, regardless of the filtering method.

If the filtered option list contains items that start with the characters entered by the user, the first matching, unselected item is auto-completed in the input field.

Multi-combo box - Default filtering and auto-complete
Multi-combo box - Default filtering and auto-complete

Behavior for Mobile Devices

The following sections describe how the multi-combo box interacts on mobile devices.

Tapping the Arrow

Tapping the arrow opens the option list in a full screen dialog (1) with a title displayed in the header (2). The Close button (3) closes the dialog and cancels any selection changes in the option list. Clicking the label of an entry (4) closes the option list and creates a token of the selected option. By selecting a checkbox (5), the option list remains open and allows multi-selection. The OK button (6) takes over the selection and closes the dialog.

Left: Filter bar with multi-combo box; Right: Full screen multi-combo box selection
Left: Filter bar with multi-combo box; Right: Full screen multi-combo box selection
Developer Hint

The title of the full-screen dialog could be customized by adding a label as ariaLabelledBy to the multi-combo box. If no label is associated with the multi-combo box, the default title “Select” is set.

As the user types into the input field (7), the list is filtered using the default “starts with per term” approach. Pressing the button next to the input field (8) toggles the view between all options and the selected options only.

Left: Option list, filtered by user input; Right: Selected options from the list
Left: Option list, filtered by user input; Right: Selected options from the list

Input Field on Collapsed List

If items have already been selected, the input field remains functional and the tokens remain visible (1). Tapping the Remove icon   in a token removes it (2). When the user taps on the input field, the list opens in full screen (3). Tapping the input field sets the focus on it (4) and the mobile device keyboard opens (5). When the user starts typing, the list is filtered (6) using the “starts with per term” approach. The input field only lets the user type characters that match the items in the list.

Left: Multi-combo box with token in the input field; Right: List for selection filtered by a character
Left: Multi-combo box with token in the input field; Right: List for selection filtered by a character

Multiple Selected Items

Not all the selected tokens can be displayed at the same time because the space is limited to the size of the input field (6). Swiping to the side scrolls horizontally to reveal a cropped token (7).

Swiping to display tokens
Swiping to display tokens

Copying and Pasting Data from a Spreadsheet or Text File

The control for the multi-combo box can handle paste actions containing, for example, multiple items that have been selected in a column of a spreadsheet or text file. The user simply selects an entire column in the spreadsheet and copies it. When items are entered into the multi-combo box, the user just pastes them from the clipboard and each item is then represented as a token. Only items that are part of the list are displayed as tokens.

Information
For information on how to manage leading and trailing whitespace (blanks) when copying and pasting text into input controls, please see removing leading and trailing whitespace.

Styles

The following images show how the states of the multi-combo box are styled.

Unselected
Unselected
Unselected with predefined placeholder
Unselected with predefined placeholder
Unselected on hover
Unselected on hover
In focus
In focus
Expanded
Expanded
Hover highlighting in list
Hover highlighting in list
Expanded selection
Expanded selection
Expanded multi-selection
Expanded multi-selection
Selected items shown as tokens
Selected items shown as tokens
Warning
Warning
Error
Error

Guidelines

Label

The multi-combo box control can be displayed with or without a label. If the field is attached to another field, you don’t need to define a second label. For more information about labels in SAP Fiori, see the label guidelines.

Placeholder

Don’t use the placeholder attribute as an alternative to a label. This is important because the placeholder text will be overwritten as soon as the form is filled out. Labels are necessary because they indicate the meaning of the form fields if the placeholders are no longer visible. Show a placeholder only if the user needs a hint about what data to enter. Don’t repeat the content of the label. A hint could be a sample value or a brief description of the expected format. For more information about how to use the placeholder, see input field.

Option List

Keep the label of an entry in the select option list as short as possible because the list uses single lines only. Values that are too long may be truncated. If you need to indicate that none of the selection options are selected, show a blank input field. Define a default selection whenever possible. The multi-combo box cannot display columns. If you want to show two values in the option list, show the leading information first, followed by the secondary information in parentheses, such as Walldorf (Germany).

Sorting

The option list contains all available items that the user can choose from. Choose one of the following styles depending on how you want the content to be arranged:

  • Logical: Sort items into a meaningful order. Group related options together and show the most common options first followed by less common options.
Logical multi-combo box
Logical multi-combo box
  • Alphabetical: Sort currencies, names, and so on into alphabetical order. We recommend this for lists with more than eight items.
Alphabetical multi-combo box
Alphabetical multi-combo box
  • Numeric: Sort numeric values into a sequential order with the lowest number first.
Numeric multi-combo box
Numeric multi-combo box
  • Chronological: Sort time-related information into chronological order with the most recent first (if applicable).
Chronological multi-combo box
Chronological multi-combo box

Width

You can adjust the width of the option list to some extent. The multi-combo box control is usually used in forms, where the width is determined by the form element or container in which it is embedded. Therefore, we don’t recommend defining a fixed width, but rather working with proper layout containers such as the form, simple form, or responsive grid layout, and with the layout data property, where the width is defined. If you need to restrict the width to a defined value, set the width accordingly. Keep in mind that there’s no horizontal scrolling in the option list. Entries that are too long are truncated and users won’t be able to read them.

Information
If localized text isn’t an issue, such as with currency codes, use a smaller width.

Unit of Measurement

You can use the layout options of the form to add the unit of measurement (UoM) after the multi-combo box. Apps can use the label-field ratio to show the UoM after the field. However, you must make sure that the UoM is properly visualized and doesn’t wrap to the next row.

Developer Hint

For accessibility purposes, you can use “ariaDescribedBy” from the input control.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Message Popover

The message popover (sap.m.MessagePopover) control can handle multiple messages within SAP Fiori. In combination with a message manager, it automatically displays messages that occur after validation points.

With the message concept, we provide a way to centrally manage messages and show them to the user without additional work for the developer.

Message popover
Message popover

Usage

Use the message popover if:

  • You want to display multiple messages to the user.
  • You do not want to interrupt users while they are performing an action.

Responsiveness

Size S (Smartphone)

On smartphones, the message popover is automatically shown in full-screen mode.

Full screen message popover on a smartphone
Full screen message popover on a smartphone

Layout

Filtering

Initial state

Initially, the filter bar shows all the different types of messages found in the message popover.

General filter

Segmented buttons at the top of the message popover allow the user to filter the messages by type (error, warning, success and information), allowing the user to focus on the messages he or she is interested in.

Filter on top of message popover
Filter on top of message popover

List

Short description

The short message text provides a simple and helpful short message. It’s the same message as the one attached on the UI control where the issue occurred.

Subtitle

The subtitle provides the chance to give your message an identifier. We recommend that you add the label of the field where the error occurred. Based on the subtitle, the user should be able to identify the corresponding UI control on the UI (for example, the input field in a form).

Navigation to second page

In case there is a long text available, the message popover automatically provides a “chevron” on the right side so that the user is able to navigate to the second page of the message popover, where he or she can read the long text of the message.

Messaging button in full screen layout
Messaging button in full screen layout

Aggregating Messages

If the application development team wants to aggregate messages, they have the chance to fill the counter property of each list item. The app team will have to implement this aggregation on their own as the message popover just provides the counter property.

Messaging button in full screen layout
Messaging button in full screen layout

Detail Page of Message Popover

Segmented buttons at the top of the message popover allow the user to filter the messages by type (error, warning, success and information), allowing the user to focus on the messages he or she is interested in.

Messaging button in full screen layout
Messaging button in full screen layout

Messaging Button

If there are no messages to display, you do not need to show a messaging button. The toolbar then only includes the “normal” actions related to the object.

If there are messages to display, the messaging button must look like the example shown in the figure on the right.

Messaging button in toolbar
Messaging button in toolbar

How to Display the Message Popover

An overview of the different steps needed to display the message popover is provided below. For further information, see message handling.

Behavior and Interaction

When Should the Message Popover Open?

Activation actions

If the user clicks or taps on an activating action (such as Create, Save, or Submit), the message popover should open automatically to inform the user about the active errors on the UI. The message popover provides the user with an overview of the error messages.

Form field validation

If an error occurs (for example, after validating an input field), the message button appears with the number of messages inside. The message popover does not open automatically.

Detailed view
Detailed view

Navigation to the Second Page of the Message Popover

If the message provides a long text from the back-end system, the user is able to navigate to a second page within the message popover. There, the user will typically find more information and helpful message text.

Navigation to second page of the message popover
Navigation to second page of the message popover

Navigation to the Relevant Field

Add a navigation link to direct users to the field on the UI that triggered the message. This can be a field in the visible area, a field somewhere else on the same page, or a field on another tab or screen.

For more information about the navigation, see Navigating to the Corresponding Field on the UI in the Message Handling article.

Developer Hint
Set the navigation link with the activeTitlePress event. This allows users to click or tap on the message text in both the first and second page of the message popover.
Navigation to from the message text to a field on the UI
Navigation to from the message text to a field on the UI

Guidelines

Messaging Overview

No messages to display

If there are no messages to display, you do not need to include a message button in the toolbar.

Highlight the fields

First, highlight the specific field(s) if possible, and change their value state according to the type of message, such as error, warning, or success messages.

Message popover

In addition to the field(s) being highlighted, a button also appears in the toolbar, displaying an icon and the number of messages that have occurred. This number matches the number of fields that have been highlighted. Whenever multiple messages occur, they should be displayed in the message popover, which can be triggered via a button on the left side of the footer toolbar.

Display single messages in a message box

There may also be messages that have to interrupt the user. At present, we are only aware of technical issues such as network errors and connection issues.

Validation Points

No guidelines are currently available regarding data validation. Several cases are possible, which depend on the users, the performance, and the data that needs to be validated. These cases include:

  • After focusing out
  • After pressing a key
  • After clicking or tapping an action, such as Create, Save, or Submit

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Message Popover

The message popover (sap.m.MessagePopover) control can handle multiple messages within SAP Fiori. In combination with a message manager, it automatically displays messages that occur after validation points.

With the message concept, we now provide a way to centrally manage messages and show them to the user without additional work for the developer.

Message popover
Message popover

Usage

Use the message popover if:

  • You want to display multiple messages to the user.
  • You do not want to interrupt users while they are performing an action.

Responsiveness

Size S (Smartphone)

On smartphones, the message popover is automatically shown in full-screen mode.

Full screen message popover on a smartphone
Full screen message popover on a smartphone

Layout

Filtering

Initial state

Initially, the filter bar shows all the different types of messages found in the message popover.

General filter

Segmented buttons at the top of the message popover allow the user to filter the messages by type (error, warning, success and information), allowing the user to focus on the messages he or she is interested in.

Filter on top of message popover
Filter on top of message popover

List

Short description

The short message text provides a simple and helpful short message. It’s the same message as the one attached on the UI control where the issue occurred.

Subtitle

The subtitle provides the chance to give your message an identifier. We recommend that you add the label of the field where the error occurred. Based on the subtitle, the user should be able to identify the corresponding UI control on the UI (for example, the input field in a form).

Navigation to second page

In case there is a long text available, the message popover automatically provides a “chevron” on the right side so that the user is able to navigate to the second page of the message popover, where he or she can read the long text of the message.

Messaging button in full screen layout
Messaging button in full screen layout

Aggregating Messages

If the application development team wants to aggregate messages, they have the chance to fill the counter property of each list item. The app team will have to implement this aggregation on their own as the message popover just provides the counter property.

Messaging button in full screen layout
Messaging button in full screen layout

Detail Page of Message Popover

Segmented buttons at the top of the message popover allow the user to filter the messages by type (error, warning, success and information), allowing the user to focus on the messages he or she is interested in.

Messaging button in full screen layout
Messaging button in full screen layout

Messaging Button

If there are no messages to display, you do not need to show a messaging button. The toolbar then only includes the “normal” actions related to the object.

If there are messages to display, the messaging button must look like the example shown in the figure on the right.

Messaging button in toolbar
Messaging button in toolbar

How to Display the Message Popover

An overview of the different steps needed to display the message popover is provided below. For further information, see message handling.

Behavior and Interaction

When Should the Message Popover Open?

Activation actions

If the user clicks or taps on an activating action (such as Create, Save, or Submit), the message popover should open automatically to inform the user about the active errors on the UI. The message popover provides the user with an overview of the error messages.

Form field validation

If an error occurs (for example, after validating an input field), the message button appears with the number of messages inside. The message popover does not open automatically.

Detailed view
Detailed view

Navigation to the Second Page of the Message Popover

If the message provides a long text from the backend, the user is able to navigate to a second page within the message popover. There, the user will typically find more information and helpful message text.

Navigation to second page of the message popover
Navigation to second page of the message popover

Guidelines

Messaging Overview

No messages to display

If there are no messages to display, you do not need to include a message button in the toolbar.

Highlight the fields

First, highlight the specific field(s) if possible, and change their value state according to the type of message, such as error, warning, or success messages.

Message popover

In addition to the field(s) being highlighted, a button also appears in the toolbar, displaying an icon and the number of messages that have occurred. This number matches the number of fields that have been highlighted. Whenever multiple messages occur, they should be displayed in the message popover, which can be triggered via a button on the left side of the footer toolbar.

Display single messages in a message box

There may also be messages that have to interrupt the user. At present, we are only aware of technical issues such as network errors and connection issues.

Validation Points

No guidelines are currently available regarding data validation. Several cases are possible, which depend on the users, the performance, and the data that needs to be validated. These cases include:

  • After focusing out
  • After pressing a key
  • After clicking or tapping an action, such as Create, Save, or Submit

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Network Graph

The network graph displays a large amount of data by highlighting the relationships between individual records. Records are displayed as nodes, and connectors (lines) show the relationships between them. The vivid display of network nodes can highlight non-trivial data discrepancies that would have been previously overlooked.

Sample implementation of a network graph
Sample implementation of a network graph

Usage

Use the network graph if:

  • You need to display a large amount of data and contextual information. Use cases include material management and supply chains, logistics structures, and value chains.
  • You want to display complex nonlinear structures, trees, and generic charts (such as organizational charts).
  • You want to give the data a spatial context.

Do not use the network graph if:

  • You want to visualize a document flow. Use the Process Flow control instead.
  • You want to enable editing of displayed data. Note that the network graph is available in read-only display mode.
  • You need to embed the chart into smaller areas or use it as embedded analytics.

Responsiveness

The network graph is not a responsive control. Only the top bar and dialogs are fully responsive. The graph content, including all the groups, nodes and connectors, keeps the same proportions regardless of the screen size. The proportions are changed only with zoom.

Size S
Size S
Size M
Size M
Size L
Size L

Layout

The network graph is split into a header toolbar that contains all the controls, and the chart.

As an extension to this layout, the control can provide a separate column either on the right or left side of the graph. This column contains a chart map to enable users to navigate to a very large structure more easily. The map displays a smaller version of the graph and the corresponding active area. This column can also be extended by other SAP Fiori controls in order to provide users with enhanced application capabilities.

Schematic visualization of a network graph
Schematic visualization of a network graph
Extension panel on the right
Extension panel on the right
Extension panel on the left
Extension panel on the left

Types

The network graph comes with three different layout algorithms:

  • Generic unordered KLay layout
  • Column-based layout displayed as either vertical or horizontal swim lanes
  • Force layout

Each of the layouts can be visualized as a directed or undirected chart. A bi-directional mode is also supported.

Undirected: Data dependency (parent-child) or data flow is not implemented.

Directed: Data dependency is implemented, and different chart orientation can be set. By default, the network graph is oriented left-to-right. Other chart orientations include top-down, center-out, or right-to-left.

Generic unordered KLay
Generic unordered KLay
Column-based layout - Vertical
Column-based layout - Vertical
Column-based layout - Horizontal
Column-based layout - Horizontal
Force layout
Force layout

Components

By default, the network graph is split into the header toolbar area and the graph content. Within the graph content, groups, nodes, and connectors are displayed. All of these elements are interactive and display action menus or popups with additional information.

Header Toolbar

  • A – Title: Provides a short, meaningful summary of the chart contents.
  • B – Search Field: Standard search component with variant suggestions enabled by default.
  • C – Legend: Toggles the legend on/off.
  • D – Zoom In: Zoom in with both mouse wheel or by clicking the icon.
  • E – Current Zoom Level: Zoom level is expressed as a percentage of the original current chart size.
  • F – Zoom Out: Zoom out with both mouse wheel or clicking the icon.
  • G – Fit to Viewport: The network graph automatically applies a zoom level to fit the whole chart into your viewport.
  • I – Fullscreen: Toggles the full-screen view.

Chart Area

 

Node

A node represents a single record in the underlying dataset comprising multiple field values. You can use two different shapes to represent a node: a rounded rectangle or a circle.

You click a node to select it. A menu is then displayed, which enables you to expand or collapse the connecting chart structure, display a details dialog, or a links popup.

Connector

A connector represents the relationship between two records and can be displayed as a straight line or a line with arrows.

You click a connector or the surrounding area to call up the details dialog of that specific connector.

Group

A group is a chart element that represents a collection of nodes. A group is envisioned as a slightly larger box containing 1-n nodes. When a group is collapsed it behaves like a node.

Overview of groups
Overview of groups
Network graph toolbar
Network graph toolbar
Overview of nodes
Overview of nodes
Overview of connectors
Overview of connectors
Warning
Following features have not yet been integrated into this version and will come in the next release(s):

  • Icons for rounded rectangular nodes
  • Semantically colored values with different font-weight
  • New visuals for Group statuses
  • Starting Node visualization

Behavior and Interaction

Navigation and Zoom

A user can navigate around the entire network graph by holding down the left mouse button and dragging the mouse. By dragging the graph, the user changes the active area of the available graph map extension. Clicking or dragging the selected area in the graph map extension changes the focus area of the network graph.

To zoom in or out, the user can use the mouse wheel, pinch open or pinch close on the touch devices, or click the respective buttons on the top bar. Each of these actions changes the number label, located between the zoom in and zoom out icon buttons, and indicates the current zoom level.

Fit to Viewport automatically adjusts the zoom level to fit the entire network graph into the user’s viewport.

Component Interaction

Clicking a node displays a menu, which provides the users with the option to collapse the following chart structure, display the details dialog, or display the links popup.

Clicking a connector or the area surrounding it calls up the connector’s details dialog.

For group interactions, clicking the display details icon button nested in the group heading calls up the group’s details dialog (it also contains the list of the nodes included in the group).

Collapsed Structure Indication

In more complex structures, many structures may be hidden within the graph. To indicate collapsed structures, we use a visual indication to represent collapsed structures following the node and collapsed structures within a group.

Partially Expanded Indication

In a directed graph, Expand/Collapse applies only to the subtree directly connected to the selected node. Each node supports a three-state action button for expanding or collapsing:

  • Fully expanded
  • Partially expanded
  • Collapsed

When a user clicks the action button in a fully expanded state, the affected node’s subtree is collapsed, and the action button of that node is indicated as collapsed. All other nodes sharing parts of the subtree with this node and will then be indicated as partially expanded.

When a user clicks the action button in a partially expanded state, the affected node’s subtree is collapsed, and the action button of that node is indicated as collapsed. All other nodes affected by this action are indicated as partially expanded.

When a user clicks the action button in a collapsed state, the affected node’s subtree is expanded and the action button of that node is indicated as expanded.

Node interaction showing 'More' menu and 'Details' popup
Node interaction showing 'More' menu and 'Details' popup
Visual indication of collapsed structure following the node or group
Visual indication of collapsed structure following the node or group
Indication of collapsed, expanded, and partially expanded structures
Indication of collapsed, expanded, and partially expanded structures

Styles

Each node can be visualized with a circle or rounded rectangle shape. These two shapes can be combined inside one graph to provide users with deeper semantic meanings: for example, circular nodes represent customers, whereas rounded rectangles represent suppliers.

Semantic meanings can be assigned to line styles for connectors, and semantic colors can be assigned to both nodes and connectors.

Node Types

As mentioned above, there are two default node shapes: circle or rounded rectangle. In addition, these node shapes have different label and title (icon) positioning.

If needed, the application owner can also define the number of the allowed lines for a node title.

Connector Types

You can give connectors semantic meaning by assigning them semantic colors or different line types. You can also use both semantic colors and different line types to provide connectors with a deeper meaning.

Connector types and their semantics
Connector types and their semantics

Guidelines

In applications, embed the network graph only within components that use the whole canvas area, such as the tab container on the object page. Do not embed the network graph in smaller containers, such as panels, headers, tables, forms, and dialogs.

The network graph is not a substitute for a Process Flow. For more details, see the Usage section at the top of this article.

Keep the amount of information inside each node to a minimum. You can reveal more information via the details popover.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Bullet Chart

The bullet chart is used to compare primary and secondary (comparison) values.

Encoded Values

Primary Values

Frequently used for actual values, primary values can also be used for any type of value that you want to compare to the secondary/comparison value.

Secondary/Comparison Values

Frequently used for target and plan values, comparison values can also be used to compare the primary value with any other value. There are use cases where the comparison value is used to express a forecast, a competitor, or a specific year.

Additional Values

The bullet chart can also express an additional value so long as it’s directly related to the primary value.

Orientation

The bullet chart can be orientated horizontally or vertically. It’s best to orientate it vertically for time series.

Horizontal bullet chart
Horizontal bullet chart
Vertical bullet chart
Vertical bullet chart

Color Palette

If nothing is customised, the bullet chart will automatically use colors from the qualitative palette.

However, it is also possible to customize the colors (for example, if you want to differentiate between categories). For more information, check out the article on bullet chart colors.

SAP Fiori chart palettes
SAP Fiori chart palettes

Selection and Popover

Unlike other charts, when the user clicks on a bullet, all the associated values are displayed in the popover – primary value, comparison value along with additional value, projected value, and qualitative ranges (if used). The popover can also be customized to display other information and actions if you wish.

Popover
Popover

Legend

As with all other charts, when you customize the colors, the text of each legend item must also be manually maintained because the chart component cannot guess the meaning of each color.

For more information, see legend.

Legend
Legend

Negative Values

The horizontal and the vertical bullet charts can support negative values. Negative values can be applied to both the primary and the secondary (comparison) values.

Horizontal bullet chart with negative values
Horizontal bullet chart with negative values

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Stacked Bar Micro Chart

The stacked bar micro chart is designed to be embedded into a list, table, or object page header as a way to represent related values atop one another in order to visualize the single values as part of a whole. These values can be displayed in two different ways:

  • Percentage compared to 100%

    Use percentage values if your goal is to see each value in the composition as a percentage of the whole. In this case, the sum of the bars is always 100%.

Percentage values (without labels)
Percentage values (without labels)
  • Values compared to a maximum value

    Use this option in a list or table if your goal is to compare the sum of the values to a maximum value (for example, the maximum of all data shown in the list or table), whilst still displaying the relative value of each to its local maximum.

Absolute values (without labels)
Absolute values (without labels)

Please note: The stacked bar micro chart does not support negative values.

Usage

Use the stacked bar micro chart if:

  • You want to visualize a part-to-whole relationship embedded in a list or table, with all the features described above.
Chart embedded in a table - Percentage values (without labels)
Chart embedded in a table - Percentage values (without labels)
Chart embedded in a table - Absolute values (without labels)
Chart embedded in a table - Absolute values (without labels)
  • You want to visualize a part-to-whole relationship in an object page header, with all the features described above.

Also consider using a Harvey Ball micro chart as an alternative visualization for a part-to-whole relationship.

Chart embedded in an object header - Percentage values (with labels)
Chart embedded in an object header - Percentage values (with labels)
Chart embedded in an object header - Absolute values (with labels)
Chart embedded in an object header - Absolute values (with labels)

Do not use the stacked bar micro chart if:

  • You want to visualize a part-to-whole relationship on a SAP Fiori tile. The stacked bar micro chart is not designed to be embedded into an SAP Fiori tile and is therefore not supported. Consider using a Harvey Ball micro chart instead.


Responsiveness

The stacked bar micro chart is fully responsive. The size adjusts dynamically based on the dimensions of the parent container. In addition, there are also four fixed sizes – L, M, S and XS. Each fixed size is a snapshot of the fully responsive micro chart for specific dimensions.

Stacked bar micro chart - Size L
Stacked bar micro chart - Size L
Stacked bar micro chart - Size M
Stacked bar micro chart - Size M
Stacked bar micro chart - Size S
Stacked bar micro chart - Size S
Stacked bar micro chart - Size XS
Stacked bar micro chart - Size XS

You can use the smallest XS size to embed the stacked bar micro chart in the table cells of the grid tableanalytical table, or tree table (also in condensed mode). Left-align the stacked bar micro chart in the table cell.

Stacked bar micro chart in XS size in the grid table
Stacked bar micro chart in XS size in the grid table

Maximum and Minimum Sizes

The stacked bar micro chart can have the following dimensions:

Maximum width: 320 px
Minimum width: 64 px.

Maximum height: 94 px
Minimum height: 18 px.

If the label is too long to fit inside the bar, it is hidden. With the minimum chart height, the labels are not shown.

Components

Maximum Value

The chart is scaled relative to the maximum value. This means if a maximum value (maxValue) is set, then the width of the stacked chart represents the maximum value and each value within the chart is scaled relative to this maximum.

If the maximum value is not set, then the width of the chart represents 100% and each value is displayed as a relative percentage.

Precision

By setting a specific value for the precision, an application developer can influence rounding calculations by defining how many digits are displayed. By default this value is 1.

Display Value

By default, the control displays percentage values on the bars. However, application developers can also set a display property to show absolute values, or to show only bars (by entering a blank space).

Color

An application developer can set any color for the chart either by using names of semantic colors, or by using names from the qualitative palette (sapUiChartPaletteQualitativeHue1…11).

Please note: A legend is currently not available for the stacked bar micro chart. Since the use of multiple colors is not self-explanatory, we highly recommend using semantic colors and an explanatory title for the chart.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Micro Chart

Micro charts help you visualize a small number of data points in a small, non-interactive way. They can be embedded in tiles, SAP Smart Business drilldowns, and any SAPUI5 container (such as SAPUI5 tables).

Usage

Use the micro chart if:

  • You want to provide tracking at a glance.
  • You want to display changes in the data in an easy and condensed way.

Do not use the micro chart if:

  • You are looking for interactive analytics. Use the analytical card instead.
  • You want to display extensive data. Use the vizFrame chart instead.

Responsiveness

All micro charts are fully responsive. The size of the control adapts automatically to the size of the parent container and does not have a defined width or height.

Types

The following micro charts are currently available:



Choosing the Correct Chart Type

Charts are used to visually represent the relationships between numeric values. In order to choose the correct chart type, it’s important to define the type of relationship you want to illustrate.

Ranking

If you want to rank items from highest to lowest, or vice versa, we recommend using the comparison (bar) micro chart. For time-based categories, the column micro chart is more appropriate.

Micro charts for ranking
Micro charts for ranking

Comparison

To compare items that don’t have a particular order, you can use the comparison micro chart (offering category and value labels for each part) or the column micro chart.

Sometimes it can also be useful to show when a certain value reaches or exceeds a reference point (for example, when an actual value is compared to a target or forecast). In such cases, use a bullet micro chart. Keep in mind that the bullet micro chart shows data points for given points in time. Do not use it to show a time series.

To compare value totals within and across different categories, you can use the stacked bar micro chart.

Micro charts for comparison
Micro charts for comparison

Variation over Time

By convention, time is represented horizontally from left to right which means it’s best to use the horizontal axis to represent the time in chart visualizations.

To show changes in measures over time, you can use the line micro chart, the column micro chart, and the area micro chart. The exact chart type depends on the type of change you want to visualize.

If you want to emphasize the trend over time, use the area micro chart (which provides information for actual and target values, visualized and compared to threshold areas) or the line micro chart. If you want to emphasize the values themselves, use the column micro chart.

Micro charts for variation over time
Micro charts for variation over time

Part to Whole

You can use several chart types that depict the contribution of individual values to a whole.

The typical chart for visualizing part of a whole is the Harvey ball micro chart. This is most suitable if you want to display a single value compared to its total. To show a single percentage value, use the radial micro chart.

The stacked bar micro chart works best for visualizing different values as part of one whole; its bars are shown next to each other. The comparison micro chart is better if you want to compare parts to each other and display category labels and value labels associated with each part.

Micro charts for part to whole
Micro charts for part to whole

Deviation

These chart types visualize the difference or variance between two values (or two sets of values).

To show a time-related deviation between sets of values, use the area micro chart (for example, to show the difference between actual expenses and target expenses), or the line micro chart.

If you want to emphasize the deviating values, use the column micro chart (suitable for showing variances), or the comparison micro chart (offering category and value labels).

The bullet micro chart shows the difference between two values (actual and target) or three values (actual, target, and forecast) at a given point in time.

The delta micro chart helps to visualize a delta value (difference) between two main key figures, which can be time-related or category-based.

Micro charts for deviation
Micro charts for deviation

Distribution

To visualize how values are distributed within a set, we recommend using the column micro chart or the comparison micro chart (offering category and value labels). The stacked bar micro chart shows the distribution of values as part of a whole.

If you want to emphasize the shape of the distribution over time, use the line micro chart.

Micro charts for distribution
Micro charts for distribution

Behavior and Interaction

Clicking/Tapping (Optional)

The micro charts include one interaction: a click event that can be switched on or off.

“No data” Text

When data is missing, a white rectangular placeholder with the text “No data” is shown instead of the chart. The size of the placeholder depends on the size of the chart. No labels and tooltips are shown. The “No data” placeholder can be focused, but it’s not possible to attach a click event to it.

Area micro chart without data
Area micro chart without data
Comparison micro chart without data
Comparison micro chart without data
Line micro chart without data
Line micro chart without data
Bullet micro chart without data
Bullet micro chart without data
Delta micro chart without data
Delta micro chart without data
Radial micro chart without data
Radial micro chart without data
Column micro chart without data
Column micro chart without data
Harvey Ball micro chart without data
Harvey Ball micro chart without data
Stacked bar micro chart without data
Stacked bar micro chart without data

Guidelines

Truncation

Never truncate numeric labels, as this could be misleading for the user. If there is not enough space for the label, hide it.

“No data” Text

If the micro chart is placed in the cell of a table and there is no data for the chart, leave the cell blank (empty).

Micro charts without data in table cells
Micro charts without data in table cells

If the chart is used in the micro chart facet of the object page header and data is missing, make sure the footer of the facet is removed as well if it doesn’t add any value for the user.

Micro charts without data in the object page header
Micro charts without data in the object page header

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Comparison Micro Chart

The comparison micro chart is a bar chart. It compares entries in a top N list. Depending on the width of the parent container, it can have two different layouts: normal view and wide view. You can use either the semantic chart palette or the qualitative chart palette.

Comparison micro charts in normal view
Comparison micro charts in normal view
Comparison micro charts in wide view
Comparison micro charts in wide view

Usage

The comparison micro chart can be embedded into a table, list, tile, or header.

Responsiveness

The comparison micro chart is fully responsive. The size adjusts dynamically based on the dimensions of the parent container. In addition, there are also four fixed sizes – L, M, S and XS. Each fixed size is a snapshot of the fully responsive micro chart for specific dimensions.

Comparison micro chart with 3 bars - Size L
Comparison micro chart with 3 bars - Size L
Comparison micro chart with 3 bars - Size M
Comparison micro chart with 3 bars - Size M
Comparison micro chart with 3 bars - Size S
Comparison micro chart with 3 bars - Size S
Comparison micro chart with 3 bars - Size XS
Comparison micro chart with 3 bars - Size XS

You can use the smallest XS size to embed the comparison micro chart in the table cells of the grid tableanalytical table, or tree table (also in condensed mode). Left-align the comparison micro chart in the table cell.

Comparison micro chart with 3 bars in XS size in the grid table
Comparison micro chart with 3 bars in XS size in the grid table

Maximum and Minimum Sizes

The comparison micro chart can have a maximum width of 320 px. The minimum width is 64 px.

In normal view, the labels for the bars are positioned on top of each bar.

If the chart width exceeds 192 px, the chart goes into wide view and the labels for the bars are positioned on both sides of the bar.

If the chart width is 96 px or less, the labels are hidden.

Comparison micro chart with 3 bars and labels on both sides
Comparison micro chart with 3 bars and labels on both sides
Comparison micro chart with 3 bars and labels above
Comparison micro chart with 3 bars and labels above
Comparison micro chart with 3 bars without labels
Comparison micro chart with 3 bars without labels

Guidelines

  • Use a maximum of 12 bars in a single comparison micro chart.
  • We strongly recommended using at least 2 bars in a single chart to visualize a comparison.
  • When embedding comparison charts in tables, use the same number of bars for all the charts in a given table column. This makes the data comparable and avoids misleading the user. Use a suitable column header to describe the embedded charts.
Do
Use comparison charts with the same number of bars in a table column
Use comparison charts with the same number of bars in a table column
Don't
Do not use comparison charts with different numbers of bars in the same table column
Do not use comparison charts with different numbers of bars in the same table column

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Bullet Micro Chart

A bullet chart is a variation of a bar graph originally developed by Stephen Few and adapted by SAP Fiori in order to fulfill additional requirements. Much like the traditional thermometer charts and progress bars found in many dashboards, the bullet chart serves as a replacement for dashboard gauges and meters.

The bullet chart features a single, primary measure (for example, current year-to-date revenue). It compares that measure to one or more other measures to enrich its meaning (for example, compared to a target), and displays it in the context of qualitative ranges of performance, such as poor, satisfactory, and good.

Bullet micro chart without forecast
Bullet micro chart without forecast
Bullet micro chart with forecast
Bullet micro chart with forecast
Bullet micro chart with only delta value shown
Bullet micro chart with only delta value shown

The actual value is shown as a colored horizontal bar, the target value as a vertical line (marker), and the thresholds as indicators above and below the bar. The actual and target values can have a label.

Only semantic colors (good, critical, bad, neutral) can be used for the actual value.

The forecast is shown as a bar with a lighter tint of the same color as the actual value in the background.

Based on the data points you want to show, choose one of the following visualizations:

  • Actual value vs. target value
  • Actual value vs. target value with forecast
  • The delta between the actual value and the target value. For this option, the delta is shown as a bar starting or ending at the target marker.

Usage

The bullet micro chart can be embedded into a tablelist, tile, and header.

Responsiveness

The bullet micro chart is fully responsive. The size adjusts dynamically based on the dimensions of the parent container. In addition, there are also four fixed sizes – L, M, S and XS. Each fixed size is a snapshot of the fully responsive micro chart for specific dimensions.

Bullet micro chart - Size L
Bullet micro chart - Size L
Bullet micro chart - Size M
Bullet micro chart - Size M
Bullet micro chart - Size S
Bullet micro chart - Size S
Bullet micro chart - Size XS
Bullet micro chart - Size XS

You can use the smallest XS size to embed the bullet micro chart in the table cells of the grid table, analytical table, or tree table (also in condensed mode). Left-align the bullet micro chart in the table cell.

Bullet micro chart in size XS in a grid table
Bullet micro chart in size XS in a grid table

Maximum and Minimum Sizes

The bullet micro chart can have the following dimensions:

Maximum width: 320 px
Minimum width: 64 px.

Maximum height: 94 px
Minimum height: 18 px.

If the chart height is less than 56 px, the labels are hidden.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Object Display Components

There are four types of object display components: object status, object identifier, object number, and object marker. Each one is connected to an object and displays a certain type of information (status, identifier, number, marker).

 Object Status

The object status is a short text that represents the semantic status of an object. It has a semantic color and an optional icon. Typically, the object status is used in the dynamic page header and as a status attribute of a line item in a table.

Object Identifier

The object identifier is a short text that represents the key identifier of an object.

You can find the object identifier in a table as an identifier of the line item.

Object Number

The object number is a short text that represents the numeric (key) attribute of an object and its unit. The number has a semantic color, and the unit inherits the same color from its number. The number can be emphasized (default setting) when it is used for the key attribute, and non-emphasized when it is used for any other numeric attribute of the item.

The object number is typically used to indicate the key attribute of an object in the dynamic page header, or as an attribute of a line item in a table.

Object Marker

The object marker indicates the technical status of an object. It is enabled for the dynamic page layout, snapping header, object page header, upload collection, and object list item.

The technical status can be represented as and icon, with an icon and text, or as text only, depending on the screen size. See the Guidelines section below to find out when to use each visibility option.

Currently, the following technical statuses can be visualized by the object marker:

  • Flag
  • Favorite
  • Editing Status (Draft, Locked, Unsaved Changes)
    The editing status is part of the draft handling concept.

Usage

Use the object status if:

  • You need to display the semantic status of an object: negative (property: error), critical (property: warning), positive (property: success), or neutral (property: none).

Use the object number if:

  • You want to display the key attribute of an object. In this case, keep the default emphasized setting (property: emphasized).
  • You need to display one or more numeric attributes of an object that, for example, you want to compare (property: emphasized set to “false”).

Use the object identifier if:

  • You want to indicate the key identifier of the object.

Use the object marker if:

  • You want to display the technical state of an object (locked, draft, unsaved changes, favorite, flagged). If you want to display the status of the object in the business lifecycle, consider using the object status display component instead.
  • You need to show that the current object instance is locked by another user.

Do not use an object display components if:

  • You want to display system messages.
  • They are for decoration purposes only.

Responsiveness

  • The object status wraps if it is longer than the available screen width.
  • The object identifier text wraps if the size of the screen becomes too small to display the entire text on one line.
  • The object number does not wrap or truncate. For large numbers, you need to consider using the appropriate formatting.
  • The object marker does not wrap or truncate. It comes with different display options. Depending on the screen size and the selected visibility option, the object marker behaves as follows:
    • Size L/M:
      • If the visibility is set to IconAndText, both are displayed.
      • If the visibility is set to IconOnly, only the icon is displayed.
      • If the visibility is set to Text, only the text is displayed.
    • Size S:
      • If the visibility is set to IconAndText, only the icon is displayed.
      • If the visibility is set to Icon, only the icon is displayed.
      • If the visibility is set to Text, only the text is displayed.

For more information about the responsive behavior of text in general, see Wrapping and Truncating Text.

Components

Object Status

The object status consists of the following:

  • A semantically colored text indicating the severity (property: text).
  • An optional icon (property: icon).
  • An optional link (property: active). If the object status is used as a link, a hover effect is shown on non-touch devices.
    If the object status is shown using a combination of icon and text, there is no hover effect for the icon.

We recommend using the semantically colored text-only option. For more information about the meaning of the colors, see How to Use Semantic Colors.

Text-only object status
Text-only object status
Object status with icon, text, and link in hover state
Object status with icon, text, and link in hover state

Object Identifier

The object identifier has the following properties:

  • A title text (property: title)
Object identifier with title only
Object identifier with title only
  • An optional additional descriptive text (property: text)
Object identifier with title and subtitle
Object identifier with title and subtitle
  • The title can be set to active. In this case, it looks like a link and can fire an event (property: titleActive).
Actionable object identifier
Actionable object identifier
  • Both texts wrap if the space available is insufficient for them to each fit on one line.
Object identifier with wrapping text
Object identifier with wrapping text

Object Number

The object number consists of the following:

  • A colored text (property: number), which can be set to non-emphasized when used in the content area (property: emphasized).
  • Semantics to indicate the status: negative (property: error), critical (property: warning), positive (property: success), and neutral (property: none). For more information about the meaning of the colors, see How to Use Semantic Colors.
  • An optional unit (property: unit).
Emphasized object numbers
Emphasized object numbers
Object numbers
Object numbers

Object Marker

The object marker comes with the following characteristics:

  • Icon only (visibility: IconOnly)
  • Text only (visibility: TextOnly)
  • Icon and text (visibility: IconAndText)
  • Interactive
  • Non-interactive

The object marker is able to fire an an event when it is pressed (interactive). If the control is interactive and displayed as an icon with text, the icon and text are one click area.

Draft
Draft
Unsaved changes
Unsaved changes
Locked
Locked
Favorite
Favorite
Flagged
Flagged

Guidelines

General

The object status and object number can make use of semantic colors. Check out when and how to use the semantic colors.

Object Status

General

  • Use semantic text only, and avoid using it with an icon.
  • Use the following semantics to indicate the status/severity: negative (property: error), critical (property: warning), positive (property: success), and neutral (property: none).
Positive object status
Positive object status
  • Provide a link for the object status if the user needs additional information about the status (for example, using a popover).
Critical object status during hover state
Critical object status during hover state
  • Only use icons if they are unambiguous and easily understood (such as a padlock for locked items). If you feel that your icon needs a descriptive text to be understood, use text only.
Widely used icon for warning
Widely used icon for warning

Tables

Always left-align the object status in a table.
Exception (responsive table only): If status information is displayed as secondary information in a column, the status should follow the alignment of the primary information.

Apply the following rules for sorting tables by status:

  • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
  • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
  • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
  • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first

Object Identifier

  • The object identifier should be easily readable (preferably the display text and not the ID). If the ID is necessary to distinguish between items that use the same title, it should appear in brackets, such as Product ABC (1234567). The decision to include the ID in the text property can also depend on how long you expect the text to be.
  • The object identifier can also be shown as a link. In this case, the event opens the quick view of the object.

Object Number

  • If the object number is the key attribute of the object inside the content area, emphasize the number when it is used as a line item status in a table.
  • The object number can also be used to visualize other semantic numeric attributes. In this case, they are not emphasized unless they are the key attribute, such as a sum.
Object number used as a semantic attribute (weight) and as a key attribute (price)
Object number used as a semantic attribute (weight) and as a key attribute (price)

Object Marker

An object can have multiple technical statuses at the same time. However, because the editing statuses are mutually exclusive, users will see a maximum of 3 technical statuses for an object: Flag, Favorite, and one Editing Status. The app developer is responsible for the technical statuses.

Every technical status has a default visualization that can be changed by the app developer depending on the usage context. Also see How to Display the Editing Status in the Draft Handling article.

Flag and Favorite are usually displayed as icons on all screen sizes. For more information, see Flag and Favorite.

The default behavior for the editing status is as follows: 

Size L/M:

  • Locked and Unsaved Changes are displayed as icon and text, while Draft is displayed as text.
  • Flag and Favorite are displayed as icons.

Size S:

  • Locked and Unsaved Changes are displayed as icons, while Draft is displayed as text.
  • Flag and Favorite are displayed as icons.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Text

The text control is used to display text. It generally contains the text that developers want apps to display (property: text).

Text used within a form
Text used within a form

Usage

Use the text control if you want to display text inside a form, table, or any other content area. Do not use the text control if you need a label, or vice versa.

Responsiveness

The text control is fully adaptive to all screen sizes. You can also set a specific width and overwrite the default value. The resizing behavior depends on the settings that the apps use for the text.

Properties

You can define whether the text should wrap or directly truncate (property: wrapping).

You can also define how often the text should wrap before it truncates (property: maxLines).

For more information about the responsive behavior of text, see Wrapping and Truncating Text.

Note: The truncation indicator for multiple lines depends on the browser line clamping support. For browsers that support it, this will be shown as ellipsis (…), whereas in other browsers, the overflowing text will just be cut off.

Text – Maximum line examples
Text – Maximum line examples

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

  • Text (SAPUI5 samples)
  • Text (SAPUI5 API reference)

Link

A link (also known as hyperlink) is a clickable text element. The link control is used for navigation, but can also trigger an event. Links are visualized to stand out from standard, non-clickable text.

Usage

Use a link if:

  • The control you are using does not support other navigation options.
  • You want to reference an object (for example, from a form or table).
    Note: Use the quick view control to show the object details (sap.m.QuickView).

Do not use a link if:

  • The link text is the key identifier of an object. In this case, use an actionable object identifier instead.
  • You could use a button to trigger the action instead. If you want the button to look like a link, you can use a transparent button.

Responsiveness

A link can react to insufficient room in two different ways:

  • By default, the text is truncated to fit the available screen real estate.
  • If you enable wrapping, the link uses more lines instead of truncating the text (property: wrapping).

For more information and guidelines on the responsive behavior of text, see Wrapping and Truncating Text.

Link – Wrapping and truncation
Link – Wrapping and truncation
Link – Wrapping and truncation (hover)
Link – Wrapping and truncation (hover)

Behavior and Interaction

Triggering an Event

The purpose of a link is to trigger navigation or an event. The action is triggered when the user clicks or taps the link. For navigation links, you can specify a target to define where the linked content should open (property: target).

Hovering

When the mouse pointer is positioned over a link, the user gets additional visual feedback (underlining) to emphasize that the text is a clickable link.

Hovering over the link with the mouse
Hovering over the link with the mouse

Disabled State

A link can have a disabled state to indicate that it is currently not clickable. Only disable a link if the user has other options for accessing the function behind the deactivated link.

Disabled links
Disabled links

Styles

Besides the standard link visualization, there are two more styles: subtle and emphasized.

Subtle

You can use subtle links to distinguish between important and less important (subtle) links (property: subtle). This allows you to improve the visual hierarchy in large data lists.

Do not use subtle links for any other use cases.

Emphasized

If the standard link visualization is not sufficient to attract the user’s attention, you can highlight the link (property: emphasized).

Links shown in different styles
Links shown in different styles
Links shown in different styles when hovering
Links shown in different styles when hovering

Guidelines

Use a meaningful link text that indicates what will happen when the user clicks the link (for example, Open Sales Order). Avoid texts such as Click Here or Link, as these do not meet accessibility standards.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Label

A label is the name or title of a control or group of related controls.

Label
Label "Name" in a form

Usage

Use the label control if:

  • You need a label for a control. We recommend that you always use labels for form controls.

Do not use the label control if:

  • You want to insert a heading in the column header of a table.
  • You want to use it as an alternative for the text control. Do not use the label control to display the data (for example, in display-only forms).

Types

There are two types of labels:

  • Required
  • Optional

To indicate that a field is required, set the required property to true. An asterisk is then added automatically in front of the label.

Required label in an editable environment (horizontal layout)
Required label in an editable environment (horizontal layout)
Result of a required label in a display-only environment
Result of a required label in a display-only environment
Optional label in an editable environment (vertical layout)
Optional label in an editable environment (vertical layout)
Result of an optional label in a display-only environment
Result of an optional label in a display-only environment

Styles

For better differentiation of labels and values, labels are displayed differently in a display-only environment than in an editable environment.

Wrapping

Automatic wrap only applies to labels within forms to avoid truncation.

Do not use wrapping to enable long labels. Instead, keep your labels short: a label is not a help text. It must be meaningful, succinct, short, and descriptive. For more information about the responsive behavior of text, see Wrapping and Truncating Text.

Developer Hint

The boolean wrapping property for the sap.m.Label control determines whether or not the text wraps .
Note: Only use this property in forms.

Wrapping label
Wrapping label

Guidelines

  • Always use a label for form controls.
  • Always set the vertical alignment for labels that display outside a form and flex box (property: VAlign). You can set the vertical alignment in tables and object page header facets, for example.
  • Use title case for labels.
  • Do not use a placeholder (input prompt) instead of a label.
  • Do not use bold labels.
  • A label is not a help text: it must be meaningful, succinct, short, and descriptive.

Exceptions

The layout can sometimes be simplified by using a placeholder instead of the label control. This exception can be applied in the following cases:

  • When the form pattern is easily understood, such as on a login screen. Since this screen consists of only two input controls (User Name and Password), the labels do not have to be used.
  • When the form is extremely small and has fewer than three input fields. This can be the case for messages or small feedback forms.
  • In search fields. For more information, see Search.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

  • Label (SAPUI5 samples)
  • Label (SAPUI5 API reference)

Calculation Builder

The calculation builder can be used to create complex expressions that combine numeric constants and variables with arithmetic and logical operators. The expressions can be entered using a visual editor or a text editor with three available layout options.

Usage

Use the calculation builder if:

  • You need to create or edit complex arithmetic expressions.
  • You need to define or modify business KPIs.
  • You need to keep the dependencies of the underlying calculations and to be able to expand them.

Responsiveness

The calculation builder is fully responsive, and uses 100% of the width provided by the container in which it is embedded. For size S, it is mandatory to use 100% of the page width.

Depending on the available width, the calculation content is broken into separate lines in order to keep the native vertical scrolling for the whole page.

Calculation Builder - Size M
Calculation Builder - Size M
Calculation builder - Size L
Calculation builder - Size L
Calculation builder - Size S
Calculation builder - Size S

Layout

The calculation builder provides three different types of layout:

  • By default, the header toolbar and both the visual and textual editors are displayed. The header toolbar includes a toggle button for hiding or displaying the textual editor.
  • Only the header toolbar and the textual editor are displayed, making the calculation builder a text-only control.
  • The header toolbar and visual editor are displayed. The header toolbar includes buttons for arithmetic and logical operators, as well as variables. The toolbar buttons show the user which operations and variables are supported.
Header toolbar + visual editor + textual editor (default)
Header toolbar + visual editor + textual editor (default)
Header toolbar + textual editor only
Header toolbar + textual editor only
Header toolbar (with operators and variables) + visual editor
Header toolbar (with operators and variables) + visual editor

Layout Examples

The following examples show how the different layout types appear on the UI.

Default layout
Default layout
Header toolbar with expression operators and textual editor
Header toolbar with expression operators and textual editor
Header toolbar with textual editor only
Header toolbar with textual editor only

Components

The calculation builder can include thee components:

  • A header toolbar
  • A visual editor
  • A textual editor

Header Toolbar

A – Title: Provides a short and meaningful summary of the expression.

B – Textual Editor Toggle: Enables the user to hide the Expression Output section and work with the visual editor only

C – Expand All Variables: Allows the user to expand all the variables included in the expression and see all the underlying calculations used to compose the variable.

D – Full Screen: Toggles the full screen view.

Visual Editor

A – Functions: Functions require brackets. The initial bracket is automatically inserted after the function name. Only a limited subset of functions is supported by default. However, you can define any custom function you need using the API.

B – Variables: A custom set of available KPIs, such as revenue, assets, or expenses. KPIs are predefined by each application.

C – Constants: Enables user to type the values directly as standalone constants or as part of a function.

D – Operators: Arithmetic, logical, and comparison operators are available.

E – New Element: The default button of each expression triggers a dialog to add a new function, variable, operator, or constant.

Textual Editor

The textual editor contains a plain text representation of the expression entered in the visual editor.

If the user copies an arithmetic expression from an external application and pastes it to the textual editor, the expression displayed in the visual editor will be updated automatically. The same applies the other way round: if the user enters an expression using the visual editor, the textual editor gets updated, which can be used to copy the expression to an external application.

Header toolbar
Header toolbar
Visual editor
Visual editor
Textual editor
Textual editor

Behavior and Interaction

Inserting New Calculation Elements

The user has two options for adding an operator, constant, variable, or function to an expression:

  • By clicking the New Element button
  • By typing it directly into the textual editor field, which makes it appear in the visual editor as well.

The New Element button triggers a dialog with the selection of all available calculation elements.

Developer Hint
You can customize the calculation elements available to your users, add custom functions, load a specific list of variables, or disable any of the default calculation elements.
Selecting a constant
Selecting a constant
'New Element' dialog
'New Element' dialog
Selecting a variable
Selecting a variable
Selecting a function
Selecting a function
Selecting an operator
Selecting an operator

Expanding Variables

There are two ways a user can expand a variable to see the underlying structure of the variable.

  • Expand an individual variable by clicking the Expand Variable button.
  • Expand all variables by clicking the Expand All Variables button in the header toolbar.

In both cases, a confirmation message is displayed warning the user that this action is irreversible and variables cannot be collapsed back.

When a variable is expanded, the user can also remove the dependency on the original variable, if needed.

Warning
Expanding a variable is currently an irreversible action, and the dependency on the original variable can only be restored if you insert the original variable again as a new calculation element.
Selecting a variable to expand
Selecting a variable to expand
Confirming the variable expansion
Confirming the variable expansion

Guidelines

When the default layout is used, displaying both the visual and textual editors, we advise against adding the editor buttons for operators, constants, functions, and variables to the header toolbar.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Table Toolbar

The table toolbar always appears above the table and has a transparent background. The control is used for key actions that impact the entire table.

Usage

Use the table toolbar if:

  • There are multiple objects on your page and you need to edit only the table.
  • You want to show actions as close to their corresponding controls as possible.
  • You need a title for your table.

Do not use the table toolbar if:

  • You are using single selection and only one or two actions. In this case, place the actions on each line.

Responsiveness

To enable responsiveness, use the OverflowToolbar control. For more information, please refer to the corresponding section in the toolbar overview article.

Components

All of the components are optional. The table toolbar can contain the following actions:

  • App-specific actions
  • Generic actions

The following actions count as generic:

  • Title
  • Variant management
  • Switch
  • Search
  • Edit
  • View switch
  • Create (for new items)
  • Add (for existing items)
  • Sort, Filter, and Group (view settings)
  • Personalize
  • Export to spreadsheet
  • Print
  • Overflow
Example of possible components
Example of possible components

Behavior and Interaction

App-Specific Actions

If needed, the app team can define their own actions for the app. In this case, the text buttons should contain a short, unambiguous text that explains what action the button performs. A button text is usually a single-word verb (for example, Share). Note that translated UIs may increase the length of the text string.

Only use icon buttons if you are sure that the user will be able to interpret the meaning of the icon easily and without the aid of a tooltip.  Use standard and easily recognizable icons, such as a paper clip for an attachment.

Table toolbar with app-specific icon buttons
Table toolbar with app-specific icon buttons

Title (Generic)

A title provides a short, meaningful summary of the content, mostly by using a single word. The title bar is a toolbar property that supports consistently-sized text and titles with the same height in cozy and compact form factors.

Consider the following when using a title:

  • Use the sap.m.Title control.
  • The toolbar height must be set to 3 rem.
  • The title must have the label class sapMH4Fontsize.

Use a table title if you need the table toolbar, and if the title of the table is not indicated in the surrounding area. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a table title, such as Items. Note that the title becomes truncated if there is not enough space.

Title in the table toolbar
Title in the table toolbar

Variant Management (Generic)

Variants store settings that have been defined, for example, for layout, column visibility, sorting, and grouping. The variant management control enables the user to load, save, and change variants.

In the context of tables, the variant management control  is used to save, manage, and load table settings which include layout, column visibility, sorting, and grouping.

For this, the variant management control can be used independently of the filter settings.

Always place this control in the table toolbar next to the title.

If you place the variant management control inside a toolbar, you need to apply the following styles:

  • The toolbar height must be set to 3 rem.
  • The title must have the class sapMH4Fontsize.

The examples below show where to place this control:

Variant in the table toolbar
Variant in the table toolbar

Title and Variant Management (Generic)

In exceptional cases, both the title and variant management have to be used. However, we do not recommend this because it results in a crowded toolbar and problems with responsiveness may occur. Variant management alone is generally sufficient.

The title and variant management are both left-aligned. The title is placed first, followed by a separator and the variant management.

Title with variant management
Title with variant management

Content Switch (Generic)

When apps need to switch between different content in a table, use a select control (also known as a dropdown) or a segmented button. The select control and the segmented button are displayed left-aligned in the table toolbar and allow the user to show different views.

These views could be very specific. For example, AllMine, and Others. However, you should ensure that there is no interference with the filters in the filter bar. Alternatively, the views might be made up of specific groupings or configurations, such as By X or By Y.

We strongly recommend that you use the segmented button and the select control as follows:

  • A limited set of views (2-3) can be represented by a segmented button (sap.m.SegmentedButton), which should collapse into a dropdown on a smartphone.
  • If the number of views can change or is larger than 3, they should be represented by a select (m.Select) control.

For more information about using multiple predefined views, see the list report floorplan (under Content Area: Multiple Views)

You can also include counters on your segmented buttons or your dropdown to indicate, for example, the number of products in each specific content view. For example, All Products (115), Hardware (60), Software (55).

Segmented button with a counter included
Segmented button with a counter included

If you use a content switch, you no longer need a title. In very rare use cases, both a title and a content switch must be visible. In this case, the title and the content view are left-aligned.

Segmented text button to switch content
Segmented text button to switch content
Select to switch content
Select to switch content

You can also use the icon tab bar as a filter. At the front, there can be an All tab (optional) stating the overall number and type of items, such as 14 Products.

If you use the icon tab bar as a filter, we strongly recommend that you show a counter on every tab. If you need a counter, use the icon tab bar instead of the content switch inside the table. Also use the icon tab bar if you need different actions for your different table views. Use the content switch instead of tabs if there are multiple table variants.

Search (Generic)

If a dataset is too large for users to find items by scanning through them, we recommend that you offer a search functionality. Do not place a search function in the table toolbar if there is a filter bar above.

If you want to provide a search for your table, place it on the right side of the toolbar. Note that this control cannot be moved into the overflow menu. We therefore recommend that you define a minimum width.

For more information, see search.

Search in the table toolbar
Search in the table toolbar

Edit (Generic)

Sometimes the user will need to edit a table. In this case, you have two options: You must decide whether the user needs to edit more than one element, or whether the main use case is to edit only one element.

Option 1: Editing Line Items

To allow the user to edit a line item details page, set sap.m.ListType to “detail” in the corresponding item (sap.m.ColumnListItem/sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive). This creates an Edit button at the end of the line. The user can click or tap the button to trigger the edit event. Use this event to switch the corresponding line item to edit mode.

Edit is a list item type and therefore cannot be used together with navigation or with the use of click events on the whole item (active).

Option 1: Editing an individual line
Option 1: Editing an individual line

Option 2: Editing the Whole Table

To edit a whole table, use the table toolbar. The edit function is a text button. Triggering this action results in the Edit button being replaced by Save and Cancel, and the user can then make any necessary changes in the table. All actions that control the UI of the table remain visible, and all other actions are hidden.

Table in view mode
Table in view mode
Table in edit mode
Table in edit mode

View Switch (Generic)

View switches are right-aligned in the toolbar and allow the user to switch between different chart types or table layouts. You must provide the view switch if the chart relies on subtle color differences or gradients of color. In these cases, users with visual impairments can switch to the table view.

Switches are optional and do not have to be available if there is no need to switch between different charts or tables.

The number of chart types and switches must be used with caution. Each app team must decide what kinds of chart types make sense to visualize the respective data to assist the user in the best possible way.

We do not recommend using more than three types of visualization. The sequence of chart type switches is not fixed; however, you must sort them in terms of their importance and frequency of usage.

The chart type currently in use is highlighted. For this purpose, use a segmented control with icons. For more information about the icons and the chart types they represent, see chart toolbar.

Create / Add (Generic)

The Create or Add actions can be presented by a generic icon button or a text that describes the action in more detail. Place the action as close to the content as possible.

If the Create or Add action is a main function, the action should never be moved into the overflow.

If the app uses more than two Create or Add actions, or if the meaning of the icon is not entirely clear, use text buttons.

Add as icon button
Add as icon button
Add as text button
Add as text button

Sort, Filter, and Group (Generic)

Sort, Filter, and Group can appear in any combination or as single actions. If you use more than one of these actions, we recommend keeping them in the following order: Sort, Filter, and Group.

When the user chooses one of these actions, the view settings dialog appears. This dialog can provide any combination of these three settings, including only one setting, such as Sort.

  • If sorting, filtering, and/or grouping is a common use case in your app, offer one, two, or all three of the corresponding features in one or more view settings dialogs. Do not provide these features if the table is expected to have only a small number of entries (up to 20 in most cases).
  • If filtering is a main use case, do not offer filtering in the view settings dialog; use the filter bar instead.

There are two ways to trigger the view settings dialog:

  1. The user clicks or taps a button on the table toolbar. Offer all relevant functionality (Sort, Filter, and/or Group) in this dialog.
  2. The user clicks or taps one of several buttons for each of these view settings. Each button opens a view settings dialog which contains only the corresponding page.

Use one of the two options listed above based on the following guidelines:

  • If sorting, filtering, and/or grouping are a secondary use case, use option 1.
  • If there are several additional actions and the table toolbar becomes overloaded with buttons, use option 1.
  • If sorting, filtering, and/or grouping are a primary use case, use option 2 to allow faster access to these settings.
  • If screen real estate is not an issue, use option 2.
  • If there is only one view setting (Sort, Filter, or Group), use option 2.

Always use only the view settings you really need. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case.

Using the view settings dialog allows you to define several Sort, Filter, and/or Group settings per column. Thus, a column with several data points can be sorted, filtered, and/or grouped independently by each data point.

Ensure a consistent user experience. When a user reopens the app, show the table with the same view settings that were last defined by this user.

Option 1: One trigger for all view settings (sort, filter, and group)
Option 1: One trigger for all view settings (sort, filter, and group)
Option 2: Multiple triggers for the different view settings (sort, filter, and group)
Option 2: Multiple triggers for the different view settings (sort, filter, and group)

Personalization (Generic)

Use the table personalization dialog for adding, removing, and rearranging columns. The user triggers the dialog by clicking a button on the table toolbar.

Offer personalization if you need more columns than those that fit on a tablet screen (which is usually five) to fulfill 80% of your main use cases. Before you do this, try to reduce the number of columns, for example, by using several lines per column or by using the pop-in.

Ensure a consistent user experience. When a user reopens the app, show the table with the same settings that were last defined by this user.

Table toolbar with personalization icon
Table toolbar with personalization icon

Export to Spreadsheet (Generic)

The Export to Spreadsheet action allows the user to export table rows and can be represented by a generic icon button. Place the action as close to the content as possible.

Example of a table toolbar with the 'Export to Spreadsheet' icon
Example of a table toolbar with the 'Export to Spreadsheet' icon

Print (Generic)

The action for printing table items can be represented by a generic Print icon ( ).

Example of table toolbar with Print icon
Example of table toolbar with Print icon

Overflow (Generic)

Please see the section on overflow in the Behavior and Interaction section of the toolbar overview article.

Styles

The table toolbar is always transparent and and has transparent-style buttons. Do not use the accept, reject, or emphasized button styles; these are reserved for key actions in the footer toolbar. For more information, see button.

Guidelines

Please see the Guidelines section in the toolbar overview article.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Variant Management

Variants store view settings, such as filter settings or control parameters.

The filter settings consist of filter parameters, selection fields, and the layout of filters. They are set within the filter bar.

Control parameters are the sort order, filter and group settings, column visibility, and the layout of a table or chart. They are set within the toolbar of the control.

The variant management control enables the user to load, save, change, and maintain variants.

Information
Note on terminology:

On the user interface, we now call variants “views”, which is better understood by end users. To describe the SAPUI5 controls, however, we still speak of “variants” and “variant management”.

Usage

Use the variant management control if:

  • The user needs to save and load different filter settings to find the relevant data.
  • The user needs to save and load different layouts (for example, a table) to display data in different views.
  • The user needs to save the settings for the whole page, including the filter settings and table layout.

Responsiveness

Size S (Smartphone)

On phones, the My Views dialog for selecting variants, the Manage Views dialog, and the Save View dialog open in full screen mode.

My Views
My Views
Manage Views
Manage Views
Save View
Save View

Size M (Tablet)

My Views
My Views
Manage Views
Manage Views
Save View
Save View

Size L (Desktop)

My Views
My Views
Manage Views
Manage Views
Save View
Save View

Components

Variant management come with several components:

  • A clickable title with an icon
  • The My Views dialog for selecting variants
  • The Manage Views dialog for setting view parameters and deleting views
  • The Save View dialog for creating a new view

Name of View

The view name is the entry point for opening the My ViewsManage Views, and Save View dialogs.

If the user has made changes to the user interface that affect the saved view, the view is marked with an asterisk (*) to indicate the unsaved changes. This happens when the user deletes or adds a filter to the filter bar, for example.

Selecting a view
Selecting a view

My Views Dialog

The My Views dialog contains all favorite views, including the default view, the pre-shipped standard views, and the views marked as favorites by the user. The default view and the pre-shipped standard views are marked as favorites automatically.

Default View

There can only be one default view, which the user can change in the Manage Views dialog. If the user sets a new default view, the last view remains as a favorite. The user can explicitly unfavorite the last view in the Manage Views dialog.

Pre-Shipped Standard Views

The standard view is the minimum set of filters delivered by SAP, and cannot be modified or deleted. It is flagged as a favorite and cannot be removed. There can be several pre-shipped standard views, depending on the use case.

Favorite Views

Users can mark views as favorites (or unfavorite them) in the Manage Views dialog. If more than 10 favorite views exist, a search option is displayed.

The views created by users themselves are favorited automatically, while views created by other users are unfavorited by default. This prevents the My Views popover from becoming overcrowded with public variants that are not relevant for the user.

The user can also mark public views as favourites.

Public Views

Public views are visible to all users who have access to the app. A view can be set to Public by individual users, key users, SAP (default delivery), or partners. All views that are set to Public are available within the Manage Views dialog.

A public view can be edited by the user who created it and by key users. All other users can only display the public view.

Actions in the My Views Dialog

Users can open the Manage Views dialog using the Manage button in the footer bar of the My Views dialog. From this dialog, users can Save changes to the current view, or choose Save As to create a new view, which opens the Save View dialog.

'My Views' dialog with a few views
'My Views' dialog with a few views
'My Views' dialog with more than 10 views and a search option
'My Views' dialog with more than 10 views and a search option

Manage Views Dialog

In the Manage Views dialog, users can make the following changes:

  • Mark a view as a favorite
  • Change the name of a self-created view
  • Set a view as the default
  • Apply the view automatically
  • View the Sharing and Created By information of each view
  • Delete a self-created view

In addition to the personal views users create for themselves, they can also see the pre-shipped and public views. A user can only modify his or her own views, and not public, pre-shipped, or third-party views created by other users. 
Exception: Key users can also change and delete views created by others.

'Manage Views' dialog
'Manage Views' dialog

Save View Dialog

The Save View dialog is for creating a new view. For each view, you can make the following settings:

  • View: Name of the new view (required field)
  • Set as Default: If checked, the new view is the new default view.
  • Public: If checked, the new view is available to everyone who has access to the app.
  • Apply Automatically: If checked, the view is applied immediately whenever it is selected. The user does not need to click the Go button in the filter bar.
    We do not recommend checking this option if the selection is likely to cause long loading times.
'Save View' dialog
'Save View' dialog

Layout

The variant management control is merged with the page title (or next to or merged with title of the respective control, such as a table).

Filter Bar (Page Title)

The variant management control is merged with the page title within the page header container, and saves the stored filter settings or both the filter and control settings.

Variant management within the filter bar, merged with the page title
Variant management within the filter bar, merged with the page title

Table

The variant management control can also store control settings like layout, table column visibility, sorting, or grouping independently of the filter settings.

It is either merged with the control title or placed next to it.

If you place the title or variant management control inside a toolbar, apply the following styles:

  • Set the toolbar height to 3 rem.
  • Use a transparent toolbar.
  • Use the title class “sapMH4Fontsize”.
Variant management within the table toolbar
Variant management within the table toolbar

If the table has a separate title, place the title first.

Variant management with table title
Variant management with table title

Behavior and Interaction

This control allows the user to select, create, update, and delete variants for filter settings and control parameters such as layout, table column visibility, sorting and grouping.

My Views dialog: Selecting a View

The page title displays the active variant. Clicking the title dropdown opens a popover that displays all available variants. The currently active variant is highlighted. To load another variant, the user simply selects one from the list.

Save

Save can only be applied to variants that the user is allowed to save. Otherwise, this button is disabled. Save overwrites the active variant.

Save As

Save As enables the user to save the current filter settings as a new view. The Save As function can also be used to duplicate existing variants for later modification.

Manage

Manage opens the Manage Views dialog that allows the user to update, delete or favorite/unfavorite existing variants.

Selecting a view
Selecting a view

Save View dialog

The Save View dialog is for creating new views. Providing a name for the new view is mandatory. Clicking or tapping OK saves the new view.

Save View
Save View

Manage Views dialog

In the Manage Views dialog, the user can rename, delete, and change properties of existing views.

Users can only modify or delete entries if they have the necessary permissions. By default, variants that a user has created can also be modified and deleted.

Manage Views
Manage Views

Save as Tile

The user can save the currently selected variant as a tile on the launchpad using the Save as Tile action in the Share menu.

In the Save as Tile dialog, the user can define the tile title and subtitle, a description, and the launchpad group in which the tile should appear.

Save as tile via 'Share' button
Save as tile via 'Share' button
'Save as Tile' dialog
'Save as Tile' dialog

Guidelines

Save as Tile

Use the name of a variant as the title of the application tile. Map this as a preset title that cannot be edited by the user.  In this case, whenever the variant is updated, the tile is updated accordingly.

Exception: If the variant cannot be referenced directly due to technical limitations, offer the standard tile creation option where filter parameters and settings are only saved within the URL.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

View Settings Dialog

The view settings dialog helps the user to sort, filter, or group data within a (master) list or a table. The dialog is triggered by icon buttons in the table toolbar.

Usage

Use the view settings dialog if:

  • You need to allow the user to sort line items in a manageable list or table (up to about 20 columns).
  • You need to offer custom filter settings in a manageable list or table (up to about 20 columns).
  • You need to allow the user to group line items in a manageable list or table (up to about 20 columns).

Do not use the view settings dialog if:

  • You have complex tables (more than about 20 columns).
  • You need to rearrange columns within your table. Use the table personalization dialog instead.
  • You need very specific sort, filter, or column sorting options within complex tables. Use the P13n dialog instead.

Button Placement

For sorting, filtering, and grouping, place the corresponding icon button for each function directly in the toolbar.

Do not place sort, filter, or group buttons in the footer toolbar if they refer to a table.

For detailed information about where to place the sort, filter, and group buttons, see Sort, Filter, Group (Generic) in the table toolbar article.

Sort, Group, and Filter a List

You can also offer the view setting features for a list.

Responsiveness

The popover dialog appears as a modal window on desktop and tablet screen sizes, but full screen on smartphones.

The view settings dialog is a composite control that consists of a modal dialog with a maximum of three tabs with lists of attributes. Each helps the user to either sort, filter, or group a table or list. If the use case requires only a sort feature, for example, you can hide the filter and group tabs.

The dialog is triggered by the icon button in the table header
The dialog is triggered by the icon button in the table header
View settings dialog - Size S
View settings dialog - Size S
View settings dialog - Size M
View settings dialog - Size M
View settings dialog - Size L
View settings dialog - Size L

Behavior and Interaction

The sort, filter, and group features can all be applied to a table simultaneously.

Sort

The first tab in the view settings dialog is the sort feature. The tab shows a standard sort icon with two arrows – one pointing up, and one pointing down (see image above).

The sort dialog shows two groups of sort settings. The first group offers general Ascending and Descending sort options. The second group offers attributes that fit the use case, such as Product, Supplier, Weight, or Price. The attributes can match the table columns, but because a table column can also contain several data points, such as “Name” and “Surname”, the attributes allow an attribute to be shown for each data point.

The user select attributes using the radio buttons. Clicking or tapping OK closes the dialog and shows the table items in the selected order.

Filter

The second tab in the View Settings dialog is the filter feature. The tab shows a filter, which is the standard filter icon. The filter tab can offer a single filter selection list, a multi-filter selection list, or a category list. The category list provides an overview, and allows the user to drill down to detailed filter selection lists.

The dialog for choosing a category from the filter tab drills down to the filter settings.
The dialog for choosing a category from the filter tab drills down to the filter settings.
The dialog after choosing a general filter category (here: Weight). You can refine the filter further by selecting subcategories.
The dialog after choosing a general filter category (here: Weight). You can refine the filter further by selecting subcategories.
A table view filtered by 'Weight'. The info bar shows the filter setting.
A table view filtered by 'Weight'. The info bar shows the filter setting.

Filter Selection List – Single Selection

The dialog offers one single-selection list with radio buttons to select a filter. This list is useful for offering a list of preconfigured filters for a specific use, such as “Products with numbers ‘starting between 100 and 200’ with status ‘in stock’ and color ‘green’”.

Filter Selection List – Multi-Selection

You can also offer a filter selection list as a multi-selection list. In this case, the user can choose, for example, all “green” and “red” products.

Selection of multiple filters
Selection of multiple filters

Category List

The filter dialog shows a single list of general filter categories depending on the use case, like Price or Height. The user chooses a category by clicking or tapping the list item, such as Price. As this is a simple drilldown, these categories do not offer radio buttons. The dialog shows a list of filter settings in the Price category. Optional filters here, such as Less than 100, depend on the use case. The user chooses a filter setting by selecting one of the radio buttons offered in this list. Clicking or tapping OK closes the dialog and shows the table items filtered by the selected attribute. The info bar shows which filter has been set.

Free-Form Apps

You can also customize your own filter UIs, for example, to support date picking.

Filter Values

Filters can correspond to single values as well as groups, such as “<100.00 EUR”.

Filter Reset

The refresh button on the filter tab resets all filter settings.

Removing Filters

Be sure to offer an entry such as None in a single-selection list. This enables users to remove a set filter.

Group

The third tab in the view settings dialog is the group feature. The tab shows an icon with lines in square brackets, which is the standard group icon.

The group dialog shows two groups of attributes. The first group offers a general Ascending or Descending order, which allows the user to select the order in which the defined groups appear. The second group offers attributes that fit the use case, such as Type or Supplier.

You can also offer an attribute like Price to group data in a table.

The user uses the radio buttons or selects checkboxes to choose attributes. Clicking or tapping OK closes the dialog and shows the table with items grouped below headers.

Dialog for choosing an attribute from the group tab
Dialog for choosing an attribute from the group tab
A table view grouped by supplier – Group headers divide the list
A table view grouped by supplier – Group headers divide the list

Naming Group Headers

Be sure to name the group headers as follows: Category Name: Value/Range. For example, Category: Accessories, or Supplier: Red Point Stores.

Guidelines

For opening the dialog from a table toolbar, use different buttons for each function (sort, filter, group). With each button, open the View Settings dialog with just the corresponding tab.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Step Input

The step input control allows the user to change the input values in predefined increments (steps).

Usage

Use the step input if:

  • The user needs to adjust amounts, quantities, or other values quickly.
  • The user needs to adjust values for a specific step (for example, in a shopping cart).

Do not use the step input if:

  • The user needs to enter a static number (for example, postal code, phone number, or ID). In this case, use the regular input field control instead.
  • You want to display a value that rarely needs to be adjusted and does not pertain to a particular step. In this case, use the regular input field control instead.
  • You want the user to enter dates and times. In this case, use the date pickerdate range selectiontime picker, or date/time picker instead.

Responsiveness

Size S and M (Smartphone and Tablet)

On smartphones and tablets, the step input is shown in cozy mode. When the focus is in the input field, the keyboard layout for numeric input is displayed.

Size L (Desktop)

On desktop devices, the step input is shown in compact mode.

For more information on the cozy and compact modes, see content density.

Step input - size S/M
Step input - size S/M
Step input - size L
Step input - size L

Components

The step input consists of an input field and buttons with icons to decrease or increase the value.

Step input areas
Step input areas

You can show a descriptive reference or unit of measurement after the field (property: description). Depending on your use case, you may need to adjust how the space is distributed between the input field and the descriptive text (property: fieldWidth).

Step input with description
Step input with description

Behavior and Interaction

Default Value

The step input always contains a value. When no value is set, the default value is generally 0. However, app developers can set a different default value (property: value).

If the minimum value is larger than 0, the generic value is the minimum value set by the app team.

Changing the Value

The user changes the value:

  • By pressing the increase/decrease buttons
  • By typing a number
  • With keyboard shortcuts (up/down, page up/down)
  • With the mouse scroll wheel

On desktop devices, clicking the input field places the cursor in the input field. On mobile devices, tapping the input field displays the numeric keyboard.

Clicking the buttons changes the value by a step and does not place the caret in the input field.

When the user clears the value and leaves the input field, the value in the field becomes 0 or the minimum if the minimum is larger than 0.

If the user enters an invalid value, the invalid value remains in the input field. An error state is displayed.

Increasing the Step

To allow the user to change values by a larger step with keyboard shortcuts, app developers can set a multiple of the step (property: largerStep). The default value is two times the set step.

If your use case requires more complex step increments (for example, if you want the step increment to be the closest number that is divisible by the defined step) you can use the stepMode property. For details, please refer to the API reference.

Maximum and Minimum Values

App developers can set a maximum and minimum value for the step input.

When the maximum/minimum values are reached, the Increase/Decrease button and up/down keyboard navigation are disabled.

Display Value

The step input control allows decimal values and can control the number of digits shown after the decimal point (property: displayValuePrecision). When the property is set to a specific value – from 0 (default) to 20 – the control restricts users accordingly as they type or paste a value. Trying to type more digits triggers an error state.

Step input at maximum value (max = 100)
Step input at maximum value (max = 100)
Step input at minimum value (min = -100)
Step input at minimum value (min = -100)

Styles

The step input has different styles for its four states: default, warning, error, and success.

Default state
Default state
Warning state with value state text
Warning state with value state text
Error state with value state text
Error state with value state text

Guidelines

Always provide a meaningful label for the step input.

Width

By default the width of the step input is set to 100% of the container. Avoid setting a fixed width, but rather embed the control in a proper layout such as a form, simple form, or grid layout, and use the layout data property where the width is defined by the 12-column approach to define the responsive behavior for sizes S, M, and L.

When used in forms, the width of the step input control comes from the label:field ratio of the form. The app development team should be able to restrict the width to a proper number of columns (12-grid responsive layout) so that the step input is not too wide.

Ensure an appropriate width for the range of values to be entered for all the sizes S, M, and L. Avoid a larger width than necessary.

Keep in mind the varying lengths of decimals. Limit the number of digits after the floating point if possible in your use case. For more information, have a look at the article on formatting numbers.

Properties

Value States

The step input control offers the four value states listed below. For the error and warning states, you can show an additional value state text when the focus is on the input field.

  • None (default): No value state message is shown
  • Warning
  • Error
  • Success: No value state message is shown

For more guidance on when to use which state, see message handling. For more information on showing value states in a form, see form field validation.

Default state
Default state
Warning state
Warning state
Error state
Error state

Editable and Enabled States

Editable

Property settings: editable = true, enabled = true

The step input control is enabled and editable by default. Set the control to editable to allow the user to enter a value.

Not Editable

Property settings: editable = false, enabled = true

Use this state, for example, to display data only.

Disabled

Property settings: editable = not relevant, enabled = false

Set the control to disabled in an edit scenario to indicate that the user cannot change the control, for example, due to missing access rights or previous conditions not having been fulfilled or selected.

Read-only state
Read-only state
Disabled state
Disabled state

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Token

Tokens are small items of information (similar to tags) that mainly serve to visualize previously selected items. The tokenizer is the container that handles the tokens. Tokens can be added, removed, selected, or deselected.

Token
Token

Usage

Use tokens only in the multi-combo boxmulti-input control, or value help dialog.

Components

The tokenizer is an invisible container that can display multiple tokens.

Tokens have the following properties:

  • They usually contain single text items.
  • They may also contain key-value pairs, such as John Miller (ID1234567).
  • They contain a Remove icon  , which is invisible if the token is in edit mode.
Tokens with a surrounding tokenizer
Tokens with a surrounding tokenizer

Behavior and Interaction

Interacting

Users can interact with tokens using a mouse, keyboard, and/or touch input. In size L (desktop) only, hovering with the mouse over the token produces a tooltip with the entire content of the token (on a maximum of two lines).

Selecting and Deselecting Tokens

Users can select tokens by clicking them, or by using the keyboard. The selected tokens are then indicated. Users can select multiple tokens separately by holding down the CTRL key and selecting the relevant tokens, for example, by clicking them.

The user can select a series of tokens by placing the cursor in an initial position (which can also be a token), holding down the SHIFT key, and clicking a new position. The tokens between these two cursor positions are then selected.

Adding Tokens

The user can add tokens to the multi-combo box and multi-input control. New tokens are added in the order in which they are entered.

Information
For information on how to manage leading and treading whitespace (blanks) when copying and pasting text into input controls, please see removing leading and trailing whitespace.

Removing Tokens

The user can instantly remove tokens via the keyboard, or by clicking the Remove  icon .

Styles

There are five different styles of tokens: regularon hover, selected, selected on hover and read-only. These styles correspond to the type of interaction being used.

Regular
Regular
On hover
On hover
Selected
Selected
Read only
Read only
Hover selected
Hover selected

Guidelines

  • The tokenizer can also be used as a tag container.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Message Strip

The message strip is a control that is used as an information bar. It contains information about an object or a status and can be embedded within the detail area of an object or page.

Usage

Use the message strip if:

  • You want to provide information within the detail area of an object.
  • You want to inform your user about a status of an object.
  • You want to warn your user about an issue.

Do not use the message strip if:

  • You want to display information within the object page header, within a control, in the master list, or above the page header.

Responsiveness

The message strip is fully responsive. Icons within the message strip are displayed to the left (custom icons) or right (Close action) of the message.  Text and links behave differently and wrap.

If you place the control within the detail area, it will always use 100% of the width and react to the responsiveness of the container.

Message strip on a smartphone (size S)
Message strip on a smartphone (size S)
Message strip on a desktop (size L)
Message strip on a desktop (size L)

Types

The following semantic types are available.

  • Information
  • Warning
  • Error
  • Success
Different semantic types and colors
Different semantic types and colors

Behavior and Interaction

Static behavior

The message strip acts as an information bar. If you want to display a status related to an object, keep the interaction static and do not show the Close button.

Static behavior used to display a status
Static behavior used to display a status

Interactive behavior

Clicking the Close button on the right side hides the message strip.

Interactive behavior with close function
Interactive behavior with close function

Properties

sap.m.MessageStrip is limited to the following properties:

  • Property:showIcon – Allows you to display an icon before the text
  • Property:customIcon – Allows you to display an icon from the icon library
  • Property:type – Changes the semantic color and the icon in front of the message strip
  • Property:text – Adds text to the control
  • Property:link – Adds a link
  • Property:showCloseButton – Adds a Close button

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Date/Time Picker

The date/time picker allows users to select date and time values in a combined input.

Usage

Use the date/time picker if:

  • You need a combined date and time input control.

Do not use the date time picker if:

  • You want to use either a date or a time value. In this case, use the date picker or the time picker instead.

Responsiveness

The date/time picker runs on all form factors and fully adapts to all devices.

The date/time picker opens in a popover for sizes M and L (tablet or desktop device)
The date/time picker opens in a popover for sizes M and L (tablet or desktop device)
The date/time picker opens in a dialog for size S (smartphone)
The date/time picker opens in a dialog for size S (smartphone)

Behavior and Interaction

Selecting Date and Time Values

Sizes M and L/XL

The date/time picker appears as a popover when the user clicks or taps a date (input field) on the calendar. The user can then select the desired date from the calendar, and the time from the rotating wheel. For the time, it’s possible to select hours, minutes, and even seconds.

When the user clicks or taps the OK button, the popover closes and the selected date and time appear in the input field. When the user selects Cancel, the action is aborted and the input field remains unchanged.

Date/time picker – Open
Date/time picker – Open
Date/time picker – Closed
Date/time picker – Closed

Size S and Mobile Size

On smaller devices, the user can choose the date and time value in arbitrary order by tapping the segmented button on top of the screen. Be aware that the popover is superimposed on the input field during the selection process for mobile/S sizes.

The user can select the desired date from the calendar, and the time from the rotating time wheel. For the time, it’s possible to select hours, minutes, and even seconds. Clicking a date in the calendar automatically takes the user to the time selection screen.

When the user selects OK, the popover closes and the selected date and time appear in the input field. When the user selects Cancel, the action is aborted and the input field remains unchanged.

Size S - Date/time picker opens with the 'Date' view
Size S - Date/time picker opens with the 'Date' view
Size S - Selecting a date opens the 'Time' view
Size S - Selecting a date opens the 'Time' view

Scrolling

Within the date/time input popover, each area can be scrolled individually by dragging and dropping the areas.
On large devices, the user can also use the standard scrolling mechanism.

Date/time input – Scrolling by swiping
Date/time input – Scrolling by swiping

Guidelines

Date Picker and Time Picker

In general, we recommend separating the date/time picker controls as the time picker supports the mask input function and the date picker allows the user to enter date in different formats. This makes it easier and more convenient for the user to enter the desired values. For additional guidelines and information on the individual controls, see the resources section below.

Default Values

Independently of the chosen control, set the default values of the date/time picker carefully to avoid unnecessary scrolling. It often makes sense to set the default for the time to the full or half hour, setting the minutes to 00 or 30. Sometimes, it may also make sense to use the current time and date.

Formatting Dates and Times

For guidelines and information on the SAPUI5 date formatters, see formatting dates.

For guidelines and information on the SAPUI5 time formatters, see formatting times.

Setting Steps

You can set intervals for the minutes and seconds on the slider (properties: minutesStep and/or secondsStep). For example, if you set the seconds step to “5”, the slider offers “00”, “05”, “10”, “15”, and so on.

Properties

AM and PM are locale-dependent. The locale can be set using the property localeId.

You can set the display format (property: displayFormat) to define the format in which the time input field and the time picker dropdown display the time.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Time Picker

The time picker allows the user to select a localized time. It can be used with touch, mouse, or keyboard input.

Usage

Use the time picker if:

  • You want the user to select a time.
  • You want the user to select a time range. In this case, one time picker can be used to set the starting time and a second one to set the end time.
  • You want the user to select a detailed duration, such as 1 minute and 30 seconds.

Do not use the time picker if:

  • You want the user to select a duration such as 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, or 2 hours. In this case, use the select control instead.

Responsiveness

The time picker comes with a cozy mode and a compact mode. In the compact mode, the time input field and the button are smaller than in the cozy mode. In the compact mode, there are also arrows that the user can click or tap to set hours, minutes, and so on. For more information, see the article on content density.

On desktop (size L/XL) and tablet (size M) devices, the user can enter a time in the input field of the time picker, or set a time via the time picker dropdown which opens when the user clicks the time picker button.

For mobile (size S) devices, the tap area is the same as for a tablet, and the user can type a time in the time input field. Unlike on a tablet or desktop, the time picker dropdown does not open below the time input field, but rather in a subview.

Comparison of cozy mode (left) and compact mode (right)
Comparison of cozy mode (left) and compact mode (right)

Components

The time picker consists of a time input field and a time picker button. On desktop, tablet, and mobile devices, both elements have their own click area. Clicking the time picker button opens the time picker dropdown.

You can set a predefined time, which shows as the initial value in the time input field and the time picker dropdown. Users can overwrite the initial value manually at any time.

Time picker input
Time picker input

Time Input Field

The time input field allows the user to enter a time directly in the field, or select it using the time picker dropdown. The input is validated and feedback is given to the user.

The time input field can also contain a placeholder (input prompt).

Time Picker Button

When the user clicks or taps the time picker button, the time picker dropdown opens to allow the user to choose a time.

Time Picker Dropdown

In the time picker dropdown, the user can select a time by setting hours, minutes, seconds and AM/PM or a subset of these (with hours and minutes only).

Dropdown with hours and minutes
Dropdown with hours and minutes
Dropdown with hours, minutes, seconds, and AM/PM
Dropdown with hours, minutes, seconds, and AM/PM

Behaviour and Interaction

Selecting a Time (Desktop Device)

The user clicks the time picker button, which opens the time picker dropdown. In the time picker dropdown, the user can set the time either with the mouse or by using the keyboard arrows. The Page Up and Page Down keys can also be used to set the current selection to the lowest or highest value, and the Home and End keys can be used to go to the first or last element of the picker.

When the desired time has been selected, the user can confirm this selection by clicking the OK button. If the user wants to close the dropdown without changing the time to the selected time, this can be done by clicking the Cancel button or by clicking outside the dropdown.

Preventing Errors

The user can also select a time by clicking the time picker input field and typing the desired time in the field. You can prevent users from making incorrect entries by not allowing them to type in certain characters (see mask input). If the user enters a time that has the correct format but is invalid (such as 12:60:85), the time picker displays a validation error.

You can switch off the integrated mask input feature, but we strongly advice against doing so. Only deactivate the mask input if you need to make an exception for your use case (for example, if a variable length is required for a specific locale).

Time picker dropdown and input field
Time picker dropdown and input field

Selecting a Time (Tablet or Mobile Device)

On tablets and mobile devices, users can select the time by tapping the time picker button. The timer picker dropdown opens beneath the input field (a subview is opened on mobile devices). The user sets the hour by touching the hour element and then swiping up or down. To set the minutes, seconds, and AM/PM, the user also touches the corresponding element and swipes up or down to set the right value.

To confirm the selected time, the user taps the OK button. Taping the Cancel button cancels the selection. On tablets, the selection can also be cancelled by tapping outside the time picker dropdown.

Set the time by swiping up and down (tablet)
Set the time by swiping up and down (tablet)

Style

Disabled Time Picker

In the disabled state, the time picker input is grayed out and the button becomes invisible.
In the disabled state, the time picker input is grayed out and the button becomes invisible.

Validation Error

When an invalid time is typed in, the time picker's border turns red and an error message appears.
When an invalid time is typed in, the time picker's border turns red and an error message appears.

Guidelines

Time Formats

Only let the user select time in seconds if this information is really necessary.

If the user has to set a time that is timezone sensitive, always provide information about the timezone. For example, if you want the user to choose a time on a calendar for a meeting that might also involve people from other timezones, provide information about those timezones. Ideally, you should also display the local time in the other attendees’ timezones so that the user can choose a time that is convenient for everyone.

12-Hour System

In the 12-hour system, the date picker can contain selections for hours, minutes, seconds, and AM/PM.

24-Hour System

In the 24-hour system, the date picker can contain selections for hours, minutes, and seconds. AM/PM is not available in this mode.

 

For more information, see formatting time.

Properties

AM and PM are locale-dependent. Therefore, the locale can be set using the property “localeId”.

You can set the display format (property: displayFormat) to define the format in which the time input field and the time picker dropdown display the time. For more information about time formats, see the article on formatting dates.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Table Toolbar

The table toolbar always appears above the table and has a transparent background. The control is used for key actions that impact the entire table.

Usage

Use the table toolbar if:

  • There are multiple objects on your page and you need to edit only the table.
  • You want to show actions as close to their corresponding controls as possible.
  • You need a title for your table.

Do not use the table toolbar if:

  • You are using single selection and only one or two actions. In this case, place the actions on each line.

Responsiveness

To enable responsiveness, use the OverflowToolbar control. For more information, please refer to the corresponding section in the toolbar overview article.

Components

All of the components are optional. The table toolbar can contain the following actions:

  • App-specific actions
  • Generic actions

The following actions count as generic:

  • Title
  • Variant management
  • Switch
  • Search
  • Edit
  • Create (for new items)
  • View switch
  • Add (for exsiting items)
  • Sort, Filter, and Group (view settings)
  • Personalize
  • Export to Spreadsheet
  • Print
  • Overflow
Example of possible components
Example of possible components

Behavior and Interaction

App-Specific Actions

If needed, the app team can define their own actions for the app. In this case, the text buttons should contain a short, unambiguous text that explains what action the button performs. A button text is usually a single-word verb (for example, Share). Note that translated UIs may increase the length of the text string.

Only use icon buttons if you are sure that the user will be able to interpret the meaning of the icon easily and without the aid of a tooltip.  Use standard and easily recognizable icons, such as a paper clip for an attachment.

Table toolbar with app-specific icon buttons
Table toolbar with app-specific icon buttons

Title (Generic)

A title provides a short, meaningful summary of the content, mostly by using a single word. The title bar is a toolbar property that supports consistently-sized text and titles with the same height in cozy and compact form factors.

Consider the following when using a title:

  • Use the sap.m.Title control.
  • The toolbar height must be set to 3 rem.
  • The title must have the label class sapMH4Fontsize.

Use a table title if you need the table toolbar, and if the title of the table is not indicated in the surrounding area. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a table title, such as Items. Note that the title becomes truncated if there is not enough space.

Title in the table toolbar
Title in the table toolbar

Variant Management (Generic)

Variants store settings that have been defined, for example, for layout, column visibility, sorting, and grouping. The variant management control enables the user to load, save, and change variants.

In the context of tables, the variant management control  is used to save, manage, and load table settings which include layout, column visibility, sorting, and grouping.

For this, the variant management control can be used independently of the filter settings.

Always place this control in the table toolbar next to the title.

If you place the variant management control inside a toolbar, you need to apply the following styles:

  • The toolbar height must be set to 3 rem.
  • The title must have the class sapMH4Fontsize.

The examples below show where to place this control:

Variant in the table toolbar
Variant in the table toolbar

Title and Variant Management (Generic)

In exceptional cases, both the title and variant management have to be used. However, we do not recommend this because it results in a crowded toolbar and problems with responsiveness may occur. Variant management alone is generally sufficient.

The title and variant management are both left-aligned. The title is placed first, followed by a separator and the variant management.

Title with variant management
Title with variant management

Content Switch (Generic)

When apps need to switch between different content in a table, use a select control (also known as a dropdown) or a segmented button. The select control and the segmented button are displayed left-aligned in the table toolbar and allow the user to show different views.

These views could be very specific. For example, AllMine, and Others. However, you should ensure that there is no interference with the filters in the filter bar. Alternatively, the views might be made up of specific groupings or configurations, such as By X or By Y.

We strongly recommend that you use the segmented button and the select control as follows:

  • A limited set of views (2-3) can be represented by a segmented button (sap.m.SegmentedButton), which should collapse into a dropdown on a smartphone.
  • If the number of views can change or is larger than 3, they should be represented by a select (m.Select) control.

For more information about using multiple predefined views, see the list report floorplan (under Content Area: Multiple Views)

You can also include counters on your segmented buttons or your dropdown to indicate, for example, the number of products in each specific content view. For example, All Products (115), Hardware (60), Software (55).

Segmented button with a counter included
Segmented button with a counter included

If you use a content switch, you no longer need a title. In very rare use cases, both a title and a content switch must be visible. In this case, the title and the content view are left-aligned.

Segmented text button to switch content
Segmented text button to switch content
Select to switch content
Select to switch content

You can also use the icon tab bar as a filter. At the front, there can be an All tab (optional) stating the overall number and type of items, such as 14 Products.

If you use the icon tab bar as a filter, we strongly recommend that you show a counter on every tab. If you need a counter, use the icon tab bar instead of the content switch inside the table. Also use the icon tab bar if you need different actions for your different table views. Use the content switch instead of tabs if there are multiple table variants.

Search (Generic)

If a dataset is too large for users to find items by scanning through them, we recommend that you offer a search functionality. Do not place a search function in the table toolbar if there is a filter bar above.

If you want to provide a search for your table, place it on the right side of the toolbar. Note that this control cannot be moved into the overflow menu. We therefore recommend that you define a minimum width.

For more information, see search.

Search in the table toolbar
Search in the table toolbar

Edit (Generic)

Sometimes the user will need to edit a table. In this case, you have two options: You must decide whether the user needs to edit more than one element, or whether the main use case is to edit only one element.

Option 1: Editing Line Items

To allow the user to edit a line item details page, set sap.m.ListType to “detail” in the corresponding item (sap.m.ColumnListItem/sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive). This creates an Edit button at the end of the line. The user can click or tap the button to trigger the edit event. Use this event to switch the corresponding line item to edit mode.

Edit is a list item type and therefore cannot be used together with navigation or with the use of click events on the whole item (active).

Option 1: Editing an individual line
Option 1: Editing an individual line

Option 2: Editing the Whole Table

To edit a whole table, use the table toolbar. The edit function is a text button. Triggering this action results in the Edit button being replaced by Save and Cancel, and the user can then make any necessary changes in the table. All actions that control the UI of the table remain visible, and all other actions are hidden.

Table in view mode
Table in view mode
Table in edit mode
Table in edit mode

View Switch (Generic)

View switches are right-aligned in the toolbar and allow the user to switch between different chart types or table layouts. You must provide the view switch if the chart relies on subtle color differences or gradients of color. In these cases, users with visual impairments can switch to the table view.

Switches are optional and do not have to be available if there is no need to switch between different charts or tables.

The number of chart types and switches must be used with caution. Each app team must decide what kinds of chart types make sense to visualize the respective data to assist the user in the best possible way.

We do not recommend using more than three types of visualization. The sequence of chart type switches is not fixed; however, you must sort them in terms of their importance and frequency of usage.

The chart type currently in use is highlighted. For this purpose, use a segmented control with icons. For more information about the icons and the chart types they represent, see chart toolbar.

Create / Add (Generic)

The Create or Add actions can be presented by a generic icon button or a text that describes the action in more detail. Place the action as close to the content as possible.

If the Create or Add action is a main function, the action should never be moved into the overflow.

If the app uses more than two Create or Add actions, or if the meaning of the icon is not entirely clear, use text buttons.

Add as icon button
Add as icon button
'Create' as a text button
'Create' as a text button

Sort, Filter, and Group (Generic)

Sort, Filter, and Group can appear in any combination or as single actions. If you use more than one of these actions, we recommend keeping them in the following order: Sort, Filter, and Group.

When the user chooses one of these actions, the view settings dialog appears. This dialog can provide any combination of these three settings, including only one setting, such as Sort.

  • If sorting, filtering, and/or grouping is a common use case in your app, offer one, two, or all three of the corresponding features in one or more view settings dialogs. Do not provide these features if the table is expected to have only a small number of entries (up to 20 in most cases).
  • If filtering is a main use case, do not offer filtering in the view settings dialog; use the filter bar instead.

There are two ways to trigger the view settings dialog:

  1. The user clicks or taps a button on the table toolbar. Offer all relevant functionality (Sort, Filter, and/or Group) in this dialog.
  2. The user clicks or taps one of several buttons for each of these view settings. Each button opens a view settings dialog which contains only the corresponding page.

Use one of the two options listed above based on the following guidelines:

  • If sorting, filtering, and/or grouping are a secondary use case, use option 1.
  • If there are several additional actions and the table toolbar becomes overloaded with buttons, use option 1.
  • If sorting, filtering, and/or grouping are a primary use case, use option 2 to allow faster access to these settings.
  • If screen real estate is not an issue, use option 2.
  • If there is only one view setting (Sort, Filter, or Group), use option 2.

Always use only the view settings you really need. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case.

Using the view settings dialog allows you to define several Sort, Filter, and/or Group settings per column. Thus, a column with several data points can be sorted, filtered, and/or grouped independently by each data point.

Ensure a consistent user experience. When a user reopens the app, show the analytical table with the same view settings that were last defined by this user.

Option 1: One trigger for all view settings (sort, filter, and group)
Option 1: One trigger for all view settings (sort, filter, and group)
Option 2: Multiple triggers for the different view settings (sort, filter, and group)
Option 2: Multiple triggers for the different view settings (sort, filter, and group)

Personalization (Generic)

Use the table personalization dialog for adding, removing, and rearranging columns. The user triggers the dialog by clicking a button on the table toolbar.

Offer personalization if you need more columns than those that fit on a tablet screen (which is usually five) to fulfill 80% of your main use cases. Before you do this, try to reduce the number of columns, for example, by using several lines per column or by using the pop-in.

Ensure a consistent user experience. When a user reopens the app, show the analytical table with the same view settings (SortFilter, and Group settings) that were last defined by this user.

Table toolbar with personalization icon
Table toolbar with personalization icon

Export to Spreadsheet (Generic)

The Export to Spreadsheet action allows the user to export table rows and can be represented by a generic icon button. Place the action as close to the content as possible.

Example of a table toolbar with the 'Export to Spreadsheet' icon
Example of a table toolbar with the 'Export to Spreadsheet' icon

Print (Generic)

The action for printing table items can be represented by a generic Print icon ( ).

Example of table toolbar with Print icon
Example of table toolbar with Print icon

Overflow (Generic)

Please see the section on overflow in the Behavior and Interaction section of the toolbar overview article.

Styles

The table toolbar is always transparent and and has transparent-style buttons. Do not use the accept, reject, or emphasized button styles; these are reserved for key actions in the footer toolbar. For more information, see button.

Guidelines

Please see the Guidelines section in the toolbar overview article.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Filter Bar

The filter bar filters item lists and tables according to various filter criteria. You can use it for both simple and complex lists, regardless of their size. To handle complex lists with multiple filters, the filter bar provides predefined, customizable filter sets (variants).

Filter bar within the dynamic page
Filter bar within the dynamic page
Information
The filter bar now supports the dynamic page. Do not use the filter bar in the sap.m.Page for new SAP Fiori apps. For more information on the differences, see the filter bar guideline for version 1.52.

Responsiveness

Because tables appear in many apps, from simple to complex ones, the filter bar needs to run on all form factors. While the main concept of the filter bar remains stable across the devices, its responsive design adapts the control’s behavior to match the ability of each device.

Size S (Smartphones)

Expanded filter bar (size S)
Expanded filter bar (size S)
Collapsed filter bar (size S)
Collapsed filter bar (size S)
Filter dialog (size S)
Filter dialog (size S)

Size M (Tablet)

Expanded filter bar (size M)
Expanded filter bar (size M)
Collapsed filter bar (size M)
Collapsed filter bar (size M)
Filter dialog (size M)
Filter dialog (size M)

Size L/XL (Desktops)

Expanded filter bar (size L/XL)
Expanded filter bar (size L/XL)
Collapsed filter bar (size L/XL)
Collapsed filter bar (size L/XL)
Filter dialog (size L/XL)
Filter dialog (size L/XL)

Layout

Filter Dialog

The filters inside the filter dialog are arranged in a vertical linear layout. If filter groups are maintained, the filters are visually grouped in sections, with the filter group name at the top. A link at the end of each group allows the user to add or remove filters from that group. The link text is Change Filters if at least one filter is activated, indicating that filters can be added or removed. If no filters have been set for the group, the link text is More Filters, indicating that more filters can be added.
The first group is called “Basic” and contains the preset filters that come with the app. A checkbox next to each filter enables the user to show the corresponding filter on the expanded filter bar. If the checkbox is selected, the filter is shown on the expanded filter bar. If the checkbox is not selected, the filter is only visible within the filter dialog. In both cases, the filter is active if a value is entered.
The vertical layout of the filter dialog remains stable across all devices. To ensure a clean grid layout appearance, the size of the widest input field is inherited by all other filters.
Filter dialog (size L)
Filter dialog (size L)
Filter dialog (size S)
Filter dialog (size S)

Expanded Filter Bar

The expanded filter bar arranges the input fields in a simple horizontal linear layout. If the browser’s window size is reduced or the filters exceed the first line, a simple mechanism opens a new line of filters. The height of the expanded filter bar is not limited and adjusts to accommodate the filters that need to be shown. The label is always above the input field. As in the filter dialog, the size of the widest input field is inherited by all other filters. This avoids having unstable and busy-looking grid layouts.
Filter bar (size L) with one row of filters
Filter bar (size L) with one row of filters
Filter Bar (Size L) with more than one row of filters
Filter Bar (Size L) with more than one row of filters
Filter bar (size S) with vertical filters
Filter bar (size S) with vertical filters

Components

Collapsed Filter Bar

The collapsed filter bar takes up very little space, leaving the bulk of the screen to display the actual results. However, the variant selector in the upper left corner is still available for switching between variants. The user can expand or collapse the filter bar by clicking on the header. If required by the use case, the filter bar can be expanded by default.
On desktop and tablet devices, the collapsed filter bar shows a summary of the filters currently applied. It shows Filtered By (x):, where “x” stands for the number of applied filters. This is followed by a comma-separated list of the filters currently applied. Up to 5 filters are listed. If more filters have been applied, an ellipsis (…) shows at the end of the string. If no filters have been applied, the summary text is Filtered By: None.
Collapsed filter bar
Collapsed filter bar

Expanded Filter Bar

Developer Hint
In addition to the collapsed filter bar, the expanded filter bar shows a user-defined filter subset of the currently selected variant.
The Adapt Filters (x) link opens the filter dialog, and allows the user to add filters or hide them. The Go button triggers the filter. The Go button is only shown in manual mode.
Expanded filter bar
Expanded filter bar

Filter Dialog

Developer Hint

The filter dialog is the central component that shows all filters of the selected variant, allowing the user to add filters to the variant or remove them. Filters are arranged into their respective filter groups. The user can search for a specific filter by name in the search bar at the top.

The footer toolbar at the bottom of the dialog provides the following functions:

  • Save: Saves your modified variant filter set (Save and Save As can be provided)
  • Cancel: Closes the dialog and undoes all changes
  • Restore: Restores the initial variant values (you can hide this button if it does not fit the app’s use case)
  • Go: Executes the selected filter set
  • Clear (optional): Clears all input fields/filters (this button should only be used if it fits the app’s use case)

The user can choose to hide filters on the expanded filter bar by deselecting the relevant checkbox next to the filter in the filter dialog (for example, if a filter is rarely edited, or unimportant).

Filter dialog
Filter dialog

Variant Selector

The variant selector is used to select the current variant, and also provides access to variant management.
Variant selector
Variant selector

Filter/Input Controls

Developer Hint
For development information, see data types for the smart filter bar.
Filter/input controls
Filter/input controls

Which filter control is used in the filter dialog or the expanded filter bar depends on the use case. Use the value help control if you want to offer an advanced function for selecting single or multiple items either inline (by entering text) or by means of a dialog. If there is a predefined list for single or multiple selection, use the combo box control. For temporal information you can use the date picker or date range selector.

When designing the filter bar, pick the simplest input control that works for your use case. Using more complex controls (like value help) when you don’t actually need them just increases the complexity of the filter bar.

Behavior and Interaction

The filter bar contains the following actions:

Selecting a Variant

The main use case for the filter bar is to select and execute variants that influence the list of items. In this example, the variant applies its filter set automatically. The item list is filtered without the user needing to click Go.

Adding Filters to a Variant

In the filter dialog the user can access more filters for every filter group. Filters can then be added or removed in a separate dialog. Once a filter has been added or removed, it appears or disappears from the filter dialog. If the user selects the checkbox next to the filter, the filter is displayed on the extended filter bar.

Personalizing the Expanded Filter Bar

Users can hide a filter on the expanded filter bar by deselecting the checkbox next to the relevant filter in the filter dialog. This allows the user to hide filters that are rarely changed from the extended filter bar, giving complex filters a more lightweight appearance.

Guidelines

Default Variant Filters

For all filter bars, provide a set of predefined default filters that come with the app (“Basic” group in the filter dialog). Include filters that are:
  • Mandatory / crucial to the use case
  • Frequently used
  • Vital for reducing the number of items in the list
Users can hide filters in the “Basic” group, but cannot remove them from the filter dialog.
Default variant
Default variant "Basic"

Default Values

Provide a meaningful default value for as many filters as possible. Meaningful default values depend on your use case.

A default value for date ranges, for example, should reflect the time frame the user would normally apply. App designers need to decide which time frame is appropriate.

Appropriate default values are particularly crucial for filter sets and list reports that operate on large datasets. In this case, consider making certain default filters mandatory to help the user avoid loading very large datasets unnecessarily.

Filter without default value
Filter without default value
Filter with available values
Filter with available values
Filter with a default value
Filter with a default value

Table Filtering and Table Searching

Provide the user with a central location filtering and searching. If you use a filter bar, do not provide filter options or search options for the control below (for example, a table, chart, or list.). Avoiding multiple filter locations also helps to prevent confusing or contradictory entries (for example between the filter bar and a table filter).
Do
Table without filtering option
Table without filtering option
Don't
Table with filtering option
Table with filtering option

Initial State

The filter bar can initially be collapsed or expanded, depending on the use case:

Initial State Collapsed

If the app has a default variant that is executed on loading, the table is prefilled, and the user seldom changes the filters, the app can start with a collapsed filter bar.

Initial State Expanded

If the app does not use a default variant and the user has to set a filter to obtain a first result set for the table, start with an expanded filter bar. Also, if a vast number of items are expected, include some mandatory filters. Since the user first has to enter values for these filters, start with an expanded filter bar. If you are in any doubt, start the app with an expanded filter bar.

Note: At least one filter must be defined to begin with. This filter is set within the basic group by app designers. If the use case allows, and depending on the size of the result set, provide a table that is initially filled.

Initial state collapsed
Initial state collapsed
Initial state expanded
Initial state expanded

Basic Search Field

The basic search field allows the user to filter the results by a given keyword. In contrast to the other input fields, the basic search field has a placeholder text instead of a label.
Note: If you need to provide a search field, use the basic search field. The search field within the table must be deactivated.
Filter bar with basic search field
Filter bar with basic search field

Manual Update / Live Update

The filter bar is available in two separate modes: manual update mode and live update mode.

Manual Update

With manual update, the filter results are only updated when the user clicks or taps Go. A Go button is therefore mandatory in manual update mode. Pressing enter on the keyboard also triggers the filter.

Live Update

With live update mode, the filter bar reacts instantly to every input change. The result table is updated every time the user changes a filter field or the search field. Therefore, a Go button is not necessary and is not shown if live update mode is used.

Additionally, the search is triggered with every letter that is entered. Starting with the first letter typed in, the table is updated with the results that match all set filters that include the search term.

Which One to Use

Use live update mode by default as it is more convenient for the user. If the user has to configure multiple filters to obtain a useful result set, or if the resulting traffic is expected to be excessively high, consider using manual update mode instead.

Filter bar in manual update mode
Filter bar in manual update mode
Filter bar in live update mode
Filter bar in live update mode

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Multi-Combo Box

The multi-combo box control is commonly used to enable users to select one or more options from a predefined list. The control provides an editable input field to filter the list, and a dropdown arrow to open the list of available options. The select options in the list have checkboxes that permit multiselection.

Usage

Use the multi-combo box if:

  • The user needs to select one or more options from a long list of options (maximum of approximately 200).
  • The values of the option list contain secondary information that does not need to be displayed right away.

Do not use the multi-combo box if:

  • The user needs to choose between two options, such as ON or OFF and YES or NO. In this case, consider using a switch control instead.
  • You need to display more than one attribute. In this case, consider using the select dialog or value help dialog instead.
  • The user needs to search on multiple attributes. In this case, consider using the select dialog or value help dialog instead.
  • Your use case requires all available options to be displayed right away, without any user interaction. In this case, consider using checkboxes instead.

Responsiveness

The multi-combo box is optimized for keyboard and mouse interaction.

Size S

 Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size S
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size S
Option list in full screen - Size S
Option list in full screen - Size S

Size M

Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size M
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size M

Size L

Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size L
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size L
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size L
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size L

Components

Input Field

The input field (2) can display a placeholder text (6) when it’s empty, or a token (1) if a value is selected.

Dropdown Trigger

The dropdown button (3) collapses and expands the dropdown list.

Option List

The option list (7) contains a list of selectable options (5). Clicking the label of an entry closes the option list and creates a token of the selected option. Every entry is accompanied by a checkbox (4) to allow multiselection. Clicking a checkbox creates a token. The option list remains open.

Components of the multi-combo box
Components of the multi-combo box

Behavior and Interaction

Select a Value

There are three ways to select an item from the list:

  • Tick the checkbox (option list remains open).
  • Click or tap the label of a select option (option list is closed).
  • Use the keyboard (spacebar or Enter).

The user clicks or taps the input field to place the cursor in the field (1). Clicking the arrow displays the list (2). As the user types into the input field, the list is filtered accordingly (3). The up and down arrows move the focus within the list (4), while the typed text remains in the input field. Selected options are automatically entered into the input field as tokens (5).

If the user selects items from the filtered option list (3) by clicking or tapping the checkbox, the text entered in input field remains. If the user selects items by clicking or tapping the label, the entered text is cleared.

Input Field

Any character in the input field acts as a filter for the option list. The input field only allows users to type text that matches the items in the list. If a user tries to enter character combinations that are not in the option list, a visual feedback is provided to indicate that the combination of characters is invalid, while the input field suppresses the characters entered.

Behavior - Sizes M and L
Behavior - Sizes M and L

Choose from Option List

The option list displays all the available items that the user can choose from. Clicking the arrow opens the option list below the field. If there is not enough space to display the dropdown list below the field, it is displayed above the field instead.

Behavior for Mobile Devices

The following sections describe how the multi-combo box interacts on mobile devices.

Tapping the Arrow

Tapping the arrow opens the option list in a full screen dialog (1) with a title displayed in the header (2). The Close button (3) closes the dialog and cancels any selection changes in the option list. Clicking the label of an entry (4) closes the option list and creates a token of the selected option. By selecting a checkbox (5), the option list remains open and allows multi-selection. The OK button (6) takes over the selection and closes the dialog.

Filter bar with multi-combo box (left) --> Full screen multi-combo box selection (right)
Filter bar with multi-combo box (left) --> Full screen multi-combo box selection (right)
Developer Hint

The title of the full-screen dialog could be customized by adding a label as ariaLabelledBy to the multi-combo box. If no label is associated with the multi-combo box, the default title “Select” is set.

As the user types into the input field (7), the list is filtered accordingly using the “starts with” approach. Pressing the button next to the input field (8) toggles the view between all options and the selected one only.

Left: Option list, filtered by user input, Right: Selected options from the list
Left: Option list, filtered by user input, Right: Selected options from the list

Input Field on Collapsed List

If items have already been selected, the input field remains functional and the tokens remain visible (1). Tapping the Remove icon   in a token removes it (2). When the user taps on the input field, the list opens to full screen (3). Tapping on the input field sets the focus on it (4) and the mobile device’s keyboard opens (5). When the user types in the first character, the list is filtered by this character (6) using the “starts with” approach. The input field only allows characters to be typed in that match the items in the list.

Left: Multi-combo box with tokens in the input field; Right: List for selection filtered by a character
Left: Multi-combo box with tokens in the input field; Right: List for selection filtered by a character

Multiple Selected Items

Not all the selected tokens can be displayed at the same time because the space is limited to the size of the input field (6). Swiping to the side scrolls horizontally to reveal a cropped token (7).

Swiping to display tokens
Swiping to display tokens

Copying and Pasting Data from a Spreadsheet or Text File

The control for the multi-combo box can handle paste actions containing, for example, multiple items that have been selected in a column of a spreadsheet or text file. The user simply selects an entire column in the spreadsheet and copies it. When items are entered into the multi-combo box, the user just pastes them from the clipboard and each item is then represented as a token. Only items that are part of the list are displayed as tokens.

Information
For information on how to manage leading and trailing whitespace (blanks) when copying and pasting text into input controls, please see removing leading and trailing whitespace.

Styles

These are the styles of the multi-combo box and their respective states:

Hover highlighting in list
Hover highlighting in list
Expanded multiselection
Expanded multiselection
Unselected
Unselected
Unselected predefined placeholder
Unselected predefined placeholder
Unselected on hover
Unselected on hover
In focus
In focus
Warning
Warning
Error
Error
Expanded
Expanded
Expanded selection
Expanded selection
Selected items shown as tokens
Selected items shown as tokens

Guidelines

Label

The multi-combo box control can be displayed with or without a label. If the field is attached to another field, you don’t need to define a second label. For more information about labels in SAP Fiori, see the label guidelines.

Placeholder

Don’t use the placeholder attribute as an alternative to a label. This is important because the placeholder text will be overwritten as soon as the form is filled out. Labels are necessary because they indicate the meaning of the form fields if the placeholders are no longer visible. Show a placeholder only if the user needs a hint about what data to enter. Don’t repeat the content of the label. A hint could be a sample value or a brief description of the expected format. For more information about how to use the placeholder, see input field.

Option List

Keep the label of an entry in the select option list as short as possible because the list uses single lines only. Values that are too long may be truncated. If you need to indicate that none of the selection options are selected, show a blank input field. Define a default selection whenever possible. The multi-combo box cannot display columns. If you want to show two values in the option list, show the leading information first, followed by the secondary information in parentheses, such as Walldorf (Germany). Typing into the input field shows all items that start with the search text.

Sorting

The option list contains all available items that the user can choose from. Choose one of the following styles depending on how you want the content to be arranged:

Logical: Sort items into a meaningful order. Group related options together and show the most common options first followed by less common options.

Logical multi-combo box
Logical multi-combo box

Alphabetical: Sort currencies, names, and so on into alphabetical order. We recommend this for lists with more than eight items.

Alphabetical multi-combo box
Alphabetical multi-combo box

Numeric: Sort numeric values into a sequential order with the lowest number first.

Numeric multi-combo box
Numeric multi-combo box

Chronological: Sort time-related information into chronological order with the most recent first (if applicable).

Chronological multi-combo box
Chronological multi-combo box

Width

You can adjust the width of the option list to some extent. The multi-combo box control is usually used in forms, where the width is determined by the form element or container in which it is embedded. Therefore, we don’t recommend defining a fixed width, but rather working with proper layout containers such as the form, simple form, or responsive grid layout, and with the layout data property, where the width is defined. If you need to restrict the width to a defined value, set the width accordingly. Keep in mind that there’s no horizontal scrolling in the option list. Entries that are too long are truncated and users won’t be able to read them.

Information
If localized text isn’t an issue, such as with currency codes, use a smaller width.

Unit of Measurement

You can use the layout options of the form to add the unit of measurement (UoM) after the multi-combo box. Apps can use the label-field ratio to show the UoM after the field. However, you must make sure that the UoM is properly visualized and doesn’t wrap to the next row.

Developer Hint

For accessibility purposes, you can use “ariaDescribedBy” from the input control.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Multi-Combo Box

The multi-combo box control is commonly used to enable users to select one or more options from a predefined list. The control provides an editable input field to filter the list, and a dropdown arrow to open the list of available options. The select options in the list have checkboxes that permit multiselection.

Usage

Use the multi-combo box if:

  • The user needs to select one or more options from a long list of options (maximum of approximately 200).
  • The values of the option list contain secondary information that does not need to be displayed right away.

Do not use the multi-combo box if:

  • The user needs to choose between two options, such as ON or OFF and YES or NO. In this case, consider using a switch control instead.
  • You need to display more than one attribute. In this case, consider using the select dialog or value help dialog instead.
  • The user needs to search on multiple attributes. In this case, consider using the select dialog or value help dialog instead.
  • Your use case requires all available options to be displayed right away, without any user interaction. In this case, consider using checkboxes instead.

Responsiveness

The multi-combo box is optimized for keyboard and mouse interaction.

Size S

 Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size S
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size S
Option list in full screen - Size S
Option list in full screen - Size S

Size M

Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size M
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size M

Size L

Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size L
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size L
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size L
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size L

Components

Input Field

The input field (2) can display a placeholder text (6) when it’s empty, or a token (1) if a value is selected.

Dropdown Trigger

The dropdown button (3) collapses and expands the dropdown list.

Option List

The option list (7) contains a list of selectable options (5). Clicking the label of an entry closes the option list and creates a token of the selected option. Every entry is accompanied by a checkbox (4) to allow multiselection. Clicking a checkbox creates a token. The option list remains open.

Components of the multi-combo box
Components of the multi-combo box

Behavior and Interaction

Select a Value

There are three ways to select an item from the list:

  • Tick the checkbox (option list remains open).
  • Click or tap the label of a select option (option list is closed).
  • Use the keyboard (spacebar or Enter).

The user clicks or taps the input field to place the cursor in the field (1). Clicking the arrow displays the list (2). As the user types into the input field, the list is filtered accordingly (3). The up and down arrows move the focus within the list (4), while the typed text remains in the input field. Selected options are automatically entered into the input field as tokens (5).

If the user selects items from the filtered option list (3) by clicking or tapping the checkbox, the text entered in input field remains. If the user selects items by clicking or tapping the label, the entered text is cleared.

Input Field

Any character in the input field acts as a filter for the option list. The input field only allows users to type text that matches the items in the list. If a user tries to enter character combinations that are not in the option list, a visual feedback is provided to indicate that the combination of characters is invalid, while the input field suppresses the characters entered.

Behavior - Sizes M and L
Behavior - Sizes M and L

Choose from Option List

The option list displays all the available items that the user can choose from. Clicking the arrow opens the option list below the field. If there is not enough space to display the dropdown list below the field, it is displayed above the field instead.

Behavior for Mobile Devices

The following sections describe how the multi-combo box interacts on mobile devices.

Tapping the Arrow

Tapping the arrow opens the option list in a full screen dialog (1) with a title displayed in the header (2). The Close button (3) closes the dialog and cancels any selection changes in the option list. Clicking the label of an entry (4) closes the option list and creates a token of the selected option. By selecting a checkbox (5), the option list remains open and allows multi-selection. The OK button (6) takes over the selection and closes the dialog.

Filter bar with multi-combo box (left) --> Full screen multi-combo box selection (right)
Filter bar with multi-combo box (left) --> Full screen multi-combo box selection (right)
Developer Hint

The title of the full-screen dialog could be customized by adding a label as ariaLabelledBy to the multi-combo box. If no label is associated with the multi-combo box, the default title “Select” is set.

As the user types into the input field (7), the list is filtered accordingly using the “starts with” approach. Pressing the button next to the input field (8) toggles the view between all options and the selected one only.

Left: Option list, filtered by user input, Right: Selected options from the list
Left: Option list, filtered by user input, Right: Selected options from the list

Input Field on Collapsed List

If items have already been selected, the input field remains functional and the tokens remain visible (1). Tapping the Remove icon   in a token removes it (2). When the user taps on the input field, the list opens to full screen (3). Tapping on the input field sets the focus on it (4) and the mobile device’s keyboard opens (5). When the user types in the first character, the list is filtered by this character (6) using the “starts with” approach. The input field only allows characters to be typed in that match the items in the list.

Left: Multi-combo box with tokens in the input field. Right: List for selection filtered by a character.
Left: Multi-combo box with tokens in the input field. Right: List for selection filtered by a character.

Multiple Selected Items

Not all the selected tokens can be displayed at the same time because the space is limited to the size of the input field (6). Swiping to the side scrolls horizontally to reveal a cropped token (7).

Swiping to display tokens
Swiping to display tokens

Copying and Pasting Data from a Spreadsheet or Text File

The control for the multi-combo box can handle paste actions containing, for example, multiple items that have been selected in a column of a spreadsheet or text file. The user simply selects an entire column in the spreadsheet and copies it. When items are entered into the multi-combo box, the user just pastes them from the clipboard and each item is then represented as a token. Only items that are part of the list are displayed as tokens.

Information
For information on how to manage leading and trailing whitespace (blanks) when copying and pasting text into input controls, please see removing leading and trailing whitespace.

Styles

These are the styles of the multi-combo box and their respective states:

Hover highlighting in list
Hover highlighting in list
Expanded multiselection
Expanded multiselection
Unselected
Unselected
Unselected predefined placeholder
Unselected predefined placeholder
Unselected on hover
Unselected on hover
In focus
In focus
Warning
Warning
Error
Error
Expanded
Expanded
Expanded selection
Expanded selection
Selected items shown as tokens
Selected items shown as tokens

Guidelines

Label

The multi-combo box control can be displayed with or without a label. If the field is attached to another field, you don’t need to define a second label. For more information about labels in SAP Fiori, see the label guidelines.

Placeholder

Don’t use the placeholder attribute as an alternative to a label. This is important because the placeholder text will be overwritten as soon as the form is filled out. Labels are necessary because they indicate the meaning of the form fields if the placeholders are no longer visible. Show a placeholder only if the user needs a hint about what data to enter. Don’t repeat the content of the label. A hint could be a sample value or a brief description of the expected format. For more information about how to use the placeholder, see input field.

Option List

Keep the label of an entry in the select option list as short as possible because the list uses single lines only. Values that are too long may be truncated. If you need to indicate that none of the selection options are selected, show a blank input field. Define a default selection whenever possible. The multi-combo box cannot display columns. If you want to show two values in the option list, show the leading information first, followed by the secondary information in parentheses, such as Walldorf (Germany). Typing into the input field shows all items that start with the search text.

Sorting

The option list contains all available items that the user can choose from. Choose one of the following styles depending on how you want the content to be arranged:

Logical: Sort items into a meaningful order. Group related options together and show the most common options first followed by less common options.

Logical multi-combo box
Logical multi-combo box

Alphabetical: Sort currencies, names, and so on into alphabetical order. We recommend this for lists with more than eight items.

Alphabetical multi-combo box
Alphabetical multi-combo box

Numeric: Sort numeric values into a sequential order with the lowest number first.

Numeric multi-combo box
Numeric multi-combo box

Chronological: Sort time-related information into chronological order with the most recent first (if applicable).

Chronological multi-combo box
Chronological multi-combo box

Width

You can adjust the width of the option list to some extent. The multi-combo box control is usually used in forms, where the width is determined by the form element or container in which it is embedded. Therefore, we don’t recommend defining a fixed width, but rather working with proper layout containers such as the form, simple form, or responsive grid layout, and with the layout data property, where the width is defined. If you need to restrict the width to a defined value, set the width accordingly. Keep in mind that there’s no horizontal scrolling in the option list. Entries that are too long are truncated and users won’t be able to read them.

Information
If localized text isn’t an issue, such as with currency codes, use a smaller width.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Multi-Combo Box

The multi-combo box control is commonly used to enable users to select one or more options from a predefined list. The control provides an editable input field to filter the list, and a dropdown arrow to open the list of available options. The select options in the list have checkboxes that permit multiselection.

Usage

Use the multi-combo box if:

  • The user needs to select one or more options from a long list of options (maximum of approximately 200).
  • The values of the option list contain secondary information that does not need to be displayed right away.

Do not use the multi-combo box if:

  • The user needs to choose between two options, such as ON or OFF and YES or NO. In this case, consider using a switch control instead.
  • You need to display more than one attribute. In this case, consider using the select dialog or value help dialog instead.
  • The user needs to search on multiple attributes. In this case, consider using the select dialog or value help dialog instead.
  • Your use case requires all available options to be displayed right away, without any user interaction. In this case, consider using checkboxes instead.

Responsiveness

The multi-combo box is optimized for keyboard and mouse interaction.

Size S

 Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size S
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size S
Option list in full screen - Size S
Option list in full screen - Size S

Size M

Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size M
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size M

Size L

Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size L
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size L
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size L
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size L

Components

Input Field

The input field (2) can display a placeholder text (6) when it’s empty, or a token (1) if a value is selected.

Dropdown Trigger

The dropdown button (3) collapses and expands the dropdown list.

Option List

The option list (7) contains a list of selectable options (5). Clicking the label of an entry closes the option list and creates a token of the selected option. Every entry is accompanied by a checkbox (4) to allow multiselection. Clicking a checkbox creates a token. The option list remains open.

Components of the multi-combo box
Components of the multi-combo box

Behavior and Interaction

Select a Value

There are three ways to select an item from the list:

  • Tick the checkbox (option list remains open).
  • Click or tap the label of a select option (option list is closed).
  • Use the keyboard (spacebar or Enter).

The user clicks or taps the input field to place the cursor in the field (1). Clicking the arrow displays the list (2). As the user types into the input field, the list is filtered accordingly (3). The up and down arrows move the focus within the list (4), while the typed text remains in the input field. Selected options are automatically entered into the input field as tokens (5).

If the user selects items from the filtered option list (3) by clicking or tapping the checkbox, the text entered in input field remains. If the user selects items by clicking or tapping the label, the entered text is cleared.

Input Field

Any character in the input field acts as a filter for the option list. The input field only allows users to type text that matches the items in the list. If a user tries to enter character combinations that are not in the option list, a visual feedback is provided to indicate that the combination of characters is invalid, while the input field suppresses the characters entered.

Behavior - Sizes M and L
Behavior - Sizes M and L

Choose from Option List

The option list displays all the available items that the user can choose from. Clicking the arrow opens the option list below the field. If there is not enough space to display the dropdown list below the field, it is displayed above the field instead.

Behavior for Mobile Devices

The following sections describe how the multi-combo box interacts on mobile devices.

Tapping the Arrow

Tapping the arrow opens the option list in a full screen dialog (1) with a title displayed in the header (2). The Close button (3) closes the dialog and cancels any selection changes in the option list. Clicking the label of an entry (4) closes the option list and creates a token of the selected option. By selecting a checkbox (5), the option list remains open and allows multi-selection. The OK button (6) takes over the selection and closes the dialog.

Left: Filter bar with multi-combo box. Right: Full screen multi-combo box selection.
Left: Filter bar with multi-combo box. Right: Full screen multi-combo box selection.
Developer Hint

The title of the full-screen dialog could be customized by adding a label as ariaLabelledBy to the multi-combo box. If no label is associated with the multi-combo box, the default title “Select” is set.

As the user types into the input field (7), the list is filtered accordingly using the “starts with” approach. Pressing the button next to the input field (8) toggles the view between all options and the selected one only.

Left: Option list, filtered by user input. Right: Selected options from the list.
Left: Option list, filtered by user input. Right: Selected options from the list.

Input Field on Collapsed List

If items have already been selected, the input field remains functional and the tokens remain visible (1). Tapping the Remove icon   in a token removes it (2). When the user taps on the input field, the list opens to full screen (3). Tapping on the input field sets the focus on it (4) and the mobile device’s keyboard opens (5). When the user types in the first character, the list is filtered by this character (6) using the “starts with” approach. The input field only allows characters to be typed in that match the items in the list.

Left: Multi-combo box with tokens in the input field. Right: List for selection filtered by a character.
Left: Multi-combo box with tokens in the input field. Right: List for selection filtered by a character.

Multiple Selected Items

Not all the selected tokens can be displayed at the same time because the space is limited to the size of the input field (6). Swiping to the side scrolls horizontally to reveal a cropped token (7).

Swiping to display tokens
Swiping to display tokens

Copying and Pasting Data from a Spreadsheet or Text File

The control for the multi-combo box can handle paste actions containing, for example, multiple items that have been selected in a column of a spreadsheet or text file. The user simply selects an entire column in the spreadsheet and copies it. When items are entered into the multi-combo box, the user just pastes them from the clipboard and each item is then represented as a token. Only items that are part of the list are displayed as tokens.

Information
For information on how to manage leading and trailing whitespace (blanks) when copying and pasting text into input controls, please see removing leading and trailing whitespace.

Styles

These are the styles of the multi-combo box and their respective states:

Hover highlighting in list
Hover highlighting in list
Expanded multiselection
Expanded multiselection
Unselected
Unselected
Unselected predefined placeholder
Unselected predefined placeholder
Unselected on hover
Unselected on hover
In focus
In focus
Warning
Warning
Error
Error
Expanded
Expanded
Expanded selection
Expanded selection
Selected items shown as tokens
Selected items shown as tokens

Guidelines

Label

The multi-combo box control can be displayed with or without a label. If the field is attached to another field, you don’t need to define a second label. For more information about labels in SAP Fiori, see the label guidelines.

Placeholder

Don’t use the placeholder attribute as an alternative to a label. This is important because the placeholder text will be overwritten as soon as the form is filled out. Labels are necessary because they indicate the meaning of the form fields if the placeholders are no longer visible. Show a placeholder only if the user needs a hint about what data to enter. Don’t repeat the content of the label. A hint could be a sample value or a brief description of the expected format. For more information about how to use the placeholder, see input field.

Option List

Keep the label of an entry in the select option list as short as possible because the list uses single lines only. Values that are too long may be truncated. If you need to indicate that none of the selection options are selected, show a blank input field. Define a default selection whenever possible. The multi-combo box cannot display columns. If you want to show two values in the option list, show the leading information first, followed by the secondary information in parentheses, such as Walldorf (Germany). Typing into the input field shows all items that start with the search text.

Sorting

The option list contains all available items that the user can choose from. Choose one of the following styles depending on how you want the content to be arranged:

Logical: Sort items into a meaningful order. Group related options together and show the most common options first followed by less common options.

Logical multi-combo box
Logical multi-combo box

Alphabetical: Sort currencies, names, and so on into alphabetical order. We recommend this for lists with more than eight items.

Alphabetical multi-combo box
Alphabetical multi-combo box

Numeric: Sort numeric values into a sequential order with the lowest number first.

Numeric multi-combo box
Numeric multi-combo box

Chronological: Sort time-related information into chronological order with the most recent first (if applicable).

Chronological multi-combo box
Chronological multi-combo box

Width

You can adjust the width of the option list to some extent. The multi-combo box control is usually used in forms, where the width is determined by the form element or container in which it is embedded. Therefore, we don’t recommend defining a fixed width, but rather working with proper layout containers such as the form, simple form, or responsive grid layout, and with the layout data property, where the width is defined. If you need to restrict the width to a defined value, set the width accordingly. Keep in mind that there’s no horizontal scrolling in the option list. Entries that are too long are truncated and users won’t be able to read them.

Information
If localized text isn’t an issue, such as with currency codes, use a smaller width.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Multi-Combo Box

The multi-combo box control is commonly used to enable users to select one or more options from a predefined list. The control provides an editable input field to filter the list, and a dropdown arrow to open the list of available options. The select options in the list have checkboxes that permit multiselection.

Usage

Use the multi-combo box if:

  • The user needs to select one or more options from a long list of options (maximum of approximately 200).
  • The values of the option list contain secondary information that does not need to be displayed right away.

Do not use the multi-combo box if:

  • The user needs to choose between two options, such as ON or OFF and YES or NO. In this case, consider using a switch control instead.
  • You need to display more than one attribute. In this case, consider using the select dialog or value help dialog instead.
  • The user needs to search on multiple attributes. In this case, consider using the select dialog or value help dialog instead.
  • Your use case requires all available options to be displayed right away, without any user interaction. In this case, consider using checkboxes instead.

Responsiveness

The multi-combo box is optimized for keyboard and mouse interaction.

Size S

 Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size S
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size S
Option list in full screen - Size S
Option list in full screen - Size S

Size M

Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size M
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size M

Size L

Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size L
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size L
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size L
Filter bar with multi-combo box - Size L

Components

Input Field

The input field (2) can display a placeholder text (6) when it’s empty, or a token (1) if a value is selected.

Dropdown Trigger

The dropdown button (3) collapses and expands the dropdown list.

Option List

The option list (7) contains a list of selectable options (5). Clicking the label of an entry closes the option list and creates a token of the selected option. Every entry is accompanied by a checkbox (4) to allow multiselection. Clicking a checkbox creates a token. The option list remains open.

Components of the multi-combo box
Components of the multi-combo box

Behavior and Interaction

Select a Value

There are three ways to select an item from the list:

  • Tick the checkbox (option list remains open).
  • Click or tap the label of a select option (option list is closed).
  • Use the keyboard (spacebar or Enter).

The user clicks or taps the input field to place the cursor in the field (1). Clicking the arrow displays the list (2). As the user types into the input field, the list is filtered accordingly (3). The up and down arrows move the focus within the list (4). Selected options are automatically entered into the input field as tokens (5).

Input Field

Any character in the input field acts as a filter for the option list. The input field only allows users to type text that matches the items in the list. If a user tries to enter character combinations that are not in the option list, a visual feedback is provided to indicate that the combination of characters is invalid, while the input field suppresses the characters entered.

Behavior - Sizes M and L
Behavior - Sizes M and L

Choose from Option List

The option list displays all the available items that the user can choose from. Clicking the arrow opens the option list below the field. If there is not enough space to display the dropdown list below the field, it is displayed above the field instead.

Behavior for Mobile Devices

The following sections describe how the multi-combo box interacts on mobile devices.

Tapping the Arrow

Tapping the arrow opens the option list in a full screen dialog (1) with a title displayed in the header (2). The Close button (3) closes the dialog and cancels any selection changes in the option list. Clicking the label of an entry (4) closes the option list and creates a token of the selected option. By selecting a checkbox (5), the option list remains open and allows multi-selection. The OK button (6) takes over the selection and closes the dialog.

Left: Filter bar with multi-combo box. Right: Full screen multi-combo box selection.
Left: Filter bar with multi-combo box. Right: Full screen multi-combo box selection.
Developer Hint

The title of the full-screen dialog could be customized by adding a label as ariaLabelledBy to the multi-combo box. If no label is associated with the multi-combo box, the default title “Select” is set.

As the user types into the input field (7), the list is filtered accordingly using the “starts with” approach. Pressing the button next to the input field (8) toggles the view between all options and the selected one only.

Left: Option list, filtered by user input. Right: Selected options from the list.
Left: Option list, filtered by user input. Right: Selected options from the list.

Input Field on Collapsed List

If items have already been selected, the input field remains functional and the tokens remain visible (1). Tapping the Remove icon   in a token removes it (2). When the user taps on the input field, the list opens to full screen (3). Tapping on the input field sets the focus on it (4) and the mobile device’s keyboard opens (5). When the user types in the first character, the list is filtered by this character (6) using the “starts with” approach. The input field only allows characters to be typed in that match the items in the list.

Left: Multi-combo box with tokens in the input field. Right: List for selection filtered by a character.
Left: Multi-combo box with tokens in the input field. Right: List for selection filtered by a character.

Multiple Selected Items

Not all the selected tokens can be displayed at the same time because the space is limited to the size of the input field (6). Swiping to the side scrolls horizontally to reveal a cropped token (7).

Swiping to display tokens
Swiping to display tokens

Copying and Pasting Data from a Spreadsheet or Text File

The control for the multi-combo box can handle paste actions containing, for example, multiple items that have been selected in a column of a spreadsheet or text file. The user simply selects an entire column in the spreadsheet and copies it. When items are entered into the multi-combo box, the user just pastes them from the clipboard and each item is then represented as a token. Only items that are part of the list are displayed as tokens.

Information
For information on how to manage leading and trailing whitespace (blanks) when copying and pasting text into input controls, please see removing leading and trailing whitespace.

Styles

These are the styles of the multi-combo box and their respective states:

Unselected
Unselected
Unselected predefined placeholder
Unselected predefined placeholder
Unselected on hover
Unselected on hover
In focus
In focus
Warning
Warning
Error
Error
Expanded
Expanded
Expanded selection
Expanded selection
Expanded multiselection
Expanded multiselection
Selected items shown as tokens
Selected items shown as tokens
Hover highlighting in list
Hover highlighting in list

Guidelines

Label

The multi-combo box control can be displayed with or without a label. If the field is attached to another field, you don’t need to define a second label. For more information about labels in SAP Fiori, see the label guidelines.

Placeholder

Don’t use the placeholder attribute as an alternative to a label. This is important because the placeholder text will be overwritten as soon as the form is filled out. Labels are necessary because they indicate the meaning of the form fields if the placeholders are no longer visible. Show a placeholder only if the user needs a hint about what data to enter. Don’t repeat the content of the label. A hint could be a sample value or a brief description of the expected format. For more information about how to use the placeholder, see input field.

Option List

Keep the label of an entry in the select option list as short as possible because the list uses single lines only. Values that are too long may be truncated. If you need to indicate that none of the selection options are selected, show a blank input field. Define a default selection whenever possible. The multi-combo box cannot display columns. If you want to show two values in the option list, show the leading information first, followed by the secondary information in parentheses, such as Walldorf (Germany). Typing into the input field shows all items that start with the search text.

Sorting

The option list contains all available items that the user can choose from. Choose one of the following styles depending on how you want the content to be arranged:

Logical: Sort items into a meaningful order. Group related options together and show the most common options first followed by less common options.

Logical multi-combo box
Logical multi-combo box

Alphabetical: Sort currencies, names, and so on into alphabetical order. We recommend this for lists with more than eight items.

Alphabetical multi-combo box
Alphabetical multi-combo box

Numeric: Sort numeric values into a sequential order with the lowest number first.

Numeric multi-combo box
Numeric multi-combo box

Chronological: Sort time-related information into chronological order with the most recent first (if applicable).

Chronological multi-combo box
Chronological multi-combo box

Width

You can adjust the width of the option list to some extent. The multi-combo box control is usually used in forms, where the width is determined by the form element or container in which it is embedded. Therefore, we don’t recommend defining a fixed width, but rather working with proper layout containers such as the form, simple form, or responsive grid layout, and with the layout data property, where the width is defined. If you need to restrict the width to a defined value, set the width accordingly. Keep in mind that there’s no horizontal scrolling in the option list. Entries that are too long are truncated and users won’t be able to read them.

Information
If localized text isn’t an issue, such as with currency codes, use a smaller width.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Range Slider

A range slider is a user interface control that enables the user to select a value range within a predefined numerical interval.

Range slider
Range slider

Usage

Use the range slider if you want to select a value range within a predefined numerical interval. If you want to specify only a single value within a predefined numerical interval, use the slider instead.

Responsiveness

The range slider itself is not responsive. It adjusts to the responsiveness of its parent container by recalculating and resizing the width of the control. The range slider supports the cozy and compact form factors.

Types

Only a horizontal range slider is available.

Components

The range slider consists of:

  • Progress line
  • Minimum and maximum value
  • Grips
  • Tooltips or input fields
Range slider components
Range slider components

Behavior and Interaction

Changing Values

If the range slider is editable, the hand cursor appears when hovering over the range slider with the mouse. A tooltip also appears when hovering, displaying the current values of each grip. The grips move together with the corresponding tooltips.

The user can change the value range on the slider in two ways:

  • By using drag and drop to adjust the grips
  • By clicking the bar outside the value range. The corresponding grip then moves to the new position.

The grips can be moved with or without increments based on the predefined steps.

Range slider on hover
Range slider on hover

Range Slider with Input Fields

The range slider can be used with input fields instead of tooltips.

Range slider with input fields
Range slider with input fields

Moving the Entire Range

Users can move the entire value range by dragging and dropping the progress line.

Range slider - Moving the entire range
Range slider - Moving the entire range

Equal Values

The grips of the range slider can be positioned on the same value.

Range slider with equal values
Range slider with equal values

Overlapping

The grips of the range slider can be moved across each other. The minimum can become the maximum, and vice versa.

Tick Marks

You can apply tick marks to the range slider. The tick marks are related to the step property. For example, if you have a range from 1 to 100 and a step of 10, the range slider will have 11 tick marks. The tick marks are responsive. If the distance between 2 tick marks is less than 8 px, all tick marks except for the first and last disappear.

Range slider with tick marks
Range slider with tick marks

Tick Marks and Labels

If tick marks are set, you can define labels for the tick marks. The labels are displayed below the tick marks and show the corresponding value of the tick mark. The labels must never overlap. You can also define labels only for specific tick marks if you don’t need a label for every tick mark on the slider. The application developer is responsible for defining a reasonable set of tick marks.

If there is not enough horizontal space to display all the labels, a responsive mechanism is activated. The first and the last label are always visible.

Range slider with tick marks and labels
Range slider with tick marks and labels

Custom Values

You can define custom values as labels. This can be useful if your scenario requires descriptive intervals, such as as dates. Always keep the values as short and meaningful as possible.

Range slider with custom values as labels
Range slider with custom values as labels
Developer Hint
In order to use custom scales in a slider, you must map them to the floats for the slider scale.

Properties

  • The step property must be positive. If a negative number is provided, the default value 1 is used instead.
  • The minimum, maximum, and value properties can be decimals (float values). The slider automatically sets the minimum value to 0 and the maximum value to 100 by default.
  • The width of the control can be provided in percentage (%), em, px, and all possible CSS units. The slider automatically sets the width of the slider to 100% by default.
  • The range property determines the range in which the user can select values. If the value is lower/higher than the allowed minimum/maximum, a warning message is displayed.
  • The inputsAsTooltips property indicates whether input fields are being used as tooltips for the grips.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Slider

A slider is a control that enables the user to adjust single values within a specified numerical range.

Slider in an input list item
Slider in an input list item

Usage

Use the slider to change values with graphical support.

Responsiveness

The slider itself is not responsive. It adjusts to the responsiveness of its parent container by recalculating and resizing the width of the control.

The slider supports the cozy and compact form factors. The compact form factor is used for apps that run on devices operated by a mouse and keyboard.

Types

Only a horizontal slider is available.

Behavior and Interaction

Changing the Value

If the slider is editable, the hand cursor appears when the user hovers over the grip.

The user can change the slider setting in two ways:

  • By using drag and drop to adjust the grip
  • By clicking the bar. The grip then moves to this new position.

The grip can be moved with or without increments based on the predefined steps.

Changing the value
Changing the value

Slider with Text Fields

The slider can be used with text fields instead of tooltips. In this case, the value of the grip is displayed.

Slider with text fields
Slider with text fields

Slider with Input Fields

The slider can be used with input fields instead of text fields. This allows the user to enter a specific value.

Slider with input fields
Slider with input fields

Slider with Tick Marks

You can apply tick marks to the slider. The tick marks are related to the step property, and are responsive. If the distance between 2 tick marks is less than 8 px, all tick marks except for the first and last disappear.

Slider with tick marks
Slider with tick marks

Slider with Tick Marks and Labels

If tick marks are set, you can define labels for the tick marks. The labels are displayed below the tick marks and show the corresponding value of the tick mark. The labels must always be numbers, and must never overlap. You can also define labels only for specific tick marks if you don’t need a label for every tick mark on the slider. The application developer is responsible for defining a reasonable set of tick marks.

If there is not enough horizontal space to display all the labels, a responsive mechanism is activated. The first and the last label are always visible.

Slider with tick marks and labels
Slider with tick marks and labels

Custom Values

You can define custom values as labels. This can be useful if your scenario requires descriptive intervals, such as as dates. Always keep the values as short and meaningful as possible.

Slider with custom values as labels
Slider with custom values as labels
Developer Hint
In order to use custom scales in a slider, you must map them to the floats for the slider scale.

Styles

The slider can be shown with or without a progress bar. By default, the progress bar is shown.

Examples

Slider without progress bar
Slider without progress bar
Slider with progress bar
Slider with progress bar

Properties

  • The step property must be positive. If a negative number is provided, the default value 1 is used instead.
  • The minimum, maximum, and value properties can be decimals (float values). The slider automatically sets the minimum value to 0 and maximum value to 100 by default.
  • The width of the control can be provided in %, em, px, and all possible CSS units. The slider automatically sets the width of the slider to 100% by default.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Status Indicator

The status indicator uses a filled shape to visualize a single value. Unlike the progress indicator or the radial micro chart, the indicator provides the user with a meaningful association through its use of icons.

Selection of status indicators
Selection of status indicators

Usage

Use the status indicator if:

  • You need to display a single value with an icon that describes its context.
  • You need to display a single value that can be updated in real time without reloading the page.

Do not use the status indicator if:

  • You need to display a single value within a table. Use the progress indicator or radial micro chart instead.
  • You need to show a rating. Use the rating indicator instead.
  • The status indicator does not provide the user with any meaningful information and would be for decoration only.

Embedding the Status Indicator

The status indicator can be embedded in other controls, including but not limited to the following:

Responsiveness

The status indicator provides four different sizes: small (size S), medium (size M), large (size L), and extra-large (size XL).

For the small size, the partial fill is replaced by a fully-filled shape that can only indicate the semantic per threshold reached.

Layout

A status indicator can consist of a scalable vector graphics (SVG) shape and additional information, such as a label. The status indicator can be configured as a shape only (default), or as a shape with a fixed label.

Shape Only

By default, the status indicator consists of a single shape. We recommend using this type of status indicator when you need to display a fraction of a value, rather than a specific value.

Status indicator - Shape only
Status indicator - Shape only

Shape with a Fixed Label

This type of status indicator includes not only a shape, but also a label that uses semantic colors defined for the the value thresholds of the status indicator. In addition, you can switch between different alignment options, such as left, right, top, or bottom. We recommended using this type of status indicator when the user needs to see the exact value.

Status indicator - Shape and label
Status indicator - Shape and label

Types

Linear Fill

Most shapes can be filled linearly. You can set the shape to be filled from the left, right, top, or bottom, or define a specific angle for filling.

Status indicator with linear fill
Status indicator with linear fill

Circular Fill

For round shapes, you can use the circular fill.

Status indicator with circular fill
Status indicator with circular fill

Filling Sequence

The sequential fill option is useful when the shape consists of multiple parts. You can fill the parts sequentially one by one, or set your own filling order.

Status indicator with filling sequence
Status indicator with filling sequence

Grouping

You can group several shapes together and decide how the filling should be orchestrated among the shapes in this group.

Status indicator grouping
Status indicator grouping

Thresholds

You can set one or more thresholds for each status indicator and assign a color to each threshold. The color changes when a threshold has been exceeded. Only use thresholds and semantic colors if they are meaningful to the user. Do not use them for decoration.

Status indicator tresholds
Status indicator tresholds

Behavior and Interaction

You can define a click event for the status indicator. If the status indicators are grouped, you can define a click event for each status indicator or for the entire group.

Information
When setting a click event for a non-filled shape, we recommend using a darker background color to emphasize that the shape is clickable and not disabled.

Guidelines

Shape Definition

You can download the predefined shapes or create your own custom shapes. For more information on how to create custom shapes correctly, see the API documentation.

Developer Hint
Only circle, rectangle, and path tags are supported inside the SVG file.

Animation Duration

Shape animation follows the motion design principles, with a maximum duration of 250 ms (small moves).

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Menu Button

Unlike a regular button, the menu button features an expand icon that triggers a dropdown menu (sap.ui.unified.Menu). The menu button was introduced to address numerous limitations of the action sheet. By default, the menu is positioned below the button, but it can also be displayed above if there is not enough space.

Usage

Use the menu button if:

  • You need a menu that provides more than one option. Wherever possible, always use the menu button instead of the action sheet, as it offers more options.

Do not use the menu button if:

  • The menu provides only one option. In this case, consider using a button instead.
  • It’s important that the user keeps the context on a phone, and you have only a few actions. In this case, use the action sheet instead.

Responsiveness

On smartphones (size S), the menu opens in a full screen dialog. The button label becomes the title of the dialog. The footer contains a Cancel button. Navigation is available with a Back button.

Menu button – Size S
Menu button – Size S

On tablet and desktop devices (Size M/L), the menu button triggers a cascading dropdown menu.

Menu button, regular and split mode - size M/L
Menu button, regular and split mode - size M/L

Layout

The menu button consists of a button with a label and an expand icon that indicates a menu.

The button has two different modes:

  1. Regular button mode (default): The menu button appears as a regular button. The user clicks or taps it to open a menu. In regular mode, you can use an icon in front of the label description.
  1. Split button mode: The menu button appears as a split button. The user clicks or taps the button to fire the menu’s default action, and clicking/tapping the arrow opens the menu.

The split button is separated into two areas: the label and the icon. The separator between them signals that the two areas result in different actions. The split button supports the emphasized, positive, and negative states of the regular button. The split button consolidates a set of command variations, especially when one of the commands is used more often.

In split mode, the label depends on the default action. If the default action is displayed with an icon only, all the menu items must contain icons.

For more information about cozy and compact modes, see content density.

Width and Truncation

If no fixed width is set, the width of the button is set automatically, depending on the text and the container. The maximum width of the menu button is 12 rem (192 px).

If the label is very long, the maximum width ensures that the menu button is consistent with the width of the menu.

After reaching the maximum width or the set fixed width, the text truncates.

Text-only menu button in compact mode
Text-only menu button in compact mode
Text-only menu button in cozy mode
Text-only menu button in cozy mode
Icon-only menu button in compact mode
Icon-only menu button in compact mode
Icon-only menu button in cozy mode
Icon-only menu button in cozy mode
Menu button with truncated text
Menu button with truncated text

Types

Regular Menu Button

Regular type (default): The user clicks or taps the button to open the menu.

Split Menu Button

The user clicks or taps the button to fire the default action. Clicking or tapping the arrow icon opens a menu.

Regular menu button
Regular menu button
Split menu button
Split menu button

Components

The menu button consists of a button with a label and/or icon and an expanding icon that indicates that a menu is available.

In split mode, the two basic elements – the label and the expanding icon – are separated.

Menu button components
Menu button components

Behavior and Interaction

On Tablets and Desktops

The menu button displays a dropdown menu (sap.ui.unified.Menu) as currently implemented.

  • If the user clicks/taps the menu button, it displays a dropdown menu.
  • If the user selects a menu item, the action is triggered and the menu closes.
  • The menu also closes if the user clicks/taps outside the menu, or if the user clicks/taps the button a second time while the menu is open.
  • The dropdown menu must be displayed in direct connection to the menu button.
  • The dropdown menu must be positioned below the menu button by default. If there is not enough space below, you may display it above the menu button.

On Smartphones

The menu opens in a full screen dialog. The button’s label becomes the title of the dialog.

  • To allow the user to navigate out of the menu, use a Cancel button in the footer.
  • Items with submenus become navigable. Navigation is similar to that used in a popover (sap.m.MessagePopover), in which a “back” button is provided.
  • When the dialog is reopened, it starts again at the top level.

Split Button

Clicking/tapping the label area triggers one of two types of behavior, which the app developer can configure individually:

  • It always triggers the default action set by the app developer. If no default item has been defined, the first item in the menu list becomes the default.
  • It triggers the last action chosen by the user. Initially, it is the default action until the user makes a different selection which then becomes default. The button label changes accordingly. The button has a fixed size and truncates the text if the menu item is longer (as with the combo box).

Expand Icon

If the user clicks or taps the expand icon, the dropdown menu opens.

Styles

The menu button supports all states of the button (sap.m.button).

Default
Default
Positive (property: type = accept)
Positive (property: type = accept)
Transparent
Transparent
Negative (property: type = reject)
Negative (property: type = reject)
Ghost
Ghost
Emphasized
Emphasized

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

  • No links

Implementation

Action Sheet

An action sheet consists of a list of options a user can select from to complete an action. Actions can be clustered if there is not enough space on the screen.

Warning
This control has a number of limitations, which were addressed with the introduction of the menu button. Please use the menu button instead of the action sheet whenever possible.

Usage

Use the action sheet if:

  • You need an option that provides more than one action.
  • It is really important that the user stays in context on a phone.
  • You only have a small number of actions.

Do not use the action sheet if:

  • The menu provides only one option. In this case, consider using a button instead.
  • You need to show a hierarchical menu. In this case, use the menu button instead.
  • Your users would benefit more from a split button, which offers an easily-accessible default action, with the option to include additional actions.

Responsiveness

The action sheet is fully responsive. On smartphones, the actions are displayed as a list inside a dialog. On tablets and desktop devices, the actions are displayed in a popover.

Size S (Smartphone)

Action sheet dialog
Action sheet dialog

Size M (Tablet)

Action sheet popover
Action sheet popover

Size L (Desktop)

Action sheet popover
Action sheet popover

Layout

All elements in the action sheet are left-aligned. Actions are always arranged in order of importance, from top to bottom. The Cancel button uses a negative button type and is centered to differentiate it from the other app actions. The cursor/focus area for buttons within the action spans the full width of the action sheet (which in turn depends on the longest button).

Action sheet popover
Action sheet popover
Action sheet popover
Action sheet popover

Components

The following UI elements can be placed in the action sheet:

Behavior and Interaction

Clicking/Tapping

Depending on the device, a click or tap on the overflow icon (“…”) opens either a popover or a dialog. The user can trigger an action or close the action sheet by clicking or tapping anywhere on the screen. On a smartphone, the dialog can be closed only with the Cancel button.

If the user triggers an action, the action sheet closes automatically and the system provides a message toast.

Guidelines

  • Never use only icons in the action sheet. Display text only or a combination of icon and text.
  • On smartphones, provide a Cancel button to enable the user to close the dialog without triggering an action.
  • Avoid scrolling in actions sheets. If you include too many buttons in an action sheet, users have to scroll to see all the actions in the list. Not only does it take users longer to distinguish between actions, but they also find it difficult to scroll without tapping a button by mistake.
Action sheet dialog
Action sheet dialog

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Switch

The toggle switch mimics a physical switch that allows users to turn individual settings (such as personalization or display settings) “on” or “off”. The initial state of the control (On or Off) is indicated by the inline label. When users change a switch to On, they expect an instantaneous action as soon as the label appears.

Usage

Use the switch if:

  • You need to emphasize the On/Off characteristic within a dialog.
  • You need to clearly show the mode or state that a setting is in.
  • You need a toggle switch for binary settings when changes become effective immediately after the user changes them. For example, if the user needs to set data transmission or accept/reject business objects.
  • The change in the setting takes effect instantaneously.

Do not use the switch if:

  • The user has to choose several options or perform extra steps for changes to become effective. In this case, provide checkboxes to choose options and a Submit or Next button to apply the changes. Also use checkboxes or a list view if the user can select multiple items.
  • The setting that requires a confirmation action or Submit button before it can take effect. In this case, use a checkbox instead.

Types

The switch provides attributes to customize its appearance.

Default switch
Default switch

Inline Label

The default type allows custom text input. We recommend that you avoid labels comprising more than 3 letters. Otherwise, the text truncates and loses its meaning.

Default switch with custom label
Default switch with custom label

Inline Icon for Accepting and Rejecting

The Accept and Reject switch type allows you to use the check and cross icons. Do not use other icons in this context.

Accept and Reject switch with icon and color coding
Accept and Reject switch with icon and color coding

Behavior and Interaction

Switch

The user can switch between two values, such as On and Off.

Styles

Depending on their usage, switches come in different states and markups, but are always active or inactive. The interaction states are as follows:

Switch interaction states
Switch interaction states
Switch Interaction states - Semantic colors
Switch Interaction states - Semantic colors

Guidelines

Replace the On and Off labels if there are more specific labels for the setting. Use any short labels (3–4 characters) that represent binary opposites if they are more appropriate for a particular setting. For example, you might use Show and Hide if the setting is “Show images.”

Do not replace the On or Off label unless you really have to. Use the default labels unless there are other labels that are more specific for the setting.

Do not use labels that are longer than three or four characters. Otherwise, the text becomes truncated and loses its meaning.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Planning Calendar

The planning calendar allows users to see different appointments at the same time and to create new appointments. It allows the user to display appointments for several objects, such as a team calendar, and compare them to each other.

Usage

Use the planning calendar if:

  • You want to compare objects of the same type with each other over a period of time.
  • You require responsive behavior.
  • You have less than 100 lines in the calendar.

Do not use the planning calendar if:

  • You want to show a calendar for one object and a detailed overview of appointments over a long time interval.
  • You want to show a complex or graphical representation. In this case, please use the Gantt chart.
  • You have more than 100 lines in the calendar. In this case, please use the Gantt chart.

Responsiveness

In size S, the control provides pop-in behavior, which allows the user to see as many appointments as possible and to connect them with the corresponding object. If the toolbar contains too many actions for the space available, the overflow icon appears.

The interval section displaying the hours, days, and months is responsive and shows 12 values in size L, 8 values in size M, and 6 values in size S. You can override this behavior, but you should then check that the responsiveness is still working.

Planning calendar - Size L
Planning calendar - Size L
Planning calendar - Size M
Planning calendar - Size M
Planning calendar - Size S
Planning calendar - Size S

Types

You can define what size of interval the calendar should show, and whether multi selection should be possible. Additionally, the row header and the interval appointments are optional.

The control allows multi-select mode to be shown for the list items. This can be used, for example, to delete multiple objects from the view.

An app development team must decide whether to show the planning calendar with or without multi-select mode, or whether users should be able to switch between the two modes. Hiding the interval appointments of every object is optional.

The example opposite shows what the interaction looks like if the user can trigger multi-select mode. When the user clicks or taps the button, a checkbox appears next to each list item and a Select All option is shown. Additional actions can appear or disappear in the calendar toolbar.

The planning calendar can also be used without a row header. In this case, the row header disappears and only the appointments are visible. It can be used to show the calendar of one object. Note that the control was built mainly to compare time slots of different objects. For this reason, the time axis is shown horizontally and, depending on the interval, the appointments might shrink to smaller size. In this case, the text is cut off rather than truncated.

Components

This section describes the various components of the planning calendar.

Parts of the planning calendar
Parts of the planning calendar

The control consists of different parts:

  1. Toolbar
  2. Header
  3. Calendar view
  4. List item
  5. Row header
  6. Row
  7. Appointment
  8. Interval appointment

1. Toolbar

The toolbar is optional and can contain a title as well as app-specific and generic actions.
If you have actions in the toolbar, we recommend that you use a title to describe the purpose of the planning calendar. For more information, check out the toolbar guideline article.

The generic actions are as follows:

  • Search
  • Add Appointment (icon: add)
  • Add New Contact (icon: add-contact)
  • Multi-Select Mode (icon: multi-select)
  • Legend (icon: legend)
  • Settings (icon: action-settings)
  • Full Screen (icon: full-screen/exit-full-screen)

2. Header

The calendar header comprises the left part, which includes an optional switch to see the calendar in a different view (day, month, year), and the right part, which contains the calendar view.

3. Calendar view

The calendar view defines the granularity of the appointments. You can decide what kind of views (Hours, Days, Months, 1 Week, 1 Month) are available by using the view switch, and how many values are shown for each view. There is a default value for the number of values shown. App developers can change this value, but they should then ensure that the app is still responsive.

The 1 Week view always renders a full week. It displays seven days on one screen. The start date is always the beginning of the week  (depending on the locale). It can be found in the view switch as a default view. When applications have this view available, we strongly recommend setting a different number of days displayed in the Days view (more or less than seven). Otherwise, the user might be confused, as the navigation for the two differs.

The 1 Month view shows an entire month. On desktop, the 1 Month view always displays an interval of 31 days. When the displayed month is shorter (28, 29, 30 days), days from the following month are displayed. They have a different visual state and serve as navigation to the following month.

On size M and Size S, the 1 Month view is adaptive. It consists of a calendar and a list of appointments for the selected day.

1-month view - Size S
1-month view - Size S

4. List item

The list item contains the row header, row, appointments, and interval appointments. Each row can show different working and non-working days.

If the users have a specific working schedule, the non-working days can be different on each row. This can be applied not only for weekends, but for also for non-working days based on specific schedule differences.

5. Row header

This identifies the object for which the appointments are shown. The row header pops in if there is not enough space. It can contain a picture or icon, a title, and a subtitle.

6. Row

All appointments that appear for an object are shown here.

App developers can turn the alternating row coloring on or off. By default, the alternating rows option is turned on.

7. Appointment

Appointments display an icon or picture, a title, and a subtitle. Appointments taking place simultaneously are shown one above the other. There are two appointment sizes – regular and half size. While half-sized appointments save space, they do not show a second line with appointment details.

App developers can define the colors of different appointment types, and appointments can be shown as tentative. Appointments are fully colored.

The control can register the click event, but the app development team must define what happens next.

In Months view, appointments within the same calendar week are combined to save space. The combined appointment shows the number of appointments in the same week. If an appointment takes place between two calendar weeks (for example, from Sunday to Monday), it is not included in the combined appointments for either calendar week.

You can show the list of the appointments in a combined appointment in a popover. However, this must be implemented by the app team. The control only provides the click event.

The app developer can disable combined appointments by setting the property GroupAppointmentsMode to Expanded.

Users can copy and paste appointments to a new position in the planning calendar using keyboard combinations (Ctrl/Cmd + Drag and drop to the new position).

8. Interval appointment

Each row can also have interval appointments, which are smaller and always appear at the top of the row. Interval appointments can be used to show appointments that last for a prolonged period of time, such as vacations or workshops.

The app developer can choose to hide the space reserved for interval appointments if no such appointments exist for that time period.

Planning Calendar Legend

To show the types for days and appointments, the planning calendar uses a specific legend control (sap.m.PlanningCalendarLegend).

Users open the planning calendar legend using a standard legend button in the toolbar ( ). Like all other actions in the toolbar, the app developer must add the legend button explicitly.

The app team also needs to decide which container to use for the planning calendar legend. We recommend placing the legend in a popover to keep the context. You can also use a dialog, or, if there is sufficient screen real estate, show the legend as dynamic side content.

The planning calendar legend has two non-collapsible sections containing legend elements. By default, these are called Calendar and Appointments. The app developer can configure the section names using the itemsHeader and appointmentItemsHeader properties. If no elements are available for a section, it is not displayed.

The Calendar section contains standard legend items: Today, Working Day, Non-Working Day, and Selected (only in the 1-month view on mobile). The app team must ensure that the Selected element is added to the planning calendar legend when the planning calendar is viewed in 1-month mode in a smartphone size. This is not provided by the control. If any of the standard legend items are not needed, you can switch them off (property: standardItems).

You can also apply colors for special days in the Calendar section. The planning calendar legend does not automatically use the colors defined for special days in the planning calendar – this must be done by the app team.

The Appointments section contains the color values for the available appointment types. The app developer has to define explicitly which color represents which type. The planning calendar legend does not take the color automatically from the planning calendar.

If combined appointments in the calendar are of the same type (in Months view), they take the color of that type. Combined appointments of different types are marked gray. We also recommend adding the gray color for mixed combined appointments to the Appointments section in the legend.

Planning calendar with legend
Planning calendar with legend
Developer Hint
To prevent waiting time, app developers should load the sap.ui.unified library.

Behavior and Interaction

To create an appointment, the user must trigger an action by clicking the Add   icon in the toolbar. Clicking directly on the row also creates a new appointment.

The user can click on the appointment to see further details. The app development team must define what kind of information is then shown. For example, clicking on an appointment can trigger a popover with detailed information.

A multi-select toggle can also be provided in the toolbar. This can be used, for example, to select multiple people in order to delete them from the planning calendar.

Various tooltips can be shown, but you should not use them to show additional information because users cannot access this functionality on touch devices.

Depending on the current time interval, appointments might be smaller and the text might be cut off, rather than truncated. The user can click or tap the appointment to see the details.

1. View select

The user can change the calendar view with the select control (dropdown). For example, to get an overview of a whole year, the user selects the Months view. Which view is most useful depends on the average length of appointments and the use case.

2. Today action

The user can trigger this action to go back to the current date/moment.

3. Back and forward navigation

The arrows allow the user to navigate to the next or previous interval.

4. Picker

The user can open a date picker to select the start time for the visible interval. What is shown initially in the picker differs depending on the view.

5. Month switch

The month switch is available if the day or month view is selected. It allows the user to switch to a different month.

6. Year switch

Day, month, and year views enable the user to switch between different years.

Navigation parts
Navigation parts

Interaction Flow for Switching Days

There are two ways in which the user can switch to a different day:

  • Clicking or tapping the arrows to navigate to the next or previous interval.
  • Clicking or tapping the date opens the date picker. When the user selects a day, the picker closes and navigates the user to the selected value.

Snapping Header

The header area of the planning calendar can remain fixed on top of the screen (property: stickyHeader), which allows users to view calendars with a lot of rows without losing the context.

Header snaps to top when scrolling down
Header snaps to top when scrolling down

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop can be used to move appointments (to enable Drag and Drop use property: enableAppointmentDragAndDrop). Moving an appointment automatically changes its start and end times (for example, if an appointment is scheduled from 1:00-2:00 PM, the user can drag it and change the time from 2:00-3:00 PM) . When dragged, the appointment is shown as a ghost element on the mouse cursor. Drop target areas are indicated to the user with a placeholder.

In the “Hours” view, the appointments can be moved to a specific new time, with the placeholder snapping at every 30 minutes. In the “Days” view, the appointment can be moved to a different day. The placeholder indicates the target day. On drop the appointment is moved to that day but keeps its previous start and end hour. The interaction is the same for the “Months” view. The placeholder indicates the target month and, when dropped, the appointment is moved to that month. The start and end hour and start and end day remain the same.

Appointments can be moved between rows. Note that additional coding may be needed to determine whether all calendar users will be able to perform this action.

Users can create new appointments by clicking, dragging and releasing on an empty space in the content area. The control also allows users to change the duration of an appointment by clicking and dragging one side of the appointment container. These two options are only available for desktop devices.

Combined appointments and interval appointments are not draggable.

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop

Guidelines

Switching the Row Header

To enable end users to rearrange the planning calendar by switching the row header, you can implement a flexible row header. This is not done by the control and must be implemented by the app development team.

The list items in the row header can be a value of any attribute of an appointment. The appointment attributes are part of app-specific content, so they should be specified by the app development team. The control does not provide default attributes.

Our guideline is to use the select control in the place of the calendar title. The select control will contain all the attributes that can serve as the row header. When a different attribute is selected, the calendar is rearranged accordingly. You can also add a counter after the list items to indicate how many appointments fall into a specific group.

It is also possible to have both the calendar title and select control, in which case you should have first the title and then the select.

On small screen sizes, use select instead of the calendar title. If you want to keep the calendar title, place select in the overflow menu.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Micro Chart

Micro charts help you visualize a small number of data points in a small, non-interactive way. They can be embedded in tiles, SAP Smart Business drilldowns, and any SAPUI5 container (such as SAPUI5 tables).

Usage

Use the micro chart if:

  • You want to provide tracking at a glance.
  • You want to display changes in the data in an easy and condensed way.

Do not use the micro chart if:

  • You are looking for interactive analytics. Use the analytical card instead.
  • You want to display extensive data. Use the vizFrame chart instead.

Responsiveness

All micro charts are fully responsive. The size of the control adapts automatically to the size of the surrounding container and does not have a defined width or height. Alternatively, you can use the size property with the control, which allows you to render the micro charts in the available fixed sizes (XS, S, M, L, Auto and Responsive).

Types

The following micro charts are currently available:



Choosing the Correct Chart Type

Charts are used to visually represent the relationships between numeric values. In order to choose the correct chart type, it’s important to define the type of relationship you want to illustrate.

Ranking

If you want to rank items from highest to lowest, or vice versa, we recommend using the comparison (bar) micro chart. For time-based categories, the column micro chart is more appropriate.

Micro charts for ranking
Micro charts for ranking

Comparison

To compare items that don’t have a particular order, you can use the comparison micro chart (offering category and value labels for each part) or the column micro chart.

Sometimes it can also be useful to show when a certain value reaches or exceeds a reference point (for example, when an actual value is compared to a target or forecast). In such cases, use a bullet micro chart. Keep in mind that the bullet micro chart shows data points for given points in time. Do not use it to show a time series.

To compare value totals within and across different categories, you can use the stacked bar micro chart.

Micro charts for comparison
Micro charts for comparison

Variation over Time

By convention, time is represented horizontally from left to right which means it’s best to use the horizontal axis to represent the time in chart visualizations.

To show changes in measures over time, you can use the line micro chart, the column micro chart, and the area micro chart. The exact chart type depends on the type of change you want to visualize.

If you want to emphasize the trend over time, use the area micro chart (which provides information for actual and target values, visualized and compared to threshold areas) or the line micro chart. If you want to emphasize the values themselves, use the column micro chart.

Micro charts for variation over time
Micro charts for variation over time

Part to Whole

You can use several chart types that depict the contribution of individual values to a whole.

The typical chart for visualizing part of a whole is the Harvey ball micro chart. This is most suitable if you want to display a single value compared to its total. To show a single percentage value, use the radial micro chart.

The stacked bar micro chart works best for visualizing different values as part of one whole; its bars are shown next to each other. The comparison micro chart is better if you want to compare parts to each other and display category labels and value labels associated with each part.

Micro charts for part to whole
Micro charts for part to whole

Deviation

These chart types visualize the difference or variance between two values (or two sets of values).

To show a time-related deviation between sets of values, use the area micro chart (for example, to show the difference between actual expenses and target expenses), or the line micro chart.

If you want to emphasize the deviating values, use the column micro chart (suitable for showing variances), or the comparison micro chart (offering category and value labels).

The bullet micro chart shows the difference between two values (actual and target) or three values (actual, target, and forecast) at a given point in time.

The delta micro chart helps to visualize a delta value (difference) between two main key figures, which can be time-related or category-based.

Micro charts for deviation
Micro charts for deviation

Distribution

To visualize how values are distributed within a set, we recommend using the column micro chart or the comparison micro chart (offering category and value labels). The stacked bar micro chart shows the distribution of values as part of a whole.

If you want to emphasize the shape of the distribution over time, use the line micro chart.

Micro charts for distribution
Micro charts for distribution

Behavior and Interaction

Clicking/Tapping (Optional)

The micro charts include one interaction: a click event that can be switched on or off.

“No data” Text

When data is missing, a white rectangular placeholder with the text “No data” is shown instead of the chart. The size of the placeholder depends on the size of the chart. No labels and tooltips are shown. The “No data” placeholder can be focused, but it’s not possible to attach a click event to it.

Area micro chart without data
Area micro chart without data
Comparison micro chart without data
Comparison micro chart without data
Line micro chart without data
Line micro chart without data
Bullet micro chart without data
Bullet micro chart without data
Delta micro chart without data
Delta micro chart without data
Radial micro chart without data
Radial micro chart without data
Column micro chart without data
Column micro chart without data
Harvey Ball micro chart without data
Harvey Ball micro chart without data
Stacked bar micro chart without data
Stacked bar micro chart without data

Guidelines

“No data” Text

If the micro chart is placed in the cell of a table and there is no data for the chart, leave the cell blank (empty).

Micro charts without data in table cells
Micro charts without data in table cells

If the chart is used in the micro chart facet of the object page header and data is missing, make sure the footer of the facet is removed as well if it doesn’t add any value for the user.

Micro charts without data in the object page header
Micro charts without data in the object page header

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Micro Chart

Micro charts help you visualize a small number of data points in a small, non-interactive way. They can be embedded in tiles, SAP Smart Business drilldowns, and any SAPUI5 container (such as SAPUI5 tables).

Usage

Use the micro chart if:

  • You want to provide tracking at a glance.
  • You want to display changes in the data in an easy and condensed way.

Do not use the micro chart if:

  • You are looking for interactive analytics. Use the analytical card instead.
  • You want to display extensive data. Use the vizFrame chart instead.

Responsiveness

All micro charts are fully responsive. The size of the control adapts automatically to the size of the surrounding container and does not have a defined width or height. Alternatively, you can use the size property with the control, which allows you to render the micro charts in the available fixed sizes (XS, S, M, L, Auto and Responsive).

Types

The following micro charts are currently available:



Choosing the Correct Chart Type

Charts are used to visually represent the relationships between numeric values. In order to choose the correct chart type, it’s important to define the type of relationship you want to illustrate.

Ranking

If you want to rank items from highest to lowest, or vice versa, we recommend using the comparison (bar) micro chart. For time-based categories, the column micro chart is more appropriate.

Comparison

To compare items that don’t have a particular order, you can use the comparison micro chart (offering category and value labels for each part) or the column micro chart.

Sometimes it can also be useful to show when a certain value reaches or exceeds a reference point (for example, when an actual value is compared to a target or forecast). In such cases, use a bullet micro chart. Keep in mind that the bullet micro chart shows data points for given points in time. Do not use it to show a time series.

To compare value totals within and across different categories, you can use the stacked bar micro chart.

Variation over Time

By convention, time is represented horizontally from left to right which means it’s best to use the horizontal axis to represent the time in chart visualizations.

To show changes in measures over time, you can use the line micro chart, the column micro chart, and the area micro chart. The exact chart type depends on the type of change you want to visualize.

If you want to emphasize the trend over time, use the area micro chart (which provides information for actual and target values, visualized and compared to threshold areas) or the line micro chart. If you want to emphasize the values themselves, use the column micro chart.

Part to Whole

You can use several chart types that depict the contribution of individual values to a whole.

The typical chart for visualizing part of a whole is the Harvey ball micro chart. This is most suitable if you want to display a single value compared to its total. To show a single percentage value, use the radial micro chart.

The stacked bar micro chart works best for visualizing different values as part of one whole; its bars are shown next to each other. The comparison micro chart is better if you want to compare parts to each other and display category labels and value labels associated with each part.

Deviation

These chart types visualize the difference or variance between two values (or two sets of values).

To show a time-related deviation between sets of values, use the area micro chart (for example, to show the difference between actual expenses and target expenses), or the line micro chart.

If you want to emphasize the deviating values, use the column micro chart (suitable for showing variances), or the comparison micro chart (offering category and value labels).

The bullet micro chart shows the difference between two values (actual and target) or three values (actual, target, and forecast) at a given point in time.

The delta micro chart helps to visualize a delta value (difference) between two main key figures, which can be time-related or category-based.

Distribution

To visualize how values are distributed within a set, we recommend using the column micro chart or the comparison micro chart (offering category and value labels). The stacked bar micro chart shows the distribution of values as part of a whole.

If you want to emphasize the shape of the distribution over time, use the line micro chart.

Behavior and Interaction

Clicking/Tapping (Optional)

The micro charts include one interaction: a click event that can be switched on or off.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Line Micro Chart

A line chart is a basic type of chart used in many fields. It displays information as a series of data points connected by a line. The chart is often used to visualize a trend over time.

The line micro chart can be embedded into a table, list, tile, or header.

Usage

Use the line micro chart if:

You want to visualize the shape.

Use this option to show a trend or sparkline. By default, the chart is rendered in blue, but application developers can set any color for the chart using the names for semantic colors or names from the qualitative palette.

Line micro chart - Sparkline
Line micro chart - Sparkline

You want to show data points that are above or below a certain threshold.

Note that the threshold can also be set to zero.

In addition to data points, you can use two different colors for the lines. We recommend that you use only semantic colors for this option, such as green for values above the threshold, and red for values below the threshold.

Line micro chart - Data points above and below a threshold
Line micro chart - Data points above and below a threshold

You want to show one or two focus points.

Use this option to display a trend or sparkline to focus on one or two special values, such as the first and/or last value of the chart. By default, the chart is rendered in blue, but application developers can choose another color for the chart line and data points from the qualitative palette.

Line micro chart - 2 focus points
Line micro chart - 2 focus points

You want to show one or two focus points with semantic colors.

Use this option to display a trend or sparkline to focus on one or two special values with a semantic meaning, such as the first and/or last value above or below a certain threshold. Note that the threshold can also be set to zero.

Line micro chart - 2 focus points with semantic meaning
Line micro chart - 2 focus points with semantic meaning

Do not use the line micro chart if:

You have scenarios that do not depict time periods.

Responsiveness

See the micro chart overview article.

Layout

Line micro chart in a tile or facet

The chart with all functionalities and options mentioned above can be embedded in a tile or header facet. It will use the full height and width of the control.

Note: The title of the tile or header facet should clearly express the value of the threshold if it is not equal to zero, such as values above and below 50.

Line micro chart in a tile with data points above and below the zero threshold
Line micro chart in a tile with data points above and below the zero threshold
Line micro chart (sparkline) in a tile with no semantic meaning
Line micro chart (sparkline) in a tile with no semantic meaning
Line micro chart in a tile with focus on first and last data points
Line micro chart in a tile with focus on first and last data points
Line micro chart in a tile with a semantic focus point and KPI value
Line micro chart in a tile with a semantic focus point and KPI value

Line Micro Chart in a Table or List

You can embed a line micro chart with all its features in a table or list.

Please note: Use the manual scale if you intend to synchronize the chart visualization.

Line micro chart in a table with values above and below a threshold
Line micro chart in a table with values above and below a threshold
Line micro chart in a table - Smaller size
Line micro chart in a table - Smaller size
Line micro chart in a table with 4 focus points - First/last and min/max value
Line micro chart in a table with 4 focus points - First/last and min/max value
Line micro chart in a table with data points hidden
Line micro chart in a table with data points hidden

Components

To present the line micro chart in an appealing way, application developers can set several properties.

Data points

The line micro chart can display or hide data points. To display data points, we recommend that you use 4 (for quarters) to 12 (for months) data points per chart. The responsive behavior of the chart hides data points if there is not enough space to display them.

If data points have semantic colors (such as green for positive, orange for critical, and red for negative values), the line is colored grey.

If data points do not have a semantic meaning, application developers can assign any color from the qualitative palette. Note that same color is then also applied to the line.

Alternatively, you can show a line-only chart, with all the data points hidden. In this case, you can use up to two colors per chart. If the values relate to a threshold, we recommend using semantic colors for the line to highlight values above or below the threshold.

Line micro chart - Data points
Line micro chart - Data points

Focus points

Unlike data points, focus points highlight specific values, such as the first and/or last value of a time series. Neutral focus points are colored blue. Focus points with a semantic meaning are colored green, orange, or red.
Focus points are always displayed regardless of the size of the chart.

Line micro chart - Focus points
Line micro chart - Focus points

Threshold line

You can set a threshold line. If the threshold isn’t zero, include its value in the title of the tile, header facet, or column in lists and tables to ensure that the chart is not misleading for the user.

Line micro chart with threshold line
Line micro chart with threshold line

Labels

The labels for the line micro chart are optional. Use the bottom labels to indicate the beginning and the end of the time period. Use the top labels to show the corresponding values for the beginning and the end of the chart. Ensure that the labels for the values are not truncated.

Line micro chart with labels
Line micro chart with labels

Scale

Application developers can set the scale manually or automatically. If the threshold is included in the scale, the chart always renders a horizontal reference line.

Use auto scale for lists and tables if you want to display a trend/sparkline per list/table element independently of other list/table elements.

Use the manual scale if list/table entries need to be synchronized. Entering the scale manually ensures that all charts within the list/table are comparable.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Line Micro Chart

A line chart is a basic type of chart used in many fields. It displays information as a series of data points connected by a line. The chart is often used to visualize a trend over time.

The line micro chart can be embedded into the table, list, tile and header.

Usage

Use the line micro chart if:

You want to visualize the shape.

Use this option to show a trend or sparkline. By default, the chart will be rendered in blue, but application developers can set any color for the chart, either with the names of semantic colors or color names from the sequential palette.

Line micro chart - Sparkline
Line micro chart - Sparkline

You want to show data points which are above or below a certain threshold.

Use this option to show values which are above or below a certain threshold. Note that the threshold can be set at zero as well.

In addition to data points, you can use two different colors for the lines. We recommended that you use only semantic colors for this option, such as green for values above the threshold, and red for values below the threshold.

Line micro chart - Data points above and below a threshold
Line micro chart - Data points above and below a threshold

You want to show one or two focus points.

Use this option to display a trend or sparkline to focus on one or two special values, such as the first and/or last value of the chart. By default, the chart will be rendered in blue, but application developers can choose another color for the chart line and data points from the sequential palette.

Line micro chart - 2 focus points
Line micro chart - 2 focus points

You want to show one or two focus points with semantic colors.

Use this option to display a trend or sparkline to focus on one or two special values with semantic meaning, such as the first and/or last value above or below a certain threshold. Note that the threshold can be set to zero as well.

Line micro chart - 2 focus points with semantic meaning
Line micro chart - 2 focus points with semantic meaning

Do not use the line micro chart if:

You have scenarios that do not depict time periods.

Line micro chart in a tile or facet

The chart with all functionalities and options mentioned above can be embedded in a tile or header facet. It will use the full height and width of the control.

Note: The title of the tile or header facet should clearly express the value of the threshold if it is not equal to zero, such as values above and below 50.

Line micro chart in a tile with data points above and below the zero threshold
Line micro chart in a tile with data points above and below the zero threshold
Line micro chart (sparkline) in a tile with no semantic meaning
Line micro chart (sparkline) in a tile with no semantic meaning
Line micro chart (sparkline) in a tile with no semantic meaning
Line micro chart (sparkline) in a tile with no semantic meaning
Line micro chart in a tile with focus on first and last data point
Line micro chart in a tile with focus on first and last data point
Line micro chart in a tile with semantic focus point and KPI value
Line micro chart in a tile with semantic focus point and KPI value

Line micro chart in a table or list

The chart with all functionalities and options mentioned above can be embedded in a table or list.

Please note: Use manual scale if you intend to synchronize the chart visualization.

Line micro chart in a table with values above and below a threshold
Line micro chart in a table with values above and below a threshold
Line micro chart in a table - Smaller size
Line micro chart in a table - Smaller size
Line micro chart in a table with 4 focus points - First/last and min/max value
Line micro chart in a table with 4 focus points - First/last and min/max value
Line micro chart in a table with data points hidden
Line micro chart in a table with data points hidden

Responsiveness

See the micro chart overview article.

Components

To present the line micro chart in an appealing way, application developers can set several properties.

Data points

The line micro chart can display or hide data points. To display data points, we recommend that you use 4 (for quarters) to 12 (for months) data points per chart. The responsive behavior of the chart will hide data points when there is not enough space to display them.

If data points are colored with a semantic meaning (such as green for positive, orange for critical, and red for negative values), the line will be colored grey.

If data points do not have a semantic meaning, application developers can assign any color from the sequential palette. Please note that the line will have this color as well.

As well, the chart can also be displayed as line only, with all data points hidden. Application developers can set up to two colors per chart for this option. We recommend that you use semantic colors for the line to highlight values above or below a certain threshold, for example.

Line micro chart - Data points
Line micro chart - Data points

Focus points

Unlike data points, focus points highlight specific values, such as the first and/or last value of a time series. Focus points can either be colored neutral blue, green, orange, or red if they contain a semantic meaning.
Focus points are always displayed regardless of the size of the chart.

Line micro chart - Focus points
Line micro chart - Focus points

Threshold line

You can set a threshold line. If the threshold doesn’t equal zero, include its value in the title of the tile, header facet, or column in lists and tables to ensure that the chart is not misleading for the user.

Line micro chart with threshold line
Line micro chart with threshold line

Labels

The labels for the line micro chart are optional. Use the bottom labels to indicate the beginning and the end of the time period. Use the top labels to show the corresponding values for the beginning and the end of the chart. Ensure that the labels for the values are not truncated.

Line micro chart with labels
Line micro chart with labels

Scale

Application developers can set the scale manually or automatically. If the threshold is included in the scale, the chart will always render a horizontal reference line.

Use auto scale for lists and tables if you want to display a trend/sparkline per list/table element independent from other list/table elements.

Use manual scale if list/table entries need to be synchronized. Entering the scale manually will ensure that all charts are comparable within the list/table.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Micro Process Flow

Intro

The micro process flow control enables you to visualize the state of individual items in a linear workflow, and is suitable for embedding into a list or a table.

Micro process flow in a responsive table
Micro process flow in a responsive table

Usage

Use the micro process flow if:

  • You need to show the state of each step in a linear, multi-step process.
  • Users need to see the progress of multiple items displayed in a list or table at a glance.

Do not use the micro process flow if:

Responsiveness

The micro process flow is responsive and adapts to the size of its parent container. If the micro process flow is too long for the parent container’s width, you can choose how it should behave:

  • Simple wrap: Steps that don’t fit into the width of the parent container wrap to a new line.
Simple wrap behaviour of micro process flow
Simple wrap behaviour of micro process flow
  • Overflow: Navigation arrows appear on both sides of the micro process flow, with the number of hidden steps indicated next to each arrow. By clicking the navigation arrows, users can scroll horizontally through all of the steps in the micro process flow.
Overflow behaviour of micro process flow
Overflow behaviour of micro process flow

The micro process flow control supports cozy and compact form factors.

Micro process flow in compact mode
Micro process flow in compact mode
Micro process flow in cozy mode
Micro process flow in cozy mode

Layout

The micro process flow acts as a generic container in which process steps are laid out linearly along the horizontal axis. The control provides the following layout options:

  • Default: The process steps appear as icons with a circular background, which use semantic colors and provide click events. You can choose from different icons provided by the SAP icon font.
Default layout with a circular background
Default layout with a circular background
Custom layout using Status Indicator control
Custom layout using Status Indicator control
Custom layout using Micro Chart control
Custom layout using Micro Chart control
Warning
Make sure that you replace the default tooltip texts from the original icons or controls with the names of individual steps in the process. For example, Payment, Shipping, Delivery. For more information, see Using Tooltips.

Types

Micro process flow with dependent steps (default)

A connector line appears between the process step and the step that follows it. Use this type when the completion of a step is a precondition for the subsequent step.

Micro process flow with dependent steps
Micro process flow with dependent steps
Information
When customizing the width of the connector lines, the minimum width must not be less than the default width, and the maximum width must not exceed the step width or step height (whichever is greater).

You can also indicate the state of the transition between two steps with a suitable icon.

Micro process flow with transition state
Micro process flow with transition state
Information
The width of the icon must not exceed 60% of the connector line’s width. The height of the icon must not exceed the size of the step node.

Micro process flow with independent steps

Steps are not connected and can be processed in arbitrary order. Connector lines and transition states are not required.

Micro process flow with independent steps
Micro process flow with independent steps

Behavior and Interaction

Popover

We recommend adding an on-click popover for each step to provide more details.

Information
Use the standard Popover control. For each step, add a click event that will invoke the popover.
Micro process flow with on-click popover
Micro process flow with on-click popover

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Icon Tab Bar

The icon tab bar comprises a series of tabs that each link to a different content area or view. You can use it for navigation within an object, or as a filter.

There are two key use cases:

  • You want to let users navigate between different object facets in the object details area.
  • You want to let users filter lists, and give them the option of calling up the entire list, or only items with a specific attribute.

In both cases, the user switches between tab pages by clicking or tapping the respective tab.

Usage

Use the icon tab bar if:

  • Your business objects need to show multiple facets at the same time.
  • You want to allow the user to browse through these facets.
  • You need a prominent or very visual filter on top of a list.
  • You have clear-cut process steps that need to be visualized.

Do not use the icon tab bar if:

  • You plan to use only one single tab.

Responsiveness

The icon tab bar stretches horizontally, and soon runs out of space on small screens. It responds to limited space by offering a scrolling mechanism.

Responsiveness – Icon tabs
Responsiveness – Icon tabs
Responsiveness – Text tabs
Responsiveness – Text tabs

In addition to the responsive overflow behavior, the icon tab bar can be forced into compact mode or even react dynamically to the application’s global density setting. See the Tab Density section for details.

Layout

The horizontal layout of the icon tab bar never changes. The tabs always appear side by side. However, there are several types of tab bar to choose from. These are described in detail below.

Types

You can use the icon tab bar control to build the following types of tab bars:

  • Text only
  • Icon tabs
  • Tabs as filters
  • Tabs as process steps

Text Only

The text-only variant is one of the most common types. It allows longer labels, and can also display counters next to the text to indicate the number of items on the tab page.

Unlike all other tab variants, the labels do not get truncated. The full text is always shown. As a result, you need to ensure that your labels do not become too long. They should still be easy to read on smaller screens.

If you use text-only tabs, make sure that the UpperCase property is disabled and that you enter the labels in title case (for example: Approval Flow).

Types – Text-only without counters
Types – Text-only without counters
Types – Text-only with inline counters
Types – Text-only with inline counters

Counters and Text Tabs

If counters are used, set the property HeaderMode to “Inline” so the counters appear in brackets after the labels.

Do not use the old layout that shows the counters on top of the labels (Headermode = “Standard”).

Do
Counters – Inline layout ('HeaderMode' set to 'Inline')
Counters – Inline layout ('HeaderMode' set to 'Inline')
Don't
Counters – Old layout ('HeaderMode' set to 'Standard')
Counters – Old layout ('HeaderMode' set to 'Standard')

Icon Tabs

Icon tabs are also common tab types. These round tabs can be populated with any icon from the SAP icon font.

Labels are optional. If you decide to use labels, use them for all tabs. You can use counters as needed.

Types – Icons with counters
Types – Icons with counters

Please note that starting with SAPUI5 version 1.40, you should only use the horizontal type of label (icon and label side by side).

If your labels get truncated, consider using shorter labels or text tabs (without icons), since text tabs cannot get truncated.

Types – Icons with counters and labels
Types – Icons with counters and labels
Types – Icon-only
Types – Icon-only

Tabs as Filters

If you build the tab bar as a filter, it can comprise two parts:

  • An “all” tab on the left (optional)
    This tab shows the total number of items, and describes the type of item (for example, 189 Products).
  • Tabs for specific filters
    Use the tab text to indicate the filter attribute.
    We strongly recommend showing a counter on every tab.
Types – Filter
Types – Filter

Tabs as Process Steps

You can also use the tab bar to depict a process. In this case, each tab stands for one step.

To connect the steps, use the triple-chevron icon ( ) from the SAP icon font (technical name: process).

Types – Process
Types – Process
Developer Hint
When using icons with labels, add a comment in the properties file to make editors and translators aware that space is limited.
Example: Label for icon tab on detail screen. Max 14-16 characters (depending on character width).

Test whether your labels and their translations are displayed in full, and do not get truncated.

Behavior and Interaction

Clicking/Tapping on a Tab

To navigate through the views, the user clicks or taps the tabs.

Optional behavior: If the user clicks or taps a tab that’s already open, the container collapses. It opens again when the user clicks any tab.

Use the expandable property to specify whether users can collapse the tab container (default = “true”):

  • Let users collapse the container if there is additional content below the container, and the information inside the container is not always needed.
  • If there is no content below the tab container, set the expandable property to “false”.

The expandable property controls the initial state of the container. Do not change the default state (“true”).

Changing the Order of Tabs

Applications can allow users to rearrange the tab order when working in a desktop environment (property: enableTabReordering). If this feature is enabled, users can use drag and drop to reorder tabs, either directly on the tab bar or inside the overflow menu. It is also possible to drag and drop tabs from the tab bar to the overflow menu and vice versa.

Please note that this feature is not available for tabs as process steps to ensure that consecutive steps do not get mixed up.

Interaction – Rearranging tabs
Interaction – Rearranging tabs
Interaction – Rearranging tabs in the overflow menu
Interaction – Rearranging tabs in the overflow menu
Interaction – Rearranging tabs between bar and overflow menu
Interaction – Rearranging tabs between bar and overflow menu

Styles

Tab Density

The default responsive design of the icon tab bar applies to both compact and cozy modes. However, in addition to this responsive behavior, the control can be forced into a compact mode, or even react dynamically to the application’s global density setting. This feature can be used to:

  • Save vertical space on the page (applies to both text and icon tabs)
  • Save horizontal space (icon tabs only; this is especially helpful when there are many tabs)
  • Generally use less space on mobile devices
  • Reduce noise when there are already more important visual elements on the screen (primarily icon tabs)

The property for the override is called tabDensityMode, which can be set to “Cozy”, “Compact”, or “Inherit”. “Cozy” is the default setting that renders the control in its regular dimensions. “Compact” reduces the control’s height and icon sizes (if applicable), even if there would be enough space for the cozy design. “Inherit” instructs the control to follow the global density mode defined for the application. For backward compatibility, the default setting is “Cozy”.

The following image shows some types of tabs with their default style (cozy, left) and the reduced density mode (compact, right).

Style – Tab density
Style – Tab density

Colors

The two different styles (round tabs and text only) are discussed in the Types section.

In both cases, you can use colors to give users additional orientation.

Information
Do not use colors for decoration only. Colors should always indicate a status that is relevant to the user.
When using colors, stick to the semantic colors provided by visual design. Do not hard-code color values. Instead, use the CSS extension “Less”.

Only use semantic colors if it is important for users to know that they need to take action (for example, to indicate errors or critical situations requiring action). Otherwise, use the neutral default colors.

This example shows a process where one step is indicating an error. Since the other tabs have neutral colors, it is clear that they do not contain errors. Coloring them green to show that they are OK is unnecessary, and would reduce the severity of the red tab.

Styles – Colors
Styles – Colors

Guidelines

Apply the styles as follows:

  • If you have only a few tabs that can easily be visualized with icons, use the icon-only tabs. If a short description is needed, use icons and labels.
  • If the content cannot easily be identified by an icon, use the text-only tabs. They also allow for longer labels.
  • If you are using the icon tab bar in the object view floorplan, use either icon-only or text-only tabs.
    Icons only:
    Use this option if you have only 4-5 tabs that can be very clearly identified by their icon.
    Text only:
    Use this option if you have more than 4-5 tabs, or if there are no clear icons to represent the content. Set the property HeaderMode to “Inline”.
Do
Counters – Inline layout ('HeaderMode' set to 'Inline')
Counters – Inline layout ('HeaderMode' set to 'Inline')
Don't
Counters – Old layout ('HeaderMode' set to 'Standard')
Counters – Old layout ('HeaderMode' set to 'Standard')

If you use icon tabs, ensure the following:

  • The icons clearly identify the content on the tab pages.
  • Each tab has a unique icon. Do not use the same icon more than once.
  • The icons are easily distinguishable.
  • Any icons between tabs (for example, as separators or connectors) are visually very different from the icons on the tabs.
  • Either all or none of the icons have labels.

Implement the focus as follows:

  • By default, show the first tab as open. This is the initial setting provided by the control.
    Note: Technically, you can also override the initial selection. However, this is not recommended.
  • Later on, you can show the tab last selected by the user.

Additional guidelines:

  • Do not display a loading indicator above the tab while the number for the item count is loading.
  • Handle empty tabs as follows:
    • Hide tabs that do not contain any information, and do not allow the user to create content..
    • Show empty tabs that allow users to create content, such as notes or attachments.
  • Only use the tab bars to navigate between tabs. Do not use any other navigation links. For example, do not let users click an item in tab A that takes them to tab B. This type of cross-navigation inside a container is confusing, and cannot be handled by the back navigation.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

  • No links

Implementation

Dialog

The dialog control (sap.m.dialog) interrupts the current app process to prompt the user for information or for a response. It forces a decision or a confirmation that needs to be signed off by the user.

Usage

Use the dialog if:

  • You want to display complex content, but don’t want the user to navigate away from the current page.
  • You want to display an additional step or process that needs to be confirmed by a user action.
  • You want to enable the user to create an object with a small number of fields (up to 8 fields).

Do not use the dialog if:

  • You want to display a simple message. Use the message box instead.
  • You just want to confirm a successful action.
  • You do not want to interrupt the user.
  • You want to enable users to create an object with more than 8 fields. Use an object page instead.

Responsiveness

The dialog provides different behavior on a smartphone than on a tablet or desktop. We distinguish between “cozy” and “compact” dialogs. For more information, see content density.

The buttons in the toolbar are aligned differently on the various devices. On a smartphone, they extend across the entire footer toolbar, but on a tablet or desktop device, they are right-aligned.

Size S (Smartphone)

Full Screen Dialog

We recommend displaying dialogs in S size in full screen mode to help users focus on the content of the dialog (property stretch = “true”). The toolbar containing the actions is positioned at the bottom of the dialog.

Full screen dialog - Size S
Full screen dialog - Size S

Position of the Action Buttons

By default, a dialog can have one or two actions, which extend across the entire footer on smartphones.

Alignment of footer actions - Size S
Alignment of footer actions - Size S

When to Open Full Screen or Modal

Always display message dialogs as modals. There is no need to display a simple message in a full screen dialog. If you want to display a simple message, use the message box instead.

If you use standard dialogs, such as value help, open them in full screen mode to help the user can focus on the content of the message. The dialog control offers a stretch property for full screen behavior.

Size M (Tablet)

By default, the dialog can have up to two action buttons in the footer. The action buttons in the toolbar are right-aligned. Use cozy mode on tablet devices.

If the content height increases or is set to more than the screen height, the dialog height stops at 4 rem from the top and bottom. The user can then scroll through the content area.

Size L (Desktop)

By default, the dialog can have one or two actions. The action buttons on a desktop device are right-aligned. Use compact mode to ensure that the padding and margins are optimized for desktop devices.

If the content height increases or is set to more than the screen height, the dialog height stops at 4 rem from the top and bottom. The user can then scroll through the content area.

Dialog in compact mode - Size L
Dialog in compact mode - Size L

Layout

Position on the Screen

The dialog is positioned in the center of the screen. It opens in a modal window to ensure that it attracts the user’s attention when it displays emergency states.

On a smartphone, the stretch property allows you to achieve full screen behavior.

Behavior and Interaction

Navigation in a Dialog

You can let users navigate to another page within the dialog. On the second page, an arrow at the top of the dialog allows users to navigate back to the first page.

Navigation Pattern List - Size L
Navigation Pattern List - Size L
Navigation Pattern Detail - Size L
Navigation Pattern Detail - Size L

 

Resizable

You can let users change the size of the dialog (property resizable = “true). The resizable indicator then shows in the bottom-right corner of the dialog.

Resizable indicator in the bottom right-hand corner - Size L
Resizable indicator in the bottom right-hand corner - Size L

Draggable

By clicking and holding on the heading, users can drag the dialog to another position (property draggable = “true”).

Dialog can be moved by dragging the title - Size L
Dialog can be moved by dragging the title - Size L

 

Messaging Within a Dialog

Do not show message popovers within dialogs. Use highlighting to show issues with content fields. For more information, see form field validation.

 

Editing and Saving Content

If a dialog is used for editing, keep it simple. If you need more than 8 editable fields, consider other solutions instead, such as navigation to a detail page.

The data in the dialog is only saved when the user click or taps Create or Save. Use form field validation within the dialog to make users aware of any errors.

The data in the dialog is lost if the page is refreshed during the editing process (also in the draft scenario), or if the user chooses Cancel.

Highlighted form fields in a dialog - Size S
Highlighted form fields in a dialog - Size S

 

Types

Standard Dialog

Use the standard dialog unless you need one of the specialized dialogs below. The standard dialog has a header with a grey background, and no icon.

Message Box

The message box is a special type of dialog that is used to display messages quickly. For each type of message, you can decide when to use a dialog. Use the message toast (sap.m.MessageToast) for success messages. For more information, see Message Box.

Components

The dialog contains the following sections and options:

Title: Title text appears in the dialog header.

Subheader (optional): Subheaders appear below the main header. Since the subheader is not part of the content area, it is not scrollable.

Content: This area contains the actual content of the dialog.

Footer with actions: The footer can contain up to two buttons (optional). If no buttons are defined, the default Close button is shown.

Example of a dialog structure (Cozy example)
Example of a dialog structure (Cozy example)

Emphasized Buttons in a Dialog

Always use an emphasized button for the the standard action. Emphasizing the main action in the dialog toolbar helps users to focus on the most likely choice. This saves users time and gives new users a sense of orientation.

Never use an emphasized button for Cancel.

Emphasized button in the dialog toolbar
Emphasized button in the dialog toolbar

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

 

 

 

 

 

 

Visual Filter Bar

The visual filter bar offers a unique way of filtering large data sets through visualizations. This helps users to recognize facts and situations, while reducing the number of interaction steps needed to gain insights or to identify significant single instances.

The visual filter bar allows users to combine measures with filter values. For example, a “Product” might have the filter value “Product Name” and the measure might typically be “Revenue”, “Cost”, or “Quantity”. If you opt for the measure “Revenue”, the chart would show the “Revenue by Product”, enabling the user to filter the data by choosing a particular product name and its revenue.

Chart visualization increases the joy of use and helps users to see relevant data more quickly. For filtering, the visual filter bar uses all of the three types of interactive chartbar chartline chart and donut chart.

Visual filter bar - Size L
Visual filter bar - Size L

Usage

Use the visual filter bar if:

  • You are using analytical list page floorplan.
  • Users need to see both the result and the direct impact of their filter settings in a chart representation.
  • You would like to give users a condensed overview of the data in the dataset.

Do not use the visual filter bar if:

  • You are not using the analytical list page floorplan.
  • Users are not interested in seeing the impact or their filter settings directly in a chart representation.
  • Users are not interested in a condensed overview of the data in the dataset.

Responsiveness and Adaptiveness

The visual filter bar itself is fully responsive. For overall responsiveness within the analytical list page, see the Analytical List Page article.

Layout

The visual filter bar is a composite control built with other responsive controls, such as the header container and the interactive charts. It is used in the header area of the analytical list page, which incorporates the dynamic page layout.

Collapsed Visual Filter Bar

The collapsed visual filter bar takes up less space, leaving most of the screen for displaying the actual results. However, the variant selector in the upper left corner is still available for switching between variants. The user can expand or collapse the filter bar by clicking on the header. If required by the use case, you can expand the filter bar by default.

Visual filter bar - Collapsed
Visual filter bar - Collapsed

On desktop and tablet devices, the collapsed filter bar shows a summary of the filters currently applied. The format of the summary text is:

Filtered By (number of filters): <comma-separated list of the filters currently applied>
Example: Filtered By (2): Country, Product

Up to 5 filters are listed. If more filters have been applied, an ellipsis (…) appears at the end of the string. If no filters have been applied, the summary text is Not Filtered.

Expanded Visual Filter Bar

The expanded visual filter bar also shows a user-defined filter subset of the selected variant. The Adapt Filters link opens the visual filter dialog, where the user can add or hide visual filters. The switch button on the top right switches between the visual filter bar and the standard (input-based) filter bar. The Go button triggers the filter. Note that the Go button is only shown in manual update mode.

Visual filter bar - Expanded
Visual filter bar - Expanded

Structure

In order to achieve filtering through visualization, the visual filter bar uses interactive charts. Currently, three interactive chart types are available: bar chartline chart, and donut chart. Each chart has a dedicated area for the chart title, the (x) link showing the number of applied filters, and the value help icon  . When the user clicks on the (x) link, a popover containing the selected filter values appears. The value help icon opens a value help dialog.

Visual filter bar with interactive charts
Visual filter bar with interactive charts

Filter Title Area

In addition to the chart title, the filter title area also contains a value help icon  and the (x) link, where “x” stands for the number of applied filters. Clicking this link opens a popover with the selected filter values.

Use the following naming convention for the filter title, using title case: <Measure Name> by <Dimension Name> in <Scale Factor> <Unit of Measure>. For example, Project Costs by Project in K EUR, Sales Volume by Commodity in M PC.

Visual filter bar - Title area
Visual filter bar - Title area
Visual filter bar - Filter title
Visual filter bar - Filter title

Bar Chart

The interactive bar chart in the visual filter bar can display only three bars. Based on the measure, they can be sorted ascending or descending. This makes it easy to compare the items and see the highest and lowest values.

Visual filter bar - Interactive bar chart
Visual filter bar - Interactive bar chart

Line Chart

The interactive line chart is used to display variations over a specified period of time. This chart is only used for displaying a time series and can contain only the first or last six time points (for example, last six days, last six months, and so on). 

Do not use a line chart to show categories. Instead, use a bar chart.

Visual filter bar - Interactive line chart
Visual filter bar - Interactive line chart

Donut Chart

The interactive donut chart is best used to display up to three slices. Use this chart if the exact value of each slice is not needed for filtering.

In the visual filter bar, only the top or bottom two values are shown; the rest are aggregated into the Other section.

Visual filter bar - Interactive donut chart
Visual filter bar - Interactive donut chart

Visual Filter Selections

Any data point or segment selected in a chart remains selected when the user changes the measure, chart type, or sort order in any of the charts.

If a selected record falls outside the top or bottom three records being displayed, the (x) status above the chart shows the number of selected records.

Visual fiter bar - Popover with selected values
Visual fiter bar - Popover with selected values
Developer Hint

Do not bind a single visual filter (chart) to more than one ID. This will lead to an incorrectly derived item count in the (x) link. Define separate visual filters instead. If this split is not desired, create a calculated column (dimension) in the back end to represent this combined ID.

Don't
Don't use a relative format for time
Don't use a relative format for time
Do
Use titles that give context
Use titles that give context
Do
Add the year in the title if you display only 4 quarters
Add the year in the title if you display only 4 quarters

Visual Filter Dialog

The filter dialog is launched by clicking the Adapt Filters (number of applied filters) link in the upper right filter area. In the filter dialog for visual filters, the user can choose which filter fields are shown in the visual filter bar.

In this dialog, the user can make the following changes:

  • Add visual filters
  • Delete visual filters
  • Hide visual filters in the visual filter bar
  • Search for visual filters
  • Change the sort order of each visual filter
  • Change the chart type of each visual filter
  • Switch to other measures in the visual filter display

The footer toolbar at the bottom of the dialog provides the following functions:

  • Save: Saves your modified filter set variant. Save and Save As can be provided.
  • Cancel: Closes the dialog and undoes all changes.
  • Restore: Restores the initial variant values. You can hide this button if it does not fit the app use case.
  • Go: Applies the selected filter set.
  • Clear (optional): Clears all filters. Only use this button if it fits the app use case.
Visual filter dialog
Visual filter dialog

Visual Filter Configuration

In the filter dialog, users can configure individual visual filters using the icons in the filter title area:

  • Change the sort order   (not supported for line charts)
  • Switch to a different chart type  
  • Choose between different measures
Visual filter configuration - Sort, chart type, measure
Visual filter configuration - Sort, chart type, measure

Behavior and Interaction

Unlike micro charts, the charts in the visual filter bar are interactive. If you are using live update mode, selecting a filter value triggers data filtering in the content area. Both single and multiple selection are supported.

Selecting Filters

In the visual filter, you can make a selection by clicking on a chart value. To deselect it, you can either click on the same value in the chart again, or click the (x) link showing the number of selected filters, such as (1).

Any data point selected in a chart remains selected, even if the user selects a data point in another chart. Filter values also react to each other.

If a selected record in a chart falls outside the displayed filter values, the selection is visible in the (x) link above the chart, where (x) represents the number of selected records.

Users can select more filter values with the value help.

Personalizing the Visual Filter Bar

Add Visual Filter

Users can add more visual filters via the visual filter dialog. The additional filter groups appear below the Basic filter group, which contains the standard filters for the application. While the Basic filter group is always visible, the additional filter groups are initially collapsed.

The More (x) link in the filter group header indicates the number of filters that have not yet been added, for example More (2). Clicking this link opens a dialog for selecting the additional filter. Once a filter has been selected, it displays under the group header in the visual filter dialog, and the user can customize the individual filter settings (sort order, chart type, measure, display in the visual filter bar).

If all filters in a group have already been added in the visual filter dialog, the More (x) link label in the filter group title switches to Change Filters.

Hide Visual Filter

Users can hide a filter by deselecting the checkbox next to the relevant filter in the filter dialog. This allows the user to hide filters that are rarely changed from the extended filter bar, giving complex filters a more lightweight appearance.

Guidelines

Live Update / Manual Update

The visual filter bar is available in two modes: live update and manual update. In both modes the visual filter charts refresh based on the selection.

Live Update

In live update mode, the filter bar reacts instantly to every input change. Because the content area updates automatically whenever the user changes a filter selection, the Go button is not necessary, and is not shown.

Visual filter bar - Live update mode
Visual filter bar - Live update mode

Manual Update

In manual update mode, the filter results are only updated when the user clicks or taps the Go button that is shown in manual mode. Pressing ENTER on the keyboard also triggers the filter.

Visual filter bar - Manual update mode
Visual filter bar - Manual update mode

Recommendation 

In general, use live update mode, which is more convenient for users. However, consider using manual update mode if the user has to configure multiple filters to obtain a useful result set, or if you expect the resulting traffic to be excessively high.

Chart Types

Choosing the right chart type as a representation for a particular filter will not only increase the joy of use but also will convey the right information to the user. Inappropriate chart types can mislead the user during the filtering process.

In the visual filter bar, you can choose between three interactive chartsbar chartline chart, and donut chart.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Form / Simple Form

Information
This article contains general design guidelines for all forms. These guidelines also apply for smart forms.

For additional hints on smart forms, you can still refer to the existing Forms / Simple Forms / Smart Forms article for guideline version 1.52. However, please note that this page is no longer updated.

Intro

A form is used to present data to the user and to allow users to enter data in a structured way.

The form acts as a container for other UI elements (such as labelsinput fieldscheckboxes, and sliders), while structuring these into a specific layout.

In SAPUI5, forms can be built using two different controls:

With a form, you can easily layout a list of properties and input fields. A form is structured into form containers. Each form container consists of form elements. And each form element consists of a label and an input field.

The simple form control gives you the possibility to achieve the same result as with the form control, but in a much easier way. Inside a simple form, a form control is created along with its form containers and form elements:

  • The layout and structure are defined by the content that is entered.
  • Form containers and form elements are created automatically according to the content type.
  • A title (sap.ui.core.Title (API)) automatically starts a new form group (form container), and a label (sap.m.Label (API)) automatically starts a new row (form element).
  • All other controls following this label will be assigned to its row (form element).

Types

There are three types of forms:

  • Display-only: the data is presented only as label-value field pairs without editable fields.
  • Editable: the data is presented as label-input field pairs, so users can enter data.
  • Mixed: some fields are editable and some are not.
Form control in display only
Form control in display only
Mixed form with editable and non-editable fields
Mixed form with editable and non-editable fields
Developer Hint
The property editable of the form and simple form only changes the height of labels for vertical alignment to a field (editable = true) or text (editable = false). With the form and simple form, it does not switch the whole form between editable and read-only mode, thus changing fields into text and vice versa.
Information
Please consider, that a read-only state of an input element behaves differently (no border and background of the field) within the sap.ui.comp.smartform.SmartForm.

Responsiveness

Always assign the responsive grid layout (sap.ui.layout.form.ResponsiveGridLayout) for your form. Although there is a specific set of form layout controls available for forms and simple forms. These should not be used as they are only available to enable downward compatibility.

Note: For downward compatibility reasons, the default form layout control for the form and simple form is not the responsive grid layout. Therefore, you need to assign the responsive grid layout manually to each form or simple form by using the layout property.

By using the responsive grid layout, the form offers a responsive layout based on a 12-column grid. There are two breakpoints, which result in three supported sizes: L, M, and S. These breakpoints are not the L, M, and S breakpoints of the page. In contrast to the page’s breakpoints, which react to the screen width, the breakpoints of the responsive grid layout react to the width of the form.

Breakpoints

Size S reaches up to 600 px. This means that as soon as the width of the form reaches 601 px, it changes from S to M, because the default value of breakpointM is 600. The value of breakpointM is the first value of the smaller size.

Form with breakpointM – Size S
Form with breakpointM – Size S
Form with breakpointM – Size M
Form with breakpointM – Size M

The property breakpointL between sizes L and M works in the same way: Size M reaches from 601 px to 1024 px. This means that as soon as the width of the form reaches 1025 px, it changes from M to L, because the default value of breakpointL is 1024.

Form with breakpointL – Size M
Form with breakpointL – Size M
Form with breakpointL – Size L
Form with breakpointL – Size L

Also the property breakpointXL between sizes L and XL works in the same way as before: Size L reaches from 1025 px to 1440 px. This means that as soon as the width of the form reaches  1441 px, it changes from L to XL, because the default value of breakpointXL is 1440.

Form with breakpointXL – Size L
Form with breakpointXL – Size L
Form with breakpointXL – Size XL
Form with breakpointXL – Size XL

In general if the page width changes to a smaller size, the width of the form in the next smaller breakpoint is usually reached before the width of the page reaches its breakpoints in that size. For example the width of a form reaches breakpoints M to S before the width of the page reaches the breakpoints from M to S. This happens due to the padding of the container in which the form is placed.

Padding of a container
Padding of a container
Developer Hint
To set the form’s breakpoints individually and to synchronize it with the breakpoints of the page, you can use the breakpointS / breakpointM / breakpointLbreakpointXL. If you are using a simple form, set these properties directly in the simple form control.

Label-Field Ratio

For each size, you can define how many grid columns are used for labels (labelSpanXL, labelSpanL, labelSpanM, labelSpanS), fields (implicitly), and empty grid columns (emptySpanXL, emptySpanL, emptySpanM, emptySpanS).

The optional empty grid columns are placed after the input elements. They avoid excessive stretching of the input fields. This ratio is displayed as x:y:z, where x is the number of grids used by the labels, y stands for the fields, and z for empty columns.

We highly recommend to change the default of the label-field-ratio according to your app’s needs. For more information, see the recommended layouts in the Layout section.

Form with a label-field ratio 3:5:4
Form with a label-field ratio 3:5:4
Developer Hint
To make the properties labelSpanXL, labelSpanL, labelSpanM, and labelSpanS in the responsive grid layout work as expected (e.g. labelSpanL sets the label span in size L) in Forms and SimpleForms, you must change the property adjustLabelSpan from its default true to false.

Otherwise..

  • labelSpanL is used for labels in forms with several form groups arranged in more than one column; it applies for both – M and L screen sizes.
  • labelSpanM is used for labels in forms arranged in one column; it also applies for both M and L screen sizes.
  • The default value of the property adjustLabelSpan is set to true for reasons of backward compatibility.

Input controls like input fields can be displayed in both – cozy and compact mode (for more information, see content density (cozy and compact)To horizontally align a label next to a field, the form has different CSS in cozy mode and compact mode.

Size S (Smartphones and Dialogs)

The form and simple form use a single-column layout within the responsive grid layout in size S by default. This means that the form groups are positioned below each other in a single column and the labels are positioned above the fields to avoid truncation of the labels.

The label-field ratio is 12:12:0 by default:

  • 12 grid columns of the responsive grid layout are used by the labels.
    (A label handles the space of a whole row.)
  • 12 grid columns of the responsive grid layout are used by the fields.
    (A field handles the space of a whole row.)
  • 0 grid columns of the responsive grid layout are used by empty columns.
    (There is no empty space on the right of the field.)
Form in size S
Form in size S

Size M

Size M of the form and simple form also has a single-column layout within the responsive grid layout by default. However, in size M the labels are positioned in the same row as the corresponding input field or value, and form groups are positioned below each other.

The label-field ratio is 2:10:0 by default:

  • 2 grid columns of the responsive grid layout are used by the labels.
  • 10 grid columns of the responsive grid layout are used by the fields.
  • 0 columns of the responsive grid layout are used by empty columns.

Please change the default 2:10:0 according to your app’s needs (see the recommended layouts in the Layout section).

Form in size M
Form in size M

Size L

The form and simple form in size L use a two-column layout within the responsive grid layout by default. That means that the form groups are placed next to each other to have all the information on one screen and to avoid scrolling. In these columns, the labels are positioned in the same row as the corresponding input field or value. So the form groups adopt the Z layout (reading direction in rows, not in columns).

The label-field ratio is 4:8:0 by default:

  • 4 grid columns of the responsive grid layout are used by the labels.
  • 8 grid columns of the responsive grid layout are used by fields.
  • 0 grid columns of the responsive grid layout are used by empty columns.
Form in size L
Form in size L

Size XL

Like the form and the simple form in size L, the size XL uses also a two-column layout within the responsive grid layout by default. To have all the information on one screen and avoid scrolling, the form groups are placed next to each other.  In these columns, the labels are positioned in the same row as the corresponding input field or value. The form groups adopt the Z layout.

The label-field ratio for size XL is 4:8:0 (technically the value is set to -1 and inherits the value of size L, see also the development hint below) by default:

  • 4 grid columns of the responsive grid layout are used by labels.
  • 8 grid columns of the responsive grid layout are used by fields.
  • 0 grid columns of the responsive grid layout are used by empty columns.
Form in size XL
Form in size XL
Developer Hint
For forms and simple forms, the value of the properties labelSpanXL, emptySpanXL and columnsXL are set to -1 and inherit the value of size L (to enable backward compatibility).

Layout

One Page, One Form

If a form contains only one group, do not use a group title – instead, use the form title.

Form with only one group (form title)
Form with only one group (form title)

If the form is the only element on the page and if it has more than one group, you can use the group titles to capture the groups. 

One form with several groups (no form title)
One form with several groups (no form title)

If the form is one of several elements on the page, such as tables and lists, use the form title as its caption.

A form as one of several elements on a page (form title)
A form as one of several elements on a page (form title)

One Page, Many Forms

If you want to emphasize that some groups are very distinct, use several forms on a page instead of one form with several groups. Visually this looks more separated than using a single form with several groups. Give each form a meaningful title. If necessary, you can structure each form with groups as well. In this case, also give the groups a title.

Several forms on a page (emphasized groups)
Several forms on a page (emphasized groups)
Forms with several groups
Forms with several groups

Various Layouts

The following sections give guidance on how to configure the form so that it meets the needs of different sizes. Depending on where you place the form, we highly recommend changing the default and using one of the following layouts according to your app’s needs.

Size S (Smartphones and Dialogs)

Retain the default behavior (single column layout with a label-field ratio 12:12:0).

Form in size S (12:12:0)
Form in size S (12:12:0)

Size M (Tablet) – Full Screen

If you place the form in the details part of a split screen, use a single-column layout with the label-field ratio 4:7:1 (4 grid columns used by the labels, 7 grid columns used by the fields, and 1 grid column used by empty columns).

Form in a split screen – size M (4:7:1)
Form in a split screen – size M (4:7:1)

If you place the form in a full-screen app, use a single-column layout with the label-field ratio 3:5:4 (3 grid columns used by the labels, 5 grid columns used by the fields, and 4 grid columns used by empty columns).

Form in full screen – size M (3:5:4)
Form in full screen – size M (3:5:4)

As explained already in the section Responsiveness (Breakpoints), Size M goes down to 601 px. In this size, the 3:5:4 approach may not be wide enough for longer labels and fields. So if you expect long labels or input values, use the label-field ratio 4:8:0 (4 grid columns used by the labels, 8 grid columns used by the fields, and 0 grid columns used by empty columns).

Form with long labels and fields – size M (4:8:0)
Form with long labels and fields – size M (4:8:0)

If you place the form in a full-screen app and it contains several form groups, use a two-column layout with its label-field ratio of 12:12:0 (12 grid columns used by the labels, 12 grid columns used by the fields, and 0 grid columns used by empty columns).

Form with several form groups (two columns) – size M (12:12:0)
Form with several form groups (two columns) – size M (12:12:0)
Developer Hint
Unlike all other XL-L-M-S properties, labelSpanL and labelSpanM up to SAPUI5 version 1.34 did not follow the XL-L-M-S size paradigm. LabelSpanL set the label span in layouts that contain more than one column, and labelSpanM set the label span in layouts that contain only one column. This has been changed since version 1.34. Due to downward compatibility, the new parameter adjustLabelSpan was necessary. Also due to downward compatibility, its default value is ‘true’, which causes the old behavior of the labelSpan properties. To achieve the new, correct behavior of the labelSpan properties, you must set the property adjustLabelSpan to ‘false’.

Size L (Desktop Screens)

If the form contains a single form group, use a single-column layout with a label-field ratio of 3:5:4 (3 grid columns used by the labels, 5 grid columns used by the fields, and 4 grid columns used by empty columns).

Form with a single form group (one column) – size L (3:5:4)
Form with a single form group (one column) – size L (3:5:4)

If the form contains multiple form groups, you can also use a two-column layout with a label-field ratio of 12:12:0 (12 grid columns used by the labels, 12 grid columns used by the fields, and 0 grid columns used by empty columns). As explained already in the section Responsiveness (Breakpoints), Size L goes down to 1025 px. In this size, long labels that are put next to the fields might not fit on smaller L-sized screens (especially in split apps). Therefore labels are put above fields.

Form with several form groups (two columns) – size L (12:12:0)
Form with several form groups (two columns) – size L (12:12:0)
Developer Hint
Unlike all other XL-L-M-S properties, labelSpanL and labelSpanM up to SAPUI5 version 1.34 did not follow the XL-L-M-S size paradigm. LabelSpanL set the label span in layouts that contain more than one column, and labelSpanM set the label span in layouts that contain only one column. This has been changed since version 1.34. Due to downward compatibility, the new parameter adjustLabelSpan was necessary. Also due to downward compatibility, its default value is ‘true’, which causes the old behavior of the labelSpan properties. To achieve the new, correct behavior of the labelSpan properties, you must set adjustLabelSpan to ‘false’.

Size XL (Desktop Wide Screens)

If the form contains a single form group, use a single-column layout with a label-field ratio of 3:5:4 (3 grid columns used by the labels, 5 grid columns used by the fields, and 4 grid columns used by empty columns).

Form with a single form group (one column) – size XL (3:5:4)
Form with a single form group (one column) – size XL (3:5:4)

The responsive grid layout has the new property singleContainerFullSize. This property enables you to insert empty columns in your form: You can for example then set the property columnsXL to 2, fill one column with the single form group in a label-field ratio of 4:8:0 (4 grid columns used by the labels, 8 grid columns used by the fields, and 0 grid columns used by empty columns), and leave the second column empty. For more information, see also the development hint below.

Form with an empty column – size XL (4:8:0)
Form with an empty column – size XL (4:8:0)

If the form is put into a full-screen app, with the property singleContainerFullSize you can also set columnsXL to 3, fill one column with the single form group in a label-field ratio of 12:12:0 (12 grid columns used by the labels, 12 grid columns used by the fields, and 0 grid columns used by empty columns), and leave the second and third columns empty.

Form with empty columns – size XL (12:12:0)
Form with empty columns – size XL (12:12:0)

If the form contains multiple form groups, you can also use a two-column layout with a label-field ratio of 4:8:0  (4 grid columns used by the labels, 8 grid columns used by the fields, and 0 grid columns used by empty columns).

Form with multiple form groups (two columns) – size XL (4:8:0)
Form with multiple form groups (two columns) – size XL (4:8:0)

If the form is put into a full-screen app and it contains multiple form groups, you can also use a three-column layout with a label-field ratio of 12:12:0  (12 grid columns used by the labels, 12 grid columns used by the fields, and 0 grid columns used by empty columns).

Form with two form groups (three columns) – size XL (12:12:0)
Form with two form groups (three columns) – size XL (12:12:0)
Form with three form groups (three columns) – size XL (12:12:0)
Form with three form groups (three columns) – size XL (12:12:0)

If you use a three-column layout for XL screens, do not use a two-column layout for L and M screens as it could create a lot of white space. In this case, use a single-column layout instead.

Form with a lot of white space (two columns)
Form with a lot of white space (two columns)
Form with less white space (single-column layout)
Form with less white space (single-column layout)

Column Layout

If you use the default form settings, each form group displays in a separate column. Depending on the size of the form group, this can mean that users need to scroll down to see the full form, even though there is unused space on the right of the screen.

To make better use of screen space and give users a better overview without scrolling, you can balance form groups across multiple columns (layout: ColumnLayout).

You can use this option to distribute the content for up to two form groups. As soon as there are more than two form groups, the display reverts to the default layout (one column per form group).

The examples below show how forms with one and two form groups display with and without layout balancing.

One form group with default arrangement
One form group with default arrangement
One form group with balanced column layout
One form group with balanced column layout
Two form groups with default arrangement
Two form groups with default arrangement
Two form groups with balanced column layout
Two form groups with balanced column layout

Use of Columns

Recommended:

  • XL2-L2-M2-S1
  • XL2-L2-M1-S1
  • XL2-L1-M1-S1

Also possible:

  • XL3-L1-M1-S1
  • XL1-L1-M1-S1

Not recommended:

  • XL3-L2-M2-S1
  • XL3-L2-M2-S1
Developer Hint
Up to SAPUI5 version 1.34, a group in a form with only this single group covered the entire width, irrespective of the value of the properties columnsM/L. Therefore, it was not possible to create an empty column next to the single group. This had to be changed. However, the default value of columnsL has always been 2. So if single groups no longer cover the entire form, all forms with a single group are automatically changed to two column forms in size L if the default value of the property columnsL has not been changed manually to 1. Therefore, a new property had to be introduced: singleContainerFullSize.If you are using a simple form, set this property directly in the simple form control. Its default value is ‘true’, which reflects the old behavior. A single group covers the entire width of the form, irrespective of  the values of the properties columnsM/L/XL. If it is set to ‘false’, the form with a single group has as many columns as the properties columnsM/L/XL are set to. The new behavior with the empty columns now can be achieved.

Components

These are some examples of the types of UI elements that can be placed in the form container:

  • Label and text elements, including dedicated text display containers such as object number, object status, sap.ui.unified.Currency, and so on
  • Text input controls like input field and text area
  • Selection controls such as select, combo box, date picker, radio button, and checkbox
  • Icon
  • Rating indicator
  • Progress indicator
  • Switch
  • Slider
  • Link

Guidelines

  • Order the form logically from a user’s perspective. For example, ask for a user´s name before asking them for their address.
  • Group related information by using form and group titles.
  • Try to arrange form groups (especially in size L and XL) in a way that the form:
    • Is easy to read and understand.
    • Does not contain too much white space (split groups if necessary).
  • A label is not a help text. Give each field a meaningful label. Labels should be succinct, short and descriptive.
  • If you have combined fields that contain, for example, a postal code and the name of a city, you can provide one combined label (postal code and city) for this group.
  • The label of a required field is marked with an asterisk (*). There is a corresponding property in the API for this. Do not write the asterisk manually in the label text. Just use the corresponding property and the asterisk will be inserted automatically.
  • At the end of the label, the form container automatically inserts a colon (:), which is triggered by the stylesheet. Do not write the colon manually in the label text.
  • Use default settings for labels. (For example, labels are not supported for manual bold formatting.)
  • Less is more: try to minimize the number of labels and their corresponding fields as much as possible.
  • If an input element is in an error or warning state, provide a meaningful message for the user. There is a corresponding property valueStateText in the sap.m.Input API.

Label Alignment

  • We generally recommend placing the label above the field. This is the most usable option, since it best supports the reading flow and avoids unnecessary eye movements.
  • If there is enough space on the screen, you can right-align the labels next to the value. Right-aligned labels minimize the gap between the label and field, and give the eye one line to scan along. Only place labels next to the value if there is also enough space to allow for longer labels in other languages.
Information
The object page can show up to four columns if the screen is wide enough. In most cases, the space available per form column is too narrow to display the label next to the field/value. Because of this, forms within the multi-column layout of an object page only support labels above the fields values. Label lengths can vary greatly, and placing the labels on top reduces the risk of truncation for both the label and the content.

Unit of Measurement

You can add the unit of measurement after certain input controls by using the layout options of the form. Examples of supported input controls include multi-input field, select, combo box, multi combo box, and mask input.

If you display the unit of measurement after the input control, make sure that it’s properly visualized and doesn’t wrap to the next row.

Unit of Measurement
Unit of Measurement

Label

To make it easier for users to differentiate between labels and values, labels in display-only mode are displayed in a different style to labels in edit mode.

To avoid truncation, labels within forms wrap automatically.

Always aim to keep your labels as concise as possible. Remember that a label is not a help text. It must be meaningful, succinct, short, and descriptive. The purpose of the wrapping feature is make the full label text legible and to help avoid unnecessary use of abbreviations. It is not intended as a fallback for very long labels.

Data Loss Message

Provide a data loss message if the user accidentally navigates away from the page, such as when selecting an item in the master list and then using the Back or Home button. For details about how the message is delivered and what text you can use, see message handling.

Form Field Validation

Provide form field validation which describes the validation points and the choreography associated with messaging. For more information, see form field validation.

Field validation and validation report
Field validation and validation report

Error Prevention

Help the user to avoid errors by using input types (sap.m.InputTypes) and mask input (sap.m.MaskInput). The input fields automatically get a specific format, which helps prevent the user from making invalid entries.

Always start with the least complex control (for example, use select instead of value help if the user needs to select only one item from a short list). Use more intricate controls only if the use case really requires it.

Placeholder

Provide a placeholder (or input prompt) as a short hint (a word or short phrase) to help the user with data entry. A hint can be a sample value or a brief description of the expected format.

Avoid using the placeholder attribute as an alternative to a label. This is important because the placeholder text is overwritten as soon as the form is filled out. Labels are necessary to indicate the meaning of the form fields when the placeholders are no longer visible.

Never repeat the label in the placeholder text. Only offer a placeholder if it provides the user with additional information.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Variant Management

Variants store view settings, such as filter settings or control parameters.

The filter settings consist of filter parameters, selection fields, and the layout of filters. They are set within the filter bar.

Control parameters are the sort order, filter and group settings, column visibility, and the layout of a table or chart. They are set within the toolbar of the control.

The variant management control enables the user to load, save, change, and maintain variants.

Information
Note on terminology:

On the user interface, we now call variants “views”, which is better understood by end users. To describe the SAPUI5 controls, however, we still speak of “variants” and “variant management”.

Usage

Use the variant management control if:

  • The user needs to save and load different filter settings to find the relevant data.
  • The user needs to save and load different layouts (for example, a table) to display data in different views.
  • The user needs to save the settings for the whole page, including the filter settings and table layout.

Responsiveness

Size S (Smartphone)

On phones, the My Views dialog for selecting variants, the Manage Views dialog, and the Save View dialog open in full screen mode.

My Views
My Views
Manage Views
Manage Views
Save View
Save View

Size M (Tablet)

My Views
My Views
Manage Views
Manage Views
Save View
Save View

Size L (Desktop)

My Views
My Views
Manage Views
Manage Views
Save View
Save View

Components

Variant management come with several components:

  • A clickable title with an icon
  • The My Views dialog for selecting variants
  • The Manage Views dialog for setting view parameters and deleting views
  • The Save View dialog for creating a new view

Name of View

The view name is the entry point for opening the My ViewsManage Views, and Save View dialogs.

If the user has made changes to the user interface that affect the saved view, the view is marked with an asterisk (*) to indicate the unsaved changes. This happens when the user deletes or adds a filter to the filter bar, for example.

Selecting a view
Selecting a view

My Views Dialog

The My Views dialog contains all favorite views, including the default view, the pre-shipped standard views, and the views marked as favorites by the user. The default view and the pre-shipped standard views are marked as favorites automatically.

Default View

There can only be one default view, which the user can change in the Manage Views dialog. If the user sets a new default view, the last view remains as a favorite. The user can explicitly unfavorite the last view in the Manage Views dialog.

Pre-Shipped Standard Views

The standard view is the minimum set of filters delivered by SAP, and cannot be modified or deleted. It is flagged as a favorite and cannot be removed. There can be several pre-shipped standard views, depending on the use case.

Favorite Views

Users can mark views as favorites (or unfavorite them) in the Manage Views dialog. If more than 10 favorite views exist, a search option is displayed.

The views created by users themselves are favorited automatically, while views created by other users are unfavorited by default. This prevents the My Views popover from becoming overcrowded with public variants that are not relevant for the user.

The user can also mark public views as favourites.

Public Views

Public views are visible to all users who have access to the app. A view can be set to Public by individual users, key users, SAP (default delivery), or partners. All views that are set to Public are available within the Manage Views dialog.

A public view can be edited by the user who created it and by key users. All other users can only display the public view.

Actions in the My Views Dialog

Users can open the Manage Views dialog using the Manage button in the footer bar of the My Views dialog. From this dialog, users can Save changes to the current view, or choose Save As to create a new view, which opens the Save View dialog.

'My Views' dialog with a few views
'My Views' dialog with a few views
'My Views' dialog with more than 10 views and a search option
'My Views' dialog with more than 10 views and a search option

Manage Views Dialog

In the Manage Views dialog, users can make the following changes:

  • Mark a view as a favorite
  • Change the name of a self-created view
  • Set a view as the default
  • Apply the view automatically
  • View the Sharing and Created By information of each view
  • Delete a self-created view

In addition to the personal views users create for themselves, they can also see the pre-shipped and public views. A user can only modify his or her own views, and not public, pre-shipped, or third-party views created by other users. 
Exception: Key users can also change and delete views created by others.

'Manage Views' dialog
'Manage Views' dialog

Save View Dialog

The Save View dialog is for creating a new view. For each view, you can make the following settings:

  • View: Name of the new view (required field)
  • Set as Default: If checked, the new view is the new default view.
  • Public: If checked, the new view is available to everyone who has access to the app.
  • Apply Automatically: If checked, the view is applied immediately whenever it is selected. The user does not need to click or tap the Go button in the filter bar. This option is typically used if small adjustments need to be made to the filters before the user finally executes the search, or if the selection is likely to cause long loading times.
'Save View' dialog
'Save View' dialog

Layout

The variant management control is merged with the page title (or next to or merged with title of the respective control, such as a table).

Filter Bar (Page Title)

The variant management control is merged with the page title within the page header container, and saves the stored filter settings or both the filter and control settings.

Variant management within the filter bar, merged with the page title
Variant management within the filter bar, merged with the page title

Table

The variant management control can also store control settings like layout, table column visibility, sorting, or grouping independently of the filter settings.

It is either merged with the control title or placed next to it.

If you place the title or variant management control inside a toolbar, apply the following styles:

  • Set the toolbar height to 3 rem.
  • Use a transparent toolbar.
  • Use the title class “sapMH4Fontsize”.
Variant management within the table toolbar
Variant management within the table toolbar

If the table has a separate title, place the title first.

Variant management with table title
Variant management with table title

Behavior and Interaction

This control allows the user to select, create, update, and delete variants for filter settings and control parameters such as layout, table column visibility, sorting and grouping.

My Views dialog: Selecting a View

The page title displays the active variant. Clicking the title dropdown opens a popover that displays all available variants. The currently active variant is highlighted. To load another variant, the user simply selects one from the list.

Save

Save can only be applied to variants that the user is allowed to save. Otherwise, this button is disabled. Save overwrites the active variant.

Save As

Save As enables the user to save the current filter settings as a new view. The Save As function can also be used to duplicate existing variants for later modification.

Manage

Manage opens the Manage Views dialog that allows the user to update, delete or favorite/unfavorite existing variants.

Selecting a view
Selecting a view

Save View dialog

The Save View dialog is for creating new views. Providing a name for the new view is mandatory. Clicking or tapping OK saves the new view.

Save View
Save View

Manage Views dialog

In the Manage Views dialog, the user can rename, delete, and change properties of existing views.

Users can only modify or delete entries if they have the necessary permissions. By default, variants that a user has created can also be modified and deleted.

Manage Views
Manage Views

Save as Tile

The user can save the currently selected variant as a tile on the launchpad using the Save as Tile action in the Share menu.

In the Save as Tile dialog, the user can define the tile title and subtitle, a description, and the launchpad group in which the tile should appear.

Save as tile via 'Share' button
Save as tile via 'Share' button
'Save as Tile' dialog
'Save as Tile' dialog

Guidelines

Save as Tile

Use the name of a variant as the title of the application tile. Map this as a preset title that cannot be edited by the user.  In this case, whenever the variant is updated, the tile is updated accordingly.

If the variant has been modified but not yet saved (“dirty state”), ensure that the variant is saved before the tile is created.

Exception: If the variant cannot be referenced directly due to technical limitations, offer the standard tile creation option where filter parameters and settings are only saved within the URL.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

List

In SAP Fiori, we distinguish between tables and lists. Both usually contain homogeneous data, but lists generally have rather basic data, whereas the data in tables tends to be more complex. Lists are mostly used in the master list for a master-detail scenario using the flexible column layout, as well as in popovers or dialogs. For certain use cases, lists can also be used in the dynamic page layout.

Usage

Use the list if:

  • You want to display a homogeneous set of basic data.
  • You need to sort, group, or filter simple datasets.
  • You need to display a single-level hierarchy rather than using a complex tree table to support this simple use case.

Do not use the list if:

  • You want to manage complex datasets that need to be extensively sorted, grouped, filtered, or edited. In this case, you should use the table.
  • You work with complex hierarchies. In this case, use a tree.

Responsiveness

The list is like a layout container. You can change its width, but you must also ensure that the items contained in the list adapt whenever the list is resized.

All list item variants available in SAP Fiori already adapt to the respective screen size.

List Item Variants

The list contains various list items. These items can be of various types depending on the use case and on the content they have. SAPUI5 already provides the most common list items in SAP Fiori in the form of controls, although custom list items can also be created if necessary.

All the available list item types behave responsively and adapt to changing screen sizes out of the box. Most of them use truncation if size becomes too limited, since they are usually used to navigate to the item details. For custom list items, you can also wrap the texts, if required.

Object List Item

The object list item is the list item variant used most frequently in SAP Fiori applications. Consisting of a title, key figure, attributes, and a status, it contains the most important information about an object.

The space available for the attributes and status is limited as it should only show crucial information that allows the user to decide which items should be dealt with first.

All essential information about an object is usually provided when the user navigates to the item details.

For more information, see object list item.

Object list items
Object list items

Standard List Item

The standard list item is used for less complex entries, such as when the user selects an item in a dialog. This list item contains an optional image, a title, description, and a single info text (which can contain semantic information).

For more information, see standard list item.

Standard list items
Standard list items

Display List Item

The display list item is the simplest form of a list item and is only capable of showing a label and values. It is seldom used.

For more information, see display list item.

Display list items
Display list items

Action List Item

The action list item allows various actions to be triggered in a dialog. The action list item is not used in the content area.

For more information, see action list item.

Action list item
Action list item

Feed List Item

The feed list item is mainly used in feeds and notes.

For more information, see feed list item.

Feed with feed list items
Feed with feed list items

Input List Item

The input list item allows the user to enter data in a list item. It is seldom used in SAP Fiori apps as forms are usually the preferable method for entering data.

For more information, see input list item.

Input list item
Input list item

Components

The list control comes with the following main properties:

Header

The header text contains the title of the list. It is usually only used when the list is in the content area.

Footer

The footer text is the last entry in the list, and as such, it scrolls away with the content. Therefore, this property is also seldom used.

Lazy Loading

Like the table, the list also allows lazy loading. The “growing” list property is used for this purpose.

List with header and footer
List with header and footer

Empty List

The noDataText property is used if the list contains no entries. A generic “No Data” text is set by default, but we recommend replacing it with a more specific text.

Empty list
Empty list

Count

List items can have a count, which is located on the far right of a row. You can use the count in simple lists, such as those that contain standard list items, to indicate how many subitems the user can expect when navigating to the item.

Standard list items with counter
Standard list items with counter

Read/Unread

You can set an indicator to highlight unread items, making it easier for the user to discover them (property: showUnread = true). If you set this indicator, all texts for the unread items are shown in bold font.

By default, this indicator is switched off, and all list items are displayed in normal font.

Display list item with read and unread items
Display list item with read and unread items

Highlighting Items

To show that an item needs attention, a highlight indicator can be shown in front of the item (property: highlight). The highlight indicator can be used to show:

  • A semantic state (for example, red or orange if the item contains an error or warning)
  • A neutral state (for example, blue to highlight newly added items)
Highlighted items using semantic colors
Highlighted items using semantic colors

Behavior and Interaction

There are several ways to interact with the list and its list items:

Mode

The list can have several modes. The respective property (Mode) allows the following methods of selection:

  • None
  • SingleSelectMaster (used to pick one item with no additional indicator, as in the master list for a master-detail scenario with the flexible column layout)
  • SingleSelectLeft (used to pick one item using a radio button on the far left)
  • MultiSelect (used to pick several items from the list using checkboxes on the far left)
  • Delete (used to delete items from the list using a delete indicator on the far right)
Developer Hint
In multiple selection mode, users can (de)select all items using the shortcut CTRL+A. This only affects items that have already been loaded to the front-end server. All other items are not (de)selected before they are loaded (for example, items added via lazy loading with growingScrollToLoad). This conflicts with the guideline that all items the user can reach by scrolling must be (de)selected.

To process all items, listen to the selectionChange event and to its flag selectAll. This indicates whether CTRL+A was triggered. As soon as an action is triggered, process the items accordingly. Depending on the number of items, consider processing them in the back end.

List with explicit single selection
List with explicit single selection
List with multiple selection
List with multiple selection
List with delete mode
List with delete mode

Grouping

List items can be grouped. The group header is a visually separate line at the top of the items it groups. It does not currently provide an interaction of its own.

Grouped list
Grouped list

Type

The list item type defines the interaction of the list item, which is accompanied by a visual cue.

The items can be one of the following:

  • Active (click event; cursor changes to indicate that)
  • Inactive (no click event; cursor does not change)
  • Navigation (a small arrow appears on the far right, indicating that clicking would navigate)
  • Detail (a pencil appears on the far right, indicating that something can be changed. The user can only click on the pencil.)
  • Detail and active (same as “detail”, but the item itself is also clickable)

The example shows how all these types are visualized.

All list item types: inactive, detail, navigation, active, detail and active
All list item types: inactive, detail, navigation, active, detail and active

Swipe

You can provide a swipe feature (SwipeDirection) for quickly approving or deleting items without having to look at the details. It must only be provided as an additional feature, and not be the only way of performing the action.

List with swipe action
List with swipe action

Styles

The list items can have a header when they are used in a content area. It is also technically possible to change the background of the header and of the list itself. Depending on the use case, the lines between the list items and around the list can be shown or hidden.

The property Show Separators (All, Inner, None) allows only the outer lines (Inner) or all the lines (None) to be hidden when the list is used as a more structural element within a content area.

List without separators
List without separators

Guidelines

Text Length

When you use the list in the first column of the flexible column layout, keep the texts as short as possible and only as long as necessary. If you expect large numbers, use formatting instead.

Custom List Items

If none of the list items provided suits the requirements of your app, you can also create a custom list. If you choose this option, ensure that your custom list item is responsive when resized.

Radio Button

Only use radio buttons if they are absolutely necessary. One example would be if you want to distinguish single selection from navigation. This is a rare case in which visible radio buttons for single selection are allowed.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Toolbar Overview

The toolbar enables the user to change the UI or trigger an action. For example, the toolbar allows the user to change views, manipulate data or objects, navigate to another page, perform generic actions, and so on.

This article gives an overview of what kind of different toolbars exist and when to use which one.

Information
With SAPUI5 version 1.40, the floating footer toolbar was introduced to improve the legibility and general clarity of the page. It is slightly transparent, showing underlying content. The floating footer property is activated at page level and not at the floating footer itself.

Actions and Layout

Actions can be used as follows:

  • They can be independent of the current selection and not related to a specific item or object. (1)
  • They can be specific to the current object (user selects one item). (2)
  • They can apply to a set of items (user selects two or more items). (3)
  • They can control the settings of the UI, which affects all items. (4)
Types of actions
Types of actions

Sort your buttons according to their importance for the user, with the most frequently-used action first and the most seldom-used action last. All buttons go into the overflow from right to left, thus ensuring that the most important buttons are the last to be moved into the overflow menu.

The toolbar is mostly used for buttons (with an icon or text) and should be right-aligned.

Responsiveness

To enable responsiveness, use the OverflowToolbar control. Based on the sap.m.Toolbar control, the OverflowToolbar control is a container that provides overflow when its content does not fit in the visible area. Controls that can overflow include the segmented button, select, toggle button, checkbox, input, search field, combo box, and date/time input.

Only allow important actions to shrink and stay outside the overflow. The app team itself must decide which actions it considers to be sufficiently important.

The height of the toolbar changes on desktops (compact mode), tablets, and smartphones (cozy mode). For more information, see the article on content density.

Responsive table toolbar – Size S
Responsive table toolbar – Size S
Responsive table toolbar – Size L
Responsive table toolbar – Size L

Behavior and Interaction

App teams should implement overflow behavior to ensure that all actions can be accessed at any time. Buttons are sorted by usage, with the most frequently used action first (on the left) and the most seldom-used action last (on the right). This ensures that the most important buttons are the last to be moved into the overflow menu. Our general guideline is to use only icon buttons or text buttons. Do not combine an icon and text into one button. Buttons are always right-aligned.

Overflow (Generic)

The overflow should be activated either when there is not enough space for all actions, or if some actions are less important than others. In this case, the app team might decide to have certain actions only appear in the overflow. Furthermore, the app team can also decide that some (important) actions should never be moved into the overflow.

When you implement the overflow toolbar, the overflow behavior is generated automatically. Since release 1.30, new features have been added to the overflow toolbar. The  “” (overflow) button is now a toggle button and can be used to switch the overflow menu on and off.

The user clicks or taps the overflow button to open a popover. In this action sheet, all icon buttons are labeled with text and the user can overflow the following controls:

  • sap.m.SegmentedButton – When in the overflow, the segmented button is in select mode and looks like a select, although it is technically still a segmented button.
  • sap.m.Select – When in the overflow, it is always in default mode to take advantage of the extra space, even if it was set to icon-only mode in the toolbar.
  • sap.m.ToggleButton
  • sap.m.Checkbox
  • sap.m.Input
  • sap.m.SearchField
  • sap.m.ComboBox
  • sap.m.DateTimeInput
  • sap.ui.comp.smartfield.SmartField
  • sap.m.Label

All buttons go into the overflow from right to the left. This ensures that the most important buttons are the last to be moved into the overflow menu.

Prioritization

You can also prioritize the actions in the toolbar by applying one of five statuses:

  • Always overflow: The action always goes into the overflow.
  • Disappear: An action that is not so relevant for the user can disappear if the space is limited (for example, a title).
  • Low: Assign the priority “Low” to an action if the user seldom needs it; this action will overflow first.
  • High: Actions set to “High” remain visible in the toolbar until all lower-priority actions have moved to the overflow. Lower-priority actions are those with the priorities “Disappear” or “Low”, and all unprioritized actions.
  • Never overflow: These actions are always visible in the toolbar.

The priority of each item is high by default. If two items have equal priority, the item on the right side overflows first.

Grouping

Items can overflow together even if they are in different positions. Elements that belong to a group are not allowed to have “always overflow” or “never overflow” as priorities because these priorities force the items to remain either in the toolbar or in the overflow area. When group elements have different priorities, the priority of the group is defined by the maximum priority of its elements.

Table toolbar on desktop without overflow
Table toolbar on desktop without overflow
Table toolbar on smartphone with overflow
Table toolbar on smartphone with overflow
Table toolbar on smartphone with open overflow
Table toolbar on smartphone with open overflow

Styles

The footer toolbar has a dark background, while header and content toolbars have a transparent style. Buttons are always transparent, and the styles accept, reject, and emphasized are reserved for key actions on the page. Pages will either have a styled button in the header or in the footer toolbar.

For more information, see buttons.

The toolbar style is an enumeration with two properties: Standard (default) and Clear.

  • Standard style results in linear design (with border) and is intended for standalone usage of the toolbar.
  • Clear style appears as a plain color without borders. This style visually groups the toolbar with a nearby control or controls.

The toolbar style property is combined with the toolbar design property to create various visual styles.

Types

A variety of toolbars exist for different use cases (see examples below). The following types are used:

  • Header toolbar: Contains global actions that are important for the whole page
  • Footer toolbar: Contains only closing and finalizing actions
  • Table toolbar: Toolbar that is positioned above a table and contains table-specific actions
  • Chart toolbar: Toolbar that is positioned above a chart and contains chart-specific actions
  • Info bar: Blue toolbar that indicates what filters have been set, and how many items have been selected
Header Toolbar with Edit and Delete Action
Header Toolbar with Edit and Delete Action
Footer toolbar with transparent standard buttons and emphasized
Footer toolbar with transparent standard buttons and emphasized
Table toolbar with title, show items, sort, group and settings
Table toolbar with title, show items, sort, group and settings
Chart toolbar with perspective switch, legend, zoom, full screen, view switch
Chart toolbar with perspective switch, legend, zoom, full screen, view switch
Info bar in filtered master list
Info bar in filtered master list

Guidelines

Order of Buttons

To provide a consistent user experience for each app, we highly recommend using the following alignment for generic actions:

  • All buttons are right-aligned.
  • Text buttons should be grouped together, as should icon buttons.
  • App-specific text-only buttons and generic text-only buttons can be combined and arranged in a sequence defined by the app team. Remember to place the most frequently-used actions furthest to the left of the group of buttons. This ensures that these actions are the last to be moved into the overflow menu or are visible at all times.

General Guidelines

  • Do not overload the toolbar with actions.
  • Place actions as close to the corresponding content as possible.
  • Place commands in the same location throughout the app. Each page should contain only the commands that are relevant to that page. If commands are shared between pages, they should be placed as close to the same location as possible on each page so that users can predict where the commands can be found when navigating.
  • Separate navigation and commands. Place commands as close to their corresponding items as possible.
  • Do not place Settings, Logout, or other account management commands in the footer toolbar. All these actions are shown in the Me Area.
  • Use only icon buttons or text buttons. Do not combine an icon and text into one button. Buttons are always right-aligned.
  • If you want to group buttons, use a menu button.
  • Actions that impact the entire page are placed in the header area.
  • Only closing or finalizing actions are placed in the footer toolbar (for example, Submit or Post).

UI Text Guidelines

Use tooltips such as Sort, Filter, and Group to label the icons in the footer toolbar. In the case of Sort, Group, and Filter, use the following text for the no selection made option:

  • (Not sorted)

Note: In most cases, (Not sorted) is not necessary. Simply show the default sort settings instead:

  • (Not filtered)
  • (Not grouped)

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Title

The title control is a simple, large-sized text containing additional semantic information for accessibility purposes.

The difference between a title and a manually styled heading is that the title can be used by assistive technologies such as screen readers to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation.

The title is used, for example, by paneltoolbar, or list components.

Table with title in toolbar and header
Table with title in toolbar and header

Usage

Use the title if:

  • You want to set the title above a table or form.
  • You want to show text in the page header.

Do not use the title if:

  • The text is inside a text block.
  • The text is inside a form element.

Responsiveness

Long titles can be truncated or wrapped if the screen is narrower than the full title (property: wrapping).

A long title that is truncated on small screens
A long title that is truncated on small screens

Styles

The actual appearance of the title and the different styles always depends on the theme being used.

The semantic level of the title can be set automatically or explicitly. With the automatic setting (property: level, value: Auto) no explicit level information is written (HTML5 header element). If you want to set it explicitly, use an HTML H1-H6 element (property: level, value: H1-H6).

The level (property: level, value: Auto, H1-H6) and title style (property: titleStyle, value: Auto, H1-H6) can be set independently.

Title with default level and style (H1)
Title with default level and style (H1)
Title with level H1 and default style
Title with level H1 and default style
Title with level H2 and default style
Title with level H2 and default style
Title with level H3 and default style
Title with level H3 and default style
Title with level H4 and default style
Title with level H4 and default style
Title with level H5 and default style
Title with level H5 and default style
Title with level H6 and default style
Title with level H6 and default style

Guidelines

  • When using the title in the dynamic page header, use wrapping in expanded mode and truncation in collapsed mode.
  • In other places, such as toolbars or dialog headers, do not use wrapping. Truncate the title instead.

Properties

The following properties are available:

  • The property text defines the text that should be displayed as a title.
  • The property level (default: auto) defines the semantic level used by assistive technology. The default level can be overridden with H1 to H6 to set the level explicitly.
  • The property titleStyle (default: auto) defines the actual appearance of the title. When you use automatic styling, the appearance of the title depends on the current position of the title and the defined level. This automatism can be overridden by explicitly setting a different style between H1 and H6.
  • The property width defines the width of the title.
  • The property textAlign (default: initial) defines the alignment of the text within the title. Note: This property only has an effect if the overall width of the title control is larger than the displayed text.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

  • Title (SAPUI5 samples)
  • Title (SAPUI5 API reference)

Table Overview

A table contains a set of line items and usually comprises rows (with each row showing one line item) and columns. Line items can contain data of any kind, but also interactive controls, for example, for editing the data, navigating, or triggering actions relating to the line item.

To display large amounts of data in tabular form, several table controls are provided. These are divided into two groups, each of which is defined by a consistent feature set:

  • Fully responsive tables
  • Desktop-centric tables

Usage

Use the responsive table if:

  • A table is needed. The responsive table is the default table in SAP Fiori.
  • The table content should be flexible and visually appealing. The responsive table offers the most flexibility in regards to its content because all SAPUI5 controls, and even multiple controls, can be used. In addition, different rows can be based on different item templates.
  • The focus lies on working on line items, not on individual cells.
  • A main use case involves selecting one or more items, for which details are needed in order to choose the correct item.
  • Line items are independent of each other and no operation across columns is needed.
  • You want to have only one implementation for all devices.

Use the list if:

  • You want to display a simple dataset.
  • A table would be too complex.
  • A list of actions is to be displayed.
  • Simple two-level hierarchies are required (by using grouping or navigation).
  • The main use case involves selecting one of several items with only a few details per item.
  • You require a master list for a master-detail scenario using the flexible column layout.

For all the cases listed above, use the list control.

Use the tree if:

  • You want to display a simple hierarchical dataset.
  • You want to use a hierarchical master list for a master-detail scenario using the flexible column layout.
  • Using a tree table would be too complex.
  • The main use case involves selecting one of several hierarchical items with only a few details per item.

For all the cases listed above, use the tree control.

Use the grid table if:

  • You need to display more than 1,000 rows at the same time.
  • The cell level and the spatial relationship between cells are more important than the line item, such as if users need to recognize patterns in the data, like in waterfall charts.
  • Comparing items is a major use case. The grid table layout remains stable irrespective of the screen width. In addition, a cell only ever contains one control.
  • You need an analytical table, but you cannot provide an analytical binding.

Note that the grid table is not fully responsive. It is available only for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.

Use the tree table if:

  • Data needs to be displayed in a hierarchical manner.

Note that the tree table is not fully responsive. It is available only for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.

Use the analytical table if:

  • You need multilevel grouping as well as grand totals and subtotals.

Note that the analytical table is not fully responsive. It is available only for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.

Types

Fully Responsive Tables

Responsive Table (sap.m.Table)

This is the default table in SAP Fiori. If a table is needed, the responsive table should be the first choice. It is based on the list.

The responsive table provides:

  • An optimized way to show a line item at a glance without the need for horizontal scrolling, regardless of the screen width.
  • Full flexibility in regards to content:
    • Any SAPUI5 control can be used in a cell, including micro charts and forms.
    • Using layout containers, such as a grid layout, allows more than one control to be used in a cell. Consequently, the cell shows more than one data point.
    • Templates with multiple rows are supported, so different items can have different layouts. For example, this can be used to show editable items and read-only items in the same table without switching modes. In this case, the editable items could have a completely different layout than the read-only items.
    • Items with different heights are supported. This allows for more dynamic content in cells, for example, to show lists or use text controls that wrap instead of truncate.
  • Smooth scrolling. This is done by rendering all items on the application background. Thus, the responsive table does not have its own scrollbar but uses the scrollbar of the whole page.
  • A very lightweight design.
  • Touch support.

The responsive table is limited in the following way:

  • Since all items are rendered, the responsive table is limited to approximately 1,000 items on one screen (depending on the complexity of the items and the whole screen). Exceeding this number can lead to decreased rendering performance. On mobile devices, browsers can also run out of memory.
Responsive table
Responsive table

List (sap.m.List)

The list is the basis for the responsive table. It should be used whenever a table is too complex.

The list provides:

  • Full flexibility in regards to its content:
    • There are various specializations for specific list types.
    • With a custom list item, all SAPUI5 controls can be used inside a list. Using layout containers allows more than one control to be used in a custom list item.
    • Templates with multiple rows are supported, so different items can be shown in the same list.
    • Items with different heights are supported.
  • Smooth scrolling. This is done by rendering all items on the application background. Thus, the list doesn’t have its own scrollbar but uses the scrollbar of the entire page.
  • A very lean and lightweight design.
  • Touch support.

The list is limited in the following way:

  • Since all items are rendered, the list is limited to approximately 1,000 items on one screen (depending on the complexity of the items and the entire screen). Exceeding this number can lead to decreased rendering performance. On mobile devices, browsers can also run out of memory.
List
List

Tree (sap.m.Tree)

The tree is based on the list. It should be used whenever a hierarchical view is needed, but a tree table is too complex.

The tree provides:

  • A standard tree item that provides an icon, a text (that wraps), and a counter.
  • Support for items with different heights.
  • Smooth scrolling. This is done by rendering all items on the application background. Thus, the tree doesn’t have its own scrollbar, but uses the scrollbar of the entire page.
  • A very lean and lightweight design.
  • Touch support.

The tree is limited in the following way:

  • Since all items are rendered, the tree is limited to approximately 200 items on one screen (depending on the complexity of the items and the whole screen). Exceeding this number can lead to decreased rendering performance. On mobile devices, browsers can also run out of memory.
Tree
Tree

Desktop-Centric Tables

This group contains three different tables:

  • Grid table: This is the most basic table in this group.
  • Analytical table: This provides the following features on top of the grid table:
    • Grouping by several levels.
    • Automatic calculation of grand totals for a column and subtotals per group level.
  • Tree table: This provides a hierarchical view of the items.

Grid Table (sap.ui.table.Table)

The grid table provides:

  • An optimized way to show large amounts of data. It supports an unlimited number of rows. It also supports a very condensed display of line items on non-touch devices, thus allowing more rows to be displayed on the same screen property.
  • Fixed control height, thus supporting horizontal and vertical scrolling (“viewport scrolling”). However, this also means that there are several vertical scrollbars on the screen for the page and table, which might be cumbersome on smaller screens.
  • Touch devices are supported.

The grid table is limited in the following ways:

  • Content layout is less flexible:
    • The grid table supports only certain controls, mainly for displaying text or getting single-line text input from users. For example, you cannot add micro charts.
    • Only one control can be added per cell.
    • It supports only single-row templates.
    • All items need to have the same height.
  • Vertical scrolling is not smooth. For performance reasons, the content is not really scrolled but exchanged.
  • The design is more complex.
  • Although touch is supported, the grid table works only on desktops and tablets. For smartphones, a fallback solution is needed.
Grid table
Grid table

Analytical Table (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable)

The analytical table is based on the grid table and is therefore quite similar to it.

In addition to the grid table, the analytical table provides:

  • Multilevel grouping
  • Display of grand totals per column and subtotals per group

The analytical table is limited in the same way as the grid table, with one addition:

Analytical table
Analytical table

Tree Table (sap.ui.table.TreeTable)

The tree table is based on the grid table and is therefore quite similar to it.

In addition to the grid table, the tree table provides:

  • One hierarchical column

The tree table is limited in the same way as the grid table.

Tree table
Tree table

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Select

The select control (also known as a dropdown) is commonly used to enable users to select an item from a predefined list.

Usage

Use select if:

  • Users need to select one item exclusively from a short list of options (for example, fewer than 12 items).
  • The values of the option list are of secondary importance and do not need to be displayed right away.

Do not use select if:

  • Users need to choose between two options, such as On or Off and Yes or No. In this case, consider using a switch control instead.
  • Users need to pick one item from a very large set of options. In this case, consider using the combo box instead.
  • You need to display more than one attribute. In this case, consider using the input field with a select dialog or a value help dialog instead.
  • The user needs to search on multiple attributes. In this case, consider using the input field with select dialog or value help dialog instead.
  • Your use case requires all available options to be displayed right away, without any user interaction. In this case, consider using radio buttons or a radio button group instead.

Responsiveness

The display of the select control depends on the device. On smartphones, the selection list takes up the whole screen. On desktop and tablet devices, it appears as a popover.

Size S

Select option list in full screen - Size S
Select option list in full screen - Size S

Size M

Select option list – The option list opens above the field if there is not enough space below it - Size M
Select option list – The option list opens above the field if there is not enough space below it - Size M

Size L

Select option list – The option list opens above the field if there is not enough space below it - Size L
Select option list – The option list opens above the field if there is not enough space below it - Size L

Layout

The select control can be placed in toolbars, such as chart toolbarsfooter toolbars, or header toolbars, as well as in forms or tables:

Components

Select Trigger

The trigger to open the option list is either the Select field (1), which also displays the current selection, or an icon (3).

Option List

The option list (2) displays all the items available to the user. The selection is always highlighted. Selecting another option from the list moves the highlight to the selected option.

Full Screen Title Bar for Size S

Opening the select control on a smartphone brings up the option list in full screen mode. The full screen mode can be closed using the icon on the top right corner (5).

You need to set a title for the full screen mode (4). We recommend the following format:

Single selection

Select <Entity>

Example: Select Product

Multi-selection

Select <Entities>

Example: Select Products

 

Anatomy of the select control
Anatomy of the select control
Anatomy of the select control - Size S
Anatomy of the select control - Size S

Behavior and Interaction

Clicking/Tapping

The Select field always displays the current selection. The user clicks or taps the field to display a list of options to choose from. Once the user selects an option, the list box closes and the selected option is displayed in the field. If there is no Select field but an icon, the user clicks the icon to open the list of options. The currently selected item is always highlighted in the list to help the user identify what has been selected.

Guidelines

Option List

The option list contains text values only. Keep the text values as short as possible because the list uses single lines only. Values that are too long may be truncated.

If you need to indicate that none of the selection options are selected, or you need to allow the user not to select an option, provide (None) (1) as an option and place it at the beginning of the list.

If you need to indicate that all items apply, for example, as a list filter, provide All as an option and place it at the beginning of the list.

If your use case requires a blank input field instead of (None), use a combo box instead.

If the select control is placed in a toolbar as an icon-only version for grouping or filtering a set of items, consider the following guideline:

Sort, Group, and Filter:

  • (Not sorted)
    Note: In most cases, this option is not necessary; just show the default sort settings instead.
  • (Not filtered)
  • (Not grouped)

For more information about the toolbar, see toolbar overview.

Define a default selection whenever possible (2). If the selected item is not specified, the first one is selected.

(1) Selection option list with (None); (2) first value selected
(1) Selection option list with (None); (2) first value selected

Label

The select control can be displayed with or without a label. If the field is attached to another field, you do not need to define a second label.

Information

Do not provide a blank value to indicate that nothing is selected.

Sorting

The sort option list contains all the items that are available to the user. Choose one of the following styles to order the content:

Logical: Sort items into a meaningful order. Group related options together and show the most common options first, followed by less common options. Sort the options alphabetically if more than eight select options are available. This helps the user find the right option quickly.

Example of logical sorting
Example of logical sorting

Alphabetical: Sort currencies, names, and similar content alphabetically.

Example of alphabetical sorting
Example of alphabetical sorting

Numeric: Sort numeric values into a sequential order, with the lowest number first.

Example of numeric sorting
Example of numeric sorting

Chronological: Sort time-related information into chronological order, with the most recent first.

Example of chronological sorting
Example of chronological sorting

Width

You can adjust the width of the option list to some extent. The width of the select control is set to Auto by default, while the maximum width is set to 100%. The option list adapts its length to the longest entry by default.

The select control is usually used in forms, where the width is determined by the form element or container in which the select control is embedded. Therefore, we do not recommend defining a fixed width, but rather working with proper layout containers, like the form, simple form, or responsive grid layout, and with the layout data property, where the width is defined.

If you need to restrict the width to a defined value, set the width accordingly.

Do not allow the control to auto-adjust based on the selection.

Keep in mind that there is no horizontal scrolling in the option list. Entries in the list that are too long are truncated and users will not be able to read them.

Information
If localized text is not an issue, such as with currency codes, consider using a smaller width.

Unit of Measurement

You can use the layout options of the form to can add the unit of measurement (UoM) after select. Apps can use the label-field ratio to show the UoM after the field. However, you must make sure that the UoM is properly visualized and doesn’t wrap to the next row.

Developer Hint

For accessibility purposes, you can use “ariaDescribedBy” from the input control.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Multi-Input Field

A multi-input field allows the user to enter multiple values, which are displayed as tokens. These can be displayed in single and multiline mode. To help the user enter a valid value, you can enable the autocomplete suggestions feature and the value help option.

Usage

Use the multi-input field if:

  • You want the user to select multiple ranges (with the value help option and the value help dialog).
  • The dataset to choose from is expected to increase over time (for example, to more than 200 values).
  • You need to provide the value help option to help users select or search multiple business objects.

Do not use the multi-input field if:

  • You want the user to select one entry only. In this case, use the input field or combo box instead.
  • You want the user to select from a pre-defined set of options only. In this case, use the multi-combo box instead.

Responsiveness

In the examples below, the autocomplete feature is shown in different sizes for single and multiline modes.

Single Line Mode (Default)

Size S (Smartphones)

  • Cozy mode.
  • When the user taps the multi-input field, a new full-screen dialog opens in which the autocomplete suggestions can be selected. When the user makes a selection, the dialog closes and the token is displayed.
  • The user can review the tokens by swiping them to the left or right.
Autocomplete feature on a smartphone (size S)
Autocomplete feature on a smartphone (size S)
Users can review tokens by swiping left and right on touch devices
Users can review tokens by swiping left and right on touch devices

Size M (Tablets)

  • Cozy mode.
  • The user can review tokens by swiping them to the left or right.
  • The autocomplete suggestions appear below or above the multi-input field.
Autocomplete on a tablet (size M)
Autocomplete on a tablet (size M)

Size L (Desktops)

  • Compact mode.
  • The user can review tokens by pressing the right or left arrows on the keyboard.
  • The autocomplete suggestions appear below or above the multi-input field.
Autocomplete on a desktop (size L)
Autocomplete on a desktop (size L)

Multiline Mode

Size S (Smartphones)

  • Cozy mode.
  • When the user taps the multi-input field, a new full-screen dialog opens in which the suggested items can be selected. When the user makes a selection within that dialog, the token is displayed in the input field. When the user enters a new search term, the display area of the token is replaced by the autocomplete suggestions.
Smartphone multiline mode – Closed
Smartphone multiline mode – Closed
Smartphone multiline mode – Open
Smartphone multiline mode – Open
Autocomplete on smartphone - Multiline mode
Autocomplete on smartphone - Multiline mode

Size M (Tablets)

  • Cozy mode.
  • When the user taps or focuses on the multi-input field, the single-line field expands to a multiline field. All tokens are displayed.
Tablet multiline mode – No token selected
Tablet multiline mode – No token selected
Tablet multiline mode active – Expanded
Tablet multiline mode active – Expanded
Tablet multiline mode – Suggest
Tablet multiline mode – Suggest

Size L (Desktops)

  • Compact mode.
  • When the user focuses on the multi-input field, it expands to a multiline field.
  • The autocomplete suggestions open below the multi-input field.
Desktop multiline mode – Not focused
Desktop multiline mode – Not focused
Desktop multiline mode active – Expanded
Desktop multiline mode active – Expanded
Desktop multiline mode – Suggest
Desktop multiline mode – Suggest

Types

The input types of the multi-input are identical to those of the input field. For more information, see input field.

Behavior and Interaction

Single Line Mode

Adding a Token

The user can add a token via autocomplete suggestions or value help. When an item is selected from the autocomplete box, the corresponding token is created. The input is ready for the next entry. Tokens are placed next to each other on one line.

Developer Hint
Values that are entered can also be tokenized when the user presses ENTER. The app development team can perform a custom validation of the entered data and decide whether a token should be created.
Adding tokens
Adding tokens
Adding a second token
Adding a second token
Information
For information on how to manage leading and treading whitespace (blanks) when copying and pasting text into input controls, please see removing leading and trailing whitespace.

Reviewing Tokens

The user can review tokens by using the left or right cursor keys on a desktop, or by swiping to the left or right on a smartphone or tablet.

Left/right keyboard cursor
Left/right keyboard cursor
Swiping left and right on a touch device
Swiping left and right on a touch device

Deleting Tokens

The user can delete tokens by pressing the Backspace or Del button (when selected) on a desktop’s keyboard, or by tapping the Delete icon on a mobile device.

Deleting tokens
Deleting tokens

Using Value Help

You can enable the value help option to provide a more advanced dialog for finding the relevant business object. Two dialogs can be used at present:

Value help with select dialog
Value help with select dialog
Value help with value help dialog
Value help with value help dialog

Multiline Mode

Single line mode is active by default, so to activate multiline mode, you need to enable it (property: enableMultiLineMode).

Adding a Token

The user can add a token via autocomplete suggestions or value help. The token is created by selecting an item from the autocomplete box. The input is ready for the next entry. Tokens are placed next to each other. If there is not enough space on one line, the control expands.

Adding a token
Adding a token

Reviewing Tokens

When the multi-input field is not focused, it is shown in collapsed mode. The token that was entered last is displayed. If there is more than one token, the number of hidden tokens is shown next to the last token.

When tokens are entered into the multi-input field, the control expands to show all tokens. On screen size S, a new dialog is opened to review the tokens.

Reviewing tokens
Reviewing tokens

Copying and Pasting Data from a Spreadsheet or Text File

The multi-input control can handle paste actions containing, for example, multiple items that have been selected in a column of a spreadsheet or text file. The user simply selects a whole column in the spreadsheet and copies it. When items are entered into the multi-input field, the user just pastes them from the clipboard and each item is represented as a token.

Guidelines

  • Use the multiline mode instead of the single line mode (default). This provides greater flexibility for displaying multiple tokens.
  • Give the control a width that is appropriate for the range of values that are going to be entered. Try to avoid setting a fixed width on this control. Instead, embed it in a proper layout (such as a form, simple form, or grid layout) and work with the layout data property.
  • Provide meaningful labels for all input fields. Do not use the placeholder as a replacement for the label. The placeholder should only provide an additional hint.
  • The multi-input field can currently contain tokens and one free text value. If you allow only validated values, display an error or warning when the user tries to leave the field to indicate that the value entered is invalid, or remove the value.
  • If users try to select an item that has been selected before, we recommend setting an error state and providing a meaningful message.
Multi-input - Error state for an item that has already been selected
Multi-input - Error state for an item that has already been selected
  • You can use the layout options of the form to can add the unit of measurement (UoM) after the multi-input control. Apps can use the label-field ratio to show the UoM after the field. However, you must make sure that the UoM is properly visualized and doesn’t wrap to the next row.
Developer Hint

For accessibility purposes, you can use “ariaDescribedBy” from the input control.

Properties

Since the multi-input field is derived from the input field, refer to the properties in the input field article.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Combo Box

The combo box control allows users to select an item from a predefined list.

The control provides an editable input field for filtering the list, and a dropdown menu with a list of the available options.

Usage

Use the combo box if:

  • Users need to select a single item from a long list of items (minimum 13, maximum 200 entries).
  • The values of the option list are secondary information and do not need to be displayed right away.

Do not use the combo box if:

  • Users need to select from a list of two options, where one of the options can be implied as on and off or yes and no. Consider using a switch control instead.
  • Users need to pick one item from a small set of options, such as up to 12 entries. Consider using the select control instead.
  • Users need to pick one item from a large set of options, such as more than 200 entries. Consider using the input field control with value help instead.
  • You need to display more than one attribute. Consider using the input field with select dialog or value help dialog.
  • Searching on multiple attributes is required. Consider using the input field with select dialog or value help dialog.
  • Your use cases require that all available options should be displayed right away without any user interaction. Consider using radio buttons or a radio button group.

Responsiveness

Size S

Size S
Size S

Size M

Size M
Size M

Size L

Size L
Size L

Components

Title

A descriptive heading (1).

Input Field

The input field (2) displays the selected value. Users type any character to filter the option list.

Dropdown Arrow

The dropdown menu’s arrow (3) collapses and expands the option list.

Option List

The option list (4) contains a list of values (5) that users can choose from.

Size S
Size S
Size M/L
Size M/L

Two-Column Layout

Use the combo box with a two-column layout if you need to display additional information for the selection options, such as currencies, country abbreviations, or system abbreviations.

Users can filter both columns simultaneously showing only matching entries.

Combo box with two-column layout
Combo box with two-column layout

Behavior and Interaction

Select a Value

There are three ways to select an item from the list:

  1. Select the item directly from the dropdown list.
  2. Type the item into the input field.
  3. Use the up and down arrows to navigate the list.

Clicking the input field places the cursor in the field (1). Clicking the arrow opens the option list (2). Typing into the input field starts filtering the list accordingly; the first value is highlighted and auto-complete suggestions appear in the input field (3). Up/down moves the highlight in the list and populates the value in the field (4). Selecting a value closes the option list (5).

Auto-Complete

When the first few letters are typed in the input field, the control performs auto-complete to help users to easily select one item from the option list.

Choose from Option List

The option list displays all available items the user can choose from. The selection is always highlighted. Selecting another option from the list moves the highlight to the newly selected option.

Clicking the arrow opens the option list below the field. An exception is made when there is not enough space to display the dropdown list. In this case, the list is displayed over the input field.

Selecting a value
Selecting a value

Auto-Resize

The width of the option list adapts to its content. The minimum width is the input field plus the dropdown arrow. The maximum width is the part of the screen furthest to the right. If the option list content requires even more width, entries become truncated.

Option list – Minimum width
Option list – Minimum width
Option list adapts to long entries
Option list adapts to long entries

Mobile Handling

The user can enter text into the input field (supported by auto-completion). When the user clicks or taps the dropdown arrow of the combo box (1), the option list opens in full width (2). Now the user can modify the selected entry by tapping the input field of the combo box. The keyboard is then displayed, and the user can begin to enter a new term to filter the option list, also supported by auto-completion (3). The option list closes when the user clicks or taps the Close button at the bottom of the list (4) or selects an item in the list (5).

Information
For information on how to manage leading and treading whitespace (blanks) when copying and pasting text into input controls, please see removing leading and trailing whitespace.

Styles

A combo box has different styles for its different states. Here are some examples:

Unselected
Unselected
Unselected (predefined placeholder)
Unselected (predefined placeholder)
Unselected (on hover)
Unselected (on hover)
Arrow (on hover)
Arrow (on hover)
Focus
Focus
Warning
Warning
Error
Error
Expanded
Expanded
Auto-complete
Auto-complete

Guidelines

Label

The combo box control can be displayed with or without a label. If the field is attached to another field, you do not need to define a second label. For more information, see the article on how to use labels in SAP Fiori.

Placeholder

Do not use the placeholder attribute as an alternative to a label. This is important because the placeholder text is overwritten as soon as the form is filled out. Labels are necessary to indicate the meaning of the form fields when the placeholders are no longer visible. Show a placeholder only if the user needs a hint on data entry. Do not repeat the content of the label. A hint could be a sample value or a brief description of the expected format. Read more about how to use placeholders.

 

Option List

The option list contains text values only. Keep the text values short because the list is represented using only single lines. Values that are too long might be truncated.

If you need to express that none of the selection options are selected, show a blank input field. Define a default selection whenever possible.

Sorting

We recommend sorting options alphabetically to help users find the right option quickly. For more sorting rules, check out the guidelines for the select control.

Width

You can adjust the width of the option list to some extent.

The combo box control is usually used in forms, where the width is determined by the form element or container in which the combo box control is embedded. Therefore, we do not recommend defining a fixed width, but rather working with proper layout containers that have a defined width, such as the following properties: “form”, “simpleform”, “responsivegridlayout”, and “layoutdata” .

If you need to restrict the width to a defined value, set the width accordingly.

Keep in mind that there is no horizontal scrolling in the option list. Entries in the list that are too long become truncated and users may not be able to read them.

If localized text is not an issue, consider using a smaller width.

Unit of Measurement

You can use the layout options of the form to can add the unit of measurement (UoM) after the combo box control. Apps can use the label-field ratio to show the UoM after the field. However, you must make sure that the UoM is properly visualized and doesn’t wrap to the next row.

Developer Hint

For accessibility purposes, you can use “ariaDescribedBy” from the input control.

Properties

Selection

When you select a value, there are two events:

  • Change: Occurs when the text in the input field is changed and the focus leaves the input field or the user presses the Enter key.
  • Selection change: Occurs when the user types something that matches an item in the list; also when the user clicks a list box item, or when navigating via keyboard.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Mask Input

The mask input control (sap.m.MaskInput) governs what a user is permitted to enter in an input field. It allows users to easily enter data in a certain format and in a fixed-width input (such as a date, time, phone number, credit card number, currency, and IP address).

Usage

Use mask input if:

  • You have to govern what a user is allowed to enter in an input field.
  • You have to enter data easily in a certain format and in a fixed-width input.
  • You have to enter input such as a date, time, phone number,  serial number, ISBN, or product activation key.

Do not use mask input if:

  • The mask prevents users from entering essential data.
  • The users need to enter data in a format other than the one used by the mask (for example, if users have to enter a phone number with a format for a different region).
Possible uses - may require additional coding
Possible uses - may require additional coding
Possible uses - may require additional coding
Possible uses - may require additional coding

Responsiveness

Mask input extends the input control (sap.m.Input) and has all the normal properties of an input field.

Components

The mask input control has a fixed length format to which the user’s input must conform. This can be particularly useful when the user needs to enter text or numbers with specific formatting, such as a phone number, postal code, or credit card number.

Mask input or a placeholder text are not substitutes for the input label. Using a label is mandatory. Placeholder texts in an input field are optional. Note that if there is no placeholder text, the input field will initially look empty. The mask formatting is revealed as soon as the focus is on the field.

Example of mask input
Example of mask input

Immutable Characters

When defining the mask format, the developer can place immutable characters, such as brackets and dashes, in specific positions. The format also specifies the range of valid characters for each separate position, thus preventing the user from entering invalid input.

For example, when the user enters a phone number, the area code in brackets and the space between the numbers are already present.

Note that the sap.m.MaskInput control extends sap.m.Input and has all the normal properties of an input field.

When creating a new mask, the developer can change the configuration of some default properties. For example, the default placeholder symbol “_” can be changed to something else.

Behavior and Interaction (incl. Gestures)

Entering Text

  • Mask string appears in the input field on focus.
  • The default placeholder symbol is “_” and can be changed to something else.

Copying and Pasting

Copying to a mask input field:

Users can copy both formatted and unformatted strings into a mask input field. When the texts are pasted, they take on the format defined for the mask input field.

Example: Mask input field for a number with the format:  (000) 000 000000

Copied source string Value in mask input field after pasting
(555) 333 123456 (555) 333 123456
555-333-123456 (555) 333 123456
555 (333) 12 34 56 (555) 333 123456

Copying from a mask input field:

If you copy a string from a mask input field and paste it elsewhere, the format of the mask input field is copied as well.

Information
For information on how to manage leading and trailing white space (blanks) when copying and pasting text into input controls, please see removing leading and trailing white space.

Deleting Content

  • Select the entire string and delete it. The placeholders will reappear.
  • Deleting a character from the string leaves the input information unchanged, except for the deleted character, which is replaced by a placeholder. (The mask does not shift if a character is deleted.)
Deleting one/all characters in mask input
Deleting one/all characters in mask input

Guidelines

Validation Rules

Another option is to define new validation rules, such as allowing lowercase characters from “a” to “e” only. This is particularly flexible because these rules are defined with regular expression syntax.

The mask comes with two predefined validation rules: one for all characters in the English alphabet, and one for the numbers from zero to ten.

Therefore, when the mask format is being defined, the alphabetic rule is represented by the letter “a”, and the numeric rule by the number “9”. For example, a numeric mask format with a length of five characters would be specified as “99999”, a mask that accepts only alphabetical characters would be specified as “aaaaa”, and a mixed mask could be “aaa99”. In the mixed mask example, the user would not be able to enter numeric characters anywhere other than in the last two positions.

When you create the MaskInput instance, you can specify the following settings:

  • Mask: The format specification, such as (123) 999-999.
  • PlaceholderSymbol: A single character used to represent empty positions in a mask value, such as _ _ _ _ _.
  • Rules: A collection of sap.m.MaskInputRule instances.

Unit of Measurement

You can use the layout options of the form to can add the unit of measurement (UoM) after the mask input control. Apps can use the label-field ratio to show the UoM after the field. However, you must make sure that the UoM is properly visualized and doesn’t wrap to the next row.

Developer Hint

For accessibility purposes, you can use “ariaDescribedBy” from the input control.

Properties

Mask string

The mask is defined by its character type (or by its length, as applicable). You should consider the following important facts:

  1. The mask characters normally correspond to an existing rule (one rule per unique character). Characters that do not are considered immutable characters. For example, the mask ‘2099’, where ‘9’ corresponds to a rule for digits, has ‘2’ and ‘0’ as immutable characters.
  2. Adding a rule that corresponds to the symbol placeholder is not recommended and would lead to unpredictable behavior.

Placeholder symbol string  “_”

This defines a placeholder symbol. It is shown in a position where there has not yet been any user input.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Search

A search is a means of accessing information quickly. If an amount of data is too large for users to find something just by scanning through it, you should consider providing a search function.

Search field
Search field

Usage

Use a search field (sap.m.SearchField) if you want to enable users to enter text to search for information. The search field is also the control of choice for filtering down a given amount of information.

Responsiveness

On tablets (size M) and smartphones (size S), the master list’s search field is not initially visible. It only appears when the user pulls down the list. Its position is not fixed, so it scrolls away. On desktops (size L), the master list’s search field is visible from the start. Its position is fixed and it does not scroll away.

Master list with search field
Master list with search field
Searching in the master list - Search field on focus
Searching in the master list - Search field on focus
Searching in the master list
Searching in the master list

Types

SAP Fiori comes with two different search types.

  1. The manual searchis triggered explicitly after the user enters text in the search field and clicks or taps the Search button or presses the Enter key.
  2. The live search(also known as “incremental search” or “search-as-you-type”) is triggered by each character that the user enters or deletes.

Queries that are entered are used to search the backend data for term matches (not case-sensitive). While a live search uses a “contains” approach, a manual search uses a “starts with” approach. “Contains” means that the result needs to match the query only partly to be a valid result. “Starts with” means that full terms of the result need to start with the entered query to be visualized.

Layout

The search input field (or search box) consists of two parts:

  1. The text input, which is left-aligned. Initially, the field shows a placeholder (Search). As soon as the user enters a character, this prompt text disappears. It appears again if the user deletes the entry.
  2. If a manual search is to be implemented, a search button with a magnifier icon is placed on the right side of this input control. The user clicks or taps this button to trigger the search. In live searches, the magnifier icon is also placed here, but it functions more like an additional indicator to signify that this is a search input field. It also functions as an explicit search button if the user wants to search again for a query that has already been entered.

All item attributes defined by the app development team are searched. When the results are displayed, the items found do not necessarily have to show the attribute through which the item was found. The results are displayed in the same list that contained the original item set. Initial grouping and the order of the list are not affected by the search.

When the split screen is used, the search field appears at the top of the master list. In full screen mode, the search field is placed at the top of the page.

Behavior and Interaction

Entering a Search Term

Search terms can be entered easily into the input field. The search box then displays all full-text search terms. There is no line break and no truncation if the query is longer than the input field. Results might also be displayed that do not match the query in their title or subtitle. This might be because details can also be searched for. The user can see the matching terms in the specific details section.

Deleting a Search Term

The user can click or tap the “X” icon  ) button to remove the text from the field. In the case of the live search, this also resets the search. In a manual search, deleting the search term and then triggering the search resets the search results.

Refreshing

If the Refresh button is available, the user can update the list without triggering a new search. This is usually needed when backend data changes quickly and often.

If the currently selected item is no longer available after the list has been refreshed, the next item in the line is selected. If no next item is available, the first item in the line should be selected next.

Search field with refresh
Search field with refresh

On touch devices, the Refresh icon is not visible in the search field. In this case, Pull Down to Refresh is used instead. The Pull Down to Refresh arrow icon is animated and spins to signal that the user should release it.

Information
For information on how to manage leading and treading whitespace (blanks) when copying and pasting text into input controls, please see removing leading and trailing whitespace.

Properties

The following methods are important.

For the live search:

  • attachLiveChange(oData?fnFunctionoListener?) Attach event handler fnFunction to the ‘liveChange’ event of this sap.m.SearchField.
  • detachLiveChange(fnFunctionoListener) Detach event handler fnFunction from the ‘liveChange’ event of this sap.m.SearchField.
  • fireLiveChange(mArguments?) Fire event liveChange to attached listeners.

For the manual search:

  • attachSearch(oData?fnFunctionoListener?) Attach event handler fnFunction to the ‘search’ event of this sap.m.SearchField.
  • detachSearch(fnFunctionoListener) Detach event handler fnFunction from the ‘search’ event of this sap.m.SearchField.
  • fireSearch(mArguments?) Fire event search to attached listeners.

If a Refresh button is needed:

To show the Search button:

To ensure the focus is set to input:

Guidelines

  • Implement the live search whenever possible.
  • Use a manual search only if the amount of data is too large and if your app would otherwise run into performance issues.
  • Show an appropriate prompt text:Search if queries are sent to all connected services, or Search In: if the search is limited to a certain source or providing service.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Date/Time Picker

The date/time picker allows users to select date and time values in a combined input.

Usage

Use the date/time picker if:

  • You need a combined date and time input control.

Do not use the date time picker if:

  • You want to use either a date or a time value. In this case, use the date picker or the time picker instead.

Responsiveness

The date/time picker runs on all form factors and fully adapts to all devices.

The date/time picker opens in a popover for sizes M and L (tablet or desktop device)
The date/time picker opens in a popover for sizes M and L (tablet or desktop device)
The date/time picker opens in a dialog for size S (smartphone)
The date/time picker opens in a dialog for size S (smartphone)

Behavior and Interaction

Selecting Date and Time Values

Sizes M and L/XL

The date/time picker appears as a popover when the user clicks or taps a date (input field) on the calendar. The user can then select the desired date from the calendar, and the time from the rotating wheel. For the time, it’s possible to select hours, minutes, and even seconds.

When the user clicks or taps the OK button, the popover closes and the selected date and time appear in the input field. When the user selects Cancel, the action is aborted and the input field remains unchanged.

Date/time picker – Open
Date/time picker – Open
Date/time picker – Closed
Date/time picker – Closed

Size S and Mobile Size

On smaller devices, the user can choose the date and time value in arbitrary order by tapping the segmented button on top of the screen. Be aware that the popover is superimposed on the input field during the selection process for mobile/S sizes.

The user can select the desired date from the calendar, and the time from the rotating time wheel. For the time, it’s possible to select hours, minutes, and even seconds. Clicking a date in the calendar automatically takes the user to the time selection screen.

When the user selects OK, the popover closes and the selected date and time appear in the input field. When the user selects Cancel, the action is aborted and the input field remains unchanged.

Size S - Date/time picker opens with the 'Date' view
Size S - Date/time picker opens with the 'Date' view
Size S - Selecting a date opens the 'Time' view
Size S - Selecting a date opens the 'Time' view

Scrolling

Within the date/time input popover, each area can be scrolled individually by dragging and dropping the areas.
On large devices, the user can also use the standard scrolling mechanism.

Date/time input – Scrolling by swiping
Date/time input – Scrolling by swiping

Guidelines

Date Picker and Time Picker

In general, we recommend separating the date/time picker controls as the time picker supports the mask input function and the date picker allows the user to enter date in different formats. This makes it easier and more convenient for the user to enter the desired values. For additional guidelines and information on the individual controls, see the resources section below.

Default Values

Independently of the chosen control, set the default values of the date/time picker carefully to avoid unnecessary scrolling. It often makes sense to set the default for the time to the full or half hour, setting the minutes to 00 or 30. Sometimes, it may also make sense to use the current time and date.

Formatting Dates and Times

For guidelines and information on the SAPUI5 date formatters, see formatting dates.

For guidelines and information on the SAPUI5 time formatters, see formatting times.

Setting Steps

You can set intervals for the minutes and seconds on the slider (properties: minutesStep and/or secondsStep). For example, if you set the seconds step to “5”, the slider offers “00”, “05”, “10”, “15”, and so on.

Properties

AM and PM are locale-dependent. The locale can be set using the property localeId.

You can set the display format (property: displayFormat) to define the format in which the time input field and the time picker dropdown display the time.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Select Dialog

The select dialog enables users to select one or more items from a comprehensive list. The select dialog comes with a list of entries and a search field to filter the list.

A more enhanced dialog for single selection and multiselection is the value help dialog as it offers range selection and excluding functions.

Usage

Use the select dialog if:

  • Users need to select one or more entries from a comprehensive list that contains multiple attributes or values.

Do not use the select dialog if:

  • Users need to pick one item from a predefined set of options that contains one attribute or value only such as languages. In this case, consider using the combo box or select instead.
  • Your use case requires more enhanced functionalities such as a selection based on ranges. For the selection of values, consider using the value help dialog instead.
  • Your use case requires tabs, filters, or an Add New functionality in the select dialog. In this case, use a standard dialog instead.

Responsiveness

The display of the select control depends on the device. On phones, the selection list takes up the whole screen. On desktop and tablet devices it appears as a popover.

Size S

Single select dialog in full screen on smartphone
Single select dialog in full screen on smartphone
Multi-select dialog in full screen on smartphone
Multi-select dialog in full screen on smartphone

Size M

Single select dialog on tablet
Single select dialog on tablet
Multi-select dialog on tablet
Multi-select dialog on tablet

Size L

Single select dialog on desktop
Single select dialog on desktop
Multi-select dialog on desktop
Multi-select dialog on desktop

Components

Dialog Header

You need to set the title of the dialog header (1). We recommend the following form:

Single selection

Select

Example: Select Product

Multi-selection

Select

Example: Select Products

Search

The first element in the dialog is a standard search field (2).

Info Toolbar

The info toolbar (3) is only available in multi-selection mode. It shows the number of selected items in the following form:

Selected :

Example: Selected Products: 2

Content

The content area (4) can be filled with any list content inherited from the list item base, such as standard list items, display list items, and feed list items. You can set the content to be displayed as grouped.

Button Toolbar

The button toolbar (5) contains two buttonsOK and Cancel. OK takes over the selection, while Cancel resets the selection to the state it was in when the dialog was opened. Do not use Add or Select instead of OK.

Components of the select dialog. Left: single select, right: multi select
Components of the select dialog. Left: single select, right: multi select

Behavior and Interaction

The select dialog can be called up from any control. The most common trigger is an input field with selection icon, also known as a “value help field”, or F4. Alternative triggers are buttons or icons, which add items to an existing list or the info bar in the master list in order to apply a contextual filter.

Single Select

Once users select an entry, the select dialog is closed and the selected entry is taken over. If applicable, the entry is displayed in the field from which the dialog was triggered.

Multi-Select

In the multi-select version of the select dialog, checkboxes are provided for choosing multiple entries. The selection is taken over when the user closes the dialog via OK. Cancel closes the dialog without taking over the selected values. An info bar indicates the number of selected items.

Search

The user can search items.

Guidelines

List Options

If you need to indicate that none of the selection options are selected, or you need to allow the user not to select an option, provide (None) as an option and place it at the beginning of the list.

If you need to indicate that all items apply (for example, as a list filter), provide All as an option and place it at the beginning of the list.

Select list with '(None)'
Select list with '(None)'

Search Behavior

Two types of search behavior are available:

(1) A live search, also known as “search-as-you-type” (property: liveChange), which is triggered by each character that the user enters or deletes.

(2) A manual search, which is triggered explicitly after the user enters text in the search field and clicks or taps the Search icon or presses the ENTER key.

Although app developers need to decide themselves which search to use, we recommend implementing the live search whenever possible. Use the manual search only if the amount of data is too large and your app would otherwise run into performance issues. For more information, check out the article on search.

Remember Selections

If your use case requires selections in a dialog to be remembered so that the user can make corrections, you can set the rememberSelections function in the select dialog to ‘true’. When users exit the dialog by clicking or tapping Cancel, the selection is restored to the state it was in when the dialog was opened.

Selection is remembered after the dialog is reopened
Selection is remembered after the dialog is reopened

Once the dialog is closed, the selection is reset by default. This allows users to make a new selection when they reopen the dialog. This functionality makes sense, for example, when users need to add multiple items to a table.

Selection is reset after the dialog is closed
Selection is reset after the dialog is closed

Info Bar

In multi-selection mode, an info bar shows the number of selected items. Use the following format:

<Business Object> Selected: <# items>
Example: Products Selected: 2

Note that the info bar is not “sticky”. When the user scrolls down the list, the info bar scrolls off the screen.

Content

By default, the select dialog comes with a growing feature (property: growing = true). We recommend disabling the growing feature and setting this property to “false”. This ensures that all items in the table are loaded at once, and that the “Items selected” count, the search, and select/deselect features all work properly.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

  • No links

Popover

The popover displays additional information for an object in a compact way and without leaving the page. The popover can contain various UI elements such as fields, tables, images, and charts. It can also include actions in the footer.

Note: The quick view is similar to a popover, but has a predefined structure, a fixed set of UI elements, and automatic UI rendering. Check first whether the quick view is appropriate for your use case.

Usage

Use a popover if:

  • You need to define your own structure.
  • You want to show UI elements that are not available with the quick view.

Do not use a popover if:

  • The quick view is more appropriate for your use case.
  • The objects are in a master list (in this case, the details are shown in the details area).

Responsiveness

The popover can be used in the following ways:

  • Responsive and adaptive: sap.m.ResponsivePopover
    Shows a dialog on smartphones (to be closed with an X) and a popover on a tablet or desktop.
  • Non-responsive: sap.m.Popover
    Always shows a popover. Only use a non-responsive popover if it has very little content. On smartphones, the popover should not use more than a third of the phone’s real estate.

Layout

Structure of Popover

The header and footer are generally optional. The other elements are as follows:

Back (1) – optional
Needs to be implemented if the user can trigger further popovers. Always show popovers in place. Never place them on top of each other.

Title (2)
We recommend that you show an app-specific title for accessibility reasons. If you do not show a title, use the invisible text control (sap.ui.core.InvisibleText) to set a text for screen reader support.

Close function (3)
This feature closes the dialog. It is available for smartphones only and is set automatically (sap.m.ResponsivePopover).

Content (4)
Ensure that the content has a basic design and shows only the most important information. We recommend the following:

  • Use no more than two groups.
  • Limit the total number of fields to eight.
  • Use single-column tables.
  • Use micro charts.

Actions (5) – optional

Popover – General structure
Popover – General structure
Popover – Example
Popover – Example

Placement Types

The placement type defines how the popover will be positioned on the screen in relation to its trigger. The default placement is “Right”: the popover appears to the right of the object it relates to.

If you set the placement type to “Auto”, the position of the popover in relation to the reference control is determined automatically, depending on the available space.

Popover with default placement type - Right
Popover with default placement type - Right
Developer Hint
More information on the different placement types can be found here.

Modal Mode

The popover in modal mode opens in a modal window, which blocks the whole screen and attracts the user’s attention.

Use the modal mode only if you want to prompt the user to make a decision or confirm an action. Ensure that the user can close the popover, either by offering an action button in the footer or a Close button in the header.

Popover – Modal
Popover – Modal

Behavior and Interaction

Opening a Popover

The user opens a popover by clicking or tapping an object represented by a text link or an icon. To improve accessibility, we recommend using texts, such as the name or ID of an object.

Closing a Popover

The popover is closed when the user clicks or taps outside the popover or selects an action within the popover.

When the popover is open over a table, and the user clicks outside the popover to close it, this can trigger unwanted drill-down navigation to a table item. Since this interaction changes the whole screen content, you can suppress drill-down navigation on tables when popovers are open on the same screen.

Developer Hint
To control the closing behavior of the popover in this case, add a CSS style “pointer-events: none” to the area that should remain static. When the popover is closed, remove the CSS style again. Here is a sample demonstrating how this can be achieved.

You can also use the property setBlocked to prevent users from accidentally triggering actions while closing the popover. The property lets you specify the area to be blocked when the popover is opened.

Guidelines

  • Show status information as text fields in a content group. You can use semantic text colors.
  • You can define a height for the popover. If the content exceeds the height, a scroll bar is displayed.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Table Select Dialog

Table select is a commonly-used dialog that helps users to make a selection from a comprehensive table containing multiple attributes or values. With the dialog, users are also able to access additional information about the objects in the table without needing to select them first.

The dialog provides a responsive table layout with additional search, filter, and selection functionalities in the header. A footer toolbar provides actions for canceling or confirming the process.

Usage

Use the table select dialog if:

  • You need to help users select one or more items from a comprehensive list that contains multiple attributes or values.

Do not use the table select dialog if:

  • You need to help users pick one item from a predefined set of options that contains only one value. In this case, use the dropdown box instead.
  • You need to help users with query-based range selection and enhanced filter options. In this case, use the value help dialog instead.
  • Your use case requires tabs, filters, or actions in a select dialog.In this case, use a standard dialog instead.
  • Your use case only requires filtering without selection. In this case, use the filter toolbar instead.

Responsiveness

The table inside the table select dialog behaves like the responsive table. On smaller screens, the columns wrap and build a list that shows all the information. All other elements in the control are also responsive.

On bigger screens, the table select dialog also provides columns
On bigger screens, the table select dialog also provides columns
The table in the dialog is responsive and wraps on smaller screens to show a list
The table in the dialog is responsive and wraps on smaller screens to show a list

Behavior and Interaction

The table select dialog can be called up from any control. The trigger is usually a button with a selection icon in an input field, or an Add button in a toolbar.

Input trigger: This trigger can be useful if users need to select, for example, one customer from a large customer register.

Example of a trigger: the selection icon in the input field
Example of a trigger: the selection icon in the input field

Add button: This trigger can be useful if users need to add an item to a list. For example, the dialog could help users select the product from a large product catalog. Clicking OK in the footer toolbar of the dialog adds the selected products to the list.

Reset button: This button allows users to clear all the selected items.

Example of a trigger: Add button in a table
Example of a trigger: Add button in a table

 

Single Select

The single-select version does not need an OK button in the footer toolbar because the selected entry is taken over and closed as soon as a user selects an item from the table. If applicable, the entry is displayed in the field from which the dialog was triggered. Alternatively, a toast message can be shown if necessary.

Multi-Select

The multi-select version of the table select dialog provides checkboxes for users to choose multiple items. The blue info bar above the table indicates the number of selected items. The selection is taken over when the user closes the dialog via the OK button in the footer toolbar. Clicking or tapping Cancel closes the dialog without taking over the selected values.

Remembering Selections

If selections need to be memorized in order to help users make corrections, you can set the RememberSelections property to true. This restores the selection to the state it was in when the dialog was last opened as soon as users exit the dialog via OK or Cancel. The interaction flow of the RememberSelections property is shown and explained in the select dialog article.

Grouping

The list can also be displayed as grouped. Group headers divide the table into segments. A pregrouped table is useful for tables with many entries, which can be sorted by a single attribute.

A responsive table with group headers
A responsive table with group headers

Guidelines

Set the information provided in the table select dialog from top to bottom as follows:

Dialog Header

Set the title of the dialog header in the following form:

  • For single selection: Select <Business Object>. For example: Select Product
  • For multiple selection: Select <Business Objects> [plural]. For example: Select Products.

Search

The first interactive element in the dialog is a standard search field. Two types of search behavior are available:

  • live search, also known as “search-as-you-type,” which is triggered by each character that the user enters or deletes.
  • A manual search, which is triggered explicitly after the user enters text in the search field and clicks or taps theSearch icon or presses the ENTER key. As soon as the user hits the Search button, a Delete icon appears at the end of the input field to delete the keyword and cancel the result list.

App developers need to decide which search to use. We recommend implementing the live search whenever possible. Use the manual search only if the amount of data is too large and if your app would otherwise run into performance issues. For more information, check out the article on searching.

Info Bar

In multi-selection mode, an info bar shows the number of selected items. Use the following format:

<Business Object> Selected: <# items>
Example: Products Selected: 2

Content

The content area provides a table. This behaves like the responsive table, so the columns wrap on smaller screens and display a list.

By default, the table select comes with a growing feature (property: growing = true). We recommend disabling the growing feature and setting this property to “false”. This ensures that all items in the table are loaded at once, and that the “Items selected” count, the search, and select/deselect features all work properly.

Footer Toolbar

In the multi-select version, the footer toolbar contains the OK and Cancel buttons. OK takes over the selection, while Cancel resets the selection to the state it was in when the user opened the dialog. Do not use Add or Select instead of OK.

In the single-select version, only provide Cancel in the footer toolbar because the dialog takes over the selection as soon as the user chooses one.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Object Display Components

There are four types of object display components: object status, object identifier, object number, and object marker. Each one is connected to an object and displays a certain type of information (status, identifier, number, marker).

 Object Status

The object status is a short text that represents the semantic status of an object. It has a semantic color and an optional icon. Typically, the object status is used in the dynamic page header and as a status attribute of a line item in a table.

Object Identifier

The object identifier is a short text that represents the key identifier of an object.

You can find the object identifier in a table as an identifier of the line item.

Object Number

The object number is a short text that represents the numeric (key) attribute of an object and its unit. The number has a semantic color, and the unit inherits the same color from its number. The number can be emphasized (default setting) when it is used for the key attribute, and non-emphasized when it is used for any other numeric attribute of the item.

The object number is typically used to indicate the key attribute of an object in the dynamic page header, or as an attribute of a line item in a table.

Object Marker

The object marker indicates the technical status of an object. It is enabled for the dynamic page layout, snapping header, object page header, upload collection, and object list item.

The technical status can be represented as and icon, with an icon and text, or as text only, depending on the screen size. See the Guidelines section below to find out when to use each visibility option.

Currently, the following technical statuses can be visualized by the object marker:

  • Flag
  • Favorite
  • Editing Status (Draft, Locked, Unsaved Changes)
    The editing status is part of the draft handling concept.

Usage

Use the object status if:

  • You need to display the semantic status of an object: negative (property: error), critical (property: warning), positive (property: success), or neutral (property: none).

Use the object number if:

  • You want to display the key attribute of an object. In this case, keep the default emphasized setting (property: emphasized).
  • You need to display one or more numeric attributes of an object that, for example, you want to compare (property: emphasized set to “false”).

Use the object identifier if:

  • You want to indicate the key identifier of the object.

Use the object marker if:

  • You want to display the technical state of an object (locked, draft, unsaved changes, favorite, flagged). If you want to display the status of the object in the business lifecycle, consider using the object status display component instead.
  • You need to show that the current object instance is locked by another user.

Do not use an object display components if:

  • You want to display system messages.
  • They are for decoration purposes only.

Responsiveness

  • The object status wraps if it is longer than the available screen width.
  • The object identifier text wraps if the size of the screen becomes too small to display the entire text on one line.
  • The object number does not wrap or truncate. For large numbers, you need to consider using the appropriate formatting.
  • The object marker does not wrap or truncate. It comes with different display options. Depending on the screen size and the selected visibility option, the object marker behaves as follows:
    • Size L/M:
      • If the visibility is set to IconAndText, both are displayed.
      • If the visibility is set to IconOnly, only the icon is displayed.
      • If the visibility is set to Text, only the text is displayed.
    • Size S:
      • If the visibility is set to IconAndText, only the icon is displayed.
      • If the visibility is set to Icon, only the icon is displayed.
      • If the visibility is set to Text, only the text is displayed.

Components

Object Status

The object status consists of the following:

  • A semantically colored text indicating the severity (property: text).
  • An optional icon (property: icon).
  • An optional link (property: active). If the object status is used as a link, a hover effect is shown on non-touch devices.
    If the object status is shown using a combination of icon and text, there is no hover effect for the icon.

We recommend using the semantically colored text-only version.

Text-only object status (left), icon-only object status (middle), and icon with text shown with a link during hover state (right)
Text-only object status (left), icon-only object status (middle), and icon with text shown with a link during hover state (right)

Object Identifier

The object identifier has the following properties:

  • A title text (property: title)
Object identifier with title only
Object identifier with title only
  • An optional additional descriptive text (property: text)
Object identifier with title and subtitle
Object identifier with title and subtitle
  • The title can be set to active. In this case, it looks like a link and can fire an event (property: titleActive).
Actionable object identifier
Actionable object identifier
  • Both texts wrap if the space available is insufficient for them to each fit on one line.
Object identifier with wrapping text
Object identifier with wrapping text

Object Number

The object number consists of the following:

  • A colored text (property: number), which can be set to non-emphasized when used in the content area (property: emphasized).
  • Semantics to indicate the status: negative (property: error), critical (property: warning), positive (property: success), and neutral (property: none).
  • An optional unit (property: unit).
Emphasized object numbers
Emphasized object numbers
Object numbers
Object numbers

Object Marker

The object marker comes with the following characteristics:

  • Icon only (visibility: IconOnly)
  • Text only (visibility: TextOnly)
  • Icon and text (visibility: IconAndText)
  • Interactive
  • Non-interactive

The object marker is able to fire an an event when it is pressed (interactive). If the control is interactive and displayed as an icon with text, the icon and text are one click area.

Draft
Draft
Unsaved changes
Unsaved changes
Locked
Locked
Favorite
Favorite
Flagged
Flagged

Guidelines

Object Status

General

  • Use semantic text only, and avoid using it with an icon.
  • Use the following semantics to indicate the status/severity: negative (property: error), critical (property: warning), positive (property: success), and neutral (property: none).
Positive object status
Positive object status
  • Provide a link for the object status if the user needs additional information about the status (for example, using a popover).
Critical object status during hover state
Critical object status during hover state
  • Only use icons if they are unambiguous and easily understood (such as a padlock for locked items). If you feel that your icon needs a descriptive text to be understood, use text only.
Widely used icon for warning
Widely used icon for warning

Tables

Always left-align the object status in a table.
Exception (responsive table only): If status information is displayed as secondary information in a column, the status should follow the alignment of the primary information.

Apply the following rules for sorting tables by status:

  • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
  • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
  • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
  • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first

Object Identifier

  • The object identifier should be easily readable (preferably the display text and not the ID). If the ID is necessary to distinguish between items that use the same title, it should appear in brackets, such as Product ABC (1234567). The decision to include the ID in the text property can also depend on how long you expect the text to be.
  • The object identifier can also be shown as a link. In this case, the event opens the quick view of the object.

Object Number

  • If the object number is the key attribute of the object inside the content area, emphasize the number when it is used as a line item status in a table.
  • The object number can also be used to visualize other semantic numeric attributes. In this case, they are not emphasized unless they are the key attribute, such as a sum.
Object number used as a semantic attribute (weight) and as a key attribute (price)
Object number used as a semantic attribute (weight) and as a key attribute (price)

Object Marker

An object can have multiple technical statuses at the same time. However, because the editing statuses are mutually exclusive, users will see a maximum of 3 technical statuses for an object: Flag, Favorite, and one Editing Status. The app developer is responsible for the technical statuses.

Every technical status has a default visualization that can be changed by the app developer depending on the usage context. Also see How to Display the Editing Status in the Draft Handling article.

Flag and Favorite are usually displayed as icons on all screen sizes. For more information, see Flag and Favorite.

The default behavior for the editing status is as follows: 

Size L/M:

  • Locked and Unsaved Changes are displayed as icon and text, while Draft is displayed as text.
  • Flag and Favorite are displayed as icons.

Size S:

  • Locked and Unsaved Changes are displayed as icons, while Draft is displayed as text.
  • Flag and Favorite are displayed as icons.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Stacked Bar Micro Chart

The stacked bar micro chart is designed to be embedded into a list, table, or object page header as a way to represent related values atop one another in order to visualize the single values as part of a whole. These values can be displayed in two different ways:

  • Percentage compared to 100%

    Use percentage values if your goal is to see each value in the composition as a percentage of the whole. In this case, the sum of the bars is always 100%.

Percentage values (without labels)
Percentage values (without labels)
  • Values compared to a maximum value

    Use this option in a list or table if your goal is to compare the sum of the values to a maximum value (for example, the maximum of all data shown in the list or table), whilst still displaying the relative value of each to its local maximum.

Absolute values (without labels)
Absolute values (without labels)

Please note: The stacked bar micro chart does not support negative values.

Usage

Use the stacked bar micro chart if:

  • You want to visualize a part-to-whole relationship embedded in a list or table, with all the features described above.
Chart embedded in a table - Percentage values (without labels)
Chart embedded in a table - Percentage values (without labels)
Chart embedded in a table - Absolute values (without labels)
Chart embedded in a table - Absolute values (without labels)
  • You want to visualize a part-to-whole relationship in an object page header, with all the features described above.

Also consider using a Harvey Ball micro chart as an alternative visualization for a part-to-whole relationship.

Chart embedded in an object header - Percentage values (with labels)
Chart embedded in an object header - Percentage values (with labels)
Chart embedded in an object header - Absolute values (with labels)
Chart embedded in an object header - Absolute values (with labels)

Do not use the stacked bar micro chart if:

  • You want to visualize a part-to-whole relationship on a SAP Fiori tile. The stacked bar micro chart is not designed to be embedded into an SAP Fiori tile and is therefore not supported. Consider using a Harvey Ball micro chart instead.


Responsiveness

See the micro chart overview article.

Components

Maximum Value

The chart is scaled relative to the maximum value. This means if a maximum value (maxValue) is set, then the width of the stacked chart represents the maximum value and each value within the chart is scaled relative to this maximum.

If the maximum value is not set, then the width of the chart represents 100% and each value is displayed as a relative percentage.

Precision

By setting a specific value for the precision, an application developer can influence rounding calculations by defining how many digits are displayed. By default this value is 1.

Display Value

By default, the control displays percentage values on the bars. However, application developers can also set a display property to show absolute values, or to show only bars (by entering a blank space).

Color

An application developer can set any color for the chart either by using names of semantic colors, or by using names from the qualitative palette (sapUiChartPaletteQualitativeHue1…11).

Please note: A legend is currently not available for the stacked bar micro chart. Since the use of multiple colors is not self-explanatory, we highly recommend using semantic colors and an explanatory title for the chart.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Radial Micro Chart

The goal of the radial chart is to display a single percentage value. The chart consists of a colored radial bar with a percentage value inside.

The radial micro chart can be embedded into a table, list, tile, or header.

Different radial charts
Different radial charts

Usage

Use the radial micro chart if:

  • You want to display a single value in a table.
  • You want to show a percentage value; the proportion of the total is always calculated and displayed as a percentage.
  • You want to emphasize the visualization; the circular shape is more prominent.
  • You want to use colors from the chart color palettes.

Do not use the radial micro chart if:

  • You want to display a single value in the form of a fillable shape or group of shapes that describe their context. Use the status indicator instead.
  • You want to make it easier to compare better two or more values visually. Use the progress indicator instead.
  • You want to display custom values and not only percentages. Use the progress indicator instead.

Responsiveness

See the Micro Chart overview article.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Radial Micro Chart (SAPUI5 samples)

Line Micro Chart

A line chart is a basic type of chart used in many fields. It displays information as a series of data points connected by a line. The chart is often used to visualize a trend over time.

The line micro chart can be embedded into a table, list, tile, or header.

Usage

Use the line micro chart if:

You want to visualize the shape.

Use this option to show a trend or sparkline. By default, the chart is rendered in blue, but application developers can set any color for the chart using the names for semantic colors or names from the qualitative palette.

Line micro chart - Sparkline
Line micro chart - Sparkline

You want to show data points that are above or below a certain threshold.

Note that the threshold can also be set to zero.

In addition to data points, you can use two different colors for the lines. We recommend that you use only semantic colors for this option, such as green for values above the threshold, and red for values below the threshold.

Line micro chart - Data points above and below a threshold
Line micro chart - Data points above and below a threshold

You want to show one or two focus points.

Use this option to display a trend or sparkline to focus on one or two special values, such as the first and/or last value of the chart. By default, the chart is rendered in blue, but application developers can choose another color for the chart line and data points from the qualitative palette.

Line micro chart - 2 focus points
Line micro chart - 2 focus points

You want to show one or two focus points with semantic colors.

Use this option to display a trend or sparkline to focus on one or two special values with a semantic meaning, such as the first and/or last value above or below a certain threshold. Note that the threshold can also be set to zero.

Line micro chart - 2 focus points with semantic colors
Line micro chart - 2 focus points with semantic colors

Do not use the line micro chart if:

You have scenarios that do not depict time periods.

Responsiveness

See the micro chart overview article.

Layout

Line micro chart in a tile or facet

The chart with all functionalities and options mentioned above can be embedded in a tile or header facet. It will use the full height and width of the control.

Note: The title of the tile or header facet should clearly express the value of the threshold if it is not equal to zero, such as values above and below 50.

Line micro chart in a tile with data points above and below the zero threshold
Line micro chart in a tile with data points above and below the zero threshold
Line micro chart (sparkline) in a tile with no semantic meaning
Line micro chart (sparkline) in a tile with no semantic meaning
Line micro chart in a tile with focus on first and last data points
Line micro chart in a tile with focus on first and last data points
Line micro chart in a tile with a semantic focus point and KPI value
Line micro chart in a tile with a semantic focus point and KPI value

Line Micro Chart in a Table or List

You can embed a line micro chart with all its features in a table or list.

Please note: Use the manual scale if you intend to synchronize the chart visualization.

Line micro chart in a table with values above and below a threshold
Line micro chart in a table with values above and below a threshold
Line micro chart in a table - Smaller size
Line micro chart in a table - Smaller size
Line micro chart in a table with 4 focus points - First/last and min/max value
Line micro chart in a table with 4 focus points - First/last and min/max value
Line micro chart in a table with data points hidden
Line micro chart in a table with data points hidden

Components

To present the line micro chart in an appealing way, application developers can set several properties.

Data points

The line micro chart can display or hide data points. To display data points, we recommend that you use 4 (for quarters) to 12 (for months) data points per chart. The responsive behavior of the chart hides data points if there is not enough space to display them.

If data points have semantic colors (such as green for positive, orange for critical, and red for negative values), the line is colored grey.

If data points do not have a semantic meaning, application developers can assign any color from the qualitative palette. Note that same color is then also applied to the line.

Alternatively, you can show a line-only chart, with all the data points hidden. In this case, you can use up to two colors per chart. If the values relate to a threshold, we recommend using semantic colors for the line to highlight values above or below the threshold.

Line micro chart - Data points
Line micro chart - Data points

Focus points

Unlike data points, focus points highlight specific values, such as the first and/or last value of a time series. Neutral focus points are colored blue. Focus points with a semantic meaning are colored green, orange, or red.
Focus points are always displayed regardless of the size of the chart.

Line micro chart - Focus points
Line micro chart - Focus points

Threshold line

You can set a threshold line. If the threshold isn’t zero, include its value in the title of the tile, header facet, or column in lists and tables to ensure that the chart is not misleading for the user.

Line micro chart with threshold line
Line micro chart with threshold line

Labels

The labels for the line micro chart are optional. Use the bottom labels to indicate the beginning and the end of the time period. Use the top labels to show the corresponding values for the beginning and the end of the chart. Ensure that the labels for the values are not truncated.

Line micro chart with labels
Line micro chart with labels

Scale

Application developers can set the scale manually or automatically. If the threshold is included in the scale, the chart always renders a horizontal reference line.

Use auto scale for lists and tables if you want to display a trend/sparkline per list/table element independently of other list/table elements.

Use the manual scale if list/table entries need to be synchronized. Entering the scale manually ensures that all charts within the list/table are comparable.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Delta Micro Chart

The delta micro chart helps to visualize a delta value (difference) between two main key figures. The delta can be a positive or negative value. Configured thresholds define the semantic coloring of the delta bar. The left-aligned labels can be omitted, whereas the right-aligned labels with the values are always shown.

Different delta charts
Different delta charts

Usage

The delta micro chart can be embedded into a table, list, tile, or header.

Responsiveness

See the micro chart overview article.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Harvey Ball Micro Chart

You can use a Harvey Ball chart to visualize a value compared to its total. This is not a pie chart with multiple values or sections, but rather just one value from a total. If you configure thresholds, the semantic color of the value shows a positive, critical, or negative value. You can also use regular chart colors from the qualitative palette without a semantic meaning.

Different Harvey Ball charts
Different Harvey Ball charts

Usage

The Harvey Ball micro chart can be embedded into a table, list, tile,or header.

Responsiveness

See the Micro Chart overview article.

Resources

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Comparison Micro Chart

The comparison chart is a bar chart. It compares entries in a top N list. You can choose between two different layouts depending on the available space and parent container: normal view and wide view. You can use either the semantic chart palette or the qualitative chart palette.

Different comparison charts in normal view and wide view
Different comparison charts in normal view and wide view

Usage

The comparison micro chart can be embedded into a table, list, tile, or header.

Responsiveness

See the micro chart overview article.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Comparison Micro Chart (SAPUI5 samples)

Column Micro Chart

A column chart uses rectangular bars to compare multiple values over time or across categories. One axis of the chart shows the specific categories being compared, the other axis represents a value.

Note: The current version of the chart does not support showing the axis.

Multiple column charts
Multiple column charts

Usage

The column micro chart can be embedded into a table, list, tile, or header.

Responsiveness and Adaptiveness

See the micro chart overview article.

Components

Bars

The bars of the column micro chart can represent both positive and negative values.

We strongly recommend using only colors from the semantic palette for the bars (good, critical, bad, neutral). If your use case requires colors from the qualitative palette, use only one color per chart.

Labels

The column micro chart currently supports four labels – two at the bottom and two at the top.

The bottom labels should be used to indicate the start and end point of a period, whereas the top labels show the corresponding values.

Column micro chart - Components
Column micro chart - Components

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Area Micro Chart

An area micro chart is a trend chart, which provides information for actual and target values for a specific time range. These values are visualized as segmented lines, and can be compared to threshold areas shown in the background.

Area micro chart
Area micro chart

Usage

The area micro chart can be embedded into a table, list, tile, or header.

Responsiveness

See the micro chart overview article.

Layout

The area micro chart can be visualized in normal or wide mode. When no thresholds are defined, the area micro chart shows only the lines on a transparent background.

Area micro chart - Normal mode
Area micro chart - Normal mode
Area micro chart - Wide mode
Area micro chart - Wide mode
Area micro chart without thresholds
Area micro chart without thresholds

Components

The actual values are displayed as a solid line, the target values as a dotted line, and the thresholds as colored areas in the background.

You can show labels for the start and end values, the maximum and minimum values, and the beginning and end of the time range.

If there are only left and right labels, each takes 50% of the width of the chart. Always try to keep the label short enough to fit into the space. Bear in mind that if one of the labels on the bottom (or on the top) truncates, both labels on the bottom (or on top) will be hidden.

If there are min and max value labels as well, their width is calculated by what is left from the total width of the chart minus the sum of left and right labels. If the min or the max value label gets truncated, both min and max will be hidden.

Area micro chart - Components
Area micro chart - Components

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Analytical Table (ALV)

An analytical table contains a set of data that is structured in rows and columns. It provides several powerful possibilities for working with the data, including advanced grouping and aggregations.

In contrast to other tables, the analytical data binding used by the analytical table allows an aggregated number to be shown automatically in a cell. This means that a number in such a summarized cell is a total sum of several lines in the database.

Usage

Use the analytical table (ALV) if:

  • The cell level and the spatial relationship between cells are more important than the line item. Examples include spreadsheet analyses and waterfall charts. Note that an analytical table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You have to work on more than 1,000 rows. In this case, the analytical table is easier to handle. In contrast to the responsive table, the architecture of the analytical table is optimized for handling large numbers of items. Note that an analytical table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • Comparing items is a major use case. In this case, an analytical table might be more appropriate than a responsive table. In the analytical table, each cell contains only one data point. In contrast, the responsive table is more flexible regarding line items, including the ability to add more data points per cell and also the pop-in function. Both make comparisons more difficult. Note that an analytical table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.

Do not use the analytical table (ALV) if:

  • You need a table. The responsive table is the default table in SAP Fiori. Additional use cases where you might need the responsive table include:
    • You need to provide a total sum for one column. You can also add totals to the responsive table.
    • The focus is on working on line items, not on cells. The responsive table is optimized for displaying complete items on all devices (such as purchase orders and purchase requisitions).
    • Selecting one or more items is a main use case and details are needed to choose the correct item.
    • Line items are independent of each other and no operation across columns is needed.
    • You want to have only one implementation for all devices.
  • The main use case is choosing one item from a very small number of items with no additional details. A select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • The main use case is choosing one out of several items with only a few details per item. A list might be more appropriate. Pay attention to the layout of the list item to ensure that it has a pleasant appearance. Examples include the master list and the attachment list.
  • You cannot provide an analytical binding on the technical side. In this case, a grid table will do the work. Note that the grid table provides only one level of grouping, no aggregation options, and is also not responsive.
  • Data needs to be structured in a hierarchical manner. In this case, a tree table might be more appropriate. Although the analytical table can have several grouping levels, it is not as flexible when nodes at several levels contain children. Note that neither the tree table nor the analytical table are responsive. You will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones and tablets.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use charts.
  • You just need it for layout reasons. In this case, use a layout container like HBox or VBox.
  • You need read-only or editable field-value pairs. Use a form instead. The analytical table is not optimized for form-like input navigation.

Responsiveness

The analytical table is available for desktops and tablets, but not in smartphone sizes. It supports touch devices, but is not optimized for small screens.

If you use an analytical table for desktop use cases, note that you must implement a fallback solution for mobile and touch devices. This fallback solution does not need to support all use cases.

You could create a fallback by using a responsive table. However, a completely different solution, such as showing charts in a read-only case, might be more suitable.

Analytical table (ALV) shown on a desktop
Analytical table (ALV) shown on a desktop
Analytical table (ALV) shown on a tablet
Analytical table (ALV) shown on a tablet

Components

An analytical table does not consist of other elements. However, it is common to use a toolbar above the analytical table.

The toolbar can contain entry points for the view settings dialog and the table personalization dialog or for the p13n dialog, as well as for view switches in the form of a segmented button, and buttons for Add, Edit, and other actions.

Behavior and Interaction

An analytical table is quite restricted in terms of its content, although it provides powerful features for working with the content.

Table Level

Scroll

An analytical table allows horizontal and vertical scrolling (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: navigationMode, value: Scrollbar).

You can add any number of line items to the analytical table, which is known as “lazy loading”.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: rowHeight).

The analytical table is optimized to allow faster scrolling within the first 1000 items.

Scroll bar
Scroll bar

Select

An analytical table can have one of the following selection types (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable/ property: selectionMode):

None: Items cannot be selected. Row selectors are shown, but not active.

Analytical table without item selection
Analytical table without item selection

Single: One item in the analytical table can be selected. A row selector column is shown.

Analytical table with single selection
Analytical table with single selection
  • Multi Toggle: A multiselection mode that allows users to select one or more items. For this, the analytical table provides a column with checkboxes on the left-hand side. Clicking a checkbox toggles the state of the corresponding row from deselected to selected and back. Set the property collapseRecursive to “false” in order to keep the selection in groups even after collapsing and expanding the groups.
  • Select All: Works via a checkbox on the left of the column header (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableSelectAll). Using the Select All checkbox selects or deselects all items the user can reach via scrolling. Use Select All only if it makes sense. Note that selecting a lot of data also takes time and might not be appropriate for all use cases. For example, a delete operation on two million database entries might not be very helpful in many cases.

You can also use the keyboard keys Shift and Ctrl for multiselection.

Analytical table with multiple selection
Analytical table with multiple selection

An item can be selected in different ways, depending on the configuration of the analytical table (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: selectionBehavior):

  • Row: An item is selected by clicking the checkbox or the row. Use this for multiselection analytical tables if clicking a row is not used for something else.
  • RowSelector: An item is selected only by clicking the checkbox in the selector cell. Use this if you need to click the row for something else, such as navigation.
  • RowOnly: An item is selected only by clicking the row, and not the checkboxes in the selector cells. Use this for single-selection analytical tables if clicking a row is not used for something else, such as navigation.

Compact, Cozy, and Condensed

Like all SAP Fiori controls, the analytical table is shown in compact mode on a desktop and in cozy mode on tablets.

For desktop devices, you can fit even more rows onto the screen by using the condensed mode together with the compact mode. This renders less white space for each item.

Note that the condensed content density must always be set in addition to the compact mode. Do not use the condensed mode on its own. Do not mix condensed with cozy. Doing so could lead to unpredictable or unwanted results, such as cozy-sized controls in condensed-sized containers, missing padding, and so on.

Note that neither compact mode nor condensed mode support touch interaction. Even on a desktop with a touch screen, users will have difficulty selecting rows or using controls inside the cells with their fingers.

For more information on cozy and compact modes, see content density.

 

 

 

 

Analytical table in compact mode
Analytical table in compact mode
Analytical table in condensed mode - more items on the same screen real estate
Analytical table in condensed mode - more items on the same screen real estate

Column Header

The column header provides the label for the corresponding column and access to the column header menu.

Columns are resized as follows:

  • Mouse interaction: The user drags the separator line between two columns (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: Resizable). Double-clicking the line optimizes the column according to the length of the data currently visible and the label of the column header (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: Autoresizable).
  • Touch interaction: The user clicks or taps the column header to reveal two buttons: one to show the column header menu and one for resizing. The user drags the latter to resize the column.

When the user resizes a column, the adaptation of the column width depends on how the column widths are set:

  • If column widths are set in pixel-based units (px, em, rem), the resized column is adapted and subsequent columns are moved accordingly. The width of all other columns is not affected.
    If all the columns together do not use up the full width of the table control, empty space is added. If all the columns together exceed the width of the table control, a scrollbar appears.
  • If all column widths are set as percentages or “auto”, resizing one column automatically resizes one or more other columns. Resizing can also affect the position of the resized column. This option utilizes the full width of the table and ensures that no white space is added. A scrollbar appears only if all or most of the columns become to narrow. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, you can set a minimum width per column. However, this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are resized automatically. End users can still reduce the column width to below the defined minimum (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth).

Users can rearrange columns by dragging the column header to another position (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: enableColumnReordering).

Column header
Column header
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Columns do not use up the available space
Columns do not use up the available space

Column Header Menu

For each column, a menu can contain the following menu items (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumnMenu, property: Visible):

  • Sort Ascending/Descending (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: showSortMenuEntries)
  • Free text filter (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: showFilterMenuEntries)
  • Group
  • Totals
  • Freeze from the first to the last specified column (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: enableColumnFreeze)

For each column, the menu can be replaced by an app-specific menu.

Column header menu
Column header menu

Sort

The column header menu can provide two sort options (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: sortProperty, showSortMenuEntry):

  • Sort Ascending
  • Sort Descending

The user selects one of these options to sort the corresponding column accordingly (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

Sort settings in column header menu
Sort settings in column header menu

Filter

The column header menu can provide a search field for entering free text (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: filterProperty, showFilterMenuEntries).

If the user enters a term in the input field and triggers the search by pressing ENTER when the focus is on the filter input field, the analytical table is filtered by the corresponding column and value (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, properties: filtered, filterProperty, filterValue, filterOperator, sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: filterType).

Note that the filter may return zero results, in which case, the table might be empty.

General recommendations for filtering:

  • If filtering is a main use case, choose the filter bar or any other filtering UI over the built-in free text filter.
  • Only use the free text filter if filtering is a secondary use case and if the filter bar is too heavy.
Free text filter in column header menu
Free text filter in column header menu

Group

The column header menu can provide the option to group by this column (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: sortProperty).

One group collects all items with the same value within the corresponding column.

Group setting in column header menu
Group setting in column header menu

If line items are grouped in a column, every group is provided with a collapsible or expandable group header (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: grouped). The header text consists of the column name and the value for the corresponding group (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: groupHeaderFormatter). Several grouping levels are possible.

The corresponding column can be hidden to avoid duplicates (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: showIfGrouped). Exercise caution when using this option since hiding the column changes the table layout and may lead to confusion.

Group headers and the corresponding columns are shown – The relevant data is duplicated
Group headers and the corresponding columns are shown – The relevant data is duplicated
Group headers shown, the corresponding column hidden – No duplicates
Group headers shown, the corresponding column hidden – No duplicates

Aggregation

The column header menu can provide the option to show or hide aggregation totals for this column.

Aggregation in column header menu
Aggregation in column header menu

Intermediate aggregations are shown at group level for the corresponding columns if the group contains more than one line item (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: summed).

Group total
Group total

The overall aggregation is shown at the bottom of the analytical table.

Overal aggregation
Overal aggregation

Freeze Columns

The column header menu can provide the option to freeze columns (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: enableColumnFreeze). Selecting Freeze freezes all columns up to the one in which the operation was triggered (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: fixedColumnCount).

When Freeze is triggered, the menu item changes to Unfreeze for the corresponding column.

Freeze setting in column header menu
Freeze setting in column header menu

Line Item Level

A line item contains a set of cells and provides options for selecting the item.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height.

(sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: rowHeight)

Line item
Line item

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Cell Level

A cell provides one data point.

It can contain one of the following controls to display this data point:

While it is technically possible to also use other controls, doing so could lead to issues with alignment, condensed mode, screen reader support, and keyboard support.

If you use text, use only single-line text to keep the same row height. Truncate if necessary as this prevents adverse side effects when scrolling vertically (sap.m.Text, property: wrapping, value: false).

Cell
Cell

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a table. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

When opened, the context menu gets the row and column context, except for special columns (such as the selection column) or special rows (like group headers). Context menus can be implemented for a specific table, row, or cell (not recommended for editable cells).

By default, the analytical table provides a context menu on the group headers (for example, Expand, Collapse, …). Otherwise, no default context menus are provided.

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a table is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Analytical table with context menu
Analytical table with context menu

Guidelines

Data Density vs. Complexity

The analytical table can be used to display and work with large amounts of data. Unfortunately, the analytical table has a high data density and therefore conveys an immediate feeling of complexity.

Only show tables with a lot of data as a last resort. To make the data easier to read, you should instead try the following:

  • Break down the data into manageable chunks and allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Try to avoid horizontal scrolling in the default delivery.

Try to minimize the number of columns, especially if there is a large number of rows.

Table Title

You implement the table title by using a title control in a toolbar.

Use a table title if the title of an analytical table is not indicated in the surrounding area. Do not use a table title if it simply repeats text that is already above the analytical table, for example, if a pricing conditions analytical table is the only control placed on a tab labeled Pricing Conditions.

Use a table title if you need the table toolbar. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a table title, such as Items.

If you use a table title, show either a title for the table, with or without variant management, or an item count in the following format:

Items (2,534).

You can combine an item count with variant management.

The count of items in the table title includes all the visible items that a user can reach by scrolling or expanding groups. Group headers are not included.

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items.

Selection

In multiple selection mode (multi toggle), do not show checkboxes in the first data column in the default delivery to avoid confusion.

Offer the Select All checkbox for (de)selecting all items the user can reach by scrolling. If items are grouped, also select all items in collapsed groups.

Developer Hint
Select All is only applied to items that have already been loaded to the front-end server. All other items are not (de)selected before they are loaded, such as items added via lazy loading with growingScrollToLoad. This conflicts with the guideline that all items the user can reach by scrolling must be (de)selected.

To process all items, listen to the selectionChange event and to its selectAll flag. This indicates whether the Select All checkbox was triggered. As soon as an action is triggered, process the items accordingly. Depending on the number of items, consider processing them in the back end.

Don't
Do not add checkboxes to the first column
Do not add checkboxes to the first column

Loading Data

To indicate that the table is currently loading items, use the busy state (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Columns – Best Practices

Minimize the number of columns. Avoid the need to scroll horizontally in the default delivery.

By default, the analytical table assigns the same width to each column. We recommend overwriting this default to provide optimal space for your content (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: width).

If you define the column width in pixels or rems, resizing a column affects only the width of this specific column. Reducing the size of the browser window results in a scrollbar. If the user resizes a column, and the total width of all columns exceeds the table width, a scrollbar appears. If the columns do not take up the full table width, white space appears to the right of the last column.

If you define the column width as a percentage, resizing one column affects the width of several or all columns. Reducing the size of the browser window truncates the texts. This ensures that the columns fill up all the available space. A scrollbar appears only if width of all the columns still exceeds the table width after the automatic width adjustments. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, you can set a minimum width per column. However, this this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users can still reduce the column width to below the defined minimum (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth).

If you set the column width to “auto”, the behavior is the same as for “percentage”. However, unlike “percentage”, “auto” distributes the columns equally.

To decide on how to set the column width (pixel/rem/em vs. percent/auto), keep the following in mind:

  • For tables with only 2 to 3 columns, use pixel-based units. This ensures that the values in the columns are not spread over the whole screen on wide screens, which improves the readability of the line items.
  • For tables with many columns, where a horizontal scrollbar is usually needed, use pixel based units. This avoids unintended side effects when resizing columns.
  • For all other tables, use whatever fits your case better.

Be cautious when mixing columns with pixel-based and percentage-based widths. While this can be helpful in some cases, it can also cause even more side effects when resizing a column. If you are using percentage-based widths for one or more columns, consider not allowing end users to resize columns at all.

Optimize column width for its initial visible content, including the column header texts.

Maintain a constant column width and avoid automatically adjusting it based on content changes.

In the default delivery, the initial visible content should not be truncated
In the default delivery, the initial visible content should not be truncated

Column Headers – Best Practices

Provide a label for each column in the column header. In the default delivery, do not truncate the column header texts.

Content Alignment

For alignment of cell content, follow the guidelines below.

Left-align: text, IDs, phone numbers, URLs, passwords, and email addresses.

Left-alignment of text
Left-alignment of text

Right-align: numbers, except IDs, to ensure comparability of numbers and amounts.

Right-alignment of numbers
Right-alignment of numbers

Right-align amounts with currencies to the cell and align them in terms of their respective decimal points.

This ensures that amounts with different currencies are shown correctly, whether these currencies have 0, 2, or 3 decimals.

For aligning to the decimal point, use the sap.ui.uinified.Currency control.

Alignment to decimal point
Alignment to decimal point

Right-align dates and times.

This ensures comparability for most formats and locales.

Right-alignment of dates
Right-alignment of dates

Left-align status information.

Left-align status information
Left-align status information

Center-align icons.

Content Formatting

Key Identifier

Use a bold label or an emphasized link as the key identifier of an item. In the default delivery, show the key identifier in the first column.

Emphasized link
Emphasized link

For strings with IDs, use one of the following:

  • Show the ID in brackets after the corresponding string. Use this format if sorting, grouping, or filtering is only needed on the string, but not on the ID.
  • Show the ID in a separate column. Use this format if sorting, grouping, or filtering on the string and the ID is needed.
Text and ID in one column – Sorting, filtering, and grouping only on the text
Text and ID in one column – Sorting, filtering, and grouping only on the text
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
Text and ID in two columns – Allows sorting, filtering, and grouping on both
Text and ID in two columns – Allows sorting, filtering, and grouping on both
If displayed as a link, use only the string as the link, not the ID
If displayed as a link, use only the string as the link, not the ID

Truncation

Avoid truncation of typical content in the default delivery (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: width). However, since the columns are resizable, do not worry too much if truncation occurs as columns can still be enlarged if necessary.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must also have the same height. If you need to decide between truncation and different row heights, choose truncation.

Optimize column width for typical content, not all content
Optimize column width for typical content, not all content

Number of Links

Are there too many links? Use subtle links to avoid a wall of links. Standard links are also emphasized more if they are surrounded by subtle links.

For example, a financial table consists of several columns with summarized cells. A summarized cell shows the total sum of several database entries. Each sum should be a link to a report that shows details about which database entries produce the total sum. The line item identifier should also be a link that provides more detail about the line item itself. Use a standard or emphasized link for the item identifier, and subtle links for the summarized cells.

Emphasized links, links, subtle links, and text
Emphasized links, links, subtle links, and text

Missing Value

If there is no value for a cell, leave it blank. Do not display text as N/A.

Leave empty fields blank
Leave empty fields blank

Numbering Items

In terms of numbering items:

  • If the item number is more like an ID with regard to its description, use ID formatting as described above.
  • In all other cases, use a separate column for the item number.
Add a separate column for the item number
Add a separate column for the item number

Status

For status information, use semantic colors on the foreground elements.

For status information on text, use an object status.

Semantic colors on text
Semantic colors on text

Empty Tables

Avoid empty analytical tables. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the analytical table with data (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, properties: noDataText, showNoData).

Examples:

  • If a table is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the table with data.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    To start, set the relevant filters.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No data found. Try adjusting the filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, a search is also offered, or only the search is offered).
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of filter settings).
Provide meaningful instructions
Provide meaningful instructions

Invalid State

To show an invalid state of the analytical table within the list report floorplan, show an overlay on the analytical table and the corresponding toolbar (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: showOverlay). The overlay prevents user interactions.

Use this within the list report floorplan if filter settings have been changed but the analytical table has not yet been updated.

Analytical table with invalid data
Analytical table with invalid data

Item States

To show that an item has been modified, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string (Modified) in an additional column with the label Editing Status.

In the default delivery, add a column directly behind the key identifier.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string Contains errors in the Editing Status column and highlight the row accordingly. This string replaces the Modified string.

A modified item with an error
A modified item with an error

To show that an item is locked, add a transparent-style button with the corresponding icon and the text Locked by [name] in the Editing Status column.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in draft state, add a transparent-style button with the text Draft in the Editing Status column.

Item in draft state
Item in draft state

Show only one state at a time.

Numbers and Units

Show the unit of measurement in one of the following ways:

The number and unit are in the same cell. Do this if sorting, filtering, or grouping by the unit of measurement are not needed.

Use a currency control to display the concatenated string.

Number and unit of measurement in one cell
Number and unit of measurement in one cell

The number and unit are in separate columns. Do this if sorting, filtering, or grouping by the unit of measurement are a common use case.

Note that this column can be hidden or moved independently of the column containing the corresponding number. Therefore, be sure to have clear labels for both columns to communicate the dependency.

Number and unit of measurement in two columns
Number and unit of measurement in two columns

Do not put the unit of measurement in the column header.

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, drag and drop is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose, such as (toolbar) buttons.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

Do not use drag and drop for rearranging items in the analytical table. The analytical table is mainly used for grouping items and for calculating the totals per group and column. Moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on values in a column, the dropped item needs to take on the value of the target group for the corresponding column.

Example:
A table is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. Because changing the value in this way doesn’t make sense, rearranging items is not permitted in analytical tables.

Don't
Do not use drag and drop for rearranging items in the analytical table
Do not use drag and drop for rearranging items in the analytical table

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar). Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

The context menu can be triggered for the table, row, or cell. However, we do not recommend using context menus for cells: because the content of a cell is a different touch target than the cell itself, opening a cell context menu via touch is quite hard, even in cozy mode.

Do not combine context menus with condensed mode: editable controls fill the entire space inside a cell. Because of this, context menus cannot be opened at all with touch or mouse interaction.

Actions

Multiple Items

To trigger actions on multiple items, use a multiselection analytical table (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: selectionMode, value: MultiToggle). Offer the corresponding actions in the table toolbar.

Do not offer action triggering on multiple items if the table is generally expected to have fewer than 10 items. In this case, try to use the responsive table instead of the analytical table.

Single Item

To trigger actions on a single item (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: selectionMode, value: Single):

  • Show the actions on the table toolbar.
  • In rare cases, show the actions within the line item. One example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every line and thus use a lot of screen real estate, do this only for a maximum of one or two actions. Provide a separate column per action. Use a button, unless the action trigger belongs to a link.

To trigger navigation on line item level choose one of the following options:

  • Use a link for the attribute that identifies the row. Clicking the link triggers the navigation.
  • Add the RowActions column and show the navigation indicator (  ) at the end of the row. The navigation arrow triggers the navigation.

Use the RowActions column only for one or both of the following actions:

  • Navigate to details page ( )
  • Delete ( )

The RowActions column does not provide a column header text. It is fixed and will not scroll away. Users also cannot personalize this column.

Single Cell

For triggering actions on a single cell, create the corresponding click event. Do not use the cell click event if the cell contains interactive controls, such as links.

Add Items

Place the add button on the table toolbar. It can be displayed as an icon ( ) or text (such as Add or Create).

New items always appear as the first item in the table.

For more details, please check the guidelines for managing objects (including subarticles).

Editable Content

For editable content, only use the following controls, and only one control per cell:

Only these controls are optimized for all viewing modes of the analytical table.

If you need edit mode, change your text controls, such as label, text, link, object status, icons, and currencies, to editable controls as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before. You can do this by exchanging the controls, for example, from sap.m.Text to sap.m.Input.

For mass editing items:

  • Provide multiselection.
  • Provide an Edit button.
  • If several items are selected, clicking the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

This is similar to mass editing in the split-screen layout floorplan.

Warning
Do not offer editing for summarized cells. A summarized cell shows the total sum of several database entries. Changing the total sum does not make sense since it is unclear how this sum is divided between the different database entries.
Interactive controls – Inline
Interactive controls – Inline

View Settings

There are several ways to show Sort, Filter, and/or Group settings:

  • Column header menu: In all cases, show the corresponding settings in the column header menu.
  • View settings dialog: Simple and more flexible with regard to filter settings. No advantage for sorting. Allows the user to ungroup grouped columns.tables with a medium amount of items.
  • Table personalization dialog: Provides complex options for sorting items by several levels and allows the user to ungroup grouped columns. It also provides a query-builder-like approach for filter settings. The complexity of the options is also its downside. Use the table personalization dialog for tables with a large number of items.
  • If filtering is a main use case, use the filter bar. In this case, avoid offering additional filter settings on the table. If you do, the filter settings on the grid table work only on the result set provided by the filter bar.

Always be careful when synchronizing the settings in the dialog with the settings from the column header menu.

Trigger the dialogs in one of the following ways:

  • View settings dialog: Provide several buttons, one for each of these view settings. Each button opens the view settings dialog on the corresponding page.
  • Table personalization dialog: Provide a settings button, which opens the table personalization dialog containing all pages.

Use only the view settings you really need. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case.

 

Column header menu with view settings
Column header menu with view settings
Table toolbar with triggers for view settings dialog
Table toolbar with triggers for view settings dialog
Table toolbar with trigger for table personalization dialog
Table toolbar with trigger for table personalization dialog

Persist the view settings. When a user reopens the app, show the analytical table with the same sort, filter, group, and aggregation settings as last defined by this user.

Sort

To display the current sort state, an icon is shown in the column header of the last sorted column. This icon indicates the sort direction (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

For the default sort setting, sort by the column that identifies the row, which is usually the first column in default delivery. Use a meaningful sort order, such as alphabetical order for text, numeric order for numbers, or chronological order for dates.

Column, sorted ascending
Column, sorted ascending
Column, sorted descending
Column, sorted descending

The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order.

For each column, provide a meaningful sort order. For example:

  • Sort text alphabetically
  • Sort numbers by their value
  • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
    • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
    • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
    • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
    • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first

Filter

To display the current filter state, an icon is shown in the column header of the filtered column (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: filtered, filterProperty, filterValue, filterOperator, defaultFilterOperator, filterType).

Column, filtered
Column, filtered

Group

To display the current group state, group headers are shown. Show the following text in the group header (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, properties: grouped, showIfGrouped, groupHeaderFormatter):

[Label of the grouped column]: [Grouping value]

If there is no grouping value, show the following text:
[Label of the grouped column]: (Not Available)

This is the case if you have a group of items that don’t have a value for the grouped column.

 

Set the property collapseRecursive to “false” to keep subgroups expanded even after collapsing and expanding the parent group.

Group headers, several levels
Group headers, several levels

On non-touch devices, right-clicking a group header opens the group header menu. On touch devices, the same menu is opened by using the menu icon on the right side of a group header.

The group header menu provides several options:

  • Show/Hide: Shows or hides the column in the table layout, although it is grouped.
  • Ungroup: When the user ungroups a column, the corresponding group headers disappear. If the column was hidden, it is shown again as a separate column.
  • Ungroup All: The columns are shown again.
  • Move Up: Rearranges the grouping levels hierarchy by moving the selected group above the group that is one level higher up in the hierarchy.
  • Move Down: Rearranges the grouping levels hierarchy by moving the selected group below the group that is one level lower down in the hierarchy.
  • Collapse Level: Collapses all groups on the corresponding grouping level.
  • Collapse All: All groups are collapsed.
Group header menu
Group header menu
Group header on touch devices
Group header on touch devices

In general:

  • Offer grouping on objects and attributes.
  • Do not offer grouping on measures.
  • If appropriate, offer reasonable grouping by default, but do not exaggerate. As a rule of thumb, use up to three group levels.
  • Provide more space for the first column. Grouping needs an indent per group level. Extra space in the first column prevents truncated text.

Aggregate

To display the current aggregation state, the total sum of the corresponding column is shown at the bottom of the table.

If items are grouped, an intermediate sum is shown:

  • At the bottom of each group if the group is expanded.
  • In the group header if the group is collapsed.

(sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn, property: summed)

When aggregating amounts with different units of measurement, show an asterisk (*) in the aggregation rows.

When sorting an aggregated column, only the leaf nodes of a group are included by default. If each measure column currently displays a single unit of measurement, the order of the groups can also be affected.

For example:
Let’s assume that table items are grouped by Country and aggregated by Total Net Amount. If you sort the Total Net Amount column in descending order, the largest total net amount is shown first.

Warning
Only enable sorting by totals if each column has a single unit of measurement. This prevents inconsistencies in the sorting behavior, which depends on user settings, such as filter settings or the columns currently displayed.
Developer Hint
To allow sorting by totals, the following conditions must be met:

  1. For each measure column, multiple units must not occur in the displayed data, regardless of whether or not totals are shown.
  2. The autoExpandMode of the AnalyticalBinding must be set to Sequential. Note that the default is Bundled.

In general:

  • Offer aggregation on measures, but not on objects or attributes.
  • Avoid aggregations on the first three columns for the default delivery. As soon as grouping is used together with aggregations, collapsing a group shows the aggregation on the group header. This conflicts with the group name.
  • Where appropriate, offer reasonable aggregation by default.
Aggregation and groups
Aggregation and groups

Personalization

Only offer personalization if you need more columns than a tablet screen can display at any one time, which is usually five.

Persist the column layout. When a user reopens the app, show the analytical table with the same column layout settings as last defined by this user.

Add, Remove, and Rearrange Columns

To add, remove, or rearrange columns, use one of the following:

  • The table personalization dialog: It offers some simple settings for column layout. Use this if you have only a few columns to choose from and/or you use the view settings dialog.
  • The p13n dialog: Besides various complex view settings, it also provides settings for column layout. Use this if you have a large number of columns to choose from and/or you use this dialog anyway for view settings.

In both cases, trigger the dialog via the settings button in the table toolbar.

You can also use drag and drop to rearrange columns (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnReordering). If you allow rearranging via drag and drop as well as via a dialog, keep both places in sync.

Resize Columns

Resizing columns works differently on touch and non-touch devices.

  • Non-touch devices: Drag and drop the column separator on the right side of the column. Double-clicking the column separator optimizes the width of the column for the data currently loaded into the front end, which is usually about 100 rows.
  • Touch devices: Clicking the column header reveals two buttons: one for opening the column header menu, another one for resizing the column. Drag and drop this second button to resize the column.

Freeze Columns

For freezing columns, offer the setting in the column header menu (sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable, property: enableColumnFreeze).

Selecting Freeze on a column freezes all columns from the first one to the one where Freeze is selected. On this column, the menu entry changes from Freeze to Unfreeze.

Frozen column
Frozen column

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, you can display a highlight indicator in front of the item. The highlight indicator can show:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning
  • A neutral highlight, such as blue to highlight newly added items

(Property: highlight)

Semantic row highlight indicator
Semantic row highlight indicator

Tables in Object Pages

In the object page, we advise against using analytical, grid, and tree tables. Instead, use a responsive table and offer navigation to a list report with the table types mentioned above.

For more information on the use of tables within the object page, see the Tables section of the Object Page article.

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a button for exporting the table data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' button
'Export to Spreadsheet' button

Properties

sap.ui.table.AnalyticalTable

The following additional properties are available for the analytical table:

  • The property: width defines the width of the analytical table.
  • The property: rowHeight defines the height of each row in the analytical table. Since the height required is calculated automatically by the analytical table, this property is only needed rarely.
  • The property: columnHeaderHeight defines the height of the column headers. Since the height required is calculated automatically by the analytical table, this property is only needed rarely.
  • The property: columnHeaderVisible can be used to hide the column headers. Always show the column headers.
  • The property: showColumnVisibilityMenu provides an additional entry in the column header menu that allows columns to be shown or hidden. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Do not use this property.
  • The property: columnVisibilityMenuSorter is used for sorting the columns inside the column header menu if showing and hiding columns is provided in the menu. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Do not use this property.
  • The property: visibleRowCount defines the height of the analytical table. Show as many rows as fit on the screen.
  • The property: visibleRowCountMode defines whether the height of the analytical table is fixed or automatically calculated based on the space provided by the underlying container. For automatic calculation, make sure that all rows have the same height.
  • The property: minimumAutoRowCount defines the minimum number of rows that must be shown if the property: visibleRowCountMode is set to “auto”. Show at least three to five rows.
  • The property: firstVisibleRow defines the first row shown in the visible area of the analytical table. The analytical table is scrolled accordingly.
  • The property: allowColumnReordering is deprecated. Use the property: enableColumnReordering instead.
  • The property: editable does not have a visible effect. Please do not use it.
  • The property: threshold is used for optimizing lazy loading of items. In most cases, the default value is appropriate.
  • The property: enableGrouping is experimental and does not have a meaningful effect on the analytical table. Do not use it.
  • The property: sumOnTop shows additional aggregation values on the group header, even if the group is expanded. Do not use it.
  • The property: enableCustomFilter changes the filter entry in the column header menu from an edit box to Filter…. Selecting this entry throws an event that apps can react to, for example, by opening a dialog. In general, you should choose the built-in filter over your own implementation. Specifically, keep filtering via the column header menu simple, while offering more advanced options via the table personalization dialog.
  • The property: enableBusyIndicator has not yet been fully implemented. Do not use it.
  • The property: title adds a line of text on top of the analytical table. Do not use it. To add a title to the table, use a toolbar.
  • The property: footer adds a short text at the bottom of the table.
  • The property: Busy sets the analytical table to busy state. While in busy state, the whole table cannot be used and items cannot be read due to an overlay.
  • The property: Tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: alternateRowColors displays the rows with alternating background colors (“banded rows”). Do not use it.

sap.ui.table.AnalyticalColumn

The following additional properties are available for the analytical column:

  • The property: leadingProperty is used for data binding.
  • The property: inResult is used for data binding.
  • The property: visible defines whether a column is shown or hidden.
  • The property: name defines the name shown in the column header menu for showing and hiding columns. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Please do not use this property.
  • The property: headerSpan defines whether one column header is used for one or several columns. To prevent adverse side effects, always use one column header for only one single column. Please do not use this property.
  • The property: Tooltip does not have an effect. Please do not use it.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Grid Table

A grid table contains a set of data that is structured in rows and columns. It allows the user to scroll in both directions and can handle large numbers of items and columns.

Usage

Use the grid table if:

  • The cell level and the spatial relationship between cells are more important than the line item. Examples include spreadsheet analyses and waterfall charts. Note that a grid table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You have to work on more than 1,000 rows. In this case, the grid table is easier to handle. In contrast to the responsive table, the architecture of the grid table is optimized for handling large numbers of items. Note that a grid table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktop and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • Comparing items is a major use case. In this case, a grid table might be more appropriate than a responsive table. In the grid table, each cell contains only one data point. In contrast, the responsive table is more flexible regarding line items, including the ability to add more data points per cell and also the pop-in function. Both make comparisons more difficult. Note that a grid table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You need an analytical table, but you cannot provide an analytical binding on the technical side. In this case, a grid table will do the work. Note that the grid table provides only one level of grouping, no aggregation options, and is also not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.

Do not use the grid table if:

  • You need a table. The responsive table is the default table in SAP Fiori. Additional use cases where you might need the responsive table include:
    • The focus is on working on line items, not on cells. The responsive table is optimized for displaying complete items on all devices, such as file browsing and a list of documents you want to act on, like purchase orders and purchase requisitions.
    • Selecting one or several items is the main use case and details are needed to choose the correct item.
    • Line items are independent of each other and no operation across columns is needed.
    • You want to have only one implementation for all devices.
  • The main use case is choosing one item from a very small number of items with no additional details. A select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • The main use case is choosing one out of several items with only a few details per item. A list might be more appropriate. Pay attention to the layout of the list item to ensure that it has a pleasant appearance.
  • Data needs to be structured in a hierarchical manner. Use a tree table instead. Note that neither the tree table nor the grid table are responsive. You will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones and tablets.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use charts.
  • You just need it for layout reasons. In this case, use a layout container such as HBox or VBox.
  • You need read-only or editable field-value pairs. Use a form instead. The grid table is not optimized for form-like input navigation.

Responsiveness

A grid table is available for desktops and tablets, but not in smartphone sizes. It supports touch devices, but is not optimized for small screens.

If you use a grid table, note that you have to implement a fallback solution for small screens. This fallback solution does not need to support all use cases.

You could create a fallback by using a responsive table, but a completely different solution, such as showing charts in a read-only case, might be more appropriate.

Grid table shown on a desktop
Grid table shown on a desktop
Grid table shown on a tablet
Grid table shown on a tablet

Layout

The column header allows the user to resize and rearrange columns. It also provides access to a menu with column-specific commands.

The collection of items, or rows, occupies the main part of the grid table.

The selector cells allow the user to select one or more items.

The Select All button selects or deselects all items.

Schematic visualization of the grid table
Schematic visualization of the grid table

Components

A grid table does not consist of other elements. However, it is common to use a toolbar above the grid table.

The toolbar can contain entry points for the view settings dialog and the table personalization dialog or for the p13n dialog, as well as view switches in the form of a segmented button, and buttons for Add, Edit, and other actions.

Behavior and Interaction

A grid table is quite restricted in terms of its content.

Table Level

Scroll

A grid table allows horizontal and vertical scrolling (sap.ui.table.Table, property: navigationMode, value: Scrollbar).

You can add any number of line items to the grid table, which uses “lazy loading”.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.Table, property: rowHeight).

The grid table is optimized to allow faster scrolling within the first 1000 items.

Scroll bar
Scroll bar

Select

A grid table can have one of the following selection types (sap.ui.table.Table/ property: selectionMode):

  • None: Items cannot be selected.
A non-selection grid table
A non-selection grid table
  • Single: One item in the grid table can be selected. A row selector column is shown.
A single-selection grid table
A single-selection grid table
  • Multi Toggle: A multiselection mode that allows one or more items to be selected. For this, the grid table provides a column with checkboxes on the left-hand side. Clicking a checkbox toggles the state of the corresponding row from deselected to selected and back.
  • Select All: Works via a checkbox on the left of the column header (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableSelectAll). Using the Select All checkbox selects or deselects all items the user can reach via scrolling. Use Select All only if it makes sense. Note that selecting a lot of data also takes time and might not be appropriate for all use cases. For example, a delete operation on two million database entries might not be very helpful in many cases.

You can also use the keyboard keys Shift and Ctrl for multi-selection.

A multiselection grid table
A multiselection grid table

An item can be selected in different ways, depending on the configuration of the grid table (sap.ui.table.Table, property: selectionBehavior):

  • Row: An item is selected by clicking the checkbox or the row. Use this for multiselection grid tables if clicking a row is not used for something else.
  • RowSelector: An item is selected only by clicking the checkbox in the selector cell. Use this if you need to click the row for something else, such as navigation.
  • RowOnly: An item is selected only by clicking the row, and not the the checkboxes in the selector cells. Use this for single-selection grid tables if clicking a row is not used for something else, such as navigation.

Compact, Cozy, and Condensed

Like all SAP Fiori controls, the grid table is shown in compact mode on a desktop and in cozy mode on tablets.

For a desktop, you can also display even more rows on the same screen height by adding the condensed mode in addition to the compact mode. This renders less white space for each item.

Note that the condensed content density has always to be set in addition to compact. Do not use condensed on its own. Do not mix condensed with cozy. Doing so could lead to unpredictable and / or unwanted results, e.g. cozy sized controls in condensed sized containers, missing padings, etc.

Note that neither compact mode nor condensed mode can be interacted with via touch. Even on a desktop with a touch screen, users will have difficulty selecting rows or using controls inside the cells when using their fingers.

Furthermore, condensed mode is not available for Internet Explorer 9. If condensed mode is to be used, please provide a fallback.

For more information on cozy and compact modes, see content density.

Column Header

The column header provides the label for the corresponding column and access to the column header menu.

Columns are resized as follows:

  • Mouse interaction: The user drags the separator line between two columns (sap.ui.table.Column, property: Resizable). Double-clicking the line optimizes the column according to the length of the currently visible data and the label of the column header (sap.ui.table.Column, property: Autoresizable).
  • Touch interaction: The user taps the column header to reveal two buttons – one to show the column header menu, and one for resizing. The user drags the latter to resize the column.

After resizing a column, the adaptation of the column widths depends on how the column width is set:

  • If column widths are set in pixel-based units (px, em, rem), the corresponding column is adapted and the columns that follow are moved accordingly. The width of all other columns is not affected.
    If all the columns together take up less width than the table control, an empty space is added. In case all columns together take up more width than the table control, a scrollbar appears. (sap.ui.table.Column, property: width)
  • If all column widths are set in percentage or “auto”, resizing one column might also lead to the automatic resizing of some or all other columns. The position of the resized column might also be affected. This is done to ensure that the whole table width is used and no white space is added. A scrollbar appears only if all or most of the columns shrink significantly. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, a minimum width can be set per column. Please be aware that this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users are still able to reduce the column width below the provided minimum. (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth)

Columns can be rearranged by dragging the column header to another position (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnReordering).

Column header
Column header
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Less columns than space available
Less columns than space available

Column Header Menu

For each column, a menu can contain the following menu items (sap.ui.table.ColumnMenu, property: visible):

  • Sort Ascending/Descending (sap.ui.table.Column, property: showSortMenuEntries)
  • Free text filter (sap.ui.table.Column, property: showFilterMenuEntries)
  • Group (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableGrouping)
  • Freeze from the first to the last specified column (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnFreeze)

For each column, the menu can be replaced by an app-specific menu.

Column header menu
Column header menu

Sort

The column header menu can provide two sort options (sap.ui.table. Column, properties: sortProperty, showSortMenuEntry):

  • Sort Ascending
  • Sort Descending

The user selects one of these options to sort the corresponding column accordingly (sap.ui.table. Column, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

Sort settings in column header menu
Sort settings in column header menu

Filter

The column header menu can provide a search field for entering free text (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: filterProperty, showFilterMenuEntries).

If the user enters a term in the input field and triggers the search by pressing Enter when the focus is on the filter input field, the grid table is filtered by the corresponding column and value (sap.ui.table.Table, properties: filtered, filterProperty, filterValue, filterOperator, sap.ui.table.Column, property: filterType).

Note that the filter may return zero results, in which case, the table might be empty.

General recommendations for filtering:

  • If filtering is a main use case, choose the filter bar or any other filtering UI over the built-in free text filter.
  • Only use the free text filter if filtering is a secondary use case and if the filter bar is too heavy.
Free text filter in column header menu
Free text filter in column header menu

Group

The column header menu can provide the option to group by this column (sap.ui.table.Column, property: enableGrouping).

One group collects all items with the same value within the corresponding column.

Group setting in column header menu
Group setting in column header menu

If line items are grouped in a column, every group is provided with a collapsible or expandable group header. The header text consists of the name of the value and the number of items in the specific group. Only one grouping level is possible.

Group header
Group header

Once line items have been grouped, the corresponding column is hidden. There is no built-in possibility to ungroup the grid table again. Therefore, provide a view settings dialog or table presonalization dialog to offer an additional way to group by a column and a way to ungroup the complete table.

An exception to this is when the table is grouped from the start and should not be ungrouped at all.

Group headers shown, the corresponding column hidden: no duplicates, but a confusing change
Group headers shown, the corresponding column hidden: no duplicates, but a confusing change
Warning
Note that grouping the grid table is experimental and currently works only on items loaded to the front end. Thus, scrolling down the table leads to data not being grouped as expected.

Only use this feature if you have just a few line items, all of which are loaded to the front end. If this is the case, consider using a responsive table first instead of a grid table.

Freeze Columns

The column header menu can provide the option to freeze columns (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnFreeze). Selecting Freeze freezes all columns up to the one in which the operation was triggered (sap.ui.table. Table, property: fixedColumnCount).

When Freeze is triggered, the menu item changes to Unfreeze for the corresponding column.

Freeze setting in column header menu
Freeze setting in column header menu

Line Item Level

A line item contains a set of cells and provides options for selecting the item.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.Table, property: rowHeight).

Line item
Line item

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a table or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.ui.table.Table, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a table. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

When opened, the context menu gets the row and column context, except for special columns (such as the selection column) or special rows (like group headers). Context menus can be implemented for a specific table, row, or cell (not recommended for editable cells).

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a table is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Grid table with a context menu
Grid table with a context menu

Cell Level

A cell provides one data point.

It can contain one of the following controls to display this data point:

While it is technically possible to also use other controls, doing so could lead to issues in regards to alignment, condensed mode, screen reader support, and keyboard support.

If you use text, use only single-line text to keep the same row height. Truncate if necessary as this prevents adverse side effects when scrolling vertically (sap.m.Text, property: wrapping, value: false).

Cell
Cell

Guidelines

Data Density vs. Complexity

The grid table can be used to display large amounts of data. Unfortunately, the grid table has a high data density and therefore conveys an immediate feeling of complexity.

Only show tables with a lot of data as a last resort. Try the following instead:

  • Break down the data into manageable chunks and allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Try to avoid horizontal scrolling in the default delivery.

Try to minimize the number of columns, especially if there is a large number of rows.

Table Title

You can implement the table title by using a title control in a toolbar.

Use a table title if the title of a grid table is not indicated in the surrounding area. Do not use a table title if it simply repeats text that is already above the grid table, for example, if a pricing conditions grid table is the only control placed on a tab labeled Pricing Conditions.

Use a table title if you need the table toolbar. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a table title, such as Items.

You can add an item count to the table title. If you do so, use the following format:

Items (345)

Text as well as text and an item count can both be combined with variant management.

The count of items in the table title displays all visible items which the user can reach via scrolling or expanding groups. Group headers do not count in.

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items.

Developer Hint
Assistive technologies (such as screen readers) use the title to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation. In addition, screen readers use the title as the label for the table.

If you don’t use a title (for example, to avoid repetition), make sure that the table is connected to another meaningful on-screen text that can be used as a label for assistive technologies. You can do this using the method addAriaLabelledBy.

Selection

In multiple selection mode (multi toggle), do not show checkboxes in the first data column in the default delivery to avoid confusion.

Offer the Select All checkbox for (de)selecting all items the user can reach by scrolling.

Developer Hint
Select All is only applied to items that have already been loaded to the front-end server. All other items are not (de)selected before they are loaded, such as items added via lazy loading with growingScrollToLoad. This conflicts with the guideline that all items the user can reach by scrolling must be (de)selected.

To process all items, listen to the selectionChange event and to its selectAll flag. This indicates whether the Select All checkbox was triggered. As soon as an action is triggered, process the items accordingly. Depending on the number of items, consider processing them in the back end.

Don't
Do not add checkboxes to the first data column in the default delivery
Do not add checkboxes to the first data column in the default delivery

Loading Data

To indicate that the table is currently loading items, use the busy state. (sap.ui.table.Table, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Grid table in busy state while loading data
Grid table in busy state while loading data

Columns – Best Practices

Minimize the number of columns. Avoid the need to scroll horizontally in the default delivery.

The grid table assigns the same width to each column by default. It is recommended that you overwrite this default to provide optimal space for your content (sap.ui.table.Column, property: width).

If you define the column width in pixels or rems, resizing a column affects only the width of this specific column. Reducing the browser window size results in a scrollbar. After resizing a column, a scroll bar appears if the width of the table is not enough to show all columns. If the columns use less space than available, white space appears on the right side of the last column.

If you define the column width as a percentage, resizing one column affects the width of several or all columns. Text becomes truncated when the browser window size is reduced. This is done to make sure that all columns together fill the space of the table. A scrollbar appears only in case the automatic change of the column widths is not enough for showing all columns. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, a minimum width can be set per column. Please be aware that this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users are still able to reduce the column width below the provided minimum.

If you define the column width as “auto”, the behavior is the same as for “percentage”. In contrast to percentage, “auto” distributes the columns equally.

To decide on how to set the column width (pixel / rem / em vs. percent / auto), keep the following in mind:

  • For tables with only 2 to 3 columns, use pixel-based units. This ensures that on wide screens the values in the columns are not spread over the whole screen, which improves the readability of line items.
  • For tables with many columns, where a horizontal scrollbar is usually needed, use pixel-based units. This avoids unintended side effects when resizing columns.
  • For all other tables, use whatever fits your case better.

Be cautious with mixing columns with pixel-based and percentage-based widths. While this can be helpful in some cases, it could also cause even more unexpected side effects when resizing a column. When using percentage-based widths for one or more columns, think of the possibility to not allow end users to resize columns at all.

Optimize column width for its initial visible content, including the column header texts.

Maintain a constant column width and avoid automatically adjusting it based on content changes.

Don't
Don't: In the default delivery, the initial visible content should not be truncated
Don't: In the default delivery, the initial visible content should not be truncated

Column Headers – Best Practices

Provide a label for each column in the column header. In the default delivery, do not truncate the column header texts.

Content Alignment

For alignment of cell content, follow the guidelines below.

Left-align the following: text, IDs, phone numbers, URLs, passwords, and email addresses.

Left-alignment of text
Left-alignment of text

Right-align numbers (except IDs).

This ensures comparability of numbers and amounts.

Right-alignment of numbers
Right-alignment of numbers

Right-align amounts with currencies to the cell and align them in terms of their respective decimal points.

This ensures that amounts with different currencies are shown correctly, whether these currencies have 0, 2, or 3 decimals.

For aligning to the decimal point, use the sap.ui.uinified.Currency control.

Alignment to decimal point
Alignment to decimal point

Right-align dates and times.

This ensures comparability for most formats and locales.

Right-alignment of dates
Right-alignment of dates

Left-align status information.

Left-align status information
Left-align status information

Center-align icons.

Content Formatting

Locale Settings

Be locale-aware: show dates, times, numbers, and so on in the format corresponding to the user’s locale settings.

Key Identifier

Use a bold label or an emphasized link as the key identifier of an item. In the default delivery, show the key identifier in the first column.

Emphasized link
Emphasized link

For strings with IDs, use one of the following:

  • Show the ID in brackets after the corresponding string. Use this formatting if sorting, grouping, or filtering is only needed on the string, but not on the ID.
  • Show the ID in a separate column. Use this format if sorting, grouping, or filtering on the string and the ID is needed.
Text and ID in one column – Sorting, filtering, and grouping only on the text
Text and ID in one column – Sorting, filtering, and grouping only on the text
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
Text and ID in two columns – Allows sorting, filtering, and grouping on both
Text and ID in two columns – Allows sorting, filtering, and grouping on both
If displayed as a link, use only the string as the link, not the ID
If displayed as a link, use only the string as the link, not the ID

Truncation

Avoid truncation of typical content in the default delivery (sap.ui.table.Column, property: width). However, since the columns are resizable, do not worry too much if truncation occurs as columns can still be enlarged if necessary.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must also have the same height. If you need to decide between truncation and different row heights, choose truncation.

Optimize column width for typical content, not all content
Optimize column width for typical content, not all content

Number of Links

Are there too many links? Use subtle links to avoid a wall of links. Standard links are also emphasized more if they are surrounded by subtle links.

Emphasized links, links, subtle links, and text
Emphasized links, links, subtle links, and text

Missing Value

If there is no value for a cell, leave it blank. Do not display text as N/A.

Leave empty fields blank
Leave empty fields blank

Numbering Items

In terms of numbering items:

  • If the item number is more like an ID with regard to its description, use ID formatting as described above.
  • In all other cases, use a separate column for the item number.
Add a separate column for the item number
Add a separate column for the item number

Status

For status information, use semantic colors on the foreground elements.

For status information on text, use an object status.

Semantic colors on text
Semantic colors on text

Empty Tables

Avoid empty grid tables. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the grid table with data (sap.ui.table.Table, properties: noDataText, showNoData).

Examples:

  • If a table is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the table with data.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    To start, set the relevant filters.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No data found. Try adjusting the filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, a search is also offered, or only the search is offered).
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of filter settings).
Provide meaningful instructions
Provide meaningful instructions

Invalid State

To show an invalid state of the grid table within the list report floorplan, show an overlay on the grid table and the corresponding toolbar (sap.ui.table.Table, property: showOverlay). The overlay prevents user interactions.

Use this within the list report floorplan if filter settings have been changed but the grid table is has not yet been updated.

Grid table with invalid data
Grid table with invalid data

Item States

To show that an item has been modified, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string Modified in an additional column with the label Editing Status.

In the default delivery, add a column directly behind the key identifier.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string Contains errors in the Editing Status column and highlight the row accordingly. This string replaces the Modified string.

A modified item with an error
A modified item with an error

To show that an item is locked, add a transparent-style button with the corresponding icon and the text Locked by [name] in the Editing Status column.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in draft state, add a transparent-style button with the text Draft in the Editing Status column.

Item in draft state
Item in draft state

Show only one state at a time.

Numbers and Units

Show the unit of measurement in one of the following ways:

Number and Unit in Same Cell

The number and the unit are in the same cell. Do this if sorting, filtering, or grouping by the unit of measurement are not needed.

Use a currency control to display the concatenated string.

Number and unit of measurement in one cell
Number and unit of measurement in one cell

Number and Unit in Separate Columns

The number and unit are in separate columns. Do this if sorting, filtering, or grouping by the unit of measurement are a common use case.

Note that this column can be hidden or moved independently of the column containing the corresponding number. Therefore, be sure to have clear labels for both columns to communicate the dependency.

Number and unit of measurement in two columns
Number and unit of measurement in two columns

Do not put the unit of measurement in the column header.

Drag and Drop

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within the table, use drop targets that are between items (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between). This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Drop targets in between items
Drop targets in between items

Do not combine rearranging items and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure that there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items with sorting
Do not combine rearranging items with sorting

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, it is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

When combining rearranging items with grouping, be aware that moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on values in a column, the dropped item needs to take on the value of the target group for the corresponding column. If this is not wanted, do not allow users to rearrange items in grouped tables.

Example:
A table is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. If changing the value doesn’t make sense make sense, only allow users to rearrange the items within the same group, or don’t allow rearranging at all.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing.
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing.

Context Menu

Use the context menu only as a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar). Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

The context menu can be triggered for the table, row, or cell. However, we do not recommend using context menus for cells: because the content of a cell is a different touch target than the cell itself, opening a cell context menu via touch is quite hard, even in cozy mode.

Do not combine context menus with condensed mode: editable controls fill the entire space inside a cell. Because of this, context menus cannot be opened at all with touch or mouse interaction.

Actions

Multiple Items

To trigger actions on multiple items, use a mutliselection grid table (sap.ui.table.Table, property: selectionMode, value: MultiToggle). Offer the corresponding actions in the table toolbar.

Do not offer action triggering on multiple items if the table is generally expected to have fewer than 10 items. In this case, try to use the responsive table instead of the grid table.

Single Item

To trigger actions on a single item (sap.ui.table. Table, property: selectionMode, value: Single):

  • Show the actions on the table toolbar.
  • In rare cases, show the actions within the line item. One example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every line and thus use a lot of screen real estate, do this only for a maximum of one or two actions. Provide a separate column per action. Use a button, unless the action trigger belongs to a link.

To trigger navigation on line item level, choose one of the following options:

  • Use a link for the attribute that identifies the row. Clicking the link triggers the navigation.
  • Add the RowActions column and show the navigation indicator (  ) at the end of the row. The navigation arrow triggers the navigation.

Use the RowActions column only for one or both of the following actions:

  • Navigate to details page ( )
  • Delete ( )

The RowActions column does not provide a column header text. It is fixed and will not scroll away. Users also cannot personalize this column.

Single Cell

To trigger actions on a single cell, create the corresponding click event. Do not use the cell click event if the cell contains interactive controls, such as links.

Add Items

Place the add button on the table toolbar. It can be displayed as an icon (+) or text (e.g. ‘Add’ or ‘Create’).

In general new items always appear as the first item of the table.

Editable Content

For editable content, only use the following controls, and only one control per cell:

Only these controls are optimized for all viewing modes of the grid table.

If you need edit mode, change your text controls, such as label, text, link, object status, icons, and currencies, to editable controls as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before. You can do this by exchanging the controls, for example, from sap.m.Text to sap.m.Input.

For mass editing items:

  • Provide multiselection.
  • Provide an Edit button.
  • If several items are selected, clicking the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

For more information, see Mass Editing.

Interactive controls – In line
Interactive controls – In line

View Settings

There are several ways to show Sort, Filter, and/or Group settings:

  • Column header menu: In all cases, show the corresponding settings in the column header menu.
  • View settings dialog: Simple and more flexible with regard to filter settings. No advantage for sorting. Allows the user to ungroup grouped columns.tables with a medium amount of items.
  • Table personalization dialog: Provides complex options for sorting items by several levels and allows the user to ungroup grouped columns. It also provides a query-builder-like approach for filter settings. The complexity of the options is also its downside. Use the table personalization dialog for tables with a large number of items.
  • If filtering is a main use case, use the filter bar. In this case, avoid offering additional filter settings on the table. If you do, the filter settings on the grid table work only on the result set provided by the filter bar.

Always be careful when synchronizing the settings in the dialog with the settings from the column header menu.

Trigger the dialogs in one of the following ways:

  • View settings dialog: Provide several buttons, one for each of these view settings. Each button opens the view settings dialog on the corresponding page.
  • Table personalization dialog: Provide a settings button, which opens the table personalization dialog containing all pages.

Use only the view settings you really need. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case.

Column header menu with view settings
Column header menu with view settings
Table toolbar with triggers for view settings dialog
Table toolbar with triggers for view settings dialog
Table toolbar with trigger for table personalization dialog
Table toolbar with trigger for table personalization dialog

Be persistent. When reopening the app, show the analytical table in the same view settings (sort/ filter/ group/ aggregation settings) as last defined by this user.

Sort

To display the current sort state, an icon is shown in the column header of the most recently sorted column. This icon indicates the sort direction (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

For the default sort settings, sort by the column that identifies the row, which is usually the first column in default delivery.

Column, sorted ascending
Column, sorted ascending
Column, sorted descending
Column, sorted descending

The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order. For each column, provide a meaningful sort order. For example:

  • Sort text alphabetically
  • Sort numbers by their value
  • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
    • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
    • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
    • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
    • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first

Filter

To display the current filter state, an icon is shown in the column header of the filtered column (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: filtered, filterProperty, filterValue, filterOperator, defaultFilterOperator, filterType).

Column, filtered
Column, filtered

Group

To display the current group state, group headers are shown. Show the following text in the group header:

[Grouping value] – [Item count for the group]

Group headers
Group headers

In general, offer reasonable grouping by default if appropriate. Enable the user to ungroup via the view settings dialog or via the table personalization dialog.

Personalization

Only offer personalization if you need more columns than those that fit on a tablet screen, which is usually five, to fulfill 80% of your main use cases.

Persist the column layout. When a user reopens the app, show the grid table with the same column layout settings as last defined by this user.

Add, Remove, and Rearrange Columns

To add, remove, or rearrange columns, use one of the following:

  • The table personalization dialog: It offers some simple settings for column layout. Use this if you have only a few columns to choose from and/or you use the view settings dialog.
  • The p13n dialog: Besides various complex view settings, it also provides settings for column layout. Use this if you have a large number of columns to choose from and/or you use this dialog anyway for view settings.

In both cases, trigger the dialog via the settings button in the table toolbar.

You can also use drag and drop to rearrange columns (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnReordering). If you allow rearranging via drag and drop as well as via a dialog, keep both places in sync.

Resize Columns

Resizing columns works differently on touch and non-touch devices.

  • Non-touch devices: Drag and drop the column separator on the right side of the column. Double-clicking the column separator optimizes the width of the column to the data currently loaded into the front end, which is usually about 100 rows.
  • Touch devices: Clicking the column header reveals two buttons: one for opening the column header menu, another one for resizing the column. Drag and drop this second button to resize the column.

Freeze Columns

To freeze columns, offer the setting in the column header menu (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnFreeze). Selecing Freeze on a column freezes all columns from the first one to the one where Freeze is selected. On this column, the menu entry changes from Freeze to Unfreeze.

Frozen column
Frozen column

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, you can display a highlight indicator in front of the item. The highlight indicator can show:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning
  • A neutral highlight, such as blue to highlight newly added items

(Propertyhighlight)

Semantic row highlight indicator
Semantic row highlight indicator

Tables in Object Pages

In the object page, we advise against using the analytical, grid, and tree tables. Instead, use a responsive table and offer navigation to a list report with the table types mentioned above.

For more information on the use of tables within the object page, see the Tables section of the Object Page article.

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a button for exporting the table data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' button
'Export to Spreadsheet' button

Properties

sap.ui.table.Table

The following additional properties are available for the grid table:

  • The property: width defines the width of the grid table.
  • The property: rowHeight defines the height of each row in the grid table. Since the height required is calculated automatically by the grid table, this property is only needed rarely.
  • The property: columnHeaderHeight defines the height of the column headers. Since the height required is calculated automatically by the grid table, this property is only needed rarely.
  • The property: columnHeaderVisible can be used to hide the column headers. Always show the column headers.
  • The property: showColumnVisibilityMenu provides an additional entry in the column header menu that allows columns to be shown or hidden. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Do not use this property.
  • The property: visibleRowCount defines the height of the grid table. Show as many rows as fit on the screen.
  • The property: visibleRowCountMode defines whether the height of the grid table is fixed or automatically calculated based on the space provided by the underlying container. For automatic calculation, make sure that all rows have the same height.
  • The property: minAutoRowCount defines the minimum number of rows that must be shown if the property: visibleRowCountMode is set to “auto”. Show at least three to five rows.
  • The property: firstVisibleRow defines the first row shown in the visible area of the grid table. The grid table is scrolled accordingly.
  • The property: allowColumnReordering is deprecated. Do not use it. Use the property: enableColumnReordering instead.
  • The property: editable does not have a visible effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: enableGrouping turns the experimental grouping on or off. Handle with care.
  • The property: enableCustomFilter changes the filter entry in the column header menu from an edit box to Filter…. Selecting this entry throws an event to which apps can react, for example, by opening a dialog. In general, you should choose the built-in filter over your own implementation. Specifically, keep filtering via the column header menu simple, while offering more advanced options via the table personalization dialog.
  • The property: enableBusyIndicator has not yet been fully implemented. Do not use it.
  • The property: title adds a line of text on top of the grid table. Do not use this. To add a title to the table, use a toolbar.
  • The property: footer adds a short text at the bottom of the table.
  • The property: Busy sets the grid table to busy state. While in busy state, the whole table cannot be used and items cannot be read due to an overlay.
  • The property: Tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: alternateRowColors displays the rows with alternating background colors (“banded rows”). Do not use it.

sap.ui.table.Column

The following additional properties are available for the column:

  • The property: visible defines whether a column is shown or hidden.
  • The property: name defines the name shown in the column header menu for showing and hiding columns. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Do not use this property.
  • The property: headerSpan defines whether one column header is used for one or several columns. To prevent adverse side effects, always use one column header for only one single column. Do not use this property.
  • The property: Tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Tree Table

A tree table contains a hierarchical set of data structured in rows and columns and grouped into nodes. The analytical table (also know as ALV) can provide additional details in several non-hierarchical columns per line item. 

Usage

Trees are used to display and work with large amounts of hierarchical data. They have a high data density and therefore convey an immediate feeling of complexity. Ideally, you should only show trees with a lot of hierarchical data as a last resort. Try the following instead:

  • Break down the data into manageable chunks and allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Responsiveness

A tree table is available for desktops and tablets, but not in smartphone sizes. It supports touch devices, but is not optimized for small screens.

If you use a tree table, note that you have to implement a fallback solution for small screens. This fallback solution does not need to support all use cases.

Possible fallback solutions are as follows:

  • Use navigation to different pages instead of a tree structure. This works well for structures that are no more than four levels deep.
  • Remove levels until only one or two remain. Replace a single-level tree by a table, and a two-level tree by a grouped table or a split-screen layout.
  • Use filtering instead of a tree structure.

You can try to create a fallback based on these ideas, but a completely different solution, such as showing charts in a read-only case, might be more appropriate.

Tree table shown on a desktop
Tree table shown on a desktop
Tree table shown on a tablet
Tree table shown on a tablet

Types

Like all SAP Fiori controls, the tree table is shown in compact mode on a desktop and in cozy mode on tablets.

For a desktop, you can also display even more rows on the same screen height by adding the condensed mode in addition to the compact mode. This renders less white space for each item.

Note that the condensed content density has always to be set in addition to compact. Do not use condensed on its own. Do not mix condensed with cozy. Doing so could lead to unpredictable and / or unwanted results, e.g. cozy sized controls in condensed sized containers, missing padings, etc.

Note that neither compact mode nor condensed mode can be interacted with via touch. Even on a desktop with a touch screen, users will have difficulty selecting rows or using controls inside the cells when using their fingers.

Furthermore, condensed mode is not available for Internet Explorer 9. If condensed mode is to be used, please provide a fallback.

For more information on cozy and compact modes, see content density.

Compact Mode

Tree table - Compact mode
Tree table - Compact mode

Condensed Mode

Tree table - Condensed mode
Tree table - Condensed mode

Components

Column Header

The column header provides the label for the corresponding column and access to the column header menu.

Resizing columns works in the following ways:

  • Mouse interaction: Dragging the separator line between two columns (sap.ui.table. Column, property: Resizable). Double-clicking optimizes the column according to the length of the currently visible data and the label of the column header (sap.ui.table.Column, property: Autoresizable).
  • Touch interaction: The user taps the column header to reveal two buttons: one for showing the column header menu and one for resizing. Drag the latter to resize the column.

After resizing a column, the adaptation of the column widths depends on how the column width is set:

  • If column widths are set in pixel-based units (px, em, rem), the corresponding column is adapted and following columns are moved accordingly. The width of all other columns is not affected.
    If all the columns together take up less width than the table control, an empty space is added. If all the columns together take up more width than the table control, a scrollbar appears.
  • If all column widths are set in percentage or “auto”, resizing one column might also lead to the automatic resizing of some or all other columns. The position of the resized column might also be affected. This is done to ensure that the whole table width is used and no white space is added. A scrollbar appears only, if all or most of the columns get very small. To avoid the unintended side effect of undersized columns, a minimum width can be set per column. Please be aware that this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users are still able to reduce the column width below the provided minimum. (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth)

Columns can be rearranged by dragging the column header to another position (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, property: enableColumnReordering).

Tree table – Column header
Tree table – Column header
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Less columns than space available
Less columns than space available

Line Item

A line item contains a set of cells and provides options for selecting the item.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, property: rowHeight).

Tree table – Line item
Tree table – Line item

In rare cases, show actions within the line item. An example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every line and thus use a lot of screen real estate, only do this for one or two actions at most. In this case, show the action trigger near the content to which it belongs. Do not add a specific column for actions, but instead use transparent-style buttons. An exception to this is if the action trigger belongs to a link.

Tree Column

The first colum (tree column) provides the hierarchical structure.

Tree table – Tree column
Tree table – Tree column

Expand/Collapse Button

The expand/collapse button is offered on container nodes to allow the child items of the corresponding container to be shown or hidden.

Tree table – Expand/collapse
Tree table – Expand/collapse

Container Node

A container node is a line item that contains child elements.

Tree table – Container node
Tree table – Container node

Leaf Node

A leaf node is a line item that does not contain child elements.

Tree table – Leave node
Tree table – Leave node

Cell

Each cell provides one data point. It can contain one of the following controls to display the data point: text, label, object status, icon, button, input, date picker, select, combo box, multi-combo box, checkbox, link, currency, rating indicator, progress indicator.

While it is technically possible to also use other controls, doing so could lead to issues in regards to alignment, condensed mode, screen reader support, and keyboard support.

If you use text, use only single-line text to keep the same row height. Truncate if necessary as this prevents adverse side effects when scrolling vertically (sap.m.Text, property: wrapping, value: false).

Tree table – Cell
Tree table – Cell

Tree Cell

A tree cell is a cell inside the tree column. Besides its data point, it provides a collapse/expand button on container nodes, and it indents the different hierarchy levels.

Tree table – Tree cell
Tree table – Tree cell

Column Header Menu

For the tree column, the column header menu can contain the menu item Freeze and a Filter field, in which the user enters free text.
For all other columns, only the free text filter is available.

Tree table – Tree column header menu
Tree table – Tree column header menu

Selection Cells

For multiselection tree tables, the first column contains checkboxes for selecting line items. Besides multiselection, the tree table offers a single-selection mode and also a read-only mode, in which line items are not selectable.

Tree table – Selection cells
Tree table – Selection cells

Select All

For multiselection tree tables, the column header can contain a checkbox above the selection cells for selecting or deselecting all line items.

Tree table – Select all
Tree table – Select all

Scrollbar

The tree table allows horizontal and vertical scrolling. You can add any number of line items to the tree table, which uses “lazy loading”.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, property: rowHeight).

The tree table is optimized to allow faster scrolling within the first 1000 items.

Tree table – Vertical scroll bar
Tree table – Vertical scroll bar

Behavior and Interaction

Selection

The tree provides the following possibilities:

Tree table – No selection
Tree table – No selection
Tree table – Single selection
Tree table – Single selection
Tree table – Multiple selection
Tree table – Multiple selection

Set the property collapseRecursive to “false” in order to keep the selection on subnodes even after collapsing and expanding the root node.

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a table or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position  (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and Drop
Drag and Drop

Column Header Menu

Sort

The column header menu can provide two sort options (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: sortProperty, showSortMenuEntry):

  • Sort Ascending
  • Sort Descending

The user selects one of these options to sort the corresponding column accordingly (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

Sort settings in column header menu
Sort settings in column header menu

Filter

The column header menu can provide a search field for entering free text. If the user enters a term in the input field and triggers the search by pressing Enter, the tree is filtered by the tree column and the corresponding value. If no items match the filter values, the filtered tree table may be empty.

Tree table – Filter
Tree table – Filter

Freeze Columns

The Freeze/Unfreeze option is provided in the column header menu of all columns. Using Freeze on one column freezes all columns from the first one to the selected one.

Tree table–- Freeze
Tree table–- Freeze

Column Handling

Show/Hide Columns

Columns can be shown and hidden. If the tree column is hidden, the following column is the tree column.

Rearrange Columns

The user rearranges columns by dragging and dropping the corresponding column header. The tree column is always the first column and cannot be dragged.

Resize Columns

Columns are resized as follows:

  • Mouse interaction: The user drags the separator line between two columns (sap.ui.table. Column, property: Resizable). Double-clicking the line optimizes the column according to the length of the currently visible data and the label of the column header (sap.ui.table.Column, property: Autoresizable). Note that auto-resizing works only if the cells in this column contain one of the following controls: text, label, link, or input.
  • Touch interaction: The user clicks or taps the column header to reveal two buttons: One to show the column header menu, and one for resizing. The user drags the latter to resize the column.

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a table. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

When opened, the context menu gets the row and column context, except for special columns (such as the selection column) or special rows (like group headers). Context menus can be implemented for a specific table, row, or cell (not recommended for editable cells).

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a table is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Tree table with context menu
Tree table with context menu

Cell Content

The tree is traditional in that each cell can contain only one data point in one single line.

Apart from plain read-only text, cells can contain the following:

While it is technically possible to also use other controls, doing so could lead to issues in regards to alignment, condensed mode, screen reader support, and keyboard support.

If you use text, use only single-line text to keep the same row height. Truncate if necessary as this prevents adverse side effects when scrolling vertically (sap.m.Text, property: wrapping, value: false).

Guidelines

Filtering

  • To filter, choose the filter bar instead of the built-in free text filter.
  • Only use the free text filter if the filter bar is too heavy.

Sorting

First of all: Is sorting meaningful in your tree? If so, decide on a meaningful default sort order.

If sorting is meaningful, is it meaningful on all levels? Or does the tree structure need to be stable? In the latter case, sort only leaves, but not nodes.

To display the current sort state, an icon is shown in the column header of the most recently sorted column. This icon indicates the sort direction (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order. For each column, provide a meaningful sort order. For example:

  • Sort text alphabetically
  • Sort numbers by their value
  • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
    • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
    • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
    • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
    • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.

Loading Data

To indicate that the table is currently loading items, use the busy state (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data has been loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Initital Display

Think of the initial expand / collapse state of a tree: If your structure contains many items on the root level, it might make sense to collapse the whole tree in the beginning.

In contrast, if the main items to work with are displayed on a deeper level (e.g. the parent nodes are just some kind of categorization), the tree should be expanded up to the first level where the needed items appear.

Selection

In multiple selection mode, do not show checkboxes in the first data column in the default delivery to avoid confusion.

Offer the Select All checkbox for (de)selecting all items the user can reach by scrolling.

Developer Hint
Select All is only applied to items that have already been loaded to the front-end server. All other items are not (de)selected before they are loaded, such as items added via lazy loading with growingScrollToLoad. This conflicts with the guideline that all items the user can reach by scrolling must be (de)selected.

Also note that Select All only selects items within currently expanded nodes.

To process all items, listen to the selectionChange event and to its selectAll flag. This indicates whether the Select All checkbox was triggered. As soon as an action is triggered, process the items accordingly. Depending on the number of items, consider processing them in the back end.

Empty Table

Try to avoid empty tables. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the tree table with data.

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items.

Add Items

Place the add button on the table toolbar. It can be displayed as an icon (+) or text (e.g. ‘Add’ or ‘Create’).

In general, new items always appear as the first item of the table (or node).

Columns

Minimize the number of columns. Avoid the need to scroll horizontally in the default delivery. In the first column, show the hierarchical data, which should identify the line item. Choose the name over the ID, but if both are needed, show the name first, then the ID.

The tree table assigns the same width to each column by default. It is recommended that you overwrite this default to provide optimal space for your content (sap.ui.table.Column, property: width).

If you define the column width in pixels or rems, resizing a column affects only the width of this specific column. Reducing the browser window size results in a scrollbar. After resizing a column, a scrollbar appears if the width of the table is not enough to show all columns. If the columns use less space than is available, white space appears on the right side of the last column.

If you define the column width as a percentage, resizing one column affects the width of several or all columns. Text becomes truncated when the browser window size is reduced. This is done to make sure that all columns together fill the space of the table. A scrollbar appears only in case the automatic change of the column widths is not enough to display all columns. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, a minimum width can be set per column. Please be aware that this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users are still able to reduce the column width below the provided minimum. (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth)

If you define the column width as “auto”, the behavior is the same as for “percentage”. In contrast to percentage, “auto” distributes the columns equally.

To decide on how to set the column width (pixel/rem/em vs. percent/auto), keep the following tips in mind:

  • For tables with only 2 to 3 columns, use pixel-based units. This ensures that on wide screens the values in the columns are not spread over the whole screen, which improves readability of line items.
  • For tables with many columns, where a horizontal scrollbar is usually needed, use pixel-based units. This avoids unintended side effects when resizing columns.
  • For all other tables, use whatever fits your case better.

Be cautious with mixing columns with pixel-based and percentage-based widths. While this can be helpful in some cases, it could also cause even more unintended side effects when resizing a column. When using percentage-based widths for one or more columns, think of the possibility to not allow end users to resize columns at all.

Alignment of Cell Content

Align column headers according to their cell content:

  • Texts are left-aligned.
  • Numbers (except for IDs), dates, and times are right-aligned.
  • Icons are centered.

In addition, align amounts with currencies to the decimal point. You can do this with the sap.ui.unified.Currency control.

Note that most currencies have two digits after the decimal point, but there are exceptions, for example:

  • The Tunisian dinar has three digits.
  • The Japanese yen has no digits.

In tree tables with mixed currencies, all amounts still have to be aligned to the decimal point.

To enable positive and negative values to be identified more easily, position the minus sign to the right of the number. It is placed in the same position in every row.

For more information, see currency.

Formatting Cell Content

  • Note that there are different locale formats, so show dates, times, and numbers in the format corresponding to the user’s language.
  • If text and an ID are to be shown, show the ID in brackets after the corresponding text.
  • Where possible, show the unit of measurement together with the number within the lines, and not only on the column header.

Tree vs. Table

Trees are more complex than tables due to their hierarchical view. Users tend to have more problems finding items in hierarchical views than in flat lists, except where the hierarchical view is natural. By natural we mean that every child node should be part of only one parent, and this relationship between the child and parent is clear and well known.

Do
Example of an acceptable use of tree tables
Example of an acceptable use of tree tables
Do
A clear parent-child relationship
A clear parent-child relationship

When you use trees, you should choose broad hierarchies over deep hierarchies. Deep hierarchies make finding items more complicated. So try to reduce hierarchical levels where possible, especially if the hierarchy is not natural. Ideally, a tree should have a maximum of four levels, the first two of which should contain the most important items.

Don't
Avoid unnecessary depth in the hierarchy
Avoid unnecessary depth in the hierarchy
Do
Favor breadth over depth in the hierarchy
Favor breadth over depth in the hierarchy

You can use the following methods to reduce hierarchy levels:

  • Avoid single root nodes. A single root node is often used to provide a Select All feature. Since the tree control provides an extra space for a Select All feature, the root node is not usually needed.
  • When you use only two levels, choose a grouped table or grouped ALV over a tree table control. Expand all groups for the default delivery.
  • Container nodes at the top level can usually be replaced by tabs or value pickers.
  • Eliminate unnecessary mid-level containers, for example, by combining redundant ones.
  • Exercise care when using a tree due to its overall complexity. The hierarchical structure of the data does not necessarily mean that a tree control is required.

Design Concepts

The tree table can be used to display large amounts of hierarchical data. Unfortunately, tree tables have a high data density and therefore convey an immediate feeling of complexity. Ideally, tree tables with large amounts of data should only be shown if there is no other option. You should instead try the following:

  • Flatten the data. A list, table, or ALV is still complex, but less so than a tree table.
  • Break down the data into manageable chunks. Allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Try to avoid horizontal scrolling in the default delivery.

Navigation

To trigger navigation on line item level, choose one of the following options:

  • Use a link for the attribute that identifies the row. Clicking the link triggers the navigation. This is the preferred option.
  • Add the RowActions column and show the navigation arrow (  ) at the end of the row. No column header text is required. The navigation column is fixed and will not scroll away. Users also cannot personalize this column. The navigation arrow triggers the navigation.
    Do not use the RowActions column for actions other than navigation and deletion.

Examples of Incorrect and Correct Usage

When you use trees:

  • Choose breadth over depth.
  • Emphasize important values. Do not let the user run into a wall of text without guidance. You can use bold text for this.
  • Try to minimize the number of columns, especially if there is a large number of rows.
  • Optimize column width for its initial visible content. Do not automatically adjust column width based on content changes.
Don't
Avoid: The first visible content should not be truncated in the default delivery
Avoid: The first visible content should not be truncated in the default delivery
  • Maintain a fixed layout, except when the user wants to change it.
  • In the default layout, use the tree column for the item name or data that identifies the row. This helps the user to choose between different items.
  • Create a clear and immediately understandable hierarchy. Use clear parent-child relationships. If this is not possible, add a child in different nodes to help the user find the element.
Do
Acceptable: repeat entries to optimize finding items
Acceptable: repeat entries to optimize finding items
  • Consider persisting the layout settings. When a user reopens the app, show the tree table with the same column sizes, column order, and view settings as last defined by this user.
  • Use the Select All feature only if it makes sense. Note that selecting a lot of data also takes time and might not be appropriate for all use cases. For example, a delete operation on two million database entries might not be very helpful in many cases.
  • Set the property collapseRecursive to “false” in order to keep the selection on subnodes even after collapsing and expanding the root node.

Empty Tree Tables

Avoid empty tree tables. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the tree table with data (sap.ui.table.TreeTable, properties: noDataText, showNoData).

Examples:

  • If a tree table is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the tree table with data.
  • If a tree table is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    No filters set. To start, enter your search and filter settings and run the search.
  • If a tree table is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No items found. Check the search and filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, no search is offered, only the search is offered).
  • You are using the live search (no Go button in the filter bar). In this case, leave out “run the search”.
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of search and filter settings).

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, you can display a highlight indicator in front of the item. The highlight indicator can show:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning
  • A neutral highlight, such as blue to highlight newly added items

(Property: highlight)

Semantic row highlight indicator
Semantic row highlight indicator

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, it is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within a tree table, use the following options:

  • For dropping items as a child, use whole nodes as drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.On).
  • For dropping items on the same level, use the space between items as drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between).
  • If you want to allow users to drop items as a child or sibling, offer both drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.OnOrBetween).

This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Drop target on an Item
Drop target on an Item

Do not combine rearranging items within one level and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure that there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

Moving items from one node to another can be combined with sorting without any issues.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items on the same level with sorting
Do not combine rearranging items on the same level with sorting

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar). Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

The context menu can be triggered for the table, row, or cell. However, we do not recommend using context menus for cells: because the content of a cell is a different touch target than the cell itself, opening a cell context menu via touch is quite hard, even in cozy mode.

Do not combine context menus with condensed mode: editable controls fill the entire space inside a cell. Because of this, context menus cannot be opened at all with touch or mouse interaction.

Tables in Object Pages

In the object page, we advise against using analytical, grid, and tree tables. Instead, use a responsive table and offer navigation to a list report with the table types mentioned above.

For more information on the use of tables within the object page, see the Tables section of the Object Page article.

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a button for exporting table data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' button
'Export to Spreadsheet' button

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Tree

Within SAP Fiori, we distinguish between tree tables and trees. Both usually allow the user to display and work with a hierarchical set of items. While tree tables are usually used for more complex data, trees are generally used for rather basic data. Trees are mostly used in the master list for a master-detail scenario using the flexible column layout and in popovers or dialogs. In certain use cases, they can also be used in the dynamic page layout.

In the case of tree tables and trees, items that contain additional items are called nodes, while items that do not contain any other items are called leaves. If available, a single topmost node is called a root node. Apart from the hierarchical structure of its nodes and leaves, a tree is quite similar to a list.

Usage

Use the tree if:

  • You need to display the key identifier of hierarchically structured items (for example in the first column of the flexible column layout).
  • Selecting one or more items out of a set of hierarchically structured items is a main use case.
  • The hierarchy has a restricted number of levels (up to about 12, depending on the content) and items (around 200).
  • You want to have only one implementation for all devices.

Do not use the tree if:

  • The main use case is to select one item from a very small number of non-hierarchical items, without viewing additional details. In this case, a select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • Items are not structured hierarchically. Use a list instead.
  • The hierarchy turns out to have only two levels. In this case, use a grouped list.
  • The hierarchy turns out to be just a categorization based on several details of the item. In this case, an analytical table provides multi-level grouping. Note that the analytical table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You need to display very deep hierarchies with additional data per item. In this case, use a tree table. Note that the tree table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • The structure contains more than 200 items. In this case, use the tree table. It is optimized for large item sets and provides better performance. Note that the tree table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use a chart.

Check out the table overview to decide which SAP Fiori table is most suitable for your needs.

Responsiveness

The tree is like a list containing hierarchical data. It acts as a container for items, with the possibility to expand and collapse nodes. When reducing the width, item texts wrap to ensure that the tree adapts to the new size.

In addition, the tree changes the indentation per level dynamically when the user expands a node, based on number of levels currently showing.

Tree displaying 2 levels
Tree displaying 2 levels
Tree displaying 3 levels
Tree displaying 3 levels
Tree displaying 4 levels
Tree displaying 4 levels

Layout

The title bar (optional) contains the title of the tree. In addition, an item counter and toolbar items can be placed on the title bar.
The collection of hierarchical items occupies the main part of the tree.

Schematic visualization of the tree
Schematic visualization of the tree

Components

The title bar consists of a toolbar. The toolbar can contain a title, an item count, and other toolbar items such as actions or view settings, for example.

The standard tree item consists of:

  • A highlight indicator (optional)
  • An expand/collapse button for nodes
  • A selector in form of a checkbox or a radio button (optional)
  • An icon (optional)
  • text
  • A counter (optional)
  • Additional buttons with actions such as Edit, Navigate, or Delete (optional)

If additional controls are needed, use a custom tree item. The custom tree item allows you to use any combination of controls inside the tree.

Standard tree item
Standard tree item

Behavior and Interaction (incl. Gestures)

Tree Level

Scrolling

The height of the tree is defined by the numbers of items it contains. It does not have a scroll container on its own, but is scrolled together with the page or its parent.

Same tree, with different expand state
Same tree, with different expand state

Selecting

A tree can have one of the following selection modes (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, property: mode):

None: Items cannot be selected (sap.m.ListMode.None).
Beware: Items can, nevertheless, use the sap.m.ListType “navigation” which allows click-handling on specific items. This should only be used when the click triggers a navigation to a corresponding item details page.

Tree without selectable items
Tree without selectable items

Single select master: One item of the tree can be selected. To select an item, click anywhere on the item. Single select master does not add any visual indication to the tree and therefore cannot be differentiated from trees without selection if no item is selected. Therefore, always keep one item selected. For single selection, this is the preferred mode. (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster)

Single selection: only one item is selected.
Single selection: only one item is selected.

Single select left: One item of the tree can be selected. For this, the tree provides radio buttons on the left side of each line item. Use this selection mode only if clicking on the item triggers something else, such as a navigation. Ideally, always keep one item selected, even in initial state (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectLeft).

Single selection with radio buttons. Use only if row clicks are used for something else, such as for navigation.
Single selection with radio buttons. Use only if row clicks are used for something else, such as for navigation.

Multiple selection: Allows the selection of one or more items. For this, the tree provides checkboxes on the left side of each line item. Each item is selected independently of the others (sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).

Developer Hint
In multiple selection mode, users can (de)select all items using the shortcut CTRL+A. This only affects items that have already been loaded to the front-end server. All other items are not (de)selected before they are loaded (for example, items added via lazy loading with growingScrollToLoad). This conflicts with the guideline that all items the user can reach by scrolling must be (de)selected.

Also note that CTRL+A only (de)selects items within expanded nodes.

To process all items, listen to the selectionChange event and to its flag selectAll. This indicates whether CTRL+A was triggered. As soon as an action is triggered, process the items accordingly. Depending on the number of items, consider processing them in the back end.

Multiple selection
Multiple selection

Deleting

To delete single items, use the tree in “delete” mode (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This adds a Delete   button to each item. Clicking or tapping this button triggers the deletion of the corresponding item. Do not use this mode if deleting multiple items at once is the preferred use case. Delete is a mode of the tree and  therefore cannot be used together with single selection or multi selection.

Tree in “delete” mode
Tree in “delete” mode

Line Item Level

Expandable and Collapsible Nodes

An Expand/Collapse button is provided automatically for each node.

Expand/collapse button
Expand/collapse button

Navigating

To allow navigation from an item, set type to “navigation” within the corresponding item (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This will create an indicator at the end of the line (“>”) and the entire item will become selectable. Clicking or tapping the line triggers the navigation event. However, clicking or tapping a selectable area or an expandable/collapse node does not. Use the navigation event to navigate to a new page containing item details.
If no navigation is possible, set type to “inactive”.
Navigation is an item type and therefore cannot be used together with “edit” or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).

Tree items with navigation indicator
Tree items with navigation indicator
Navigation indicators can be set per item
Navigation indicators can be set per item

Editing Items

To allow the user to edit an item, set type to “detail” within the corresponding item (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive). This will create an edit  button at the end of the line. Clicking the button triggers the edit event. Use this event to either open a dialog or a details page where the item can be edited.
Edit is an item type and therefore cannot be used together with “navigation” or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).

Edit button
Edit button

Clicking an Item

Items as a whole can be clickable. An event is fired by clicking on the item (anywhere except when triggering a selection or when expanding/collapsing a node). Apps can react to the event, such as by opening a dialog (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive).
Active elements do not have a visual indication and therefore cannot be differentiated from non-active elements.
“Active” is an item type and  therefore cannot be used together with “navigation” or “edit”. In addition, “active” uses the entire item as a clickable area and thus cannot be used together with single select master.

Active items
Active items

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a tree. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

The context menu can be triggered for the tree or per item.

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a tree is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Tree - context menu
Tree - context menu

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a tree or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.m.ListBase, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Guidelines

Tree vs. List

Trees are more complex than lists due to their hierarchical view. Users tend to have more problems finding items in hierarchical views than in flat lists, except where the hierarchical view is natural. By natural we mean that every child node should be part of only one parent, and this relationship between the child and parent is clear and well known.

Example of an acceptable use of trees
Example of an acceptable use of trees
Do
A clear parent-child relationship
A clear parent-child relationship

Broad vs. Deep Hierarchies

When you use trees, you should choose broad hierarchies over deep hierarchies. Deep hierarchies make finding items more complicated. So try to reduce hierarchical levels where possible, especially if the hierarchy is not natural. Ideally, a tree should have a maximum of four levels, the first two of which should contain the most important items.

Don't
Avoid unnecessary depth in the hierarchy
Avoid unnecessary depth in the hierarchy
Do
Favor breadth over depth in a hierarchy
Favor breadth over depth in a hierarchy

You can use the following methods to reduce hierarchy levels:

  • Avoid a single root node. It is usually not needed.
  • Container nodes at the top level can usually be replaced by tabs or value pickers.
  • Eliminate unnecessary mid-level containers, for example, by combining redundant ones.
  • Exercise care when using a tree due to its overall complexity. The hierarchical structure of the data does not necessarily mean that a tree control is required.
Acceptable: repeat entries to optimize finding items
Acceptable: repeat entries to optimize finding items

Design Concepts

The tree can be used to display hierarchical data. Unfortunately, trees convey an immediate feeling of complexity. Ideally, show trees only if there is no other option. You should instead try the following:

  • Flatten the data. A list is still complex, but less so than a tree. A combo box might also fit in some use cases.
  • When only two levels are needed, a grouped list control can be used. This works well, where group nodes are used for categorizing their children and where the group nodes themselves do not need to be selectable.
  • Break down the data into manageable chunks. Allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Title

If needed, implement the title text by adding a title to a toolbar. Place the toolbar above the tree.
Use a title text if it is not already provided by the surrounding area. Do not use a title text if it would just repeat text that is already in the context above the tree.
Use a title if you need a toolbar. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a title, such as Items.
If you use a title, be sure to include the following:

  • A title text for the tree.
  • An (optional) item count using the following format: Title (Number of Items). For example, Items (17). Depending on the use case, either count all items or leaves only (for example, if nodes are mainly used for categorization).
Title
Title
Title with item count
Title with item count

Loading Data

To indicate that the tree is currently loading items, use the busy state (sap.m.Tree, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Tree in busy state while loading data
Tree in busy state while loading data

Initial Display

Think of the initial expandable/collapsible state of a tree. If your structure contains many items on the root level, it might make sense to collapse the whole tree in its initial state.

In contrast, if the most important items are displayed on a deeper level (if, for example, the parent nodes are simply a kind of categorization), the tree should be expanded up to the first level where the most important items immediately appear.

Content

The standard tree item allows you to set one text per item. The text wraps, which can lead to items of different heights depending on the length of the text. An icon can be shown before the text. Try not to use the icons, and only use them if the meaning of the icons is clear and unambiguous. In addition, a counter can be placed on the right side of the item (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: counter).

The custom tree item allows you to use any combination of controls inside a tree, including editable controls (selection controls, Expand/Collapse buttons, navigation indicators, counters).

When designing a custom tree item, consider the responsive behavior. Take into account that all the controls you can add to a tree require additional width. Their position cannot be changed.

Standard tree item with all options
Standard tree item with all options

Content Formatting

To display object names with an ID, show the ID in brackets after the corresponding object name.

Place the ID in brackets after the corresponding object name
Place the ID in brackets after the corresponding object name

Try not to display an empty tree. If there is no way around this, provide instructions on how to fill the tree with data (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, properties: showNoData, noDataText).

 

Examples:

  • If a tree is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the tree with data.
  • If a tree is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    No filters set. To start, enter your search and filter settings and run the search.
  • If a tree is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No items found. Check the search and filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, no search is offered, only the search is offered).
  • You are using the live search (no Go button in the filter bar). In this case, leave out “run the search”.
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of search and filter settings).
Provide meaningful instructions within an empty tree
Provide meaningful instructions within an empty tree

Highlighting Items

To show that an item needs attention, a highlight indicator can be shown in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to show:

  • A semantic state (for example, red or orange if the item contains an error or warning)
  • A neutral state (for example, blue to highlight newly added items)

(sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListIemBase, property: highlight)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Item States

To show that an item has been modified, for example within the global edit flow, add the string (Modified) to the text of the item.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error, for example within the global edit flow, add the string (Contains errors) to the text of the item and highlight the row accordingly.

A modified item with an error
A modified item with an error

To show that an item is locked, add the string (Locked by [name]) to the text of the item.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in a draft state, add the string (Draft) to the text of the item.

Item in draft state
Item in draft state

Show only one state at any one time.

Actions

To trigger actions on items, show the actions on a toolbar above the tree. Do not offer action triggering on multiple items if the tree is expected to have fewer than 10 items in most cases.
The following actions on single items must always be in-line:

Delete: Use “Delete” mode (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This places a delete  button at the end of each item.

Items with Delete button
Items with Delete button

Navigation: Use the “Navigation” item type (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This places a navigation indicator at the end of the corresponding items. Use this to navigate to a new page containing item details.

Items with navigation indicator
Items with navigation indicator

Edit: Use the “Detail” item type (sap.m.TreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail). This places an edit   icon at the end of the corresponding items.

Edit button
Edit button

From these three actions (delete, navigation, and edit), you can combine delete and edit, or delete and navigation. Edit and navigation cannot be combined.

To trigger actions that are independent of the selection, show the actions on a toolbar above the tree. For example: AddCollapse AllExpand All, …

To trigger a default action on the entire item, use the “Active” or “DetailAndActive” item type (sap.m.TreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active). Active items trigger an event when clicked, which can be handled by apps, for example, to open a dialog. Selection and expanding/collapsing a node does not trigger the event, but are handled by the tree. Do not use this for navigation, to switch the line item to an edit state, or to delete the item.
Active can be combined with edit and delete, but not with navigation. Do not combine active with single selection master.

When you add an item, add the new item as the first item of the corresponding node.

Editing Items

To edit items, add an Edit button either in-line on the toolbar above the tree. Triggering the button either opens a dialog or navigates to an editable details page.

For mass editing:

  • Provide multiselection (sap.m.Tree/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).
  • Provide an Edit button on the toolbar above the tree.
  • If several items are selected, triggering the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

For more details, see mass editing.

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar).

Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, it is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within a tree, use the following options:

  • For dropping items as a child, use whole nodes as drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.On).
  • For dropping items on the same level, use the space between items as drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between).
  • If you want to allow users to drop items as a child or sibling, offer both drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.OnOrBetween).

This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Do not combine rearranging items within one level and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure that there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

Moving items from one node to another can be combined with sorting without any issues.

Drop targets in between items
Drop targets in between items

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a button for exporting the tree data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' button
'Export to Spreadsheet' button

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

List

In SAP Fiori, we distinguish between tables and lists. Both usually contain homogeneous data, but lists generally have rather basic data, whereas the data in tables tends to be more complex. Lists are mostly used in the master list for a master-detail scenario using the flexible column layout, as well as in popovers or dialogs. For certain use cases, lists can also be used in the dynamic page layout.

Usage

Use the list if:

  • You want to display a homogeneous set of basic data.
  • You need to sort, group, or filter simple datasets.
  • You need to display a single-level hierarchy rather than using a complex tree table to support this simple use case.

Do not use the list if:

  • You want to manage complex datasets that need to be extensively sorted, grouped, filtered, or edited. In this case, use a table.
  • You work with complex hierarchies. In this case, use a tree.

Responsiveness

The list is like a layout container. You can change its width, but you must also ensure that the items contained in the list adapt whenever the list is resized.

All list item variants available in SAP Fiori already adapt to the respective screen size.

List Item Variants

The list contains various list items. These items can be of various types depending on the use case and on the content they have. SAPUI5 already provides the most common list items in SAP Fiori in the form of controls, although custom list items can also be created if necessary.

All the available list item types behave responsively and adapt to changing screen sizes out of the box. Most of them use truncation if size becomes too limited, since they are usually used to navigate to the item details. For custom list items, you can also wrap the texts, if required.

Object List Item

The object list item is the list item variant used most frequently in SAP Fiori applications. Consisting of a title, key figure, attributes, and a status, it contains the most important information about an object.

The space available for the attributes and status is limited as it should only show crucial information that allows the user to decide which items should be dealt with first.

All essential information about an object is usually provided when the user navigates to the item details.

For more information, see object list item.

Object list items
Object list items

Standard List Item

The standard list item is used for less complex entries, such as when the user selects an item in a dialog. This list item contains an optional image, a title, description, and a single info text (which can contain semantic information).

For more information, see standard list item.

Standard list items
Standard list items

Display List Item

The display list item is the simplest form of a list item and is only capable of showing a label and values. It is seldom used.

For more information, see display list item.

Display list items
Display list items

Action List Item

The action list item allows various actions to be triggered in a dialog. The action list item is not used in the content area.

For more information, see action list item.

Action list item
Action list item

Feed List Item

The feed list item is mainly used in feeds and notes.

For more information, see feed list item.

Feed with feed list items
Feed with feed list items

Input List Item

The input list item allows the user to enter data in a list item. It is seldom used in SAP Fiori apps as forms are usually the preferable method for entering data.

For more information, see input list item.

Input list item
Input list item

Components

The list control comes with the following main properties:

Header

The header text contains the title of the list. It is usually only used when the list is in the content area.

Footer

The footer text is the last entry in the list, and as such, it scrolls away with the content. Therefore, this property is also seldom used.

Lazy Loading

Like the table, the list also allows lazy loading. The “growing” list property is used for this purpose.

List with header and footer
List with header and footer

Empty List

Avoid empty lists. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the list with data (sap.m.List/ sap.m.ListBase, properties: noDataText, showNoData).

Examples:

  • If a list is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the list with data.
  • If a list is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    No filters set. To start, enter your search and filter settings and run the search.
  • If a list is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No items found. Check the search and filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, no search is offered, only the search is offered).
  • You are using the live search (no Go button in the filter bar). In this case, leave out “run the search”.
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of search and filter settings).
Empty list
Empty list

Count

List items can have a count, which is located on the far right of a row. You can use the count in simple lists, such as those that contain standard list items, to indicate how many subitems the user can expect when navigating to the item.

Standard list items with counter
Standard list items with counter

Read/Unread

You can set an indicator to highlight unread items, making it easier for the user to discover them (property: showUnread = true). If you set this indicator, all texts for the unread items are shown in bold font.

By default, this indicator is switched off, and all list items are displayed in normal font.

Display list item with read and unread items
Display list item with read and unread items

Highlighting Items

To show that an item needs attention, a highlight indicator can be shown in front of the item (property: highlight). The highlight indicator can be used to show:

  • A semantic state (for example, red or orange if the item contains an error or warning)
  • A neutral state (for example, blue to highlight newly added items)
Highlighted items using semantic colors
Highlighted items using semantic colors

Behavior and Interaction

There are several ways to interact with the list and its list items:

Line Item Level

Mode

The list can have several modes. The respective property (Mode) allows the following selection methods:

  • None
  • SingleSelectMaster (used to pick one item with no additional indicator, as in the master list for a master-detail scenario with the flexible column layout)
  • SingleSelectLeft (used to pick one item using a radio button on the far left)
  • MultiSelect (used to pick several items from the list using checkboxes on the far left)
  • Delete (used to delete items from the list using a delete indicator on the far right)
Developer Hint
In multiple selection mode, users can (de)select all items using the shortcut CTRL+A. This only affects items that have already been loaded to the front-end server. All other items are not (de)selected before they are loaded (for example, items added via lazy loading with growingScrollToLoad). This conflicts with the guideline that all items the user can reach by scrolling must be (de)selected.

To process all items, listen to the selectionChange event and to its flag selectAll. This indicates whether CTRL+A was triggered. As soon as an action is triggered, process the items accordingly. Depending on the number of items, consider processing them in the back end.

List with explicit single selection
List with explicit single selection
List with multiple selection
List with multiple selection
List with delete mode
List with delete mode

Grouping

List items can be grouped. The group header is a visually separate line at the top of the items it groups. It does not currently provide an interaction of its own.

Grouped list
Grouped list

Type

The list item type defines the interaction of the list item, which is accompanied by a visual cue.

The items can be one of the following:

  • Active (click event; cursor changes to indicate that)
  • Inactive (no click event; cursor does not change)
  • Navigation (a small arrow appears on the far right, indicating that clicking would navigate)
  • Detail (a pencil appears on the far right, indicating that something can be changed. The user can only click on the pencil.)
  • Detail and active (same as “detail”, but the item itself is also clickable)

The example shows how all these types are visualized.

All list item types: inactive, detail, navigation, active, detail and active
All list item types: inactive, detail, navigation, active, detail and active

Swipe

You can provide a swipe feature (SwipeDirection) for quickly approving or deleting items without having to look at the details. It must only be provided as an additional feature, and not be the only way of performing the action.

List with swipe action
List with swipe action

Context Menu

The context menu can be triggered for the list or per item.

It gives users an alternative way of modifying the focused elements by giving access to context-specific functions.

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

List - context menu
List - context menu

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a list or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.m.ListBase, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Styles

The list items can have a header when they are used in a content area. It is also technically possible to change the background of the header and of the list itself. Depending on the use case, the lines between the list items and around the list can be shown or hidden.

The property Show Separators (All, Inner, None) allows only the outer lines (Inner) or all the lines (None) to be hidden when the list is used as a more structural element within a content area.

List without separators
List without separators

Guidelines

Text Length

When you use the list in the first column of the flexible column layout, keep the texts as short as possible and only as long as necessary. If you expect large numbers, use formatting instead.

Custom List Items

If none of the list items provided suits the requirements of your app, you can also create a custom list. If you choose this option, ensure that your custom list item is responsive when resized.

Radio Button

Only use radio buttons if they are absolutely necessary. One example would be if you want to distinguish single selection from navigation. This is a rare case in which visible radio buttons for single selection are allowed.

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar).

Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, it is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within the list, use drop targets that are between items (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between). This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Drop targets in between items
Drop targets in between items

Do not combine rearranging items and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure that there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

When combining rearranging items with grouping, be aware that moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on values, the dropped item needs to take on the corresponding value of the target group. If this is not wanted, do not allow users to rearrange items in grouped lists.

 

Example:

A list is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. If changing the value doesn’t make sense, only allow users to rearrange the items within the same group, or don’t allow rearranging at all.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing

Export to SpreadSheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a button for exporting the list data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' button
'Export to Spreadsheet' button

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Responsive Table

The responsive table is the default table in SAP Fiori. It contains a set of line items and is fully responsive. Depending on the scenario, users can also navigate from the line items to further details.

A line item contains several data points sorted into columns. A data point refers to a unit of information, such as a number, a text, a unit of measurement, and so on, which can be used to form the content of a tableform or other control. One data point is usually displayed by a control, such as a text, object status, or input field. A control can display more than one data point, for example, by concatenating text.

In contrast to traditional tables, a “cell” of the responsive table is not limited to displaying only one control, and therefore a single cell can present far more than one data point.

Responsive table
Responsive table

Usage

Use the responsive table if:

  • You need a table. The responsive table is the default table in SAP Fiori.
  • You need to use various controls inside a line item, such as micro charts. By contrast, the analytical table supports only a very limited set of controls.
  • The focus is on line items, not on cells. The responsive table is optimized for viewing complete items on all devices.
  • Selecting one or more items is a main use case and details are needed to choose the correct item.
  • Line items are independent of each other and no operation across columns is needed.
  • You want to have only one implementation for all devices. As the name suggests, the responsive table is responsive.

Do not use the responsive table if:

  • The main use case is to select one item from a very small number of items, without viewing additional details. In this case, a select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • The main use case is to select one item from several items, with the possibility of viewing only a few details per item. In this case, a list might be more appropriate. Pay attention to the layout of the list item to ensure that it has a pleasant appearance.
  • The cell level and the spatial relationship between cells is more important than the line item. In this case, use the analytical table or grid table. Examples include spreadsheet analyses and waterfall charts. Note that neither the analytical table nor the grid table are fully responsive. Both are only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You are working on more than 1,000 rows. Try using the analytical table or grid table instead; they are easier to handle, perform better, and are optimized for handling large numbers of items. Note that neither the analytical table nor the grid table are fully responsive. Both are only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • Comparing items is a major use case. In this case, the analytical table or grid table might be more appropriate because each cell contains only one data point. By contrast, the responsive table offers greater flexibility within line items, including the ability to add more data points per cell and the pop-in function. Both make comparisons more difficult. Note that neither the analytical table nor the grid table are fully responsive. Both are only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • Data needs to be structured in a hierarchical manner. In this case, a tree table might be more appropriate. Although the analytical table can have several grouping levels, it is not as flexible when nodes at several levels contain child nodes. Note that neither the analytical table nor the grid table are fully responsive. Both are only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use a chart.
  • You just need it for layout reasons. In this case, use a layout container such as a horizontal layout or a vertical layout instead.
  • You need read-only or editable field-value pairs. In this case, use a form instead. The responsive table is not optimized for form-like input navigation.
Don't
Do not use a responsive table as a form
Do not use a responsive table as a form

See the table overview to decide which SAP Fiori table is most suitable for your needs.

Responsiveness

The responsive table is optimized for viewing one line item at a time with no scrolling or only vertical scrolling, irrespective of the display width.

On smartphones, only the most important data remains in the one-column or two-column table, while all other data is moved to the space between two item rows, known as the “pop-in area”.

In this area, data for the corresponding cell is provided as a label/value pair. The label is defined by the column header, and the value is taken from the corresponding cell. Labels can be displayed next to the value or above the value.

Within the pop-in area, the label/value pairs can be displayed in the following ways (sap.m.Table, property: PopinLayout):

  • Block: Label/value pairs are listed one below the other.
  • GridSmall: Label/value pairs are displayed next to each other in equally spaced grid cells. An additional column is shown for each 13 rem of available screen width (208 px with default browser settings). If the number of grid cells exceeds the available screen width, the grid cells wrap. On S size, this layout transforms automatically to a block layout.
  • GridLarge: The display logic is the same as for GridSmall,, but grid columns come with a larger minimum width (26 rem instead of 13 rem).

In all layouts, you can show the labels next to or above (recommended) the corresponding data.

Information
The GridSmall and GridLarge layouts are not available in all browsers. If the chosen layout is not available, it is automatically changed to Block layout.
The responsive table displayed on a smartphone (size S)
The responsive table displayed on a smartphone (size S)
The responsive table displayed on a tablet (size M)
The responsive table displayed on a tablet (size M)
The responsive table displayed in compact mode on a desktop computer (size L)
The responsive table displayed in compact mode on a desktop computer (size L)

To ensure responsiveness, you must configure each column. Depending on the screen width (in pixels), the column needs to know which of the following responses is required:

  • Stay in the table layout.
  • Move to the pop-in (sap.m.Column, with the properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth, popinHAlign, popinDisplay).
  • Hide.

Since you have to define this for each column, you can also handle more than one column at a single breakpoint, such as moving three columns to the pop-in area at once.

Each of the three device types has a predefined value for the screen width. However, you will get better results if you offer more breakpoints by using pixel values instead of the predefined values.

For the smallest screen width, keep the following information in the table layout:

  • The identifier of the line item
  • The key attribute

Example for Block Layout

A typical responsive table.

A typical responsive table
A typical responsive table

Hide the information column for a screen width smaller than 570 px.

Hiding the information column
Hiding the information column

Move the column “vendor” to the pop-in area for a screen width smaller than 460 px (sap.m.Column, properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth).

Moving the vendor column to the pop-in area
Moving the vendor column to the pop-in area

Move the column “limit” to the pop-in for a screen width smaller than 350 px (sap.m.Column, properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth).

Moving the limit column to the pop-in area
Moving the limit column to the pop-in area

Move the column “price” to the pop-in area for a screen width smaller than 270 px (sap.m.Column, properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth).

Moving the price column to the pop-in area
Moving the price column to the pop-in area

If you still need to support smaller screens, values can be moved below the corresponding labels inside the pop-in area. In these examples, this happens for a screen width smaller than 220 px (sap.m.Column, property: popinDisplay).

Pop-in area: moving the data below the labels
Pop-in area: moving the data below the labels

Example for GridLarge Layout

A more complex responsive table.

A more complex responsive table
A more complex responsive table

In this example, the Average Occupancy Rate and Available In columns move to the pop-in area if the screen width is less than 1900 pixels.

GridLarge layout - 'Average Occupancy Rate' and  'Available In' columns move to the pop-in area
GridLarge layout - 'Average Occupancy Rate' and 'Available In' columns move to the pop-in area

If the screen width is less than 1500 pixels, the Average Stay column moves to the pop-in area.

GridLarge layout - 'Average Stay' column moves to the pop-in area
GridLarge layout - 'Average Stay' column moves to the pop-in area

If the screen width is less than 1100 pixels, the Description column moves to the pop-in area. Since all four columns in the pop-in area do not fit into one row, the pop-in wraps.

GridLarge layout - 'Description' column moves to the pop-in area
GridLarge layout - 'Description' column moves to the pop-in area

If the screen width is reduced even further, the Details column moves to the pop-in area. On this narrow screen, only one column fits into one pop-in row, so it looks exactly like the block layout.

GridLarge layout - 'Details' column moves to the pop-in area
GridLarge layout - 'Details' column moves to the pop-in area

Layout

The optional title bar consists of the title of the responsive table, an item counter, variant management, and the toolbar.

The filter info bar appears when the responsive table is filtered, and shows information on the filter settings.

The column header shows the label for each column.

The collection of items, or rows, occupies the main part of the responsive table.

You can add aggregation information (such as totals) on the table footer.

A More button can be shown if you do not want all items to be loaded at the start (known as “lazy loading”). Ideally, you should use scrolling to load more items instead of choosing the More button.

Schematic visualization of the responsive table
Schematic visualization of the responsive table

Components

The title bar contains the title of the responsive table, an item counter, variant management, and the toolbar.

The toolbar can contain entry points for the view settings dialog and the table personalization dialog, as well as view switches in the form of a segmented button, and buttons for AddEdit, and other actions.
Beneath the toolbar, display a filter info bar (which itself is a special toolbar) if the responsive table is filtered.
To format within items, apply the guidelines for formatting data. Controls commonly used inside items are the object identifier and the object number. For more information about these controls, see object display components.
You can use the table footer to display additional static information relating to the table content.
The More button loads more items to the front end if not all items have yet been loaded.
Components of the responsive table
Components of the responsive table

Behavior and Interaction

The responsive table is quite flexible with regard to its content.

Table Level

Scroll

The height of the table is defined by the number of items it contains. It does not have a scroll container on its own, but is scrolled together with the app (in contrast to the grid table and the analytical table).

If the table works in a “growing” mode, it only loads a few items at first. Additional items are only loaded (and rendered) on request. The “request” can either be triggered by scrolling (preferred), or by clicking the More button.

Same table, different number of items
Same table, different number of items

When the user scrolls, the title bar, column headers, and filter info bar can stick to the top of the surrounding layout container (sap.m.Table, property: sticky).

Information
The “sticky” feature comes with some limitations:

  • It is not available on all browsers. In non-supporting browsers, the corresponding areas (title bar, column headers, filter info bar) are not fixed on top of the surrounding layout container while scrolling.
  • Certain layout containers suppress the sticky behavior, such as the grid layout. The same happens if the table is placed within the object page.
  • If focus is set to a fixed column header, the table is automatically scrolled to top.

Sticky table title and sticky column header
Sticky table title and sticky column header

Merge Duplicates

To simulate the behavior of row spanning, you can merge cells of consecutive rows inside one or more columns automatically if they contain the same value (sap.m.Column, properties: mergeDuplicates, mergeFunctionName).

Use the merge feature if you expect the column to contain duplicate entries, and it makes sense to group them. In the example screenshot, the Supplier, Product, and Dimensions columns reflect a hierarchical structure: Suppliers have products, which in turn have dimensions. Because suppliers typically have multiple products, merging duplicate entries for the supplier column makes the table easier to read. Note, however, that when the user sorts the table by another field, the hierarchy changes and the merged items are regrouped accordingly.

Do not use the merge feature if duplicate entries are not part of the design. If consecutive table rows happen to have the same values at runtime, this alone isn’t a valid reason to group them.

Supplier column merges duplicates in consecutive rows
Supplier column merges duplicates in consecutive rows
Merged columns with multiselection
Merged columns with multiselection

Select

A responsive table can have one of the following selection modes (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode):

  • None: Items cannot be selected (sap.m.ListMode.None).
    Beware: Line items can still use the sap.m.ListType “navigation”, which allows click handling on specific line items. This should only be used when the click triggers navigation to a corresponding line item details page.
  • Single selection master: One item in the responsive table can be selected. Items are selected by clicking or tapping the whole row. The single select master mode has no obvious visual cues, such as checkboxes or radio buttons. It only provides a light blue background for the selected state. Because of this, it can barely be differentiated from tables without selection (mode: None). Single select master is the preferred mode for single selection (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster).
  • Single selection left: One item in the responsive table can be selected. For this, the responsive table provides radio buttons on the left side of each line item. Only use this mode if row clicks are being used for something else, such as navigation. (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectLeft).
  • Multiple selection: Users can select one or more items. For this, the responsive table provides checkboxes on the left side of each line item. Users can (de)select all items using the Select All checkbox to the left of the column header. Select All (de)selects all items that the user can reach by scrolling (sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).
Responsive table without selectable items
Responsive table without selectable items
Single selection master
Single selection master
SIngle selection left with radio buttons. Use only if row clicks are used for something else.
SIngle selection left with radio buttons. Use only if row clicks are used for something else.
Multiple selection
Multiple selection

Group

For grouping items, a group header is displayed (sap.m.GroupHeaderLisItem). The group header is not interactive.

Group headers
Group headers

Show Aggregations

Show aggregations (such as totals) on the table footer (sap.m.Column, aggregation: footer).

Do not show aggregations in “growing” mode. It is not clear, if an aggregation will only aggregate the items loaded into the front end, or all items.

Table footer displays aggregated total
Table footer displays aggregated total

Load Items

To show more than 200 items, use the “growing” mode (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, properties: growing, growingThreshold, growingScrollToLoad, growingTriggerText). The growing mode allows the user to load only the first few items. Additional items are only loaded (and rendered) on request, which improves performance. The “request” can either be done via scrolling (preferred), or by clicking the More button.

If using the More button, show the number of items already loaded and the total number items below the text More, if possible.

Do not show more than 1,000 items overall, even in growing mode. Use the grid table instead.

Do not show aggregations in growing mode. Also, do not display an item count on the table toolbar if growing mode is used. Use the count on the More button instead.

Load on scroll
Load on scroll

Line Item Level

Delete Single Item Rows

To delete single item rows, use the table in the mode “delete” (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This adds Delete buttons to each line item. Clicking this button triggers the deletion of the corresponding line item.

Do not use this mode if deleting multiple lines at once is the preferred use case.

Delete is a mode of the responsive table and therefore cannot be used together with single selection or multiselection.

Responsive table in 'delete' mode
Responsive table in 'delete' mode

Navigate

To allow navigation from a line item, use an item with the type “navigation” (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This creates an indicator at the end of the line (“>”) and the entire line item becomes clickable. If the user clicks or taps on the line, navigate to a new page containing line item details. In rare cases, you can also use the navigation mode for category navigation, without navigating to another page.

By contrast, clicking an interactive control within a line item does not trigger the navigation event. Instead, the corresponding control handles the click event.

If no navigation is possible, set sap.m.ListType to “inactive”.

“Navigation” is a list item type and therefore cannot be used together with “edit”, or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).

Navigation indicator
Navigation indicator

Edit Line Items

To allow editing for a line item, set sap.m.ListType to “detail” within the corresponding item (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive). This will create an Edit button at the end of the line. Clicking the button triggers the edit event. Use this event to switch the corresponding line item to edit mode.

Edit is a list item type and therefore cannot be used together with “navigation” or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).

Edit button
Edit button

Click an Item

Items as a whole can be clickable. An event is fired by clicking on the item (anywhere where there is no interactive control inside the item). Apps can react on the event, for example, by opening a dialog (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive).

Active elements do not have a visual indication and can therefore not be differentiated from non-active elements.

Active is a list item type and can therefore not be used together with “navigation” or “edit”. In addition, “active” uses the whole item as a clickable area and therefore cannot be used together with a single-selection table.

Active element
Active element

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a table or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.m.ListBase, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a table. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

When opened, the context menu gets the row and column context, except for special columns (such as the selection column). Context menus can be implemented for a specific table or row.

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a table is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Responsive table with a context menu
Responsive table with a context menu

Cell Level

Showing Information

In contrast to traditional tables (such as the analytical table or the tree table), a cell can contain more than just one line of text.

Several lines of text within one cell
Several lines of text within one cell

Add Controls

Alongside textual elements, you can also add any control to a table cell, such as input fields, microcharts, buttons, and so on.

Controls inside cells
Controls inside cells
Any control can be placed inside cells
Any control can be placed inside cells

A cell can contain more than one control and more than one data point.

With the View Settings dialog, users can sort, filter, and group by each of these data points.

Several controls per cell
Several controls per cell

You can also have different controls in different rows in the same column. This could be the case if one item is locked, but another item is in edit mode, for example.

Different controls per column
Different controls per column

Guidelines

Responsiveness

While the pop-in layouts GridLarge and GridSmall make better use of screen width, they also only look good with content that is specifically designed for pop-in behavior. If you have text-only tables with only one value per column, use the Block layout (sap.m.Table, property: popinLayout).

Place the column header labels in the pop-in area above the corresponding values (sap.m.Column, property: popinDisplay, value: Block). This avoids alignment issues with different content. Be aware that the labels get top-aligned with the adjacent content.
Only place the label next to the corresponding value under the following conditions (sap.m.Column, property: popinDisplay, value: Inline):

  • The values are text-only (no input fields, icons, images, micro charts, and so on)
  • The available space is at least the double the width of size S.

This avoids truncation or “over-wrapping” of the labels and content.

If a column does not have a column header text (for example, if it always contains the same button with its own label), do not show the header text as a label in the pop-in area either (sap.m.Column, property: popinDisplay, value: withoutHeader). If you forget this setting, you will see an empty space followed by a colon (“:”).

Information
The GridSmall and GridLarge layouts are not available in all browsers. If the chosen layout is not available, it is automatically changed to Block layout.

Table Title

Implement the table title by using a title on a toolbar control.

Use a table title if the title of a responsive table is not indicated in the surrounding area. Do not use a table title if it would just repeat text that is already above the responsive table.

Use a table title if you need the table toolbar. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use a generic table title, such as Items.

The item count in the table title displays all visible items the user can reach by scrolling, even if the number of items is 0. Group headers are not counted.

If available, keep the title bar sticky (sap.m.Table, property: sticky).

If you use a table title, be sure to include one of the following:

Table title
Table title
  • An item count with the following format: Items (Number of Items). For example, Items (2). You can combine an item count with variant management.
    Do not use an item count together with “growing mode”.
Table title with item count
Table title with item count
Developer Hint
Assistive technologies (such as screen readers) use the title to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation. In addition, screen readers use the title as the label for the table.

If you don’t use a title (for example, to avoid repetition), make sure that the table is connected to another meaningful on-screen text that can be used as a label for assistive technologies. You can do this using the method addAriaLabelledBy.

Selection

If the click area for the row is being used for another purpose (such as navigation), it cannot be used for selecting the row. In this case, use the “single select left” selection mode, which offers a radio button as an additional click area for each row. To avoid confusion, make sure that the first data column does not contain radio buttons in default delivery.

In all other single selection cases, use the selection mode “single select master”.

For all single selection modes, make sure that one item is initially selected. Otherwise, the user cannot return to the initial state. A selected item can only be deselected by selecting another item.

In multiple selection mode, do not show checkboxes in the first data column in the default delivery to avoid confusion. Offer the Select All checkbox for (de)selecting all items the user can reach by scrolling.

Don't
Single selection left - Do not show radio buttons in the first column in the default delivery
Single selection left - Do not show radio buttons in the first column in the default delivery
Don't
Multiple selection - Do not show checkboxes in the first column in the default delivery
Multiple selection - Do not show checkboxes in the first column in the default delivery
Do
Use the selection mode
Use the selection mode "single select left" if clicking the row is used for something else (such as navigation)
Do
Use the selection mode
Use the selection mode "single select master" in all other single-selection cases
Developer Hint
Select All is only applied to items that have already been loaded to the front-end server. All other items are not (de)selected before they are loaded, such as items added via lazy loading with growingScrollToLoad. This conflicts with the guideline that all items the user can reach by scrolling must be (de)selected.

To process all items, listen to the selectionChange event and to its selectAll flag. This indicates whether the Select All checkbox was triggered. As soon as an action is triggered, process the items accordingly. Depending on the number of items, consider processing them in the back end.

Loading Data

To indicate that the table is currently loading items, use the busy state. (sap.m.Table, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Table in busy state while loading data
Table in busy state while loading data

Columns – Best Practices

Minimize the number of columns:

  • On a smartphone, use only one or two columns, depending on the content.
  • On a tablet or desktop, use three to five columns if the responsive table is shown within the flexible column layout. Use about eight columns if using the full screen width, depending on the content.

If the responsive table does not fit on the screen width:

  • Hide columns to reduce the width of the table.
  • Use pop-in areas to show the whole content by increasing the height of the line items (sap.m.Column, properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth).

At the smallest size, keep the following information in the table layout:

  • The column that identifies the line item.
  • The column that contains the key attribute.

If both of these do not fit on the respective screen width, keep just the column with the line item identifier in the tabular layout.

The responsive table assigns the same width to each column by default. It is recommended that you overwrite this default to provide optimal space for your content (sap.m.Column, property: width).

Optimize column width for its initial content (sap.m.Column, property: width). If the content is dynamic, optimize column width for typical content.

If you need more columns than those that fit on a tablet screen (usually five) to fulfill 80% of your main use cases, offer an option to add, remove, and rearrange columns via the table personalization dialog. Before doing so, try to reduce the number of columns, for example, by using several lines per column or by utilizing the pop-in function. See the cheat sheet for an example.

Column Headers – Best Practices

Within the column header, provide a label for each column (sap.m.Column, aggregation: header). The column header label is reused as a label in the pop-in area.

Exception: If the column does not pop in, no column header label is needed as long as at least one column still has a column header label.

Use controls that wrap, such as text (with wrapping enabled). Do not use controls that truncate, such as labels.

Keep column headers sticky.

Do
Do: wrap column headers
Do: wrap column headers
Don't
Do not: truncate column headers
Do not: truncate column headers

Column headers (sap.m.Column, aggregation: header) usually contain links or text-based controls.

Column headers can also contain other kinds of SAP Fiori controls. However, the column header cannot be aligned vertically, making it difficult to use many controls in the column header. Using other kinds of controls also creates problems with pop-in behavior and could thus lead to accessibility issues. Therefore, exercise caution when using them in a column header.

Accepted: Link as column header text (used rarely)
Accepted: Link as column header text (used rarely)
Accepted if responsiveness is taken into account: Text plus search field
Accepted if responsiveness is taken into account: Text plus search field

If a column cell contains several fields, use an umbrella term in the column header (such as Address for fields like Street, ZIP Code, and City).

For text and ID fields, use a generic label (for example, Employee for Name and ID).

If none of these are possible, separate the labels with “/” (for example, Name / Status).

For boolean values, such as checkboxes, find a descriptive text for the column header.

Content Alignment

For alignment of cell content, follow the guidelines below (sap.m.Column, properties: halgin, valign, sap.m.ColumnListItem, property: VAlign). Align the column header horizontally according to the content of the cell.

Exception: Secondary information in a column always follows the alignment of the main information.

Left-align: text, IDs, phone numbers, URLs, passwords, and email addresses.

Left-alignment of text
Left-alignment of text

Right-align: numbers and amounts, except IDs, to ensure comparability of such figures.

Right-alignment of numbers
Right-alignment of numbers

Right-align: dates and times (to ensure comparability for most formats and locales).

Right-alignment of dates
Right-alignment of dates

Left-align status information.

Left-align status information
Left-align status information

Center-align icons.

Vertical alignment:

Top-align where possible to facilitate reading the content on one line.

Do not use top-alignment if it results in a peculiar layout. This usually happens when controls that need more vertical space are combined with text-only controls, such as input fields. In this case, try center-alignment instead and fine tune it until the layout fits.

Do
Do: use top-alignment where possible
Do: use top-alignment where possible
Don't
Do not: rigidly use top alignment if it does not make sense
Do not: rigidly use top alignment if it does not make sense

Content Formatting

The responsive table provides flexibility, including multiline cells, by enabling every control to be put into a cell.

As a key identifier of an item, use an object identifier. Show the key identifier in the first column. For more information, see object display components.

If the screen width is small, do not hide this column or move it to the pop-in area.

Object identifier
Object identifier

Strings with IDs: If the responsive table contains more single-line data, show the ID in brackets after the corresponding string.

This minimizes the line height.

For items with a small line height, place the ID in brackets after the corresponding string
For items with a small line height, place the ID in brackets after the corresponding string
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link

Strings with IDs: If line height is already large, show the ID below the corresponding string. Use the object identifier to do so.

For items with a large line height, place the ID below the corresponding string
For items with a large line height, place the ID below the corresponding string
Is displayed as a link, use only the first line as the link
Is displayed as a link, use only the first line as the link

If there is more than one key identifier (for example, First Name and Last Name), display these columns first and show the values in bold text.

Several key identifiers
Several key identifiers

For status information, use semantic colors on the foreground elements.

For status information on text: If the status is actionable, add a transparent icon button next to the text.

Semantic colors on text
Semantic colors on text

Avoid truncation. Use controls that wrap the text.

For example, use text instead of a label.

Do
Do: wrap text
Do: wrap text
Don't
Do not: truncate text
Do not: truncate text

For editable content, use input fields and other interactive controls within the table cells. If you need to offer edit mode, change your text controls (labels, text, and links, to input fields or other appropriate controls) as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before.

You can do this by changing the control or, in more complex cases, by exchanging the whole responsive table.

Interactive controls – In line
Interactive controls – In line

If there is no value for a cell, leave it blank. Do not display text as N/A.

Leave empty fields blank
Leave empty fields blank

Numbering items:

  • If the item number has four digits/letters or less and is equally important as the corresponding description, concatenate the item number with the description and show it in one column.
  • If the item number has five digits/letters or more, or if it is more important than the corresponding description, for example, when no description is available, use a separate column for the item number.
  • If the item number is more like an ID in regards to its description, use ID formatting, like Description (ID).
For short numbers, add the item number to the description
For short numbers, add the item number to the description

Try not to display an empty responsive table. If there is no way around this, provide instructions on how to fill the table with data (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, properties: showNoData, noDataText).

Examples:

  • If a table is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the table with data.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    To start, set the relevant filters.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No data found. Try adjusting the filter settings.

Adapt the texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, a search is also offered, or only the search is offered).
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of filter settings).

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items.

Provide meaningful instructions
Provide meaningful instructions

Item States

To show that an item is unread, use the corresponding flag (sap.m.Table, property: showUnread, sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: unread). This shows most of the content in bold font.

An unread item
An unread item

To show that an item has been modified, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string (Modified) at the bottom of the column that identifies the line item.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error (for example, within the global edit flow), add the string (Contains errors) at the bottom of the column that identifies the line item. To do this, use an object status control with the error state (sap.m.ObjectStatus, property: state, value: sap.ui.core.ValueState.Error).

In addition, highlight the row accordingly (sap.m.ListItemBase, property: highlight).

A modified item with an error
A modified item with an error

To show that an item is locked, use a transparent button with the corresponding icon and the text Locked by [Name] at the bottom of the identifying column. The user can click or tap the button to open a quick view of the person.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in a draft state, use a transparent-style button with the text Draft at the bottom of the identifying column. The user can click or tap the button to open a popover showing the timestamp of the last change.

Item in draft state
Item in draft state

Show only one state at any one time.

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, a highlight indicator can be shown in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to show:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • A neutral highlight, such as blue to highlight newly added items.

(sap.m.ListItemBase, property: highlight)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Numbers and Units

Show the unit of measurement together with the number within the item rows.

Do not put the unit in the column header. Do not use an additional column to show the unit of measurement. This is also valid for prices.

Unit of mesaurement – In line
Unit of mesaurement – In line

For numbers with units, show the correct formatting by using the object number control.

Object number
Object number

For the most important number with its unit, show the correct formatting by using the object number control and the emphasized flag.
Exception: If all numbers are of equal importance, emphasize none of them.

If the screen width is small, do not hide this column or move it to the pop-in area.
Exception: If the column containing the object identifier and the column containing the key attribute do not fit together on the screen, move the column containing the key attribute to the pop-in area.

Object number (emphasized)
Object number (emphasized)

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, it is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within the table, use drop targets that are between items (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between). This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Drop targets in between items
Drop targets in between items

Do not combine rearranging items and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure that there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

When combining rearranging items with grouping, be aware that moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on values in a column, the dropped item needs to take on the value of the target group for the corresponding column. If this is not wanted, do not allow users to rearrange items in grouped tables.

Example:
A table is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. If changing the value doesn’t make sense, only allow users to rearrange the items within the same group, or don’t allow rearranging at all.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing.
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing.

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar).

Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

The context menu can be triggered for the whole table or per row.

Actions

To trigger actions on multiple items, use a multiselection table (sap.m.Table, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect), and offer the corresponding actions on the table toolbar. Keep the table toolbar sticky (sap.m.Table, property: sticky).

Do not offer actions for multiple items if the table is expected to have fewer than 10 items in most cases.

To trigger actions on a single item only (sap.m.Table, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster):

  • Offer the corresponding actions in the footer toolbar if the responsive table is the only area on the screen to which actions can be applied. This has the advantage that the actions on the footer toolbar are fixed on the screen and cannot be scrolled away.
  • In other cases, show the actions on the table toolbar.
  • In rare cases, show the actions within the line item. One example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every line and thus use a lot of screen real estate, only do this for one or two actions at most. In this case, show the action trigger near the content to which it belongs. Do not add a specific column for actions. An exception to this is if the action trigger belongs to a link.
Inline actions
Inline actions
Do: Place actions near to the objects to which they belong
Do: Place actions near to the objects to which they belong

The following actions on single items must always be in-line:

Delete: Use “Delete” table mode (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This places a Delete button at the end of each row.

Delete button
Delete button

Navigation: Use the “Navigation” column list item type (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This places a Navigation indicator at the end of each row.

Use this to navigate to a new page containing line item details. In rare cases, you can also use this for navigation within the table without navigating to another page.

Navigation indicator
Navigation indicator

Edit: Use the “Detail” column list item type (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail). This places an Edit icon at the end of each row.

Edit button
Edit button

From these three actions (delete, navigation, and edit), you can combine delete and edit, or delete and navigation.

Edit and navigation cannot be combined.

To trigger actions that are independent of the selection, show the actions on the table toolbar. Examples of such actions are add, edit (in the sense of changing the whole table to edit mode), sort, filter, group (or view settings), and table personalization.

To trigger a default action on the whole line item, use the “Active” or “DetailAndActive” column list item type (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active).

Active items trigger an event when clicked, which can be handled by apps (for example, to open a dialog). Clicks on interactive controls within the item do not trigger the event, but are handled by the interactive control. Do not use this for navigation, to switch the line item to an edit state, or to delete the item.

Active can be combined with edit and delete, but not with navigation. Do not combine active with single selection.

Add Items

Place the Add button on the table toolbar. It can be displayed as an icon ( ) or text (for example, Add or Create).

In general, new items always appear as the first item of the table and contain a visual highlight at the beginning of the row.

After pressing the Add button, there are three possibilities for adding an item, which should be considered in the following priority:

  1. Add the item inline. Create an empty, editable row as the first item of the table. Show the Save button on the table toolbar. This option is recommended for simple scenarios with about ten columns.
  2. Open a dialog for larger tables with more than ten columns. Save the new item at the dialog level.
  3. Navigate to a new page. This behavior should only be used for very complex scenarios (for example, when a dialog cannot handle the amount of content anymore). After pressing the Save button in the footer toolbar on the create page, navigate back to the table.

There are three different states of a new item:

  1. New: The item was just created and is in edit mode. It is highlighted with a visual indicator.
  2. Recent: The item was saved, but is still highlighted and displayed as the first item of the table. Current filter, sort and group criteria are ignored since the item should remain visible.
  3. As soon as the responsive table is sorted, filtered, or grouped again, the new item is handled accordingly and looses the visual highlight, but not before.

In the context of the draft handling new items are not saved on table level, but rather with the entire draft.

Add button in table toolbar
Add button in table toolbar
New item as first row in edit mode
New item as first row in edit mode
Saved new item still with highlight and as first item
Saved new item still with highlight and as first item

Editable Content

For editable content, use input fields and any other interactive controls within the table cells that meet your input needs.

All SAPUI5 controls can be used.

If you need edit mode, change your text controls, such as label, text, and link, to input fields, or other appropriate controls as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before.

You can do this by exchanging the control or, in more complex cases, by exchanging the entire responsive table.

For mass editing items:

  • Provide multiselection (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).
  • Provide an Edit button.
  • If several items are selected, choosing the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

For details, see mass editing.

View Settings: Sort, Filter, and Group

Sort, filter, and/or group settings are handled in the view settings dialog. This dialog can provide any combination of these three settings, including just one setting, such as sort only.

  • If sorting, filtering, and/or grouping are a common use case in your app, offer one, two, or all three of the corresponding features in one or more view settings dialogs. Note: Do not offer these features if the table is expected to have only a small number of entries (up to 20 in most cases).
  • If filtering is a main use case, do not offer filtering in the view settings dialog. Use the filter bar instead.

To trigger the view settings dialog, provide several buttons, one for each of these view settings. Each button opens a view settings dialog that contains only the relevant page.

You should always use only the view settings you really need. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case well.

Using the view settings dialog allows you to define several sort, filter, and/or group settings per column. Therefore, you can sort, filter, and/or group a column with several data points independently by each data point.

Several triggers for the different view settings (sort, filter, group)
Several triggers for the different view settings (sort, filter, group)

Sort

For the default sort settings, sort by the column that identifies the row, which is usually the first column in default delivery. From this column, use the primary data point.

If you offer sorting, offer it for each data point. In other words, allow sorting by both the primary and secondary information in a column. Allow sorting in both directions, ascending and descending. The descending sort order must always be the exact reverse of the ascending sort order.

For each data point, provide a meaningful sort order. For example:

  • Sort text alphabetically
  • Sort numbers by their value
  • Sort status information by the severity of the status:
    • Ascending: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last.
    • Descending: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first.
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted ascending, with neutral status last
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
Object status sorted descending, with neutral status first
    • Ascending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from positive to negative, with neutral last. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
    • Descending with different values per severity level: Sort status information from negative to positive, with neutral first. Sort different values within a severity level (semantic color) alphabetically.
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted ascending and alphabetically, from positive to negative with neutral last
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first
Object status sorted descending and alphabetically, from negative to positive with neutral first

Filter

To display the current filter state, use the info bar below the table title. Clicking or tapping the info bar opens the view settings dialog on the filter page.

Show the info bar only if the filter settings are not shown somewhere else. For example, do not show the info bar for settings taken in the filter bar or in a select placed in the table toolbar.

If the info bar is shown, provide an option to reset all corresponding filters on the info bar.

Keep the info bar sticky (sap.m.Table, property: sticky).

Developer Hint
To display the current filter settings on the info bar, consider using the list formatter (sap.ui.core.format.ListFormat).
Filtered table
Filtered table

Group

To display the current group state, group headers are shown.

On the group header, show the following text (sap.m.GroupHeaderListItem, property: title):

[Label of the grouped column]: [Grouping Value]

Do not use several values on the group header.

Grouped table
Grouped table

If there is no grouping value, show the following text:
[Label of the grouped column]: (Not Available)

This is the case if you have a group of items that don’t have a value for the grouped column.

Grouped table, with missing grouping value
Grouped table, with missing grouping value

Persist the view settings. When a user reopens the app, show the responsive table with the same sort, filter, and group settings as last defined by this user.

Personalization

To add, remove, or rearrange columns, use the table personalization dialog. Trigger the dialog via a button in the table toolbar.

Offer personalization if you need more columns than those that fit on a tablet screen, which is usually five, to fulfill 80% of your main use cases. Before doing so, try to reduce the number of columns, for example, by using several lines per column or by utilizing the pop-in function. See the cheat sheet for an example.

View settings and table personalization icons
View settings and table personalization icons

Persist the column layout settings. When a user reopens the app, show the responsive table with the same column layout as last defined by this user.

Tables in Object Pages

To show a table in the object page content area, use the responsive table.

A responsive table with up to 20 expected items can be displayed right away, without lazy loading.
If you expect the table to have more than 20 items, use one of the following 3 options:

  1. Lazy loading (More button): Use this option if you expect to have up to 100 items.
  2. Tab navigation: If you expect to have more than 50 to 100 items, but less than 400, use the object page with tab navigation instead of anchor navigation. Put the table on a dedicated tab.
  3. Navigation to a list report: If you expect the table to have more than 400 items, or if the tab approach is unsuitable, restrict the number of items in the table itself to a reasonable amount. To provide the user with a way to work with the entire table, offer navigation to a separate list report containing the full table.

For all of the three options mentioned above, we recommend providing a search, and if feasible, sort and filter capabilities for the table in the object page. Grouping should be avoided.

For more information on the use of tables within the object page, see the Tables section of the Object Page article.

Export to Spreadsheet

On the table toolbar, apps can provide a button for exporting table data to a spreadsheet. For the export, use the export to spreadsheet function.

'Export to Spreadsheet' button
'Export to Spreadsheet' button

Properties

sap.m.Table

The following additional properties are available for the responsive table:

  • The property: fixedLayout defines the algorithm the control uses to define column width. Setting it to “false” would perform automatic calculations for the column width, based on the longest non-breakable content. You should always set it to “true” for performance reasons. Exceptions are permissible if the table has only a few columns on a large screen width and fewer than 10 rows are displayed.
  • The property: backgroundDesign defines the background on which items are rendered. Use the default value.
  • The property: showOverlay provides an overlay on the whole table, which prevents use of the responsive table. This is used within the list report floorplan to mark the table as outdated after filter settings have been changed but the new filter settings have not yet been applied. Do not use it in other cases.
  • The property: insert adds a margin on all sides of the responsive table.
  • The property: headerText is a simple way to set the table title if you just need a title. However, do not use any of the following:
    • A separate toolbar
    • variantManagement
    • headerToolbar aggregation
  • The property: headerDesign affects the appearance of the header if the theme supports it. Leave the default value as it is.
  • The property: footerText adds a small additional row below the table footer or last item. This row can contain text only. Do not use this property.
  • The property: width defines the width of the whole table.
  • The property: includeItemInSelection uses a click on the whole line item to select the corresponding item if the responsive table is in a selection mode. This competes with other settings like “Navigation” or “Active” and should therefore not be used.
  • The property: enableBusyIndicator automatically shows a busy indicator while data is loaded. (In contrast to the property: busy, where the application can control when the table is set to busy state)
  • The property: modeAnimationOn does not have any effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: showSeparators allows you to show all, none, or some separators. The default setting, which is to show all separators, is to be used.
  • The property: swipeDirection allows you to define the direction in which to swipe if additional actions are hidden behind a table row. This works only on touch devices. Do not use this property.
  • The property: rememberSelections leaves items selected even if they are not currently visible, for example, through filtering. If this behavior is not wanted, set the flag to “false”, but you should do so only in exceptional cases.
  • The property: busy sets the table to a busy state. While in busy state, the whole table cannot be used and items cannot be read due to an overlay.
  • The property: busyIndicatorDelay defines the time after which a busy state is shown after the responsive table has been set to this state. Use the default value.
  • The property: visible shows the table (“true”) or hides it (“false”).
  • The property: tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: alternateRowColors displays the rows with alternating background colors (“banded rows”). Do not use it.

sap.m.Column

The following additional properties are available for sap.m.Column:

  • The property: width defines the width of the column in all units allowed by HTML, such as em, rem, %, and px.
  • The property: styleClass is used if you need to change the visual design of a column. Do not use this, but use the default style instead.
  • The property: visible shows or hides the column.
  • The property: tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.

sap.m.ColumnListItem

The following additional properties are available for sap.m.ColumnListItem:

  • The property: selected allows an item to be selected programmatically.
  • The property: counter does not have any effect. Do not use it.
  • Do not use the property: busy.
  • Do not use the property: busyIndicatorDelay.
  • The property: visible shows or hides the item.
  • The property: tooltip adds a tooltip to a whole row. The tooltip is only shown on mouse interaction. It will not work on tablets or smartphones. Do not use it.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Mask Input

The mask input control (sap.m.MaskInput) governs what a user is permitted to enter in an input field. It allows users to easily enter data in a certain format and in a fixed-width input (such as a date, time, phone number, credit card number, currency, and IP address).

Usage

Use mask input if:

  • You have to govern what a user is allowed to enter in an input field.
  • You have to enter data easily in a certain format and in a fixed-width input.
  • You have to enter input such as a date, time, phone number,  serial number, ISBN, or product activation key.

Do not use mask input if:

  • The mask prevents users from entering essential data.
  • The users need to enter data in a format other than the one used by the mask (for example, if users have to enter a phone number with a format for a different region).
Possible uses - may require additional coding
Possible uses - may require additional coding
Possible uses - may require additional coding
Possible uses - may require additional coding

Responsiveness

Mask input extends the input control (sap.m.Input) and has all the normal properties of an input field.

Components

The mask input control has a fixed length format to which the user’s input must conform. This can be particularly useful when the user needs to enter text or numbers with specific formatting, such as a phone number, postal code, or credit card number.

Mask input or a placeholder text are not substitutes for the input label. Using a label is mandatory. Placeholder texts in an input field are optional. Note that if there is no placeholder text, the input field will initially look empty. The mask formatting is revealed as soon as the focus is on the field.

Example of mask input
Example of mask input

Immutable Characters

When defining the mask format, the developer can place immutable characters, such as brackets and dashes, in specific positions. The format also specifies the range of valid characters for each separate position, thus preventing the user from entering invalid input.

For example, when the user enters a phone number, the area code in brackets and the space between the numbers are already present.

Note that the sap.m.MaskInput control extends sap.m.Input and has all the normal properties of an input field.

When creating a new mask, the developer can change the configuration of some default properties. For example, the default placeholder symbol “_” can be changed to something else.

Behavior and Interaction (incl. Gestures)

Entering Text

  • Mask string appears in the input field on focus.
  • The default placeholder symbol is “_” and can be changed to something else.

Copying and Pasting

Copying to a mask input field:

Users can copy both formatted and unformatted strings into a mask input field. When the texts are pasted, they take on the format defined for the mask input field.

Example: Mask input field for a number with the format:  (000) 000 000000

Copied source string Value in mask input field after pasting
(555) 333 123456 (555) 333 123456
555-333-123456 (555) 333 123456
555 (333) 12 34 56 (555) 333 123456

Copying from a mask input field:

If you copy a string from a mask input field and paste it elsewhere, the format of the mask input field is copied as well.

Information
For information on how to manage leading and treading whitespace (blanks) when copying and pasting text into input controls, please see removing leading and trailing whitespace.

Deleting Content

  • Select the entire string and delete it. The placeholders will reappear.
  • Deleting a character from the string leaves the input information unchanged, except for the deleted character, which is replaced by a placeholder. (The mask does not shift if a character is deleted.)
Deleting one/all characters in mask input
Deleting one/all characters in mask input

Guidelines

Validation Rules

Another option is to define new validation rules, such as allowing lowercase characters from “a” to “e” only. This is particularly flexible because these rules are defined with regular expression syntax.

The mask comes with two predefined validation rules: one for all characters in the English alphabet, and one for the numbers from zero to ten.

Therefore, when the mask format is being defined, the alphabetic rule is represented by the letter “a”, and the numeric rule by the number “9”. For example, a numeric mask format with a length of five characters would be specified as “99999”, a mask that accepts only alphabetical characters would be specified as “aaaaa”, and a mixed mask could be “aaa99”. In the mixed mask example, the user would not be able to enter numeric characters anywhere other than in the last two positions.

When you create the MaskInput instance, you can specify the following settings:

  • Mask: The format specification, such as (123) 999-999.
  • PlaceholderSymbol: A single character used to represent empty positions in a mask value, such as _ _ _ _ _.
  • Rules: A collection of sap.m.MaskInputRule instances.

Properties

Mask string

The mask is defined by its character type (or by its length, as applicable). You should consider the following important facts:

  1. The mask characters normally correspond to an existing rule (one rule per unique character). Characters that do not are considered immutable characters. For example, the mask ‘2099’, where ‘9’ corresponds to a rule for digits, has ‘2’ and ‘0’ as immutable characters.
  2. Adding a rule that corresponds to the symbol placeholder is not recommended and would lead to unpredictable behavior.

Placeholder symbol string  “_”

This defines a placeholder symbol. It is shown in a position where there has not yet been any user input.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Value Help Dialog

The value help dialog is a UI pattern that helps the user find and select single and multiple values. The user can also define and select multiple ranges. The value help dialog is generally called from an input field or a multi-input field by clicking the selection icon (value help icon) of the input field.

Usage

Use the value help dialog if:

  • The user needs to use different attributes (such as city, company name, and so on) to find an object.
  • The user is searching within a dataset containing more than 200 items.
  • The user needs to define and select ranges and exclusions.

Do not use the value help dialog if:

  • The user only needs a few items to filter the data set. Always start with the least complex control (for example, use select instead of value help if the user needs to select only one item from a short list).

Responsiveness

The behavior of the value help dialog on a phone differs from its behavior on a tablet or desktop device. Both the navigation and the positioning of the selection area differ depending on the device.

Value help dialog - Size S
Value help dialog - Size S
Value help dialog - Size M
Value help dialog - Size M
Value help dialog - Size L
Value help dialog - Size L

Components

The value help dialog contains the following components:

1) Header bar
2) Icon tab bar / list control (phone)
3) Search template (optional)
4) Basic search
5) Advanced search
6) Result list
7) Items row (selected items, excluded items)
8) Footer toolbar
9) Include/exclude areas for range selection

Header Bar (1)

The header bar contains the dialog title. For guidelines on the dialog title, see the Guidelines section of this article.

Icon Tab Bar on Tablet/Desktop and List Control on Phone (2)

Depending on the device, the following controls are used to display the content of the value help dialog:

  • Smartphones: The start dialog provides a list (sap.m.List) with the standard list items (sap.m.StandardListItemSelect from List and
    Define Conditions to navigate between the different dialogs.
  • Tablet and desktop devices: The value help dialog contains an icon tab bar (sap.m.IconTabBar) to navigate between the Select from List and the Define Conditions tab.

Search Template (3)

Search templates allow the user to display different or additional fields in the advanced search field and the results list. Depending on the use case, the user can switch between the different search templates in order to use different fields when searching. For example, the search template “Customer (by company code)” displays the additional field “Company code” in the advanced search and result list.

Basic Search (4)

The basic search finds all results that are somehow related to the input. For example, the search term “A” returns all the results containing the letter “A”.

Always offer the basic search in the value help dialog. Position the basic search to the right of the search template control. If there is no search template control, left-align the basic search.

Advanced Search (5)

The advanced search offers a search field for each column in the result list.

Value help dialog - Advanced search
Value help dialog - Advanced search

For implementation of the basic and advanced search, the filter bar (sap.ui.comp.filterbar.FilterBar) is used in advanced mode. Advanced mode differs from basic mode in the following ways:

  • There is no Filters link or a dialog to make additional filter fields visible. All filter fields/advanced search fields are added automatically to the advanced search area.
  • There is a toggle link to show and hide the advanced search.
  • On desktops, the advanced search should be expanded by default.
  • On tablets, the advanced search should be collapsed by default.
  • In each of the filter fields, users can use operators like “between” or “lower than” to define ranges.

Note that the value help icon of the business object ID field and description field for the business object that opened the current value help dialog will open only the Define Conditions screen. The entire value help dialog is not shown in order to prevent endless loops. For example, the value help icon of the customer ID or description field in a Select: Customer value help dialog will navigate directly to the Define Conditions screen.

How the Advanced Search Works

The user can include operators (such as “=“) to define the ranges directly within the field without moving to the fields of the Define Conditions tab.

The user must type the following to get results:

Operator Input Notation Example
between valuevalue 000100
equal to =value =0001
contains *value* *1*
starts with value* 001*
ends with *value *5
less than <value <100
less than or equal to <=value <=200
greater than >value >0300
greater than or equal to >=value >=0500
not equal to* !(=value) !(=0)

* Note that there isn’t an explicit “not equal to” operator. Instead, you need to use “Exclude” (!) in conjunction with the “equal to” operator (=).

Advanced search using operator
Advanced search using operator

Result List (6)

  • You can prefill the result list of the value help dialog by default.
  • If you transferred values from the input field to the basic search field of the value help dialog, the results are filtered accordingly.
  • If available, display the ID and description of the business object in the first and second columns. Display additional information in the next columns.
  • We recommend a maximum of five columns in the results list.

Selected/Excluded Items Row (7)

The row for Selected Items / Excluded Items is displayed in the panel container (see panel for more information). Each item or range that is selected or excluded is displayed as a token in the selected or excluded item row.

  • On desktops, the selection area with the selected and excluded items row is initially expanded.
  • On tablets and phones, the selection area with the selected and excluded item row is initially collapsed.

Footer Toolbar (8)

The footer bar offers the OK and Cancel buttons.

Include/Exclude Areas for Range Selection (9)

In the Include and Exclude areas of the Define Conditions tab, you can define single and multiple ranges with the following operators:

  • equal to
  • between
  • less than
  • less than or equal to
  • greater than
  • greater than or equal to

Each range is displayed as a token in the selected or excluded item row.

Developer Hint
For information on how to manage whitespace characters (blanks) when users copy and paste text into input controls, see Removing Leading and Trailing Whitespace.

Behavior and Interaction

Basic and Advanced Search

  • The basic search (mandatory) and advanced search (optional) are triggered by clicking or tapping the Go button. The search results are shown in the result list.
  • If the input field where the user is coming from contains data, this data is transferred to the basic search of the value help dialog and the results are then filtered accordingly.
  • The basic search performs a search across all fields that are displayed in the advanced search and the result list.

Item and Range Selection

Depending on your use case, the value help dialog can offer different selection options:

  • Select a single item
  • Select a single range
  • Select multiple items
  • Select/exclude multiple ranges

Users open the value help dialog by clicking or tapping the value help icon of the input field. The next steps depend on the use case and form factor (smartphone or desktop/tablet).

The different use cases are described in the sections below.

Select a Single Item (Smartphone)

Tapping the value help icon opens the Select from List tab. As soon as an item is selected, the value help dialog closes automatically.

Single item selection on a smartphone
Single item selection on a smartphone

Select a Single Item (Desktop/Tablet)

Clicking the value help icon opens the Select: <Object> screen (for example, Select: Company). The icon tab bar and the Selected Items / Excluded Items row are hidden. As soon as an item is selected, the value help dialog closes automatically.

Single item selection on a desktop/tablet device
Single item selection on a desktop/tablet device

Select a Single Range (Smartphone)

Tapping the value help icon opens the Define Condition tab.

Single range selection on a smartphone
Single range selection on a smartphone

Select a Single Range (Desktop/Tablet)

Clicking the value help icon opens the Define Condition: <Object> tab (for example, Define Condition: Company).

The icon tab bar and the Selected Items / Excluded Items row are hidden. The Add and Delete icons for adding and deleting ranges are also hidden.

Single range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Single range selection on a desktop/tablet device

Select Multiple Items | Select/Exclude Multiple Ranges (Smartphone)

Tapping the value help icon displays the start dialog.

  • The Select from List tab is used to select multiple items
  • The Define Conditions tab is used to select and exclude ranges.

Both are added as tokens to the Selected Items / Excluded Items row at the bottom of the start dialog.

Start dialog for multi-item and multi-range selection on a smartphone
Start dialog for multi-item and multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-item selection on a smartphone
Multi-item selection on a smartphone
Advanced search on a smartphone
Advanced search on a smartphone

Select Multiple Items | Select/Exclude Multiple Ranges (Desktop/Tablet)

Clicking the value help icon displays the icon tab bar with the Select from List and Define Conditions tabs.

  • The Select from List tab is used to select multiple items
  • The Define Conditions tab is used to select and exclude ranges.

Both are added as tokens to the Selected Items / Excluded Items row at the bottom of the screen.

Multi-item and multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Multi-item and multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Multi-item and multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Multi-item and multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device

Select/Exclude Multiple Ranges (Smartphone)

Tapping the value help icon opens the start dialog with the Define Conditions tab.

The selected values are added as tokens to the Selected Items / Excluded Items row at the bottom of the start dialog.

Start dialog for multi-range selection on a smartphone
Start dialog for multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-range selection on a smartphone
Multi-range selection on a smartphone

Select/Exclude Multiple Ranges (Desktop/Tablet)

Clicking the value help icon opens the Define Conditions: <Object> tab (for example, Define Conditions: Company). The icon tab bar is hidden and the Selected Items / Excluded Items row is displayed.

Multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device
Multi-range selection on a desktop/tablet device

Selected Items / Excluded Items

  • Each item that is selected from the result list on the Select from List tab is displayed as a token in the Selected Items row.
  • Each range that is selected or excluded on the Define Conditions tab is displayed as a token in the Selected Items / Excluded Items row.

Copying and Pasting Multiple Values

The Include and Exclude areas on the Define Conditions tab allow the user to enter multiple values at once (copied from the clipboard) .

In both areas, users can paste more than one value into the value input field. In this case, the condition row repeats with the previously selected condition and shows one value per row.

If there are more than 10 rows of conditions in either the Include or Exclude area, pagination is added to top of the respective area. A token appears next to each pasted value on the Selected Items / Excluded Items row at the bottom of the value help dialog.

Copying and pasting multiple values
Copying and pasting multiple values
Copying and pasting multiple values
Copying and pasting multiple values

Guidelines

Dialog Title

The dialog title differs depending on the device and whether multiple or single selection is used.

For smartphones:

  • Starting dialog: <Object> (for example, Company)
  • Select from list dialog: Select from List
  • Advanced search dialog: Advanced Search
  • Single range selection: Define Condition
  • Multiple range selection: Define Conditions

For tablet and desktop devices:

  • Multiple items combined with selection of multiple ranges: <Object> (for example, Company)
  • Single item selection: Select: <Object> (for example, Select: Company)
  • Single range selection: Define Condition: <Object> (for example, Define Condition: Company)
  • Multiple range selection: Define Conditions: <Object> (for example, Define Conditions: Company)

Advanced Search

If necessary, also provide value help for fields offered in the advanced search. However, do not provide the full value help dialog for the ID and description fields of the business object that is being selected. For these two fields, make sure that the value help icon opens only the Define Conditions screen (range selection).

For example, in a value help dialog for selecting the customer, do not offer full value help for the Customer ID and Customer Name fields. Instead, try to use the value help in combination with a helpful suggestion.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

 

Message View

Containing features from the message popover control, the message view control gives you the flexibility to display multiple messages within SAP Fiori.

While message view can be embedded within multiple controls, we recommend that you use it only within a responsive popover or a dialog.

Message view
Message view

Usage

Use the message view if:

  • You want to display messages without using the message popover.
  • You want to display multiple messages.
  • You want to display multiple transient messages within a disruptive dialog.

Do not use the message view if:

Responsiveness

Size S (Smartphone)

The responsiveness of the message view is determined by the container in which it is embedded.

To display messages as popovers on desktop devices, or in full-screen mode on smartphones, we recommend that you use sap.m.ResponsivePopover as a container.

Layout

Filtering

Multiple Message types – Filtering by Message Severity

If different types of message are available, users can filter messages by type (error, warning, success, and information) using the segmented buttons at the top of the message view.

Messages of different types can be filtered using the segmented buttons at the top of the control.
Messages of different types can be filtered using the segmented buttons at the top of the control.

One Message Type Only – Filtering Hidden

If there is only one type of message (for example, only errors), the filter bar is hidden.

The filter bar is hidden if all messages are of the same type.
The filter bar is hidden if all messages are of the same type.

List

Short Description

The short description comprises a simple and helpful text.

Subtitle

The subtitle comprises a description that helps users to identify the object they are looking for.

Navigation to Second Page

If there is a long text, the message popover automatically provides a “chevron” on the right side so that the user is able to navigate to the second page of the message view, where he or she can read the long text of the message.

Message view list items
Message view list items

Aggregating Messages

If desired, the app development team can aggregate messages by filling out the counter property of each list item. Note that the app team must implement this aggregation on their own as the message popover only provides the counter property.

Message view list aggregation
Message view list aggregation

Detail Page of Message View

Users can filter messages by type (error, warning, success and information) using the segmented buttons on top of the message view.

Message view detail page
Message view detail page

Behavior and Interaction

Navigation to the Second Page of the Message View

If the backend contains a long text, the user can click on the arrow/chevron on the right-hand side to view the full text in the second page of the message view.

Navigation to second page of the message view
Navigation to second page of the message view

Message View Within a Dialog

Handling of Transient Messages

The message view also handles transient messages and is available within a dialog. Possessing the same interaction patterns as the message popover, this control helps the app development team to display messages more easily and consistently.

Transient message handling with the message view
Transient message handling with the message view

Life Cycle

We recommend that messages no longer be displayed after the user closes the dialog (sap.m.MessageBox/sap.m.Dialog).

Message View within a Responsive Popover

Handling Application-Specific Messages

The message view can be embedded in a responsive popover (sap.m.ResponsivePopover), for example, if you want to display multiple messages by clicking a button.

Due to the full screen behavior on smartphones (size S), we recommend that you use the responsive popover as a container.

Message view inside the sap.m.ResponsivePopover
Message view inside the sap.m.ResponsivePopover

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Planning Calendar

The planning calendar allows users to see different appointments at the same time and to create new appointments. It allows the user to display appointments for several objects, such as a team calendar, and compare them to each other.

Usage

Use the planning calendar if:

  • You want to compare objects of the same type with each other over a period of time.
  • You require responsive behavior.
  • You have less than 100 lines in the calendar.

Do not use the planning calendar if:

  • You want to show a calendar for one object and a detailed overview of appointments over a long time interval.
  • You want to show a complex or graphical representation. In this case, please use the Gantt chart.
  • You have more than 100 lines in the calendar. In this case, please use the Gantt chart.

Responsiveness

In size S, the control provides pop-in behavior, which allows the user to see as many appointments as possible and to connect them with the corresponding object. If the toolbar contains too many actions for the space available, the overflow icon appears.

The interval section displaying the hours, days, and months is responsive and shows 12 values in size L, 8 values in size M, and 6 values in size S. You can override this behavior, but you should then check that the responsiveness is still working.

Planning calendar - Size L
Planning calendar - Size L
Planning calendar - Size M
Planning calendar - Size M
Planning calendar - Size S
Planning calendar - Size S

Types

You can define what size of interval the calendar should show, and whether multi selection should be possible. Additionally, the row header and the interval appointments are optional.

The control allows multi-select mode to be shown for the list items. This can be used, for example, to delete multiple objects from the view.

An app development team must decide whether to show the planning calendar with or without multi-select mode, or whether users should be able to switch between the two modes. Hiding the interval appointments of every object is optional.

The example opposite shows what the interaction looks like if the user can trigger multi-select mode. When the user clicks or taps the button, a checkbox appears next to each list item and a Select All option is shown. Additional actions can appear or disappear in the calendar toolbar.

The planning calendar can also be used without a row header. In this case, the row header disappears and only the appointments are visible. It can be used to show the calendar of one object. Note that the control was built mainly to compare time slots of different objects. For this reason, the time axis is shown horizontally and, depending on the interval, the appointments might shrink to smaller size. In this case, the text is cut off rather than truncated.

Components

This section describes the various components of the planning calendar.

Parts of the planning calendar
Parts of the planning calendar

The control consists of different parts:

  1. Toolbar
  2. Header
  3. Calendar view
  4. List item
  5. Row header
  6. Row
  7. Appointment
  8. Interval appointment

1. Toolbar

The toolbar is optional and can contain a title as well as app-specific and generic actions.
If you have actions in the toolbar, we recommend that you use a title to describe the purpose of the planning calendar. For more information, check out the toolbar guideline article.

The generic actions are as follows:

  • Search
  • Add Appointment (icon: add)
  • Add New Contact (icon: add-contact)
  • Multi-Select Mode (icon: multi-select)
  • Legend (icon: legend)
  • Settings (icon: action-settings)
  • Full Screen (icon: full-screen/exit-full-screen)

2. Header

The calendar header comprises the left part, which includes an optional switch to see the calendar in a different view (day, month, year), and the right part, which contains the calendar view.

3. Calendar view

The calendar view defines the granularity of the appointments. You can decide what kind of views (Hours, Days, Months, 1 Week, 1 Month) are available by using the view switch, and how many values are shown for each view. There is a default value for the number of values shown. App developers can change this value, but they should then ensure that the app is still responsive.

The 1 Week view always renders a full week. It displays seven days on one screen. The start date is always the beginning of the week  (depending on the locale). It can be found in the view switch as a default view. When applications have this view available, we strongly recommend setting a different number of days displayed in the Days view (more or less than seven). Otherwise, the user might be confused, as the navigation for the two differs.

The 1 Month view shows an entire month. On desktop, the 1 Month view always displays an interval of 31 days. When the displayed month is shorter (28, 29, 30 days), days from the following month are displayed. They have a different visual state and serve as navigation to the following month.

On size M and Size S, the 1 Month view is adaptive. It consists of a calendar and a list of appointments for the selected day.

1-month view - Size S
1-month view - Size S

4. List item

The list item contains the row header, row, appointments, and interval appointments. Each row can show different working and non-working days. This is useful if users want to view calendars from different countries that have different weekends.

5. Row header

This identifies the object for which the appointments are shown. The row header pops in if there is not enough space. It can contain a picture or icon, a title, and a subtitle.

6. Row

All appointments that appear for an object are shown here.

App developers can turn the alternating row coloring on or off. By default, the alternating rows option is turned on.

7. Appointment

Appointments display an icon or picture, a title, and a subtitle. Appointments taking place simultaneously are shown one above the other. There are two appointment sizes – regular and half size. While half-sized appointments save space, they do not show a second line with appointment details.

App developers can define the colors of different appointment types, and appointments can be shown as tentative. Appointments are fully colored.

The control can register the click event, but the app development team must define what happens next.

In Months view, appointments within the same calendar week are combined to save space. The combined appointment shows the number of appointments in the same week. If an appointment takes place between two calendar weeks (for example, from Sunday to Monday), it is not included in the combined appointments for either calendar week.

You can show the list of the appointments in a combined appointment in a popover. However, this must be implemented by the app team. The control only provides the click event.

The app developer can disable combined appointments by setting the property GroupAppointmentsMode to Expanded.

8. Interval appointment

Each row can also have interval appointments, which are smaller and always appear at the top of the row. Interval appointments can be used to show appointments that last for a prolonged period of time, such as vacations or workshops.

The app developer can choose to hide the space reserved for interval appointments if no such appointments exist for that time period.

Planning Calendar Legend

To show the types for days and appointments, the planning calendar uses a specific legend control (sap.m.PlanningCalendarLegend).

Users open the planning calendar legend using a standard legend button in the toolbar ( ). Like all other actions in the toolbar, the app developer must add the legend button explicitly.

The app team also needs to decide which container to use for the planning calendar legend. We recommend placing the legend in a popover to keep the context. You can also use a dialog, or, if there is sufficient screen real estate, show the legend as dynamic side content.

The planning calendar legend has two non-collapsible sections containing legend elements. By default, these are called Calendar and Appointments. The app developer can configure the section names using the itemsHeader and appointmentItemsHeader properties. If no elements are available for a section, it is not displayed.

The Calendar section contains standard legend items: Today, Working Day, Non-Working Day, and Selected (only in the 1-month view on mobile). The app team must ensure that the Selected element is added to the planning calendar legend when the planning calendar is viewed in 1-month mode in a smartphone size. This is not provided by the control. If any of the standard legend items are not needed, you can switch them off (property: standardItems).

You can also apply colors for special days in the Calendar section. The planning calendar legend does not automatically use the colors defined for special days in the planning calendar – this must be done by the app team.

The Appointments section contains the color values for the available appointment types. The app developer has to define explicitly which color represents which type. The planning calendar legend does not take the color automatically from the planning calendar.

If combined appointments in the calendar are of the same type (in Months view), they take the color of that type. Combined appointments of different types are marked gray. We also recommend adding the gray color for mixed combined appointments to the Appointments section in the legend.

Planning calendar with legend
Planning calendar with legend
Developer Hint
To prevent waiting time, app developers should load the sap.ui.unified library.

Behavior and Interaction

To create an appointment, the user must trigger an action by clicking the Add   icon in the toolbar. Clicking directly on the row also creates a new appointment.

The user can click on the appointment to see further details. The app development team must define what kind of information is then shown. For example, clicking on an appointment can trigger a popover with detailed information.

A multi-select toggle can also be provided in the toolbar. This can be used, for example, to select multiple people in order to delete them from the planning calendar.

Various tooltips can be shown, but you should not use them to show additional information because users cannot access this functionality on touch devices.

Depending on the current time interval, appointments might be smaller and the text might be cut off, rather than truncated. The user can click or tap the appointment to see the details.

1. View select

The user can change the calendar view with the select control (dropdown). For example, to get an overview of a whole year, the user selects the Months view. Which view is most useful depends on the average length of appointments and the use case.

2. Today action

The user can trigger this action to go back to the current date/moment.

3. Back and forward navigation

The arrows allow the user to navigate to the next or previous interval.

4. Picker

The user can open a date picker to select the start time for the visible interval. What is shown initially in the picker differs depending on the view.

5. Month switch

The month switch is available if the day or month view is selected. It allows the user to switch to a different month.

6. Year switch

Day, month, and year views enable the user to switch between different years.

Navigation parts
Navigation parts

Interaction Flow for Switching Days

There are two ways in which the user can switch to a different day:

  • Clicking or tapping the arrows to navigate to the next or previous interval.
  • Clicking or tapping the date opens the date picker. When the user selects a day, the picker closes and navigates the user to the selected value.

Snapping Header

The header area of the planning calendar can remain fixed on top of the screen (property: stickyHeader), which allows users to view calendars with a lot of rows without losing the context.

Header snaps to top when scrolling down
Header snaps to top when scrolling down

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop can be used to move appointments and change their start and end times (to enable Drag and Drop use property: enableAppointmentDragAndDrop). When dragged, the appointment is shown as a ghost element on the mouse cursor. Drop target areas are indicated to the user with a placeholder.

In the “Hours” view, the appointments can be moved to a specific new time, with the placeholder snapping at every 30 minutes. In the “Days” view, the appointment can be moved to a different day. The placeholder indicates the target day. On drop the appointment is moved to that day but keeps its previous start and end hour. The interaction is the same for the “Months” view. The placeholder indicates the target month and, when dropped, the appointment is moved to that month. The start and end hour and start and end day remain the same.

Combined appointments and interval appointments are not draggable.

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop

Guidelines

Switching the Row Header

To enable end users to rearrange the planning calendar by switching the row header, you can implement a flexible row header. This is not done by the control and must be implemented by the app development team.

The list items in the row header can be a value of any attribute of an appointment. The appointment attributes are part of app-specific content, so they should be specified by the app development team. The control does not provide default attributes.

Our guideline is to use the select control in the place of the calendar title. The select control will contain all the attributes that can serve as the row header. When a different attribute is selected, the calendar is rearranged accordingly. You can also add a counter after the list items to indicate how many appointments fall into a specific group.

It is also possible to have both the calendar title and select control, in which case you should have first the title and then the select.

On small screen sizes, use select instead of the calendar title. If you want to keep the calendar title, place select in the overflow menu.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Message Popover

The message popover (sap.m.MessagePopover) control can handle multiple messages within SAP Fiori. In combination with a message manager, it automatically displays messages that occur after validation points.

With the message concept, we now provide a way to centrally manage messages and show them to the user without additional work for the developer.

Message popover
Message popover

Usage

Use the message popover if:

  • You want to display multiple messages to the user.
  • You do not want to interrupt users while they are performing an action.

Responsiveness

Size S (Smartphone)

On smartphones, the message popover is automatically shown in full-screen mode.

Full screen message popover on a smartphone
Full screen message popover on a smartphone

Layout

Filtering

Initial state

Initially, the filter bar shows all the different types of messages found in the message popover.

General filter

Segmented buttons at the top of the message popover allow the user to filter the messages by type (error, warning, success and information), allowing the user to focus on the messages he or she is interested in.

Filter on top of message popover
Filter on top of message popover

List

Short description

The short message text provides a simple and helpful short message. It’s the same message as the one attached on the UI control where the issue occurred.

Subtitle

The subtitle provides the chance to give your message an identifier. We recommend that you add the label of the field where the error occurred. Based on the subtitle, the user should be able to identify the corresponding UI control on the UI (for example, the input field in a form).

Navigation to second page

In case there is a long text available, the message popover automatically provides a “chevron” on the right side so that the user is able to navigate to the second page of the message popover, where he or she can read the long text of the message.

Messaging button in full screen layout
Messaging button in full screen layout

Aggregating Messages

If the application development team wants to aggregate messages, they have the chance to fill the counter property of each list item. The app team will have to implement this aggregation on their own as the message popover just provides the counter property.

Messaging button in full screen layout
Messaging button in full screen layout

Detail Page of Message Popover

Segmented buttons at the top of the message popover allow the user to filter the messages by type (error, warning, success and information), allowing the user to focus on the messages he or she is interested in.

Messaging button in full screen layout
Messaging button in full screen layout

Messaging Button

If there are no messages to display, you do not need to show a messaging button. The toolbar then only includes the “normal” actions related to the object.

If there are messages to display, the messaging button must look like the example shown in the figure on the right.

Messaging button in toolbar
Messaging button in toolbar

How to Display the Message Popover

An overview of the different steps needed to display the message popover is provided below. For further information, see message handling.

Behavior and Interaction

When Should the Message Popover Open?

Activation actions

If the user clicks on a so-called activation action (such as Save or Submit), the message popover should open automatically to inform the user about the active errors on the UI. The message popover will provide the user with an overview of the error messages.

Form field validation

If an error occurs (for example, after validating an input field), the message button appears with the number of messages inside. The message popover does not open automatically.

Detailed view
Detailed view

Navigation to the Second Page of the Message Popover

If the message provides a long text from the backend, the user is able to navigate to a second page within the message popover. There, the user will typically find more information and helpful message text.

Navigation to second page of the message popover
Navigation to second page of the message popover

Guidelines

Messaging Overview

No messages to display

If there are no messages to display, you do not need to include a message button in the toolbar.

Highlight the fields

First, highlight the specific field(s) if possible, and change their value state according to the type of message, such as error, warning, or success messages.

Message popover

In addition to the field(s) being highlighted, a button also appears in the toolbar, displaying an icon and the number of messages that have occurred. This number matches the number of fields that have been highlighted. Whenever multiple messages occur, they should be displayed in the message popover, which can be triggered via a button on the left side of the footer toolbar.

Display single messages in a message box

There may also be messages that have to interrupt the user. At present, we are only aware of technical issues such as network errors and connection issues.

Validation Points

No guidelines are currently available regarding data validation. Several cases are possible, which depend on the users, the performance, and the data that needs to be validated. These cases include:

  • After focusing out
  • After pressing a key
  • After clicking or tapping an action, such as Save or Submit

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Progress Indicator

The progress indicator visualizes the current advancement of a process or a degree of accomplishment. The inside of the progress indicator is filled with color to indicate the state of progress. The advancement depends on the specific process. The progress is shown either using absolute numbers or the current percentage of completion together with a progress bar.

Within SAP Fiori, the progress indicator is used as a “meter” or micro chart. It indicates a current object status and is not related to any process that is currently running.

Usage

Use the progress indicator if:

  • You need to visually show a current status.
  • You need to visually strengthen a current status.
  • You need to make different states comparable to each other at a higher level.
  • You want to show custom values as well as percentages.

Do not use the progress indicator if:

  • Visual feedback is needed for an ongoing operation. Use a busy indicator instead.
  • The progress is indeterminate. Use a busy indicator instead.
  • You want to display a single value in the form of a fillable shape or a group of shapes that describe their context. Use the status indicator instead.

Responsiveness

The progress indicator itself is not responsive. It supports the cozy and compact form factors. The compact form factor is used for apps that run on a device operated by a mouse and keyboard. For more information, see Content Density (Cozy and Compact).

Progress indicator in compact mode
Progress indicator in compact mode
Progress indicator in cozy mode
Progress indicator in cozy mode

Layout

Show the current progress as a percentage value between 0% and 100%. Property: percentValue.

Progress indicator displaying 10% progress
Progress indicator displaying 10% progress
Progress indicator displaying 50% progress
Progress indicator displaying 50% progress
Progress indicator displaying 80% progress
Progress indicator displaying 80% progress

Alternatively, you can show the current progress as text in addition to the bar. In this case, the text is shown on the right of the bar if the progress is 50% or less. In all other cases, the progress is shown right-aligned on the bar itself. Property: showValue.

Textual presentation for progress of 50% or less
Textual presentation for progress of 50% or less
Textual presentation for progress of more than 50%
Textual presentation for progress of more than 50%
Progress indicator without textual representation
Progress indicator without textual representation

You also have the option of showing any application-specific text instead of a percentage. Property: displayValue.

App-specific textual representation of progress
App-specific textual representation of progress

Styles

The progress indicator can be enabled or disabled. Property: enabled.

Enabled progress indicator
Enabled progress indicator
Disabled progress indicator
Disabled progress indicator

For usage in read-only forms or read-only tables, the progress indicator provides a “display” state. This state is optimized for reading environments. The default height is lower, and the bar color darker. Property: displayOnly.

Progress indicator in display state
Progress indicator in display state

The progress indicator can visualize different value states that are represented by various theme-dependent semantic colors. The states are: normal, success, warning, and error. Property: state.

Value states can be combined with the “enabled” and “display” states.

Progress indicator in success state
Progress indicator in success state
Progress indicator in warning state
Progress indicator in warning state
Progress indicator in error state
Progress indicator in error state

Guidelines

Use the progress indicator to add clarity and weight to an important state that needs to be perceived very quickly.

Progress indicator used for status display
Progress indicator used for status display

Always provide a label for the progress indicator.

Exception: If the progress indicator is used as a single control inside a cell of a responsive table, the column header text is used as a label.

Progress indicator in a responsive table
Progress indicator in a responsive table

Use a group of up to five bars to help users compare different states at a high level. Note that in a group of more than five bars, slight differences are much harder to perceive than a numeric display.

If the user has to compare a group of values, be sure to use the same visual display for all of them (only bars or only numbers).

Group of progress indicators
Group of progress indicators

Progress indicators are typically used within (but not restricted to) the following controls:

Do not disable a progress indicator. A progress indicator is not interactive, therefore disabling it has no effect.

Exception: The progress indicator is shown inside a disabled UI area, such as a completely disabled form or panel.

Properties

The following additional properties are available for the progress indicator:

  • The property “width” defines the width of the progress indicator. The property “height” defines the height of the progress indicator. Adapt it only if the default height does not fit into the surrounding context. Do not use a height below 1.5 rems if text is shown inside the progress indicator.
  • The property “textDirection” is used for localiaztion (right-to-left languages).
  • The property “busy” sets the progress indicator to busy state.
  • The property “visible” shows or hides the progress indicator.
  • The property “tooltip” does not have an effect.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Popover

The popover displays additional information for an object in a compact way and without leaving the page. The popover can contain various UI elements such as fields, tables, images, and charts. It can also include actions in the footer.

Note: The quick view is similar to a popover, but has a predefined structure, a fixed set of UI elements, and automatic UI rendering. Check first whether the quick view is appropriate for your use case.

Usage

Use a popover if:

  • You need to define your own structure.
  • You want to show UI elements that are not available with the quick view.

Do not use a popover if:

  • The quick view is more appropriate for your use case.
  • The objects are in a master list (in this case, the details are shown in the details area).

Responsiveness

The popover can be used in the following ways:

  • Responsive and adaptive: sap.m.ResponsivePopover
    Shows a dialog on smartphones (to be closed with an X) and a popover on a tablet or desktop.
  • Non-responsive: sap.m.Popover
    Always shows a popover. Only use a non-responsive popover if it has very little content. On smartphones, the popover should not use more than a third of the phone’s real estate.

Layout

Structure of Popover

The header and footer are generally optional. The other elements are as follows:

Back (1) – optional
Needs to be implemented if the user can trigger further popovers. Always show popovers in place. Never place them on top of each other.

Title (2)
We recommend that you show an app-specific title for accessibility reasons. If you do not show a title, use the invisible text control (sap.ui.core.InvisibleText) to set a text for screen reader support.

Close function (3)
This feature closes the dialog. It is available for smartphones only and is set automatically (sap.m.ResponsivePopover).

Content (4)
Ensure that the content has a basic design and shows only the most important information. We recommend the following:

  • Use no more than two groups.
  • Limit the total number of fields to eight.
  • Use single-column tables.
  • Use micro charts.

Actions (5) – optional

Popover – General structure
Popover – General structure
Popover – Example
Popover – Example

Placement Types

The placement type defines how the popover will be positioned on the screen in relation to its trigger. The default placement is “Right”: the popover appears to the right of the object it relates to.

If you set the placement type to “Auto”, the position of the popover in relation to the reference control is determined automatically, depending on the available space.

Popover with default placement type - Right
Popover with default placement type - Right
Developer Hint
More information on the different placement types can be found here.

Modal Mode

The popover in modal mode opens in a modal window, which blocks the whole screen and attracts the user’s attention.

Use the modal mode only if you want to prompt the user to make a decision or confirm an action. Ensure that the user can close the popover, either by offering an action button in the footer or a Close button in the header.

Popover – Modal
Popover – Modal

Behavior and Interaction

Opening a Popover

The user opens a popover by clicking or tapping an object represented by a text link or an icon. To improve accessibility, we recommend using texts, such as the name or ID of an object.

Closing a Popover

The popover is closed when the user clicks or taps outside the popover or selects an action within the popover.

When the popover is open over a table, and the user clicks outside the popover to close it, this can trigger unwanted drill-down navigation to a table item. Since this interaction changes the whole screen content, you can suppress drill-down navigation on tables when popovers are open on the same screen.

Developer Hint
To control the closing behavior of the popover in this case, add a CSS style “pointer-events: none” to the area that should remain static. When the popover is closed, remove the CSS style again. Here is a sample demonstrating how this can be achieved.

Guidelines

  • Show status information as text fields in a content group. You can use semantic text colors.
  • You can define a height for the popover. If the content exceeds the height, a scroll bar is displayed.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Input Field

A text input field allows users to enter and edit text or numeric values in one line. To help users enter a valid value, you can enable the autocomplete suggestion feature and the value help option.

Usage

Use the input field if:

  • The user needs to enter a short, single-line text or number.
  • The user needs to enter a password, URL, phone number, or email address.
  • The user needs to select a single item from a large amount of data (for example, more than 200 items).
  • The user needs to find an object by searching for more than one attribute, such as an ID, city, and customer name. Use this control in combination with the autocomplete suggestion feature and value help option. For a small set of values (for example, fewer than 20 items), consider using the select control. Otherwise, use the combo box (for 20-200 items).

Do not use the input field if:

Responsiveness

In the examples below, the input field is shown in combination with the tabular autocomplete feature for different device sizes.

Size S (Smartphones)

Cozy mode:

When the user clicks or taps the input field, a new full screen dialog opens in which suggested items can be selected. Here, the pop-in feature of the responsive table is used.

Tabular autocomplete suggestion feature on a smartphone
Tabular autocomplete suggestion feature on a smartphone

Size M (Tablets)

Cozy mode:

The pop-in feature of the responsive table is used here, and defined columns are wrapped into a new line due to the limited space available.

Tabular autocomplete suggestion feature on a tablet
Tabular autocomplete suggestion feature on a tablet

Size L (Desktops)

Compact mode:

The full table is shown by the suggest feature.

Tabular autocomplete suggestion feature on a desktop
Tabular autocomplete suggestion feature on a desktop

Types

Six input types are currently supported (API). Be sure to select the correct type for your use case. Depending on the input type, a different keyboard layout is displayed on a mobile device (see some sample input types).

Note: The control does not provide validation based on the type. The app development team must carry out format validation. If binding is used, validation is carried out by the model, but the error handling still needs to be taken care of on the UI.

URL

Input type URL – Keyboard layout on a smartphone
Input type URL – Keyboard layout on a smartphone

Telephone Number

Input type telephone number – Keyboard layout on a smartphone
Input type telephone number – Keyboard layout on a smartphone

Password

Input type password – Keyboard layout on a smartphone
Input type password – Keyboard layout on a smartphone

Some types, such as number or telephone number, can be used together with mask input for better guidance.

Examples of input with different number masks
Examples of input with different number masks

Behavior and Interaction

Entering Text Using the Autocomplete Feature

Have a look at the interaction flow below:

Entering Text Using the Value Help Dialog

Have a look at the interaction flow below:

Information
For information on how to manage leading and trailing whitespace (blanks) when copying and pasting text into input controls, please see removing leading and trailing whitespace.

Styles

An input field can have four states: default, warning, error, or success.

Default
Default
Error
Error
Warning
Warning
Success
Success

Properties

Value State and Value State Message

The input control offers the four value states listed below. For the error and warning states, you can show an additional value state text when the focus is on the input field.

  1. None (default): No value state message is shown.
  2. Warning
  3. Error
  4. Success: No value state message is shown.

For more guidance on when to use which state, check out the article on message handling.

Default
Default
Warning
Warning
Error
Error
Success
Success

Required

Use this property to indicate that user input is required. Set the property for the specific input field to ensure that the asterisk is shown in front of the label.

Required input field
Required input field

Maximum Length

Use this property to set the maximum number of characters allowed. There is no limit by default.

Placeholder

The placeholder, or input prompt, is a short hint (a word or short phrase) to help the user with data entry. A hint can be a sample value or a brief description of the expected format.

Placeholder
Placeholder

Description

You can provide an additional description on the input field, for example, for units or currency. The width of the input field and description is distributed equally by default. Although the default setting is 50%, you can change this with the fieldWidth property.

Input description
Input description

Width

The width of the input field is set to 100% by default. Input fields are usually used in forms, where the width is determined by the form element or container that the input field is embedded in. Therefore, we do not recommend defining a fixed width, but rather working with proper layout containers, like the form, simple form, and responsive grid layout, and with the layout data property, where the width is defined by the 12-column approach.

Editable and Enabled States

The input field has three states (see examples of input states):

  1. Enabled: This is the default setting.
  2. Read-only: The input field is not shown; only the value is shown. This is used in display-only forms.
  3. Disabled: The input field is shown with a visual indication that an edit is not possible, for example, due to missing editing rights.
Editable and enabled input states
Editable and enabled input states

Text Alignment

The input field offers six types of alignment for text values (API):

  • Begin
  • Center
  • End
  • Initial (default): Browser-configured alignment is used
  • Left
  • Right

Value Help

To help the user find the correct value, you can enable the value help option (propertyshowValueHelp). By enabling this option, a small value help icon is displayed in the input field on the right-hand side. Once this option is enabled, the click event can be registered and one of the following displayed:

If you want to force the user to select only existing values, you can enable the value-help-only option (see an example of the value-help-only option). In this case, the user cannot enter text in the input field. Instead, the value must be selected from the list of suggestions, or chosen using the select dialog or value help dialog.

Value help option
Value help option

The values can also be pasted into the input field by copying and pasting, or dragging and dropping, if the user prefers this. In this case, the values will be automatically transformed into conditional expressions. Example: Copying values “1234” and “5678” leads to the token generation “=1234” and “=5678”. Additionally, these values will be found within the conditions tab of the value help dialog.

Autocomplete Suggestion

The input control offers three different types of autocomplete suggestions: single, two-value, and tabular. The width of the autocomplete and the input fields are set by default, but you can change these via the maxSuggestionWidth property. The position of the suggestion box depends on the space available below the control. If there is not enough space, the suggest box is shown above the control.

Single Value with Autocomplete

Displays a list of suggestions with one left-aligned value. As a base for the aggregation suggestionItemssap.ui.core.Item is used.

See live example of single-value autocomplete suggestions.

Single value autocomplete suggestion feature
Single value autocomplete suggestion feature

Two Values with Autocomplete

The two-value autocomplete suggestion feature displays two attributes of a business object, such as an ID and a name.  As a base for the aggregation suggestionItemssap.ui.core.ListItem is used.

The text property is displayed first, left-aligned, and the additionalText property is right-aligned.

See live example of two-value autocomplete suggestions.

Two-value autocomplete suggestion feature
Two-value autocomplete suggestion feature

Tabular Autocomplete

This autocomplete feature displays the values in a table layout. The width of the columns is distributed equally by default.

To use the tabular autocomplete feature, use the suggestionColumns aggregation to define the columns and the correct responsive behavior for the pop-in. For more information, see the article on the responsive table.

With the showTableSuggestionValueHelp property, you can offer a Show All Items button at the end of the suggest result list. Because the number of results in the suggest functionality is limited, this option helps the user find the relevant item via an alternative dialog:

See a live example of tabular autocomplete suggestions.

Tabular autocomplete
Tabular autocomplete

Guidelines

Always provide a meaningful label for any input field, and use the least complex control (such as select instead of value help. Use more intricate controls only if the use case really requires it. Where appropriate, help users by providing mask input or placeholder texts.

Maximum Columns

For input fields in a tabular view, we recommend using a maximum of 4 columns.

Maximum Length

Limit the length of the input field. For example, if you don’t want users to enter more than 5 characters, set the maximum length to 5. The maximum permissible character length is not defined by default. If the back-end system has a limit, ensure that you set this property accordingly.

Note that this parameter is not compatible with the input type sap.m.InputType.Number. If the input type is set to Number, the value of the maxLength property is ignored.

Placeholder

Avoid using the placeholder attribute as an alternative to a label. This is important because the placeholder text is overwritten as soon as the form is filled out. Labels are necessary to indicate the meaning of the form fields when the placeholders are no longer visible.

Description

The description field should be used, for example, for displaying units or currency. Do not use a description for help text or as a label replacement. Note that the description is not placed in a new line in size S. Therefore, only use the description property for small input fields with a short description.

Width

Editable and Enabled States

Editable

Property settings: editable = true, enabled = true

The input control is enabled and editable by default. Set the control to editable to allow the user to enter a value.

Not Editable

Property settings: editable = false, enabled = true

Use this state, for example, to display data only.

Disabled

Property settings: editable = not relevant, enabled = false

Set the control to disabled in an edit scenario to indicate that the user cannot change the control, for example, due to missing access rights or previous conditions not having been fulfilled or selected.

Text Align

Align left if:

  • Text is used. Also use left alignment for a phone number, URL, password, and email address.

Align right if:

  • Amounts and decimal numbers are used.
  • Values need to be added and compared.

Value Help

Show the value help option to help the user select the correct value (such as a customer ID) from a large dataset via the:

Use this option in combination with the autocomplete suggestion feature.

When the user clicks or taps the value help icon, the data entered into the input field must be transferred to the processing dialog so that the user does not have to enter the search term again. Likewise, data entered in the processing dialog must be transferred back to the input field.

Autocomplete Suggestion

Use the autocomplete suggestion feature to display real-time suggestions and to help the user enter information more accurately and efficiently. If you expect the suggest values to be longer than the input field itself, you can change the width via the maxSuggestionWidth property.

Single Value with Autocomplete

Use the single-value autocomplete feature if you want to search by only one attribute, such as an ID or a customer name.

Two Values with Autocomplete

Use the two-value autocomplete feature if you want to search by two attributes, such as a customer name and an ID. This ensures that the search is carried out for both attributes.

Tabular Autocomplete

If you need to display more than two attributes, use the tabular autocomplete feature. Try to keep the number of columns to a minimum, and focus on the columns that are really relevant for the use case. Define appropriate responsive behavior for sizes S and M. For more information, see responsive table.

The width of the columns is distributed equally by default. To avoid truncation, accurately estimate the primary attribute length and set a minimum width for this column.

Creating and Editing Objects

Sometimes a new object needs to be created if the user cannot find a specific item via autocomplete or value help. In this case, we recommend that you place the New action next to the input field.

If you want the user to be able to edit a selected object directly, you should place the Edit link next to the input field.

If both actions are needed, they should be toggled based on the content of the input field. If a valid object is selected, you should display Edit. If the input field is empty or the object is not valid, you should display New. This pattern can also be applied for the multi-input fieldcombo boxmulti-combo box, and select controls.

Input field – New action
Input field – New action
Input field – Edit action
Input field – Edit action

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Dynamic Side Content

Dynamic side content is a layout control that displays additional content to help the user better understand the data that’s being displayed on the screen.  It is displayed in a way that flexibly adapts to different screen sizes.

App development teams can configure the behavior of the control on smaller screen sizes by following the relevant guidelines.

Dynamic side content layout
Dynamic side content layout

Usage

Use dynamic side content if:

  • You want to display information that:
    • Will enrich the main content and will help the user better perform his/her tasks;
    • Only makes sense when displayed next to the main container (side-by-side);
    • Influences the main content (for example, a filter for list; settings for chart, details for map).
  • Users should have access to all of the key functions and critical information in the app even if they do not see the side content. This is important because on smaller screen sizes it may be difficult to display the side content in a way that is easily accessible for the user.

Do not use dynamic side content if:

  • You want to display critical information that should be visible all the time. The dynamic side content is not meant to split the page into two equally important sections.
  • You want to display navigation or drilldown. For drilldown scenarios, use the Flexible Column Layout.
  • You want to display a master-detail scenario. Instead, use the Flexible Column Layout.
Information
Currently Dynamic Side Content is not available in Fiori Elements.

Layout

Dynamic side content is displayed to the left or right of the main content container.

The dynamic side content can be closed by a button that is displayed in its toolbar.

The dynamic side content can be opened, if it set to hidden, with an action within the container to which it is directly related, or by an action displayed in the container-related toolbar, if it is available.

When the dynamic side content is displayed side-by-side to the container, it doesn’t overlay it. The main container narrows down and makes space for the additional content to be displayed.

Responsiveness

The dynamic side content control is built for different screen sizes and layouts.

The default screen layout features the side content on the left or right side of the screen, covering 25% of the screen width on a large desktop (over 1440 px).

Dynamic side content - Default layout
Dynamic side content - Default layout

On smaller screen sizes (under 1440 px), the side content occupies 33% of the screen width to accommodate the nested controls. If the side content width falls below 320 px, the side content automatically slides under the main content, unless the app development team specifies that it should disappear.

Dynamic side content - smaller screen sizes
Dynamic side content - smaller screen sizes

On screen sizes of less than or equal to 720 px, the side content automatically disappears from the screen (unless specified to stay under the content) and can be triggered from a preset trigger (specified within the app). When the side content is triggered, it replaces the main content. We recommend that you always place the trigger for the side content in the same location, such as in the container toolbar.

Equal split: A special view of the side content is the 50:50 view, which enables users to show more data, for example, for comparison purposes. The responsive behavior of the equal split is the same as in the standard view: The side content disappears on screen widths of less than 720 px and can only be viewed by triggering it.

Dynamic side content - Equal split
Dynamic side content - Equal split

The app development team may specify that the side content should slide under the main content when the screen is resized to a smaller width. Sliding the side content under the main content on smaller screens allows it to remain on the screen at all times. However, it may only be accessible via scrolling.

Navigation

The side content is always related to the main content, so it must show content that can be triggered from the main content. This also means minimizing navigation, such as drill-ins within the side content, and displaying content that is triggered from the main content area. An example would be showing additional details such as contact information or conversation history. If a different type of data relates to the main content, app developers can implement a switcher in the side content. However, we recommend that you keep the side content free of additional navigation elements.

Triggering the side content

The side content can be set to hidden by default, and it automatically disappears when the screen width is less than or equal to 720 px (except when it is set to be under the main content).The app design team can define the trigger point. Our recommendation is to put a transparent text button with a meaningful label in the container toolbar, or an action inside the container the dynamic side content is related to. Ensure that the user can understand how to trigger the side content. Please, avoid using icons, because they can confuse the user.

Hiding the side content

The side content should be hidden from the header (top) section of the side content. The side content container itself has no header. We therefore strongly recommend that you use a toolbar control with a title, a transparent button labeled Close, and a spacer between them.

Hiding side content – From the header section
Hiding side content – From the header section

Guidelines

Dynamic Side Content in Object Page

Dynamic side content can be used within the object page. Use dynamic side content within a section if you want to give the user additional data related to this section. If you want to display additional information about the object such as a timeline, include this information as a new section.

Do
Correct usage of dynamic side content in object page
Correct usage of dynamic side content in object page
Don't
Wrong usage of the dynamic side content in object page
Wrong usage of the dynamic side content in object page
Do
Correct usage of dynamic side content in object page
Correct usage of dynamic side content in object page
Don't
Wrong usage of the dynamic side content in object page
Wrong usage of the dynamic side content in object page

Do not separate the screen into two panels. Do not use it for navigation, for drilldown, or for displaying information related to the entire object.

Dynamic Side Content in List Report

Do not separate the page into two panels when you are using it inside the list report. The dynamic side content should be placed directly next to the table or the chart container.

Do
Correct usage of dynamic side content in List Report
Correct usage of dynamic side content in List Report
Don't
Wrong usage of the dynamic side content in dynamic page
Wrong usage of the dynamic side content in dynamic page

Dynamic Side Content in Dynamic Page

Do not separate the page into two panels if you use dynamic side content within the dynamic page layout. Place the dynamic side content directly next to the page container and under the header container. The header snaps manually and both sections have their own scrollbars.

Do
Correct usage of dynamic side content in dynamic page
Correct usage of dynamic side content in dynamic page
Don't
Wrong usage of the dynamic side content in dynamic page
Wrong usage of the dynamic side content in dynamic page

Examples

Dynamic side content in object page, used with map
Dynamic side content in object page, used with map
Dynamic side content in object page, used with planning calendar
Dynamic side content in object page, used with planning calendar
Dynamic side content with event list
Dynamic side content with event list

Use of Controls in the Dynamic Side Content

You can use most of the main controls in the dynamic side content, such as text, simple form, chart, list, panel, tree, timeline, or feed and notes. However, you must make sure that the control doesn’t result in the appearance of a horizontal scrollbar.

Do not use complex controls, such as tables.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

List

In SAP Fiori, we distinguish between tables and lists. Both usually contain homogeneous data, but lists generally have rather basic data, whereas the data in tables tends to be more complex. Lists are mostly used in the master list for a master-detail scenario using the flexible column layout, as well as in popovers or dialogs. For certain use cases, lists can also be used in the dynamic page layout.

Usage

Use the list if:

  • You want to display a homogeneous set of basic data.
  • You need to sort, group, or filter simple datasets.
  • You need to display a single-level hierarchy rather than using a complex tree table to support this simple use case.

Do not use the list if:

  • You want to manage complex datasets that need to be extensively sorted, grouped, filtered, or edited. In this case, use a table.
  • You work with complex hierarchies. In this case, use a tree.

Responsiveness

The list is like a layout container. You can change its width, but you must also ensure that the items contained in the list adapt whenever the list is resized.

All list item variants available in SAP Fiori already adapt to the respective screen size.

List Item Variants

The list contains various list items. These items can be of various types depending on the use case and on the content they have. SAPUI5 already provides the most common list items in SAP Fiori in the form of controls, although custom list items can also be created if necessary.

All the available list item types behave responsively and adapt to changing screen sizes out of the box. Most of them use truncation if size becomes too limited, since they are usually used to navigate to the item details. For custom list items, you can also wrap the texts, if required.

Object List Item

The object list item is the list item variant used most frequently in SAP Fiori applications. Consisting of a title, key figure, attributes, and a status, it contains the most important information about an object.

The space available for the attributes and status is limited as it should only show crucial information that allows the user to decide which items should be dealt with first.

All essential information about an object is usually provided when the user navigates to the item details.

For more information, see object list item.

Object list items
Object list items

Standard List Item

The standard list item is used for less complex entries, such as when the user selects an item in a dialog. This list item contains an optional image, a title, description, and a single info text (which can contain semantic information).

For more information, see standard list item.

Standard list items
Standard list items

Display List Item

The display list item is the simplest form of a list item and is only capable of showing a label and values. It is seldom used.

For more information, see display list item.

Display list items
Display list items

Action List Item

The action list item allows various actions to be triggered in a dialog. The action list item is not used in the content area.

For more information, see action list item.

Action list item
Action list item

Feed List Item

The feed list item is mainly used in feeds and notes.

For more information, see feed list item.

Feed with feed list items
Feed with feed list items

Input List Item

The input list item allows the user to enter data in a list item. It is seldom used in SAP Fiori apps as forms are usually the preferable method for entering data.

For more information, see input list item.

Input list item
Input list item

Components

The list control comes with the following main properties:

Header

The header text contains the title of the list. It is usually only used when the list is in the content area.

Footer

The footer text is the last entry in the list, and as such, it scrolls away with the content. Therefore, this property is also seldom used.

Lazy Loading

Like the table, the list also allows lazy loading. The “growing” list property is used for this purpose.

List with header and footer
List with header and footer

Empty List

The noDataText property is used if the list contains no entries. A generic “No Data” text is set by default, but we recommend replacing it with a more specific text.

Empty list
Empty list

Count

List items can have a count, which is located on the far right of a row. You can use the count in simple lists, such as those that contain standard list items, to indicate how many subitems the user can expect when navigating to the item.

Standard list items with counter
Standard list items with counter

Read/Unread

You can set an indicator to highlight unread items, making it easier for the user to discover them (property: showUnread = true). If you set this indicator, all texts for the unread items are shown in bold font.

By default, this indicator is switched off, and all list items are displayed in normal font.

Display list item with read and unread items
Display list item with read and unread items

Highlighting Items

To show that an item needs attention, a highlight indicator can be shown in front of the item (property: highlight). The highlight indicator can be used to show:

  • A semantic state (for example, red or orange if the item contains an error or warning)
  • A neutral state (for example, blue to highlight newly added items)
Highlighted items using semantic colors
Highlighted items using semantic colors

Behavior and Interaction

There are several ways to interact with the list and its list items:

Line Item Level

Mode

The list can have several modes. The respective property (Mode) allows the following selection methods:

  • None
  • SingleSelectMaster (used to pick one item with no additional indicator, as in the master list for a master-detail scenario with the flexible column layout)
  • SingleSelectLeft (used to pick one item using a radio button on the far left)
  • MultiSelect (used to pick several items from the list using checkboxes on the far left)
  • Delete (used to delete items from the list using a delete indicator on the far right)
Developer Hint
In multiple selection mode, users can (de)select all items using the shortcut CTRL+A. This only affects items that have already been loaded to the front-end server. All other items are not (de)selected before they are loaded (for example, items added via lazy loading with growingScrollToLoad). This conflicts with the guideline that all items the user can reach by scrolling must be (de)selected.

To process all items, listen to the selectionChange event and to its flag selectAll. This indicates whether CTRL+A was triggered. As soon as an action is triggered, process the items accordingly. Depending on the number of items, consider processing them in the back end.

List with explicit single selection
List with explicit single selection
List with multiple selection
List with multiple selection
List with delete mode
List with delete mode

Grouping

List items can be grouped. The group header is a visually separate line at the top of the items it groups. It does not currently provide an interaction of its own.

Grouped list
Grouped list

Type

The list item type defines the interaction of the list item, which is accompanied by a visual cue.

The items can be one of the following:

  • Active (click event; cursor changes to indicate that)
  • Inactive (no click event; cursor does not change)
  • Navigation (a small arrow appears on the far right, indicating that clicking would navigate)
  • Detail (a pencil appears on the far right, indicating that something can be changed. The user can only click on the pencil.)
  • Detail and active (same as “detail”, but the item itself is also clickable)

The example shows how all these types are visualized.

All list item types: inactive, detail, navigation, active, detail and active
All list item types: inactive, detail, navigation, active, detail and active

Swipe

You can provide a swipe feature (SwipeDirection) for quickly approving or deleting items without having to look at the details. It must only be provided as an additional feature, and not be the only way of performing the action.

List with swipe action
List with swipe action

Context Menu

The context menu can be triggered for the list or per item.

It gives users an alternative way of modifying the focused elements by giving access to context-specific functions.

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

List - context menu
List - context menu

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a list or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.m.ListBase, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Styles

The list items can have a header when they are used in a content area. It is also technically possible to change the background of the header and of the list itself. Depending on the use case, the lines between the list items and around the list can be shown or hidden.

The property Show Separators (All, Inner, None) allows only the outer lines (Inner) or all the lines (None) to be hidden when the list is used as a more structural element within a content area.

List without separators
List without separators

Guidelines

Text Length

When you use the list in the first column of the flexible column layout, keep the texts as short as possible and only as long as necessary. If you expect large numbers, use formatting instead.

Custom List Items

If none of the list items provided suits the requirements of your app, you can also create a custom list. If you choose this option, ensure that your custom list item is responsive when resized.

Radio Button

Only use radio buttons if they are absolutely necessary. One example would be if you want to distinguish single selection from navigation. This is a rare case in which visible radio buttons for single selection are allowed.

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar).

Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, it is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within the list, use drop targets that are between items (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between). This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Drop targets in between items
Drop targets in between items

Do not combine rearranging items and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure that there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

When combining rearranging items with grouping, be aware that moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on values, the dropped item needs to take on the corresponding value of the target group. If this is not wanted, do not allow users to rearrange items in grouped lists.

 

Example:

A list is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. If changing the value doesn’t make sense, only allow users to rearrange the items within the same group, or don’t allow rearranging at all.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Tree

Within SAP Fiori, we distinguish between tree tables and trees. Both usually allow the user to display and work with a hierarchical set of items. While tree tables are usually used for more complex data, trees are generally used for rather basic data. Trees are mostly used in the master list for a master-detail scenario using the flexible column layout and in popovers or dialogs. In certain use cases, they can also be used in the dynamic page layout.

In the case of tree tables and trees, items that contain additional items are called nodes, while items that do not contain any other items are called leaves. If available, a single topmost node is called a root node. Apart from the hierarchical structure of its nodes and leaves, a tree is quite similar to a list.

Usage

Use the tree if:

  • You need to display the key identifier of hierarchically structured items (for example in the first column of the flexible column layout).
  • Selecting one or more items out of a set of hierarchically structured items is a main use case.
  • The hierarchy has a restricted number of levels (up to about 12, depending on the content) and items (around 200).
  • You want to have only one implementation for all devices.

Do not use the tree if:

  • The main use case is to select one item from a very small number of non-hierarchical items, without viewing additional details. In this case, a select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • Items are not structured hierarchically. Use a list instead.
  • The hierarchy turns out to have only two levels. In this case, use a grouped list.
  • The hierarchy turns out to be just a categorization based on several details of the item. In this case, an analytical table provides multi-level grouping. Note that the analytical table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You need to display very deep hierarchies with additional data per item. In this case, use a tree table. Note that the tree table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • The structure contains more than 200 items. In this case, use the tree table. It is optimized for large item sets and provides better performance. Note that the tree table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use a chart.

Check out the table overview to decide which SAP Fiori table is most suitable for your needs.

Responsiveness

The tree is like a list containing hierarchical data. It acts as a container for items, with the possibility to expand and collapse nodes. When reducing the width, item texts wrap to ensure that the tree adapts to the new size.

In addition, the tree changes the indentation per level dynamically when the user expands a node, based on number of levels currently showing.

Tree displaying 2 levels
Tree displaying 2 levels
Tree displaying 3 levels
Tree displaying 3 levels
Tree displaying 4 levels
Tree displaying 4 levels

Layout

The title bar (optional) contains the title of the tree. In addition, an item counter and toolbar items can be placed on the title bar.
The collection of hierarchical items occupies the main part of the tree.

Schematic visualization of the tree
Schematic visualization of the tree

Components

The title bar consists of a toolbar. The toolbar can contain a title, an item count, and other toolbar items such as actions or view settings, for example.

The standard tree item consists of:

  • A highlight indicator (optional)
  • An expand/collapse button for nodes
  • A selector in form of a checkbox or a radio button (optional)
  • An icon (optional)
  • text
  • A counter (optional)
  • Additional buttons with actions such as Edit, Navigate, or Delete (optional)

If additional controls are needed, use a custom tree item. The custom tree item allows you to use any combination of controls inside the tree.

Standard tree item
Standard tree item

Behavior and Interaction (incl. Gestures)

Tree Level

Scrolling

The height of the tree is defined by the numbers of items it contains. It does not have a scroll container on its own, but is scrolled together with the page or its parent.

Same tree, with different expand state
Same tree, with different expand state

Selecting

A tree can have one of the following selection modes (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, property: mode):

None: Items cannot be selected (sap.m.ListMode.None).
Beware: Items can, nevertheless, use the sap.m.ListType “navigation” which allows click-handling on specific items. This should only be used when the click triggers a navigation to a corresponding item details page.

Tree without selectable items
Tree without selectable items

Single select master: One item of the tree can be selected. To select an item, click anywhere on the item. Single select master does not add any visual indication to the tree and therefore cannot be differentiated from trees without selection if no item is selected. Therefore, always keep one item selected. For single selection, this is the preferred mode. (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster)

Single selection: only one item is selected.
Single selection: only one item is selected.

Single select left: One item of the tree can be selected. For this, the tree provides radio buttons on the left side of each line item. Use this selection mode only if clicking on the item triggers something else, such as a navigation. Ideally, always keep one item selected, even in initial state (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectLeft).

Single selection with radio buttons. Use only if row clicks are used for something else, such as for navigation.
Single selection with radio buttons. Use only if row clicks are used for something else, such as for navigation.

Multiple selection: Allows the selection of one or more items. For this, the tree provides checkboxes on the left side of each line item. Each item is selected independently of the others (sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).

Developer Hint
In multiple selection mode, users can (de)select all items using the shortcut CTRL+A. This only affects items that have already been loaded to the front-end server. All other items are not (de)selected before they are loaded (for example, items added via lazy loading with growingScrollToLoad). This conflicts with the guideline that all items the user can reach by scrolling must be (de)selected.

Also note that CTRL+A only (de)selects items within expanded nodes.

To process all items, listen to the selectionChange event and to its flag selectAll. This indicates whether CTRL+A was triggered. As soon as an action is triggered, process the items accordingly. Depending on the number of items, consider processing them in the back end.

Multiple selection
Multiple selection

Deleting

To delete single items, use the tree in “delete” mode (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This adds a Delete   button to each item. Clicking or tapping this button triggers the deletion of the corresponding item. Do not use this mode if deleting multiple items at once is the preferred use case. Delete is a mode of the tree and  therefore cannot be used together with single selection or multi selection.

Tree in “delete” mode
Tree in “delete” mode

Line Item Level

Expandable and Collapsible Nodes

An Expand/Collapse button is provided automatically for each node.

Expand/collapse button
Expand/collapse button

Navigating

To allow navigation from an item, set type to “navigation” within the corresponding item (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This will create an indicator at the end of the line (“>”) and the entire item will become selectable. Clicking or tapping the line triggers the navigation event. However, clicking or tapping a selectable area or an expandable/collapse node does not. Use the navigation event to navigate to a new page containing item details.
If no navigation is possible, set type to “inactive”.
Navigation is an item type and therefore cannot be used together with “edit” or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).

Tree items with navigation indicator
Tree items with navigation indicator
Navigation indicators can be set per item
Navigation indicators can be set per item

Editing Items

To allow the user to edit an item, set type to “detail” within the corresponding item (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive). This will create an edit  button at the end of the line. Clicking the button triggers the edit event. Use this event to either open a dialog or a details page where the item can be edited.
Edit is an item type and therefore cannot be used together with “navigation” or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).

Edit button
Edit button

Clicking an Item

Items as a whole can be clickable. An event is fired by clicking on the item (anywhere except when triggering a selection or when expanding/collapsing a node). Apps can react to the event, such as by opening a dialog (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive).
Active elements do not have a visual indication and therefore cannot be differentiated from non-active elements.
“Active” is an item type and  therefore cannot be used together with “navigation” or “edit”. In addition, “active” uses the entire item as a clickable area and thus cannot be used together with single select master.

Active items
Active items

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a tree. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

The context menu can be triggered for the tree or per item.

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a tree is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Tree - context menu
Tree - context menu

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a tree or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.m.ListBase, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Guidelines

Tree vs. List

Trees are more complex than lists due to their hierarchical view. Users tend to have more problems finding items in hierarchical views than in flat lists, except where the hierarchical view is natural. By natural we mean that every child node should be part of only one parent, and this relationship between the child and parent is clear and well known.

Example of an acceptable use of trees
Example of an acceptable use of trees
Do
A clear parent-child relationship
A clear parent-child relationship

Broad vs. Deep Hierarchies

When you use trees, you should choose broad hierarchies over deep hierarchies. Deep hierarchies make finding items more complicated. So try to reduce hierarchical levels where possible, especially if the hierarchy is not natural. Ideally, a tree should have a maximum of four levels, the first two of which should contain the most important items.

Don't
Avoid unnecessary depth in the hierarchy
Avoid unnecessary depth in the hierarchy
Do
Favor breadth over depth in a hierarchy
Favor breadth over depth in a hierarchy

You can use the following methods to reduce hierarchy levels:

  • Avoid a single root node. It is usually not needed.
  • Container nodes at the top level can usually be replaced by tabs or value pickers.
  • Eliminate unnecessary mid-level containers, for example, by combining redundant ones.
  • Exercise care when using a tree due to its overall complexity. The hierarchical structure of the data does not necessarily mean that a tree control is required.
Acceptable: repeat entries to optimize finding items
Acceptable: repeat entries to optimize finding items

Design Concepts

The tree can be used to display hierarchical data. Unfortunately, trees convey an immediate feeling of complexity. Ideally, show trees only if there is no other option. You should instead try the following:

  • Flatten the data. A list is still complex, but less so than a tree. A combo box might also fit in some use cases.
  • When only two levels are needed, a grouped list control can be used. This works well, where group nodes are used for categorizing their children and where the group nodes themselves do not need to be selectable.
  • Break down the data into manageable chunks. Allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Title

If needed, implement the title text by adding a title to a toolbar. Place the toolbar above the tree.
Use a title text if it is not already provided by the surrounding area. Do not use a title text if it would just repeat text that is already in the context above the tree.
Use a title if you need a toolbar. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a title, such as Items.
If you use a title, be sure to include the following:

  • A title text for the tree.
  • An (optional) item count using the following format: Title (Number of Items). For example, Items (17). Depending on the use case, either count all items or leaves only (for example, if nodes are mainly used for categorization).
Title
Title
Title with item count
Title with item count

Loading Data

To indicate that the tree is currently loading items, use the busy state (sap.m.Tree, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Tree in busy state while loading data
Tree in busy state while loading data

Initial Display

Think of the initial expandable/collapsible state of a tree. If your structure contains many items on the root level, it might make sense to collapse the whole tree in its initial state.

In contrast, if the most important items are displayed on a deeper level (if, for example, the parent nodes are simply a kind of categorization), the tree should be expanded up to the first level where the most important items immediately appear.

Content

The standard tree item allows you to set one text per item. The text wraps, which can lead to items of different heights depending on the length of the text. An icon can be shown before the text. Try not to use the icons, and only use them if the meaning of the icons is clear and unambiguous. In addition, a counter can be placed on the right side of the item (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: counter).

The custom tree item allows you to use any combination of controls inside a tree, including editable controls (selection controls, Expand/Collapse buttons, navigation indicators, counters).

When designing a custom tree item, consider the responsive behavior. Take into account that all the controls you can add to a tree require additional width. Their position cannot be changed.

Standard tree item with all options
Standard tree item with all options

Content Formatting

To display object names with an ID, show the ID in brackets after the corresponding object name.

Place the ID in brackets after the corresponding object name
Place the ID in brackets after the corresponding object name

Try not to display an empty tree. If there is no way around this, provide instructions on how to fill the tree with data (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, properties: showNoData, noDataText).

Provide meaningful instructions within an empty tree
Provide meaningful instructions within an empty tree

Highlighting Items

To show that an item needs attention, a highlight indicator can be shown in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to show:

  • A semantic state (for example, red or orange if the item contains an error or warning)
  • A neutral state (for example, blue to highlight newly added items)

(sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListIemBase, property: highlight)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Item States

To show that an item has been modified, for example within the global edit flow, add the string (Modified) to the text of the item.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error, for example within the global edit flow, add the string (Contains errors) to the text of the item and highlight the row accordingly.

A modified item with an error
A modified item with an error

To show that an item is locked, add the string (Locked by [name]) to the text of the item.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in a draft state, add the string (Draft) to the text of the item.

Item in draft state
Item in draft state

Show only one state at any one time.

Actions

To trigger actions on items, show the actions on a toolbar above the tree. Do not offer action triggering on multiple items if the tree is expected to have fewer than 10 items in most cases.
The following actions on single items must always be in-line:

Delete: Use “Delete” mode (sap.m.Tree / sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This places a delete  button at the end of each item.

Items with Delete button
Items with Delete button

Navigation: Use the “Navigation” item type (sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This places a navigation indicator at the end of the corresponding items. Use this to navigate to a new page containing item details.

Items with navigation indicator
Items with navigation indicator

Edit: Use the “Detail” item type (sap.m.TreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail). This places an edit   icon at the end of the corresponding items.

Edit button
Edit button

From these three actions (delete, navigation, and edit), you can combine delete and edit, or delete and navigation. Edit and navigation cannot be combined.

To trigger actions that are independent of the selection, show the actions on a toolbar above the tree. For example: AddCollapse AllExpand All, …

To trigger a default action on the entire item, use the “Active” or “DetailAndActive” item type (sap.m.TreeItem / sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active). Active items trigger an event when clicked, which can be handled by apps, for example, to open a dialog. Selection and expanding/collapsing a node does not trigger the event, but are handled by the tree. Do not use this for navigation, to switch the line item to an edit state, or to delete the item.
Active can be combined with edit and delete, but not with navigation. Do not combine active with single selection master.

When you add an item, add the new item as the first item of the corresponding node.

Editing Items

To edit items, add an Edit button either in-line on the toolbar above the tree. Triggering the button either opens a dialog or navigates to an editable details page.

For mass editing:

  • Provide multiselection (sap.m.Tree/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).
  • Provide an Edit button on the toolbar above the tree.
  • If several items are selected, triggering the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

For more details, see mass editing.

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar).

Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, it is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within a tree, use the following options:

  • For dropping items as a child, use whole nodes as drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.On).
  • For dropping items on the same level, use the space between items as drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between).
  • If you want to allow users to drop items as a child or sibling, offer both drop targets (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.OnOrBetween).

This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Do not combine rearranging items within one level and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure that there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

Moving items from one node to another can be combined with sorting without any issues.

Drop targets in between items
Drop targets in between items

Properties

sap.m.Tree

The following additional properties are available for the tree:

  • The property: insert adds a margin on all sides of the tree.
  • The property: footerText adds a small additional row below the last item of the tree. This row can contain text only. Do not use this property.
  • The property: width defines the width of the whole tree.
  • The property: includeItemInSelection uses a click on the entire line item to select the corresponding item if the tree is in a selection mode. This competes with other settings such as “Navigation” or “Active” and should therefore not be used.
  • The property: enableBusyIndicator automatically shows a busy indicator while data is being loaded.
  • The property: modeAnimationOn plays a short animation it the selection mode is changed. Do not use it.
  • The property: showSeparators allows you to show all, none, or some separators. The default setting, which shows all separators, works well in most cases.
  • The property: swipeDirection allows you to define the direction in which to swipe if additional actions are hidden behind a tree item. This works only on touch devices. Do not use this property for functionality which is not available somewhere else.
  • The property: rememberSelections leaves items selected even if they are not currently visible, for example, through filtering. If this behavior is not wanted, set the flag to “false”, but you should do so only in exceptional cases.
  • The property: busy sets the tree to a busy state. While in busy state, the entire tree cannot be used and items cannot be read due to an overlay.
  • The property: busyIndicatorDelay defines the time after which a busy state is shown after the tree has been set to this state. Use the default value.
  • The property: visible shows the tree (“true”) or hides it (“false”).
  • The property: tooltip adds a tooltip to the entire tree. The tooltip is only shown on mouse interaction. It will not work on tablets, smartphones, or other touch devices. Do not use it.

sap.m.StandardTreeItem / sap.m.CustomTreeItem

The following additional properties are available for sap.m.StandardTreeItem:

  • The property: selected allows an item to be selected programmatically.
  • The property: busy sets the item to a busy state. While in busy state, the whole item cannot be used and cannot be read due to an overlay. In most cases, this should not be needed. Do not use it.
  • The property: busyIndicatorDelay defines the time after which a busy state is shown after the item has been set to this state. Do not use it.
  • The property: visible shows or hides the item.
  • The property: tooltip adds a tooltip to a whole item. The tooltip is only shown on mouse interaction. It will not work on tablets, smartphones, or other touch devices. Do not use it.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Grid Table

A grid table contains a set of data that is structured in rows and columns. It allows the user to scroll in both directions and can handle large numbers of items and columns.

Usage

Use the grid table if:

  • The cell level and the spatial relationship between cells are more important than the line item. Examples include spreadsheet analyses and waterfall charts. Note that a grid table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You have to work on more than 1,000 rows. In this case, the grid table is easier to handle. In contrast to the responsive table, the architecture of the grid table is optimized for handling large numbers of items. Note that a grid table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktop and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • Comparing items is a major use case. In this case, a grid table might be more appropriate than a responsive table. In the grid table, each cell contains only one data point. In contrast, the responsive table is more flexible regarding line items, including the ability to add more data points per cell and also the pop-in function. Both make comparisons more difficult. Note that a grid table is not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You need an analytical table, but you cannot provide an analytical binding on the technical side. In this case, a grid table will do the work. Note that the grid table provides only one level of grouping, no aggregation options, and is also not fully responsive. It is only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.

Do not use the grid table if:

  • You need a table. The responsive table is the default table in SAP Fiori. Additional use cases where you might need the responsive table include:
    • The focus is on working on line items, not on cells. The responsive table is optimized for displaying complete items on all devices, such as file browsing and a list of documents you want to act on, like purchase orders and purchase requisitions.
    • Selecting one or several items is the main use case and details are needed to choose the correct item.
    • Line items are independent of each other and no operation across columns is needed.
    • You want to have only one implementation for all devices.
  • The main use case is choosing one item from a very small number of items with no additional details. A select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • The main use case is choosing one out of several items with only a few details per item. A list might be more appropriate. Pay attention to the layout of the list item to ensure that it has a pleasant appearance.
  • Data needs to be structured in a hierarchical manner. Use a tree table instead. Note that neither the tree table nor the grid table are responsive. You will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones and tablets.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use charts.
  • You just need it for layout reasons. In this case, use a layout container such as HBox or VBox.
  • You need read-only or editable field-value pairs. Use a form instead. The grid table is not optimized for form-like input navigation.

Responsiveness

A grid table is available for desktops and tablets, but not in smartphone sizes. It supports touch devices, but is not optimized for small screens.

If you use a grid table, note that you have to implement a fallback solution for small screens. This fallback solution does not need to support all use cases.

You could create a fallback by using a responsive table, but a completely different solution, such as showing charts in a read-only case, might be more appropriate.

Grid table shown on a desktop
Grid table shown on a desktop
Grid table shown on a tablet
Grid table shown on a tablet

Layout

The column header allows the user to resize and rearrange columns. It also provides access to a menu with column-specific commands.

The collection of items, or rows, occupies the main part of the grid table.

The selector cells allow the user to select one or more items.

The Select All button selects or deselects all items.

Schematic visualization of the grid table
Schematic visualization of the grid table

Components

A grid table does not consist of other elements. However, it is common to use a toolbar above the grid table.

The toolbar can contain entry points for the view settings dialog and the table personalization dialog or for the p13n dialog, as well as view switches in the form of a segmented button, and buttons for Add, Edit, and other actions.

Behavior and Interaction

A grid table is quite restricted in terms of its content.

Table Level

Scroll

A grid table allows horizontal and vertical scrolling (sap.ui.table.Table, property: navigationMode, value: Scrollbar).

You can add any number of line items to the grid table, which uses “lazy loading”.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.Table, property: rowHeight).

The grid table is optimized to allow faster scrolling within the first 1000 items.

Scroll bar
Scroll bar

Select

A grid table can have one of the following selection types (sap.ui.table.Table/ property: selectionMode):

  • None: Items cannot be selected.
A non-selection grid table
A non-selection grid table
  • Single: One item in the grid table can be selected. A row selector column is shown.
A single-selection grid table
A single-selection grid table
  • Multi Toggle: A multiselection mode that allows one or more items to be selected. For this, the grid table provides a column with checkboxes on the left-hand side. Clicking a checkbox toggles the state of the corresponding row from deselected to selected and back.
  • Select All: Works via a checkbox on the left of the column header (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableSelectAll). Using the Select All checkbox selects or deselects all items the user can reach via scrolling. Use Select All only if it makes sense. Note that selecting a lot of data also takes time and might not be appropriate for all use cases. For example, a delete operation on two million database entries might not be very helpful in many cases.

You can also use the keyboard keys Shift and Ctrl for multi-selection.

A multiselection grid table
A multiselection grid table

An item can be selected in different ways, depending on the configuration of the grid table (sap.ui.table.Table, property: selectionBehavior):

  • Row: An item is selected by clicking the checkbox or the row. Use this for multiselection grid tables if clicking a row is not used for something else.
  • RowSelector: An item is selected only by clicking the checkbox in the selector cell. Use this if you need to click the row for something else, such as navigation.
  • RowOnly: An item is selected only by clicking the row, and not the the checkboxes in the selector cells. Use this for single-selection grid tables if clicking a row is not used for something else, such as navigation.

Compact, Cozy, and Condensed

Like all SAP Fiori controls, the grid table is shown in compact mode on a desktop and in cozy mode on tablets.

For a desktop, you can also display even more rows on the same screen height by adding the condensed mode in addition to the compact mode. This renders less white space for each item.

Note that the condensed content density has always to be set in addition to compact. Do not use condensed on its own. Do not mix condensed with cozy. Doing so could lead to unpredictable and / or unwanted results, e.g. cozy sized controls in condensed sized containers, missing padings, etc.

Note that neither compact mode nor condensed mode can be interacted with via touch. Even on a desktop with a touch screen, users will have difficulty selecting rows or using controls inside the cells when using their fingers.

Furthermore, condensed mode is not available for Internet Explorer 9. If condensed mode is to be used, please provide a fallback.

For more information on cozy and compact modes, see content density.

Column Header

The column header provides the label for the corresponding column and access to the column header menu.

Columns are resized as follows:

  • Mouse interaction: The user drags the separator line between two columns (sap.ui.table.Column, property: Resizable). Double-clicking the line optimizes the column according to the length of the currently visible data and the label of the column header (sap.ui.table.Column, property: Autoresizable).
  • Touch interaction: The user taps the column header to reveal two buttons – one to show the column header menu, and one for resizing. The user drags the latter to resize the column.

After resizing a column, the adaptation of the column widths depends on how the column width is set:

  • If column widths are set in pixel-based units (px, em, rem), the corresponding column is adapted and the columns that follow are moved accordingly. The width of all other columns is not affected.
    If all the columns together take up less width than the table control, an empty space is added. In case all columns together take up more width than the table control, a scrollbar appears. (sap.ui.table.Column, property: width)
  • If all column widths are set in percentage or “auto”, resizing one column might also lead to the automatic resizing of some or all other columns. The position of the resized column might also be affected. This is done to ensure that the whole table width is used and no white space is added. A scrollbar appears only if all or most of the columns shrink significantly. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, a minimum width can be set per column. Please be aware that this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users are still able to reduce the column width below the provided minimum. (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: width, minWidth)

Columns can be rearranged by dragging the column header to another position (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnReordering).

Column header
Column header
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Opening the column header menu on touch devices
Less columns than space available
Less columns than space available

Column Header Menu

For each column, a menu can contain the following menu items (sap.ui.table.ColumnMenu, property: visible):

  • Sort Ascending/Descending (sap.ui.table.Column, property: showSortMenuEntries)
  • Free text filter (sap.ui.table.Column, property: showFilterMenuEntries)
  • Group (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableGrouping)
  • Freeze from the first to the last specified column (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnFreeze)

For each column, the menu can be replaced by an app-specific menu.

Column header menu
Column header menu

Sort

The column header menu can provide two sort options (sap.ui.table. Column, properties: sortProperty, showSortMenuEntry):

  • Sort Ascending
  • Sort Descending

The user selects one of these options to sort the corresponding column accordingly (sap.ui.table. Column, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

Sort settings in column header menu
Sort settings in column header menu

Filter

The column header menu can provide a search field for entering free text (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: filterProperty, showFilterMenuEntries).

If the user enters a term in the input field and triggers the search by pressing Enter when the focus is on the filter input field, the grid table is filtered by the corresponding column and value (sap.ui.table.Table, properties: filtered, filterProperty, filterValue, filterOperator, sap.ui.table.Column, property: filterType).

Note that the filter may return zero results, in which case, the table might be empty.

General recommendations for filtering:

  • If filtering is a main use case, choose the filter bar or any other filtering UI over the built-in free text filter.
  • Only use the free text filter if filtering is a secondary use case and if the filter bar is too heavy.
Free text filter in column header menu
Free text filter in column header menu

Group

The column header menu can provide the option to group by this column (sap.ui.table.Column, property: enableGrouping).

One group collects all items with the same value within the corresponding column.

Group setting in column header menu
Group setting in column header menu

If line items are grouped in a column, every group is provided with a collapsible or expandable group header. The header text consists of the name of the value and the number of items in the specific group. Only one grouping level is possible.

Group header
Group header

Once line items have been grouped, the corresponding column is hidden. There is no built-in possibility to ungroup the grid table again. Therefore, provide a view settings dialog or table presonalization dialog to offer an additional way to group by a column and a way to ungroup the complete table.

An exception to this is when the table is grouped from the start and should not be ungrouped at all.

Group headers shown, the corresponding column hidden: no duplicates, but a confusing change
Group headers shown, the corresponding column hidden: no duplicates, but a confusing change
Warning
Note that grouping the grid table is experimental and currently works only on items loaded to the front end. Thus, scrolling down the table leads to data not being grouped as expected.

Only use this feature if you have just a few line items, all of which are loaded to the front end. If this is the case, consider using a responsive table first instead of a grid table.

Freeze Columns

The column header menu can provide the option to freeze columns (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnFreeze). Selecting Freeze freezes all columns up to the one in which the operation was triggered (sap.ui.table. Table, property: fixedColumnCount).

When Freeze is triggered, the menu item changes to Unfreeze for the corresponding column.

Freeze setting in column header menu
Freeze setting in column header menu

Line Item Level

A line item contains a set of cells and provides options for selecting the item.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must have the same height (sap.ui.table.Table, property: rowHeight).

Line item
Line item

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a table or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.ui.table.Table, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a table. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

When opened, the context menu gets the row and column context, except for special columns (such as the selection column) or special rows (like group headers). Context menus can be implemented for a specific table, row, or cell (not recommended for editable cells).

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a table is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Grid table with a context menu
Grid table with a context menu

Cell Level

A cell provides one data point.

It can contain one of the following controls to display this data point:

While it is technically possible to also use other controls, doing so could lead to issues in regards to alignment, condensed mode, screen reader support, and keyboard support.

If you use text, use only single-line text to keep the same row height. Truncate if necessary as this prevents adverse side effects when scrolling vertically (sap.m.Text, property: wrapping, value: false).

Cell
Cell

Guidelines

Data Density vs. Complexity

The grid table can be used to display large amounts of data. Unfortunately, the grid table has a high data density and therefore conveys an immediate feeling of complexity.

Only show tables with a lot of data as a last resort. Try the following instead:

  • Break down the data into manageable chunks and allow the user to navigate or drill down between them.
  • Use charts with drilldown functionality until the amount of data is more manageable.

Try to avoid horizontal scrolling in the default delivery.

Try to minimize the number of columns, especially if there is a large number of rows.

Table Title

You can implement the table title by using a title control in a toolbar.

Use a table title if the title of a grid table is not indicated in the surrounding area. Do not use a table title if it simply repeats text that is already above the grid table, for example, if a pricing conditions grid table is the only control placed on a tab labeled Pricing Conditions.

Use a table title if you need the table toolbar. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use generic text as a table title, such as Items.

You can add an item count to the table title. If you do so, use the following format:

Items (345)

Text as well as text and an item count can both be combined with variant management.

The count of items in the table title displays all visible items which the user can reach via scrolling or expanding groups. Group headers do not count in.

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items.

Developer Hint
Assistive technologies (such as screen readers) use the title to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation. In addition, screen readers use the title as the label for the table.

If you don’t use a title (for example, to avoid repetition), make sure that the table is connected to another meaningful on-screen text that can be used as a label for assistive technologies. You can do this using the method addAriaLabelledBy.

Selection

In multiple selection mode (multi toggle), do not show checkboxes in the first data column in the default delivery to avoid confusion.

Offer the Select All checkbox for (de)selecting all items the user can reach by scrolling.

Developer Hint
Select All is only applied to items that have already been loaded to the front-end server. All other items are not (de)selected before they are loaded, such as items added via lazy loading with growingScrollToLoad. This conflicts with the guideline that all items the user can reach by scrolling must be (de)selected.

To process all items, listen to the selectionChange event and to its selectAll flag. This indicates whether the Select All checkbox was triggered. As soon as an action is triggered, process the items accordingly. Depending on the number of items, consider processing them in the back end.

Don't
Do not add checkboxes to the first data column in the default delivery
Do not add checkboxes to the first data column in the default delivery

Loading Data

To indicate that the table is currently loading items, use the busy state. (sap.ui.table.Table, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Grid table in busy state while loading data
Grid table in busy state while loading data

Columns – Best Practices

Minimize the number of columns. Avoid the need to scroll horizontally in the default delivery.

The grid table assigns the same width to each column by default. It is recommended that you overwrite this default to provide optimal space for your content (sap.ui.table.Column, property: width).

If you define the column width in pixels or rems, resizing a column affects only the width of this specific column. Reducing the browser window size results in a scrollbar. After resizing a column, a scroll bar appears if the width of the table is not enough to show all columns. If the columns use less space than available, white space appears on the right side of the last column.

If you define the column width as a percentage, resizing one column affects the width of several or all columns. Text becomes truncated when the browser window size is reduced. This is done to make sure that all columns together fill the space of the table. A scrollbar appears only in case the automatic change of the column widths is not enough for showing all columns. To avoid the side effect of undersized columns, a minimum width can be set per column. Please be aware that this minimum width is only taken into account if columns are automatically resized. End users are still able to reduce the column width below the provided minimum.

If you define the column width as “auto”, the behavior is the same as for “percentage”. In contrast to percentage, “auto” distributes the columns equally.

To decide on how to set the column width (pixel / rem / em vs. percent / auto), keep the following in mind:

  • For tables with only 2 to 3 columns, use pixel-based units. This ensures that on wide screens the values in the columns are not spread over the whole screen, which improves the readability of line items.
  • For tables with many columns, where a horizontal scrollbar is usually needed, use pixel-based units. This avoids unintended side effects when resizing columns.
  • For all other tables, use whatever fits your case better.

Be cautious with mixing columns with pixel-based and percentage-based widths. While this can be helpful in some cases, it could also cause even more unexpected side effects when resizing a column. When using percentage-based widths for one or more columns, think of the possibility to not allow end users to resize columns at all.

Optimize column width for its initial visible content, including the column header texts.

Maintain a constant column width and avoid automatically adjusting it based on content changes.

Don't
Don't: In the default delivery, the initial visible content should not be truncated
Don't: In the default delivery, the initial visible content should not be truncated

Column Headers – Best Practices

Provide a label for each column in the column header. In the default delivery, do not truncate the column header texts.

Content Alignment

For alignment of cell content, follow the guidelines below.

Left-align the following: text, IDs, phone numbers, URLs, passwords, and email addresses.

Left-alignment of text
Left-alignment of text

Right-align numbers (except IDs).

This ensures comparability of numbers and amounts.

Right-alignment of numbers
Right-alignment of numbers

Right-align amounts with currencies to the cell and align them in terms of their respective decimal points.

This ensures that amounts with different currencies are shown correctly, whether these currencies have 0, 2, or 3 decimals.

For aligning to the decimal point, use the sap.ui.uinified.Currency control.

Alignment to decimal point
Alignment to decimal point

Right-align dates and times.

This ensures comparability for most formats and locales.

Right-alignment of dates
Right-alignment of dates

Left-align status information.

Left-align status information
Left-align status information

Center-align icons.

Content Formatting

Locale Settings

Be locale-aware: show dates, times, numbers, and so on in the format corresponding to the user’s locale settings.

Key Identifier

Use a bold label or an emphasized link as the key identifier of an item. In the default delivery, show the key identifier in the first column.

Emphasized link
Emphasized link

For strings with IDs, use one of the following:

  • Show the ID in brackets after the corresponding string. Use this formatting if sorting, grouping, or filtering is only needed on the string, but not on the ID.
  • Show the ID in a separate column. Use this format if sorting, grouping, or filtering on the string and the ID is needed.
Text and ID in one column – Sorting, filtering, and grouping only on the text
Text and ID in one column – Sorting, filtering, and grouping only on the text
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
Text and ID in two columns – Allows sorting, filtering, and grouping on both
Text and ID in two columns – Allows sorting, filtering, and grouping on both
If displayed as a link, use only the string as the link, not the ID
If displayed as a link, use only the string as the link, not the ID

Truncation

Avoid truncation of typical content in the default delivery (sap.ui.table.Column, property: width). However, since the columns are resizable, do not worry too much if truncation occurs as columns can still be enlarged if necessary.

To prevent adverse side effects when scrolling vertically, all line items must also have the same height. If you need to decide between truncation and different row heights, choose truncation.

Optimize column width for typical content, not all content
Optimize column width for typical content, not all content

Number of Links

Are there too many links? Use subtle links to avoid a wall of links. Standard links are also emphasized more if they are surrounded by subtle links.

Emphasized links, links, subtle links, and text
Emphasized links, links, subtle links, and text

Missing Value

If there is no value for a cell, leave it blank. Do not display text as N/A.

Leave empty fields blank
Leave empty fields blank

Numbering Items

In terms of numbering items:

  • If the item number is more like an ID with regard to its description, use ID formatting as described above.
  • In all other cases, use a separate column for the item number.
Add a separate column for the item number
Add a separate column for the item number

Status

For status information, use semantic colors on the foreground elements.

For status information on text, use an object status.

Semantic colors on text
Semantic colors on text

Empty Tables

Avoid empty grid tables. If necessary, provide instructions on how to fill the grid table with data (sap.ui.table.Table, properties: noDataText, showNoData).

Examples:

  • If a table is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the table with data.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    No filters set. To start, enter your search and filter settings and run the search.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No items found. Check the search and filter settings.

Overwrite the standard texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, no search is offered, only the search is offered).
  • You are using the live search (no Go button in the filter bar). In this case, leave out “run the search”.
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of search and filter settings).

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items.

Provide meaningful instructions
Provide meaningful instructions

Invalid State

To show an invalid state of the grid table within the list report floorplan, show an overlay on the grid table and the corresponding toolbar (sap.ui.table.Table, property: showOverlay). The overlay prevents user interactions.

Use this within the list report floorplan if filter settings have been changed but the grid table is has not yet been updated.

Grid table with invalid data
Grid table with invalid data

Item States

To show that an item has been modified, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string Modified in an additional column with the label Editing Status.

In the default delivery, add a column directly behind the key identifier.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string Contains errors in the Editing Status column and highlight the row accordingly. This string replaces the Modified string.

A modified item with an error
A modified item with an error

To show that an item is locked, add a transparent-style button with the corresponding icon and the text Locked by [name] in the Editing Status column.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in draft state, add a transparent-style button with the text Draft in the Editing Status column.

Item in draft state
Item in draft state

Show only one state at a time.

Numbers and Units

Show the unit of measurement in one of the following ways:

Number and Unit in Same Cell

The number and the unit are in the same cell. Do this if sorting, filtering, or grouping by the unit of measurement are not needed.

Use a currency control to display the concatenated string.

Number and unit of measurement in one cell
Number and unit of measurement in one cell

Number and Unit in Separate Columns

The number and unit are in separate columns. Do this if sorting, filtering, or grouping by the unit of measurement are a common use case.

Note that this column can be hidden or moved independently of the column containing the corresponding number. Therefore, be sure to have clear labels for both columns to communicate the dependency.

Number and unit of measurement in two columns
Number and unit of measurement in two columns

Do not put the unit of measurement in the column header.

Drag and Drop

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within the table, use drop targets that are between items (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between). This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Drop targets in between items
Drop targets in between items

Do not combine rearranging items and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure that there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items with sorting
Do not combine rearranging items with sorting

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, it is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

When combining rearranging items with grouping, be aware that moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on values in a column, the dropped item needs to take on the value of the target group for the corresponding column. If this is not wanted, do not allow users to rearrange items in grouped tables.

Example:
A table is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. If changing the value doesn’t make sense make sense, only allow users to rearrange the items within the same group, or don’t allow rearranging at all.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing.
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing.

Context Menu

Use the context menu only as a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar). Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

The context menu can be triggered for the table, row, or cell. However, we do not recommend using context menus for cells: because the content of a cell is a different touch target than the cell itself, opening a cell context menu via touch is quite hard, even in cozy mode.

Do not combine context menus with condensed mode: editable controls fill the entire space inside a cell. Because of this, context menus cannot be opened at all with touch or mouse interaction.

Actions

Multiple Items

To trigger actions on multiple items, use a mutliselection grid table (sap.ui.table.Table, property: selectionMode, value: MultiToggle). Offer the corresponding actions in the table toolbar.

Do not offer action triggering on multiple items if the table is generally expected to have fewer than 10 items. In this case, try to use the responsive table instead of the grid table.

Single Item

To trigger actions on a single item (sap.ui.table. Table, property: selectionMode, value: Single):

  • Show the actions on the table toolbar.
  • In rare cases, show the actions within the line item. One example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every line and thus use a lot of screen real estate, do this only for a maximum of one or two actions. Provide a separate column per action. Use a button, unless the action trigger belongs to a link.

To trigger navigation on line item level, choose one of the following options:

  • Use a link for the attribute that identifies the row. Clicking the link triggers the navigation.
  • Add the RowActions column and show the navigation indicator (  ) at the end of the row. The navigation arrow triggers the navigation.

Use the RowActions column only for one or both of the following actions:

  • Navigate to details page ( )
  • Delete ( )

The RowActions column does not provide a column header text. It is fixed and will not scroll away. Users also cannot personalize this column.

Single Cell

To trigger actions on a single cell, create the corresponding click event. Do not use the cell click event if the cell contains interactive controls, such as links.

Add Items

Place the add button on the table toolbar. It can be displayed as an icon (+) or text (e.g. ‘Add’ or ‘Create’).

In general new items always appear as the first item of the table.

Editable Content

For editable content, only use the following controls, and only one control per cell:

Only these controls are optimized for all viewing modes of the grid table.

If you need edit mode, change your text controls, such as label, text, link, object status, icons, and currencies, to editable controls as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before. You can do this by exchanging the controls, for example, from sap.m.Text to sap.m.Input.

For mass editing items:

  • Provide multiselection.
  • Provide an Edit button.
  • If several items are selected, clicking the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

For more information, see Mass Editing.

Interactive controls – In line
Interactive controls – In line

View Settings

There are several ways to show Sort, Filter, and/or Group settings:

  • Column header menu: In all cases, show the corresponding settings in the column header menu.
  • View settings dialog: Simple and more flexible with regard to filter settings. No advantage for sorting. Allows the user to ungroup grouped columns.tables with a medium amount of items.
  • Table personalization dialog: Provides complex options for sorting items by several levels and allows the user to ungroup grouped columns. It also provides a query-builder-like approach for filter settings. The complexity of the options is also its downside. Use the table personalization dialog for tables with a large number of items.
  • If filtering is a main use case, use the filter bar. In this case, avoid offering additional filter settings on the table. If you do, the filter settings on the grid table work only on the result set provided by the filter bar.

Always be careful when synchronizing the settings in the dialog with the settings from the column header menu.

Trigger the dialogs in one of the following ways:

  • View settings dialog: Provide several buttons, one for each of these view settings. Each button opens the view settings dialog on the corresponding page.
  • Table personalization dialog: Provide a settings button, which opens the table personalization dialog containing all pages.

Use only the view settings you really need. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case.

Column header menu with view settings
Column header menu with view settings
Table toolbar with triggers for view settings dialog
Table toolbar with triggers for view settings dialog
Table toolbar with trigger for table personalization dialog
Table toolbar with trigger for table personalization dialog

Be persistent. When reopening the app, show the analytical table in the same view settings (sort/ filter/ group/ aggregation settings) as last defined by this user.

Sort

To display the current sort state, an icon is shown in the column header of the last sorted column. This icon indicates the sort direction (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: sorted, sortOrder, sortProperty).

For the default sort settings, sort by the column that identifies the row, which is usually the first column in default delivery. Use a meaningful sort order, such as an alphabetical order for text, a numeric order for numbers, or a chronological order for dates.

Column, sorted ascending
Column, sorted ascending
Column, sorted descending
Column, sorted descending

Filter

To display the current filter state, an icon is shown in the column header of the filtered column (sap.ui.table.Column, properties: filtered, filterProperty, filterValue, filterOperator, defaultFilterOperator, filterType).

Column, filtered
Column, filtered

Group

To display the current group state, group headers are shown. Show the following text in the group header:

[Grouping value] – [Item count for the group]

Group headers
Group headers

In general, offer reasonable grouping by default if appropriate. Enable the user to ungroup via the view settings dialog or via the table personalization dialog.

Personalization

Only offer personalization if you need more columns than those that fit on a tablet screen, which is usually five, to fulfill 80% of your main use cases.

Persist the column layout. When a user reopens the app, show the grid table with the same column layout settings as last defined by this user.

Add, Remove, and Rearrange Columns

To add, remove, or rearrange columns, use one of the following:

  • The table personalization dialog: It offers some simple settings for column layout. Use this if you have only a few columns to choose from and/or you use the view settings dialog.
  • The p13n dialog: Besides various complex view settings, it also provides settings for column layout. Use this if you have a large number of columns to choose from and/or you use this dialog anyway for view settings.

In both cases, trigger the dialog via the settings button in the table toolbar.

You can also use drag and drop to rearrange columns (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnReordering). If you allow rearranging via drag and drop as well as via a dialog, keep both places in sync.

Resize Columns

Resizing columns works differently on touch and non-touch devices.

  • Non-touch devices: Drag and drop the column separator on the right side of the column. Double-clicking the column separator optimizes the width of the column to the data currently loaded into the front end, which is usually about 100 rows.
  • Touch devices: Clicking the column header reveals two buttons: one for opening the column header menu, another one for resizing the column. Drag and drop this second button to resize the column.

Freeze Columns

To freeze columns, offer the setting in the column header menu (sap.ui.table.Table, property: enableColumnFreeze). Selecing Freeze on a column freezes all columns from the first one to the one where Freeze is selected. On this column, the menu entry changes from Freeze to Unfreeze.

Frozen column
Frozen column

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, you can display a highlight indicator in front of the item. The highlight indicator can show:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning
  • A neutral highlight, such as blue to highlight newly added items

(Propertyhighlight)

Semantic row highlight indicator
Semantic row highlight indicator

Tables in Object Pages

In the object page, we advise against using the analytical, grid, and tree tables. Instead, use a responsive table and offer navigation to a list report with the table types mentioned above.

For more information on the use of tables within the object page, see the Tables section of the Object Page article.

Properties

sap.ui.table.Table

The following additional properties are available for the grid table:

  • The property: width defines the width of the grid table.
  • The property: rowHeight defines the height of each row in the grid table. Since the height required is calculated automatically by the grid table, this property is only needed rarely.
  • The property: columnHeaderHeight defines the height of the column headers. Since the height required is calculated automatically by the grid table, this property is only needed rarely.
  • The property: columnHeaderVisible can be used to hide the column headers. Always show the column headers.
  • The property: showColumnVisibilityMenu provides an additional entry in the column header menu that allows columns to be shown or hidden. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Do not use this property.
  • The property: visibleRowCount defines the height of the grid table. Show as many rows as fit on the screen.
  • The property: visibleRowCountMode defines whether the height of the grid table is fixed or automatically calculated based on the space provided by the underlying container. For automatic calculation, make sure that all rows have the same height.
  • The property: minAutoRowCount defines the minimum number of rows that must be shown if the property: visibleRowCountMode is set to “auto”. Show at least three to five rows.
  • The property: firstVisibleRow defines the first row shown in the visible area of the grid table. The grid table is scrolled accordingly.
  • The property: allowColumnReordering is deprecated. Do not use it. Use the property: enableColumnReordering instead.
  • The property: editable does not have a visible effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: enableGrouping turns the experimental grouping on or off. Handle with care.
  • The property: enableCustomFilter changes the filter entry in the column header menu from an edit box to Filter…. Selecting this entry throws an event to which apps can react, for example, by opening a dialog. In general, you should choose the built-in filter over your own implementation. Specifically, keep filtering via the column header menu simple, while offering more advanced options via the table personalization dialog.
  • The property: enableBusyIndicator has not yet been fully implemented. Do not use it.
  • The property: title adds a line of text on top of the grid table. Do not use this. To add a title to the table, use a toolbar.
  • The property: footer adds a short text at the bottom of the table.
  • The property: Busy sets the grid table to busy state. While in busy state, the whole table cannot be used and items cannot be read due to an overlay.
  • The property: Tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: alternateRowColors displays the rows with alternating background colors (“banded rows”). Do not use it.

sap.ui.table.Column

The following additional properties are available for the column:

  • The property: visible defines whether a column is shown or hidden.
  • The property: name defines the name shown in the column header menu for showing and hiding columns. In SAP Fiori, columns are shown and hidden via the table personalization dialog or via the table personalization dialog. Do not use this property.
  • The property: headerSpan defines whether one column header is used for one or several columns. To prevent adverse side effects, always use one column header for only one single column. Do not use this property.
  • The property: Tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation

Responsive Table

The responsive table is the default table in SAP Fiori. It contains a set of line items and is fully responsive. Depending on the scenario, users can also navigate from the line items to further details.

A line item contains several data points sorted into columns. A data point refers to a unit of information, such as a number, a text, a unit of measurement, and so on, which can be used to form the content of a tableform or other control. One data point is usually displayed by a control, such as a text, object status, or input field. A control can display more than one data point, for example, by concatenating text.

In contrast to traditional tables, a “cell” of the responsive table is not limited to displaying only one control, and therefore a single cell can present far more than one data point.

Responsive table
Responsive table

Usage

Use the responsive table if:

  • You need a table. The responsive table is the default table in SAP Fiori.
  • You need to use various controls inside a line item, such as micro charts. By contrast, the analytical table supports only a very limited set of controls.
  • The focus is on line items, not on cells. The responsive table is optimized for viewing complete items on all devices.
  • Selecting one or more items is a main use case and details are needed to choose the correct item.
  • Line items are independent of each other and no operation across columns is needed.
  • You want to have only one implementation for all devices. As the name suggests, the responsive table is responsive.

Do not use the responsive table if:

  • The main use case is to select one item from a very small number of items, without viewing additional details. In this case, a select or combo box might be more appropriate.
  • The main use case is to select one item from several items, with the possibility of viewing only a few details per item. In this case, a list might be more appropriate. Pay attention to the layout of the list item to ensure that it has a pleasant appearance.
  • The cell level and the spatial relationship between cells is more important than the line item. In this case, use the analytical table or grid table. Examples include spreadsheet analyses and waterfall charts. Note that neither the analytical table nor the grid table are fully responsive. Both are only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You are working on more than 1,000 rows. Try using the analytical table or grid table instead; they are easier to handle, perform better, and are optimized for handling large numbers of items. Note that neither the analytical table nor the grid table are fully responsive. Both are only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • Comparing items is a major use case. In this case, the analytical table or grid table might be more appropriate because each cell contains only one data point. By contrast, the responsive table offers greater flexibility within line items, including the ability to add more data points per cell and the pop-in function. Both make comparisons more difficult. Note that neither the analytical table nor the grid table are fully responsive. Both are only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • Data needs to be structured in a hierarchical manner. In this case, a tree table might be more appropriate. Although the analytical table can have several grouping levels, it is not as flexible when nodes at several levels contain child nodes. Note that neither the analytical table nor the grid table are fully responsive. Both are only available for desktops and tablets, so you will need to take an adaptive approach by offering an additional UI for smartphones.
  • You need an overview of a large amount of data. In this case, use a chart.
  • You just need it for layout reasons. In this case, use a layout container such as a horizontal layout or a vertical layout instead.
  • You need read-only or editable field-value pairs. In this case, use a form instead. The responsive table is not optimized for form-like input navigation.
Don't
Do not use a responsive table as a form
Do not use a responsive table as a form

See the table overview to decide which SAP Fiori table is most suitable for your needs.

Responsiveness

The responsive table is optimized for viewing one line item at a time with no scrolling or only vertical scrolling, irrespective of the display width.

On smartphones, only the most important data remains in the one-column or two-column table, while all other data is moved to the space between two item rows, known as the “pop-in area”.

In this area, data for the corresponding cell is provided as a label/value pair. The label is defined by the column header, and the value is taken from the corresponding cell. Labels can be displayed next to the value or above the value.

Within the pop-in area, the label/value pairs can be displayed in the following ways (sap.m.Table, property: PopinLayout):

  • Block: Label/value pairs are listed one below the other.
  • GridSmall: Label/value pairs are displayed next to each other in equally spaced grid cells. An additional column is shown for each 13 rem of available screen width (208 px with default browser settings). If the number of grid cells exceeds the available screen width, the grid cells wrap. On S size, this layout transforms automatically to a block layout.
  • GridLarge: The display logic is the same as for GridSmall,, but grid columns come with a larger minimum width (26 rem instead of 13 rem).

In all layouts, you can show the labels next to or above (recommended) the corresponding data.

Information
The GridSmall and GridLarge layouts are not available in all browsers. If the chosen layout is not available, it is automatically changed to Block layout.
The responsive table displayed on a smartphone (size S)
The responsive table displayed on a smartphone (size S)
The responsive table displayed on a tablet (size M)
The responsive table displayed on a tablet (size M)
The responsive table displayed in compact mode on a desktop computer (size L)
The responsive table displayed in compact mode on a desktop computer (size L)

To ensure responsiveness, you must configure each column. Depending on the screen width (in pixels), the column needs to know which of the following responses is required:

  • Stay in the table layout.
  • Move to the pop-in (sap.m.Column, with the properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth, popinHAlign, popinDisplay).
  • Hide.

Since you have to define this for each column, you can also handle more than one column at a single breakpoint, such as moving three columns to the pop-in area at once.

Each of the three device types has a predefined value for the screen width. However, you will get better results if you offer more breakpoints by using pixel values instead of the predefined values.

For the smallest screen width, keep the following information in the table layout:

  • The identifier of the line item
  • The key attribute

Example for Block Layout

A typical responsive table.

A typical responsive table
A typical responsive table

Hide the information column for a screen width smaller than 570 px.

Hiding the information column
Hiding the information column

Move the column “vendor” to the pop-in area for a screen width smaller than 460 px (sap.m.Column, properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth).

Moving the vendor column to the pop-in area
Moving the vendor column to the pop-in area

Move the column “limit” to the pop-in for a screen width smaller than 350 px (sap.m.Column, properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth).

Moving the limit column to the pop-in area
Moving the limit column to the pop-in area

Move the column “price” to the pop-in area for a screen width smaller than 270 px (sap.m.Column, properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth).

Moving the price column to the pop-in area
Moving the price column to the pop-in area

If you still need to support smaller screens, values can be moved below the corresponding labels inside the pop-in area. In these examples, this happens for a screen width smaller than 220 px (sap.m.Column, property: popinDisplay).

Pop-in area: moving the data below the labels
Pop-in area: moving the data below the labels

Example for GridLarge Layout

A more complex responsive table.

A more complex responsive table
A more complex responsive table

In this example, the Average Occupancy Rate and Available In columns move to the pop-in area if the screen width is less than 1900 pixels.

GridLarge layout - 'Average Occupancy Rate' and  'Available In' columns move to the pop-in area
GridLarge layout - 'Average Occupancy Rate' and 'Available In' columns move to the pop-in area

If the screen width is less than 1500 pixels, the Average Stay column moves to the pop-in area.

GridLarge layout - 'Average Stay' column moves to the pop-in area
GridLarge layout - 'Average Stay' column moves to the pop-in area

If the screen width is less than 1100 pixels, the Description column moves to the pop-in area. Since all four columns in the pop-in area do not fit into one row, the pop-in wraps.

GridLarge layout - 'Description' column moves to the pop-in area
GridLarge layout - 'Description' column moves to the pop-in area

If the screen width is reduced even further, the Details column moves to the pop-in area. On this narrow screen, only one column fits into one pop-in row, so it looks exactly like the block layout.

GridLarge layout - 'Details' column moves to the pop-in area
GridLarge layout - 'Details' column moves to the pop-in area

Layout

The optional title bar consists of the title of the responsive table, an item counter, variant management, and the toolbar.

The filter info bar appears when the responsive table is filtered, and shows information on the filter settings.

The column header shows the label for each column.

The collection of items, or rows, occupies the main part of the responsive table.

You can add aggregation information (such as totals) on the table footer.

A More button can be shown if you do not want all items to be loaded at the start (known as “lazy loading”). Ideally, you should use scrolling to load more items instead of choosing the More button.

Schematic visualization of the responsive table
Schematic visualization of the responsive table

Components

The title bar contains the title of the responsive table, an item counter, variant management, and the toolbar.

The toolbar can contain entry points for the view settings dialog and the table personalization dialog, as well as view switches in the form of a segmented button, and buttons for AddEdit, and other actions.
Beneath the toolbar, display a filter info bar (which itself is a special toolbar) if the responsive table is filtered.
To format within items, apply the guidelines for formatting data. Controls commonly used inside items are the object identifier and the object number. For more information about these controls, see object display components.
You can use the table footer to display additional static information relating to the table content.
The More button loads more items to the front end if not all items have yet been loaded.
Components of the responsive table
Components of the responsive table

Behavior and Interaction

The responsive table is quite flexible with regard to its content.

Table Level

Scroll

The height of the table is defined by the numbers of items it contains. It does not have a scroll container on its own, but is scrolled together with the app (in contrast to the grid table and the analytical table).

If the table works in a “growing” mode, it only loads a few items at first. Additional items are only loaded (and rendered) on request. The “request” can either be done via scrolling (preferred), or by clicking the More button.

Same table, different number of items
Same table, different number of items

Merge Duplicates

To simulate the behavior of row spanning, you can merge cells of consecutive rows inside one or more columns automatically if they contain the same value (sap.m.Column, properties: mergeDuplicates, mergeFunctionName).

Use the merge feature if you expect the column to contain duplicate entries, and it makes sense to group them. In the example screenshot, the Supplier, Product, and Dimensions columns reflect a hierarchical structure: Suppliers have products, which in turn have dimensions. Because suppliers typically have multiple products, merging duplicate entries for the supplier column makes the table easier to read. Note, however, that when the user sorts the table by another field, the hierarchy changes and the merged items are regrouped accordingly.

Do not use the merge feature if duplicate entries are not part of the design. If consecutive table rows happen to have the same values at runtime, this alone isn’t a valid reason to group them.

Supplier column merges duplicates in consecutive rows
Supplier column merges duplicates in consecutive rows
Merged columns with multiselection
Merged columns with multiselection

Select

A responsive table can have one of the following selection modes (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode):

  • None: Items cannot be selected (sap.m.ListMode.None).
    Beware: Line items can still use the sap.m.ListType “navigation”, which allows click handling on specific line items. This should only be used when the click triggers navigation to a corresponding line item details page.
  • Single selection master: One item in the responsive table can be selected. Items are selected by clicking or tapping the whole row. The single select master mode has no obvious visual cues, such as checkboxes or radio buttons. It only provides a light blue background for the selected state. Because of this, it can barely be differentiated from tables without selection (mode: None). Single select master is the preferred mode for single selection (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster).
  • Single selection left: One item in the responsive table can be selected. For this, the responsive table provides radio buttons on the left side of each line item. Only use this mode if row clicks are being used for something else, such as navigation. (sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectLeft).
  • Multiple selection: Users can select one or more items. For this, the responsive table provides checkboxes on the left side of each line item. Users can (de)select all items using the Select All checkbox to the left of the column header. Select All (de)selects all items that the user can reach by scrolling (sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).
Responsive table without selectable items
Responsive table without selectable items
Single selection master
Single selection master
SIngle selection left with radio buttons. Use only if row clicks are used for something else.
SIngle selection left with radio buttons. Use only if row clicks are used for something else.
Multiple selection
Multiple selection

Group

For grouping items, a group header is displayed (sap.m.GroupHeaderLisItem). The group header is not interactive.

Group headers
Group headers

Show Aggregations

Show aggregations (such as totals) on the table footer (sap.m.Column, aggregation: footer).

Do not show aggregations in “growing” mode. It is not clear, if an aggregation will only aggregate the items loaded into the front end, or all items.

Table footer displays aggregated total
Table footer displays aggregated total

Load Items

To show more than 200 items, use the “growing” mode (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, properties: growing, growingThreshold, growingScrollToLoad, growingTriggerText). The growing mode allows the user to load only the first few items. Additional items are only loaded (and rendered) on request, which improves performance. The “request” can either be done via scrolling (preferred), or by clicking the More button.

If using the More button, show the number of items already loaded and the total number items below the text More, if possible.

Do not show more than 1,000 items overall, even in growing mode. Use the grid table instead.

Do not show aggregations in growing mode. Also, do not display an item count on the table toolbar if growing mode is used. Use the count on the More button instead.

Load on scroll
Load on scroll

Line Item Level

Delete Single Item Rows

To delete single item rows, use the table in the mode “delete” (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This adds Delete buttons to each line item. Clicking this button triggers the deletion of the corresponding line item.

Do not use this mode if deleting multiple lines at once is the preferred use case.

Delete is a mode of the responsive table and therefore cannot be used together with single selection or multiselection.

Responsive table in 'delete' mode
Responsive table in 'delete' mode

Navigate

To allow navigation from a line item, use an item with the type “navigation” (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This creates an indicator at the end of the line (“>”) and the entire line item becomes clickable. If the user clicks or taps on the line, navigate to a new page containing line item details. In rare cases, you can also use the navigation mode for category navigation, without navigating to another page.

By contrast, clicking an interactive control within a line item does not trigger the navigation event. Instead, the corresponding control handles the click event.

If no navigation is possible, set sap.m.ListType to “inactive”.

“Navigation” is a list item type and therefore cannot be used together with “edit”, or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).

Navigation indicator
Navigation indicator

Edit Line Items

To allow editing for a line item, set sap.m.ListType to “detail” within the corresponding item (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive). This will create an Edit button at the end of the line. Clicking the button triggers the edit event. Use this event to switch the corresponding line item to edit mode.

Edit is a list item type and therefore cannot be used together with “navigation” or in combination with click events for the entire item (“active”).

Edit button
Edit button

Click an Item

Items as a whole can be clickable. An event is fired by clicking on the item (anywhere where there is no interactive control inside the item). Apps can react on the event, for example, by opening a dialog (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active or sap.m.ListType.DetailAndActive).

Active elements do not have a visual indication and can therefore not be differentiated from non-active elements.

Active is a list item type and can therefore not be used together with “navigation” or “edit”. In addition, “active” uses the whole item as a clickable area and therefore cannot be used together with a single-selection table.

Active element
Active element

Drag and Drop

One or several items can be repositioned within a table or moved to other UI elements using drag and drop operations (sap.m.ListBase, aggregation: dragDropConfig). While being dragged, the items are shown as ghost elements on the mouse cursor.

Drop targets can be on items, between items, or both (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition). On a drop target, the mouse cursor changes to either a “copy”, “link”, “move”, or “none” cursor. “None” indicates that the dragged item cannot be dropped in the current position (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect).

Drag and drop is only available on supporting browsers.

Drag and drop
Drag and drop
Whole item as drop target
Whole item as drop target

Context Menu

You can attach a context menu (sap.m.Menu) to a table. The context menu gives users an alternative way to modify the focused elements by giving them access to context-specific functions.

When opened, the context menu gets the row and column context, except for special columns (such as the selection column). Context menus can be implemented for a specific table or row.

Context menus are opened by right-clicking (desktop), long press (mobile), the context menu key, or SHIFT+F10.

Be aware that using the context menu overrides the browser context menu, which can no longer be opened.

If a control inside a table is the “click target”, and the control also provides a context menu, the control context menu “wins”.

Responsive table with a context menu
Responsive table with a context menu

Cell Level

Showing Information

In contrast to traditional tables (such as the analytical table or the tree table), a cell can contain more than just one line of text.

Several lines of text within one cell
Several lines of text within one cell

Add Controls

Alongside textual elements, you can also add any control to a table cell, such as input fields, microcharts, buttons, and so on.

Controls inside cells
Controls inside cells
Any control can be placed inside cells
Any control can be placed inside cells

A cell can contain more than one control and more than one data point.

With the View Settings dialog, users can sort, filter, and group by each of these data points.

Several controls per cell
Several controls per cell

You can also have different controls in different rows in the same column. This could be the case if one item is locked, but another item is in edit mode, for example.

Different controls per column
Different controls per column

Guidelines

Responsiveness

While the pop-in layouts GridLarge and GridSmall make better use of screen width, they also only look good with content that is specifically designed for pop-in behavior. If you have text-only tables with only one value per column, use the Block layout (sap.m.Table, property: popinLayout).

Place the column header labels in the pop-in area above the corresponding values (sap.m.Column, property: popinDisplay, value: Block). This avoids alignment issues with different content. Be aware that the labels get top-aligned with the adjacent content.
Only place the label next to the corresponding value under the following conditions (sap.m.Column, property: popinDisplay, value: Inline):

  • The values are text-only (no input fields, icons, images, micro charts, and so on)
  • The available space is at least the double the width of size S.

This avoids truncation or “over-wrapping” of the labels and content.

If a column does not have a column header text (for example, if it always contains the same button with its own label), do not show the header text as a label in the pop-in area either (sap.m.Column, property: popinDisplay, value: withoutHeader). If you forget this setting, you will see an empty space followed by a colon (“:”).

Information
The GridSmall and GridLarge layouts are not available in all browsers. If the chosen layout is not available, it is automatically changed to Block layout.

Table Title

Implement the table title by using a title on a toolbar control.

Use a table title if the title of a responsive table is not indicated in the surrounding area. Do not use a table title if it would just repeat text that is already above the responsive table.

Use a table title if you need the table toolbar. To avoid repeating text, feel free to use a generic table title, such as Items.

The item count in the table title displays all visible items the user can reach by scrolling, even if the number of items is 0. Group headers are not counted.

If you use a table title, be sure to include one of the following:

Table title
Table title
  • An item count with the following format: Items (Number of Items). For example, Items (2). You can combine an item count with variant management.
    Do not use an item count together with “growing mode”.
Table title with item count
Table title with item count
Developer Hint
Assistive technologies (such as screen readers) use the title to create a hierarchical site map for faster navigation. In addition, screen readers use the title as the label for the table.

If you don’t use a title (for example, to avoid repetition), make sure that the table is connected to another meaningful on-screen text that can be used as a label for assistive technologies. You can do this using the method addAriaLabelledBy.

Selection

If the click area for the row is being used for another purpose (such as navigation), it cannot be used for selecting the row. In this case, use the “single select left” selection mode, which offers a radio button as an additional click area for each row. To avoid confusion, make sure that the first data column does not contain radio buttons in default delivery.

In all other single selection cases, use the selection mode “single select master”.

For all single selection modes, make sure that one item is initially selected. Otherwise, the user cannot return to the initial state. A selected item can only be deselected by selecting another item.

In multiple selection mode, do not show checkboxes in the first data column in the default delivery to avoid confusion. Offer the Select All checkbox for (de)selecting all items the user can reach by scrolling.

Don't
Single selection left - Do not show radio buttons in the first column in the default delivery
Single selection left - Do not show radio buttons in the first column in the default delivery
Don't
Multiple selection - Do not show checkboxes in the first column in the default delivery
Multiple selection - Do not show checkboxes in the first column in the default delivery
Do
Use the selection mode
Use the selection mode "single select left" if clicking the row is used for something else (such as navigation)
Do
Use the selection mode
Use the selection mode "single select master" in all other single-selection cases
Developer Hint
Select All is only applied to items that have already been loaded to the front-end server. All other items are not (de)selected before they are loaded, such as items added via lazy loading with growingScrollToLoad. This conflicts with the guideline that all items the user can reach by scrolling must be (de)selected.

To process all items, listen to the selectionChange event and to its selectAll flag. This indicates whether the Select All checkbox was triggered. As soon as an action is triggered, process the items accordingly. Depending on the number of items, consider processing them in the back end.

Loading Data

To indicate that the table is currently loading items, use the busy state. (sap.m.Table, property: busy). Do not show any items or text. As soon as the data is loaded, remove the busy state and show all items.

Table in busy state while loading data
Table in busy state while loading data

Columns – Best Practices

Minimize the number of columns:

  • On a smartphone, use only one or two columns, depending on the content.
  • On a tablet or desktop, use three to five columns if the responsive table is shown within the flexible column layout. Use about eight columns if using the full screen width, depending on the content.

If the responsive table does not fit on the screen width:

  • Hide columns to reduce the width of the table.
  • Use pop-in areas to show the whole content by increasing the height of the line items (sap.m.Column, properties: demandPopin, minScreenWidth).

At the smallest size, keep the following information in the table layout:

  • The column that identifies the line item.
  • The column that contains the key attribute.

If both of these do not fit on the respective screen width, keep just the column with the line item identifier in the tabular layout.

The responsive table assigns the same width to each column by default. It is recommended that you overwrite this default to provide optimal space for your content (sap.m.Column, property: width).

Optimize column width for its initial content (sap.m.Column, property: width). If the content is dynamic, optimize column width for typical content.

If you need more columns than those that fit on a tablet screen (usually five) to fulfill 80% of your main use cases, offer an option to add, remove, and rearrange columns via the table personalization dialog. Before doing so, try to reduce the number of columns, for example, by using several lines per column or by utilizing the pop-in function. See the cheat sheet for an example.

Column Headers – Best Practices

Within the column header, provide a label for each column (sap.m.Column, aggregation: header). The column header label is reused as a label in the pop-in area.

Exception: If the column does not pop in, no column header label is needed as long as at least one column still has a column header label.

Use controls that wrap, such as text (with wrapping enabled). Do not use controls that truncate, such as labels.

Do
Do: wrap column headers
Do: wrap column headers
Don't
Do not: truncate column headers
Do not: truncate column headers

Column headers (sap.m.Column, aggregation: header) usually contain links or text-based controls.

Column headers can also contain other kinds of SAP Fiori controls. However, the column header cannot be aligned vertically, making it difficult to use many controls in the column header. Using other kinds of controls also creates problems with pop-in behavior and could thus lead to accessibility issues. Therefore, exercise caution when using them in a column header.

Accepted: Link as column header text (used rarely)
Accepted: Link as column header text (used rarely)
Accepted if responsiveness is taken into account: Text plus search field
Accepted if responsiveness is taken into account: Text plus search field

If a column cell contains several fields, use an umbrella term in the column header (such as Address for fields like Street, ZIP Code, and City).

For text and ID fields, use a generic label (for example, Employee for Name and ID).

If none of these are possible, separate the labels with “/” (for example, Name / Status).

For boolean values, such as checkboxes, find a descriptive text for the column header.

Content Alignment

For alignment of cell content, follow the guidelines below (sap.m.Column, properties: halgin, valign, sap.m.ColumnListItem, property: VAlign). Align the column header horizontally according to the content of the cell.

Left-align: text, IDs, phone numbers, URLs, passwords, and email addresses.

Left-alignment of text
Left-alignment of text

Right-align: numbers and amounts, except IDs, to ensure comparability of such figures.

Right-alignment of numbers
Right-alignment of numbers

Right-align: dates and times (to ensure comparability for most formats and locales).

Right-alignment of dates
Right-alignment of dates

Left-align status information.

Left-align status information
Left-align status information

Center-align icons.

Vertical alignment:

Top-align where possible to facilitate reading the content on one line.

Do not use top-alignment if it results in a peculiar layout. This usually happens when controls that need more vertical space are combined with text-only controls, such as input fields. In this case, try center-alignment instead and fine tune it until the layout fits.

Do
Do: use top-alignment where possible
Do: use top-alignment where possible
Don't
Do not: rigidly use top alignment if it does not make sense
Do not: rigidly use top alignment if it does not make sense

Content Formatting

The responsive table provides flexibility, including multiline cells, by enabling every control to be put into a cell.

As a key identifier of an item, use an object identifier. Show the key identifier in the first column. For more information, see object display components.

If the screen width is small, do not hide this column or move it to the pop-in area.

Object identifier
Object identifier

Strings with IDs: If the responsive table contains more single-line data, show the ID in brackets after the corresponding string.

This minimizes the line height.

For items with a small line height, place the ID in brackets after the corresponding string
For items with a small line height, place the ID in brackets after the corresponding string
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link
If displayed as a link, use the whole text as the link

Strings with IDs: If line height is already large, show the ID below the corresponding string. Use the object identifier to do so.

For items with a large line height, place the ID below the corresponding string
For items with a large line height, place the ID below the corresponding string
Is displayed as a link, use only the first line as the link
Is displayed as a link, use only the first line as the link

If there is more than one key identifier (for example, First Name and Last Name), display these columns first and show the values in bold text.

Several key identifiers
Several key identifiers

For status information, use semantic colors on the foreground elements.

For status information on text: If the status is actionable, add a transparent icon button next to the text.

Semantic colors on text
Semantic colors on text

Avoid truncation. Use controls that wrap the text.

For example, use text instead of a label.

Do
Do: wrap text
Do: wrap text
Don't
Do not: truncate text
Do not: truncate text

For editable content, use input fields and other interactive controls within the table cells. If you need to offer edit mode, change your text controls (labels, text, and links, to input fields or other appropriate controls) as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before.

You can do this by changing the control or, in more complex cases, by exchanging the whole responsive table.

Interactive controls – In line
Interactive controls – In line

If there is no value for a cell, leave it blank. Do not display text as N/A.

Leave empty fields blank
Leave empty fields blank

Numbering items:

  • If the item number has four digits/letters or less and is equally important as the corresponding description, concatenate the item number with the description and show it in one column.
  • If the item number has five digits/letters or more, or if it is more important than the corresponding description, for example, when no description is available, use a separate column for the item number.
  • If the item number is more like an ID in regards to its description, use ID formatting, like Description (ID).
For short numbers, add the item number to the description
For short numbers, add the item number to the description

Try not to display an empty responsive table. If there is no way around this, provide instructions on how to fill the table with data (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, properties: showNoData, noDataText).

Examples:

  • If a table is initially empty, provide at least a basic text:
    No items available.
    Overwrite this whenever a hint can be provided on how to fill the table with data.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar (as in the list report), and is initially empty, use the following text:
    No filters set. To start, enter your search and filter settings and run the search.
  • If a table is used together with a filter bar and the filter does not return results, use the following text:
    No items found. Check the search and filter settings.

Overwrite the standard texts above if:

  • The standard text is not precise enough for your use case (for example, no search is offered, only the search is offered).
  • You are using the live search (no Go button in the filter bar). In this case, leave out “run the search”.
  • The standard text is misleading (for example, if the data is filled based on a master-detail pattern instead of search and filter settings).

Remove the item count in the table title if there are zero items.

Provide meaningful instructions
Provide meaningful instructions

Item States

To show that an item is unread, use the corresponding flag (sap.m.Table, property: showUnread, sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: unread). This shows most of the content in bold font.

An unread item
An unread item

To show that an item has been modified, for example, within the global edit flow, add the string (Modified) at the bottom of the column that identifies the line item.

A modified item
A modified item

To show that a modified item contains an error (for example, within the global edit flow), add the string (Contains errors) at the bottom of the column that identifies the line item. To do this, use an object status control with the error state (sap.m.ObjectStatus, property: state, value: sap.ui.core.ValueState.Error).

In addition, highlight the row accordingly.

A modified item with an error
A modified item with an error

To show that an item is locked, use a transparent button with the corresponding icon and the text Locked by [Name] at the bottom of the identifying column. The user can click or tap the button to open a quick view of the person.

A locked item
A locked item

To show that an item is in a draft state, use a transparent-style button with the text Draft at the bottom of the identifying column. The user can click or tap the button to open a popover showing the timestamp of the last change.

Item in draft state
Item in draft state

Show only one state at any one time.

Highlight Items

To show that an item needs attention, a highlight indicator can be shown in front of the item. The highlight indicator can be used to show:

  • A semantic state, such as red or orange for an error or warning.
  • A neutral highlight, such as blue to highlight newly added items.

(Property: highlight)

Highlighted items
Highlighted items

Numbers and Units

Show the unit of measurement together with the number within the item rows.

Do not put the unit in the column header. Do not use an additional column to show the unit of measurement. This is also valid for prices.

Unit of mesaurement – In line
Unit of mesaurement – In line

For numbers with units, show the correct formatting by using the object number control.

Object number
Object number

For the most important number with its unit, show the correct formatting by using the object number control and the emphasized flag.
Exception: If all numbers are of equal importance, emphasize none of them.

If the screen width is small, do not hide this column or move it to the pop-in area.
Exception: If the column containing the object identifier and the column containing the key attribute do not fit together on the screen, move the column containing the key attribute to the pop-in area.

Object number (emphasized)
Object number (emphasized)

Drag and Drop

Drag and drop is “invisible” on the UI: users can’t see where dragging is available and where it isn’t. In addition, it is not accessible, since there is no generic keyboard interaction. Drag and drop is also not available on all browsers. For these reasons, provide it only in addition to existing (and visible) UI elements that fulfill the same purpose. For example, offer (toolbar) buttons for moving or for copying and pasting items.

Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements
Use drag and drop only in addition to existing visible UI elements

If you offer drag and drop for rearranging items within the table, use drop targets that are between items (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropPosition.Between). This provides better feedback on where the item will be inserted. Show the “move” mouse cursor (sap.ui.core.dnd.DropEffect.Move).

Drop targets in between items
Drop targets in between items

Do not combine rearranging items and sorting. If you really need to do so, make sure that there is a dedicated sort criterion for the user-defined sort order, and only offer options for rearranging items if this sort order is set.

When combining rearranging items with grouping, be aware that moving items to another group also means that a value of the dropped item changes: because grouping is based on values in a column, the dropped item needs to take on the value of the target group for the corresponding column. If this is not wanted, do not allow users to rearrange items in grouped tables.

Example:
A table is grouped by availability. An item is moved from the group “Not Available” to the group “In Stock”. In this case, the moved item needs to change its availability to “In Stock” to match the target group. If changing the value doesn’t make sense, only allow users to rearrange the items within the same group, or don’t allow rearranging at all.

Don't
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing.
Do not combine rearranging items with grouping, unless you know exactly what you're doing.

Context Menu

Use the context menu only to give users a quick way of accessing functions that are already available elsewhere (for example, as buttons in the toolbar).

Don’t just offer actions in the context menu itself, as users might not realize that these actions are available at all.

The context menu can be triggered for the whole table or per row.

Actions

To trigger actions on multiple items, use a multiselection table (sap.m.Table, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect):

  • Offer the corresponding actions in the footer toolbar if the responsive table is the only area on the screen where actions can be applied. The advantage is that actions on the footer toolbar are fixed on the screen and cannot be scrolled away.
  • In all other cases, show the actions on the table toolbar.

Do not offer action triggering on multiple items if the table is expected to have fewer than 10 items in most cases.

To trigger actions on a single item only (sap.m.Table, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.SingleSelectMaster):

  • Offer the corresponding actions in the footer toolbar if the responsive table is the only area on the screen to which actions can be applied. This has the advantage that the actions on the footer toolbar are fixed on the screen and cannot be scrolled away.
  • In other cases, show the actions on the table toolbar.
  • In rare cases, show the actions within the line item. One example would be an Add to Cart button in a shopping application. Since these actions are repeated in every line and thus use a lot of screen real estate, only do this for one or two actions at most. In this case, show the action trigger near the content to which it belongs. Do not add a specific column for actions. An exception to this is if the action trigger belongs to a link.
Inline actions
Inline actions
Do: Place actions near to the objects to which they belong
Do: Place actions near to the objects to which they belong

The following actions on single items must always be in-line:

Delete: Use “Delete” table mode (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.Delete). This places a Delete button at the end of each row.

Delete button
Delete button

Navigation: Use the “Navigation” column list item type (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Navigation). This places a Navigation indicator at the end of each row.

Use this to navigate to a new page containing line item details. In rare cases, you can also use this for navigation within the table without navigating to another page.

Navigation indicator
Navigation indicator

Edit: Use the “Detail” column list item type (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Detail). This places an Edit icon at the end of each row.

Edit button
Edit button

From these three actions (delete, navigation, and edit), you can combine delete and edit, or delete and navigation.

Edit and navigation cannot be combined.

To trigger actions that are independent of the selection, show the actions on the table toolbar. Examples of such actions are add, edit (in the sense of changing the whole table to edit mode), sort, filter, group (or view settings), and table personalization.

To trigger a default action on the whole line item, use the “Active” or “DetailAndActive” column list item type (sap.m.ColumnListItem/ sap.m.ListItemBase, property: type, value: sap.m.ListType.Active).

Active items trigger an event when clicked, which can be handled by apps, for example, to open a dialog. Clicks on interactive controls within the item do not trigger the event, but are handled by the interactive control.

Do not use this for navigation, to switch the line item to an edit state, or to delete the item.

Active can be combined with edit and delete, but not with navigation. Do not combine active with single selection.

Add Items

Place the Add button on the table toolbar. It can be displayed as an icon ( ) or text (for example, Add or Create).

In general, new items always appear as the first item of the table and contain a visual highlight at the beginning of the row.

After pressing the Add button, there are three possibilities for adding an item, which should be considered in the following priority:

  1. Add the item inline. Create an empty, editable row as the first item of the table. Show the Save button on the table toolbar. This option is recommended for simple scenarios with about ten columns.
  2. Open a dialog for larger tables with more than ten columns. Save the new item at the dialog level.
  3. Navigate to a new page. This behavior should only be used for very complex scenarios (for example, when a dialog cannot handle the amount of content anymore). After pressing the Save button in the footer toolbar on the create page, navigate back to the table.

There are three different states of a new item:

  1. New: The item was just created and is in edit mode. It is highlighted with a visual indicator.
  2. Recent: The item was saved, but is still highlighted and displayed as the first item of the table. Current filter, sort and group criteria are ignored since the item should remain visible.
  3. As soon as the responsive table is sorted, filtered, or grouped again, the new item is handled accordingly and looses the visual highlight, but not before.

In the context of the draft handling new items are not saved on table level, but rather with the entire draft.

Add button in table toolbar
Add button in table toolbar
New item as first row in edit mode
New item as first row in edit mode
Saved new item still with highlight and as first item
Saved new item still with highlight and as first item

Editable Content

For editable content, use input fields and any other interactive controls within the table cells that meet your input needs.

All SAPUI5 controls can be used.

If you need edit mode, change your text controls, such as label, text, and link, to input fields, or other appropriate controls as soon as you switch to edit mode, but not before.

You can do this by exchanging the control or, in more complex cases, by exchanging the entire responsive table.

For mass editing items:

  • Provide multiselection (sap.m.Table/ sap.m.ListBase, property: mode, value: sap.m.ListMode.MultiSelect).
  • Provide an Edit button.
  • If several items are selected, choosing the Edit button opens a dialog in which the user edits the corresponding fields for all selected items.

For details, see mass editing.

View Settings: Sort, Filter, and Group

Sort, filter, and/or group settings are handled in the view settings dialog. This dialog can provide any combination of these three settings, including just one setting, such as sort only.

  • If sorting, filtering, and/or grouping are a common use case in your app, offer one, two, or all three of the corresponding features in one or more view settings dialogs. Note: Do not offer these features if the table is expected to have only a small number of entries (up to 20 in most cases).
  • If filtering is a main use case, do not offer filtering in the view settings dialog. Use the filter bar instead.

To trigger the view settings dialog, provide several buttons, one for each of these view settings. Each button opens a view settings dialog that contains only the relevant page.

You should always use only the view settings you really need. For example, do not offer grouping if it does not support your use case well.

Using the view settings dialog allows you to define several sort, filter, and/or group settings per column. Therefore, you can sort, filter, and/or group a column with several data points independently by each data point.

Several triggers for the different view settings (sort, filter, group)
Several triggers for the different view settings (sort, filter, group)

To display the current filter state, use the info bar below the table title. Clicking or tapping the info bar opens the view settings dialog on the filter page.

Show the info bar only if the filter settings are not shown somewhere else. For example, do not show the info bar for settings taken in the filter bar or in a select placed in the table toolbar.

If the info bar is shown, provide an option to reset all corresponding filters on the info bar.

Developer Hint
To display the current filter settings on the info bar, consider using the list formatter (sap.ui.core.format.ListFormat).
Filtered table
Filtered table

To display the current group state, group headers are shown.

On the group header, show the following text (sap.m.GroupHeaderListItem, property: title):

[Label of the grouped column]: [Grouping Value]

Do not use several values on the group header.

Grouped table
Grouped table

If there is no grouping value, show the following text:
[Label of the grouped column]: (Not Available)

This is the case if you have a group of items that don’t have a value for the grouped column.

Grouped table, with missing grouping value
Grouped table, with missing grouping value

Persist the view settings. When a user reopens the app, show the responsive table with the same sort, filter, and group settings as last defined by this user.

Personalization

To add, remove, or rearrange columns, use the table personalization dialog. Trigger the dialog via a button in the table toolbar.

Offer personalization if you need more columns than those that fit on a tablet screen, which is usually five, to fulfill 80% of your main use cases. Before doing so, try to reduce the number of columns, for example, by using several lines per column or by utilizing the pop-in function. See the cheat sheet for an example.

View settings and table personalization icons
View settings and table personalization icons

Persist the column layout settings. When a user reopens the app, show the responsive table with the same column layout as last defined by this user.

Tables in Object Pages

To show a table in the object page content area, use the responsive table.

A responsive table with up to 20 expected items can be displayed right away, without lazy loading.
If you expect the table to have more than 20 items, use one of the following 3 options:

  1. Lazy loading (More button): Use this option if you expect to have up to 100 items.
  2. Tab navigation: If you expect to have more than 50 to 100 items, but less than 400, use the object page with tab navigation instead of anchor navigation. Put the table on a dedicated tab.
  3. Navigation to a list report: If you expect the table to have more than 400 items, or if the tab approach is unsuitable, restrict the number of items in the table itself to a reasonable amount. To provide the user with a way to work with the entire table, offer navigation to a separate list report containing the full table.

For all of the three options mentioned above, we recommend providing a search, and if feasible, sort and filter capabilities for the table in the object page. Grouping should be avoided.

For more information on the use of tables within the object page, see the Tables section of the Object Page article.

Properties

sap.m.Table

The following additional properties are available for the responsive table:

  • The property: fixedLayout defines the algorithm the control uses to define column width. Setting it to “false” would perform automatic calculations for the column width, based on the longest non-breakable content. You should always set it to “true” for performance reasons. Exceptions are permissible if the table has only a few columns on a large screen width and fewer than 10 rows are displayed.
  • The property: backgroundDesign defines the background on which items are rendered. Use the default value.
  • The property: showOverlay provides an overlay on the whole table, which prevents use of the responsive table. This is used within the list report floorplan to mark the table as outdated after filter settings have been changed but the new filter settings have not yet been applied. Do not use it in other cases.
  • The property: insert adds a margin on all sides of the responsive table.
  • The property: headerText is a simple way to set the table title if you just need a title. However, do not use any of the following:
    • A separate toolbar
    • variantManagement
    • headerToolbar aggregation
  • The property: headerDesign affects the appearance of the header if the theme supports it. Leave the default value as it is.
  • The property: footerText adds a small additional row below the table footer or last item. This row can contain text only. Do not use this property.
  • The property: width defines the width of the whole table.
  • The property: includeItemInSelection uses a click on the whole line item to select the corresponding item if the responsive table is in a selection mode. This competes with other settings like “Navigation” or “Active” and should therefore not be used.
  • The property: enableBusyIndicator automatically shows a busy indicator while data is loaded. (In contrast to the property: busy, where the application can control when the table is set to busy state)
  • The property: modeAnimationOn does not have any effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: showSeparators allows you to show all, none, or some separators. The default setting, which is to show all separators, is to be used.
  • The property: swipeDirection allows you to define the direction in which to swipe if additional actions are hidden behind a table row. This works only on touch devices. Do not use this property.
  • The property: rememberSelections leaves items selected even if they are not currently visible, for example, through filtering. If this behavior is not wanted, set the flag to “false”, but you should do so only in exceptional cases.
  • The property: busy sets the table to a busy state. While in busy state, the whole table cannot be used and items cannot be read due to an overlay.
  • The property: busyIndicatorDelay defines the time after which a busy state is shown after the responsive table has been set to this state. Use the default value.
  • The property: visible shows the table (“true”) or hides it (“false”).
  • The property: tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.
  • The property: alternateRowColors displays the rows with alternating background colors (“banded rows”). Do not use it.

sap.m.Column

The following additional properties are available for sap.m.Column:

  • The property: width defines the width of the column in all units allowed by HTML, such as em, rem, %, and px.
  • The property: styleClass is used if you need to change the visual design of a column. Do not use this, but use the default style instead.
  • The property: visible shows or hides the column.
  • The property: tooltip does not have an effect. Do not use it.

sap.m.ColumnListItem

The following additional properties are available for sap.m.ColumnListItem:

  • The property: selected allows an item to be selected programmatically.
  • The property: counter does not have any effect. Do not use it.
  • Do not use the property: busy.
  • Do not use the property: busyIndicatorDelay.
  • The property: visible shows or hides the item.
  • The property: tooltip adds a tooltip to a whole row. The tooltip is only shown on mouse interaction. It will not work on tablets or smartphones. Do not use it.

Resources

Want to dive deeper? Follow the links below to find out more about related controls, the SAPUI5 implementation, and the visual design.

Elements and Controls

Implementation